Keysight
ASeries FieldFox Analyzers
This manual provides documentation for the following models
N9913A N9914A N9915A N9916A N9917A N9918A N9925A
N9926A N9927A N9928A
N9935A N9936A N9937A N9938A
N9950A N9951A N9952A
N9960A N9961A N9962A
User＇s GuideNotices
© Keysight Technologies Inc
20142019
No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form or by any
means (including electronic storage
and retrieval or translation into a
foreign language) without prior
agreement and written consent from
Keysight Technologies Inc as
governed by United States and
international copyright laws
Trademark Acknowledgments
Bluetooth®
Manual Part Number
N992790001
Edition
Edition 4 September 2019
Printed in USAMalaysia
Published by
Keysight Technologies
1400 Fountaingrove Parkway
Santa Rosa CA 95403
Warranty
THE MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS
DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED AS IS
AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING
CHANGED WITHOUT NOTICE IN
FUTURE EDITIONS FURTHER TO
THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW KEYSIGHT
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH
REGARD TO THIS MANUAL AND
ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED
HEREIN INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
KEYSIGHT SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ERRORS OR FOR INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE
FURNISHING USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS
DOCUMENT OR ANY INFORMATION
CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD
KEYSIGHT AND THE USER HAVE A
SEPARATE WRITTEN AGREEMENT
WITH WARRANTY TERMS
COVERING THE MATERIAL IN THIS
DOCUMENT THAT CONFLICT WITH
THESE TERMS THE WARRANTY
TERMS IN THE SEPARATE
AGREEMENT WILL CONTROL
Technology Licenses
The hardware andor software
described in this document are
furnished under a license and may be
used or copied only in accordance
with the terms of such license
US Government Rights
The Software is commercial
computer software as defined by
Federal Acquisition Regulation
(FAR) 2101 Pursuant to FAR
12212 and 274053 and
Department of Defense FAR
Supplement (DFARS) 2277202 the
US government acquires
commercial computer software
under the same terms by which the
software is customarily provided to
the public Accordingly Keysight
provides the Software to US
government customers under its
standard commercial license which
is embodied in its End User License
Agreement (EULA) a copy of which
can be found at
httpwwwkeysightcomfindsweu
la The license set forth in the EULA
represents the exclusive authority by
which the US government may use
modify distribute or disclose the
Software The EULA and the license
set forth therein does not require or
permit among other things that
Keysight (1) Furnish technical
information related to commercial
computer software or commercial
computer software documentation
that is not customarily provided to
the public or (2) Relinquish to or
otherwise provide the government
rights in excess of these rights
customarily provided to the public to
use modify reproduce release
perform display or disclose
commercial computer software or
commercial computer software
documentation No additional
government requirements beyond
those set forth in the EULA shall
apply except to the extent that those
terms rights or licenses are
explicitly required from all providers
of commercial computer software
pursuant to the FAR and the DFARS
and are set forth specifically in
writing elsewhere in the EULA
Keysight shall be under no obligation
to update revise or otherwise modify
the Software With respect to any
technical data as defined by FAR
2101 pursuant to FAR 12211 and
274042 and DFARS 2277102 the
US government acquires no greater
than Limited Rights as defined in FAR
27401 or DFAR 22771035 (c) as
applicable in any technical data
Safety Notices
A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard It
calls attention to an operating
procedure practice or the like that
if not correctly performed or adhered
to could result in damage to the
product or loss of important data Do
not proceed beyond a CAUTION
notice until the indicated conditions
are fully understood and met
A WARNING notice denotes a hazard
It calls attention to an operating
procedure practice or the like that
if not correctly performed or adhered
to could result in personal injury or
death Do not proceed beyond a
WARNING notice until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and
met 3
Where to Find the Latest Information
Documentation is updated periodically For the latest information about these products including instrument
software upgrades application information and product information browse to one of the following URLs
according to the name of your product
httpwwwkeysightcomfindfieldfox
To receive the latest updates by email subscribe to Keysight Email Updates at the following URL
httpwwwkeysightcomfindMyKeysight
Information on preventing instrument damage can be found at
wwwkeysightcomfindPreventingInstrumentRepair
Is your product software uptodate
Periodically Keysight releases software updates to fix known defects and incorporate product enhancements
To search for software updates for your product go to the Keysight Technical Support website at
httpwwwkeysightcomfindfieldfoxsupport 4
A0819 Firmware Release (CPU1) Updates (N991xA2xA3xA with
serial number prefixes <5607)
For customers upgrading FieldFox firmware the following is a list of changes from the previous release
Other updates
— Fix to FAB USB access
A1126 Firmware Release (CPU2) Updates (Also applies to
N991xA2xA3xA units with serial number prefixes ≥56071)
For customers upgrading FieldFox firmware the following is a list of changes from the previous release
— Initial release of the FieldFox N99xxB models
— Option 360 Phased Array Antenna
1 Country codes have been omitted from serial number prefixes 5
Contacting Keysight
Assistance with test and measurements needs and information on finding a local Keysight office are available
on the Web at httpwwwkeysightcomfindassist
If you do not have access to the Internet please contact your Keysight field engineer
In any correspondence or telephone conversation refer to the Keysight product by its model number and full
serial number With this information the Keysight representative can determine whether your product is still
within its warranty period 6 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 7
Contents
1 Overview
Models and Options 23
Accessories 24
Optional Accessories 24
FieldFox Manuals Software and Supplemental Help 25
Conventions that are used in the Manual 25
Safety Notes 25
2 Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
Check the Shipment 27
Meeting Power Requirements for the ACDC Adapter 27
Install the LithiumIon Battery 28
Battery Usage 28
FieldFox ONOFF Settings 29
Power Button LED Status 30
FieldFox High Temperature Protection 30
How to monitor the internal FieldFox temperature 30
Temperature Control Mode 31
HighTemp Shutdown Warning (RTSA Mode Only) 33
Avoid Overpowering the FieldFox 34
Take the FieldFox Tour 35
Front Panel 35
Top Panel 38
Right Side Panel 38
Left Side Panel 40
Screen Tour 41
How to Enter Numeric Values 43
Multiplier Abbreviations 43
Connector Care 44
3 CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode
CAT Mode Settings 47
How to select CAT Mode 47
Measurement Selection 47
Quick Settings Table 48
Frequency Range 49
Scale Settings 49
Averaging 508 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Smoothing 51
Single or Continuous Measure 51
Resolution (Number of Data Points) 52
Sweep Time 52
Output Power 53
Interference Rejection 53
Coupled Frequency 54
Return Loss Measurements 55
How to Measure Return Loss 55
1Port Cable Loss Measurements 55
How to make a 1port Cable Loss Measurement 56
2Port Insertion Loss Measurements 57
4 DTF (Distance to Fault) Measurements
How to make DTF Measurements 60
DTF Measurement Settings 62
DTF Settings Table 62
DTF Measurement (Format) 62
DTF Start and Stop Distance 63
Frequency Mode 63
Coupled Frequency 64
Cable (Correction) Specifications 65
Window Settings 68
DTF Units 69
Calculated DTF values 69
About Alias Faults 69
5 TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) Option 215
TDR Measurement Settings 74
TDR Measurement (Format) 74
TDR Settings Table 74
TDR Start and Stop Distance 75
TDR Sweep 75
Frequency Mode 76
Cable (Correction) Specifications 77
Window Settings 80
TDR Units 81
Calculated TDR values 81
About Alias Faults 82
How to Prevent Undersampling 83
6 NA (Network Analyzer) ModeKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 9
NA Mode Settings 87
About Sparameters 87
MixedMode SParameters 88
Parameter Conversion 89
Receiver Measurements 90
MultiTrace Configurations 91
Quick Settings 92
Calibration Settings 93
Format 94
Frequency Range 95
Scale Settings 95
Magnitude Offset 96
Electrical Delay 97
Phase Offset 97
Averaging 98
IF Bandwidth 99
Smoothing 99
Single or Continuous Measure 100
Resolution (Number of Data Points) 100
Sweep Time 101
Triggering 101
Output Power 102
System Impedance (Z0) 103
Port Extensions 103
Velocity Factor 104
Big Marker Display States (A and B) 105
Increase Dynamic Range 107
7 Time Domain – Option 010
Overview 111
Time Domain (Transform) Settings 112
Transform Settings Table 112
StartStop (Frequency Range) and Points 112
Stimulus (Mode) 113
Set Frequency Lowpass 113
StartStop Time 113
Distance Units 114
Window Layout 114
Transform Window 114
Line Loss and Velocity Factor 115
Data Chain 116
Trace Settings 11710 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Transform Enable 117
Gate Enable 117
Gating 118
How to make Time Domain Gating settings 119
Start Stop Center and Span Gate Times 119
Gating Type 119
8 Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
122
Why and When to Calibrate 122
Definitions 122
CalReady 123
How to Perform a Calibration 123
QuickCal (N991xA2xA3xA Only) 125
Mechanical Cal 127
ECal 130
Simple Response Cals 132
View Cal 134
Calibration Type 134
Isolation Step 137
Waveguide Calibrations 137
Enhanced Response Optimization 139
Interpolation * 140
Cal ON – Questionable Accuracy 140
Compatible Mode Calibrations 140
Save the Calibration 140
CalReady Properties 141
Verifying Calibration and Jumper Cable Integrity 142
Verify a Calibration 142
Test the Jumper Cable 142
Calibration Method Summary 143
9 SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings 148
How to select SA Mode 148
Frequency Range 148
Radio Standard 150
Custom Radio Standards 150
Channel Selection 151
Reverse Swap 153
Scale and Units 153
External Gain 154Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 11
Attenuation Control 154
Preamplifier Control (Opt 235) 155
Check for Compressed Measurements 155
Field Strength Measurements 156
Using the AntennaCable Editor 158
Source Tracking Offset and Offset Reversal 160
Tune & Listen (AMFM) 161
Independent SourceTracking Generator 163
Resolution Bandwidth (Res BW) 165
Video Bandwidth (Video BW) 166
Sweep Type 166
IF Output 167
Sweep Acquisition 169
Very Long Sweep Times 170
Zero Span Measurements 170
Triggering 172
FFT Gating (Opt 238) 175
Single Continuous Restart 177
Points 177
Trace Display States (SA Mode) 178
Average Type 179
Average Count 179
Alignments 180
Detection Method 187
Display Line 189
Noise Marker 190
BandInterval Power Marker 190
Frequency Counter at Marker 191
Time Zero Fixed Marker 192
Audio Beep at Marker Power 192
Meas UNCAL Error 193
Old Data Indicator (*) 193
Channel Measurements 194
Radio Standards and Channel Measurements 194
Measurement Preset 194
Averaging 194
Traces 195
Channel Power (CHP) 195
10 RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings 207
How to select RTSA Mode 20712 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Frequency Range 207
Scale and Units 208
External Gain 209
Attenuation Control 209
Preamplifier Control (Opt 235) 210
Check for Compressed Measurements 211
Spectrum Selection 211
Resolution Bandwidth (Res BW) 214
Triggering 215
Single Continuous Restart Time Per Div 218
Acq Time 219
Points (not user settable) 219
Trace Display States 220
Detection Method 221
Average Count Show Density Blue and Red Percentage Limits 222
Alignments 223
Display Line 223
Spectrogram Display 225
Spectrogram Display (RTSA Option) 225
Common Settings for Spectrogram 226
RecordPlayback (RTSA Option) 227
About Sessions 227
FieldFox Setting Changes during Record and Playback 228
About State and User Tags 229
How to Record a Session 230
How to Playback a Session 231
Recording Configuration 232
Record Source 233
Playback Configuration 234
Manage Sessions 234
Record Playback Example (RTSA Mode Only) 235
11 IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
About IQ Analyzer (IQA) Measurements 240
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings 241
How to Make Measurements Using the IQ Analyzer Mode 241
How to Capture IQ Data to a File 242
How to modify the IQ data measurement parameters 245
Using Markers (IQA) 256
Noise Marker 256
BandInterval Power Marker 257Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 13
Band Span Marker (Spectrum Only) 258
Interval Span Marker (Waveform Only) 258
Coupled Markers (Waveform Only) 258
Continuous Peak Search Marker 260
Alignments 261
Trace Display States (IQA Mode) 261
How to display the Trace States 261
Other Features Available 263
12 Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2 Only)
Using OTA (Options 370 – LTE FDD and 377 – 5GTF) 267
About Over–the–Air (OTA) Measurements 268
LTE FDD Features (Option 370) 268
5GTF Features (Option 377) 271
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings 273
OTA Setup Procedure 273
Optional Using RTSA to verify the signal quality (Requires Option 350 and Preamp Option
235) 283
How to Define a Cell or Cell(s) and Use OTA 284
How to RecordPlayback (OTA Options 370 and 377) 294
Screen Annotation 294
How to Record 295
To change Recording Configuration settings 295
How to Playback 296
Other Features Available 297
Troubleshooting 298
Glossary (OTA) 299
13 Remote Server Mode (Requires CPU2 and SA HardwareSA Option 233)
In this Chapter 302
Connecting Using Remote Server 303
89600 VSA Software Overview (Requires CPU2 and N991xA3xA5xA6xA and SA Option 233)
305
14 Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
Spectrogram and Waterfall Displays 308
Spectrogram Display (SA Option) 308
Common Settings for Waterfall and Spectrogram 310
Waterfall Display 311
RecordPlayback (SA Option) 313
About Sessions 31314 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
FieldFox Setting Changes during Record and Playback 314
About State and User Tags 315
How to Record a Session 316
How to Playback a Session 317
Recording Configuration 317
Frequency Mask Trigger Configuration (SA Mode Only) 319
Record Source 320
Playback Configuration 321
Manage Sessions 321
Record Playback Example (SA Only) 322
15 Reflection Mode (SA Models) Option 320
Reflection Mode Settings 328
How to select Reflection Mode 328
Measurement Selection 328
Normalize 328
16 Builtin Power Meter Mode – Option 310
Builtin Power Meter Settings 333
How to select Builtin Power Meter Mode 333
Frequency Span Step 333
Attenuation 334
17 Power Meter (USB) Mode Option 302
337
Supported Power Sensors 337
How to Connect the Power Sensor 337
USB Power Meter Settings 339
How to select Power Meter Mode 339
Average Peak 339
Zeroing 339
Frequency 340
Source Control 340
Relative and Offset Power Measurements 342
Display Units 342
Resolution 342
Averaging 343
Single or Continuous Measure 343
Step Detection Mode 344
Limits 344
18 Frequency Offset Using Power Sensor (FOPS) – Option 208Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 15
Overview 347
FOPS Settings 349
How to select Power Meter (USB Sensor) 349
Measurement Selection 349
Sweep Type and Frequency 350
Power Sensor Settling 352
Sweep Settings 352
Amplitude Markers 353
Trace Math 353
19 Pulse Measurements Mode – Option 330
Supported Power Sensors 357
Switching between Pulse Measurement Mode and Power Meter Mode 357
How to Connect the Power Sensor 357
Pulse Measurement Settings 358
How to select Pulse Measurement Mode 358
Measurement Selection 358
Frequency Time 358
Zoom Window 359
Scale 360
Averaging 360
Video Bandwidth 361
Single or Continuous Measure 361
Resolution 362
Triggering 362
Marker Settings 365
Amplitude Markers 366
Marker Search 366
Auto Analysis 367
Pulse Top 368
Grid 368
Trace Memory 369
20 VVM (Vector Voltmeter) Mode Option 308
Overview 373
VVM Mode Settings 374
How to select VVM Mode 374
Measurement Selection 374
Frequency Selection 374
Display Resolution 374
IF Bandwidth 375
Output Power 37516 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Averaging 376
Single or Continuous Measure 377
VVM Calibration 377
Zeroing 377
1Port Cable Trimming Measurements 379
How to make a 1Port Cable Trimming Measurement 379
2Port Transmission Measurements 381
How to make a 2Port Transmission Measurement 381
AB and BA Measurements 383
21 ERTA (Extended Range Transmission Analysis) Mode Option 209
Overview 386
Requirements and Limitations 387
Requirements 387
Limitations 387
Start Connection Wizard 388
On the Receiver unit 388
Configure Measurement Settings 392
Select Measurement 392
Normalize 393
Source Tracking Offset and Offset Reversal 393
Improve Dynamic Range 394
Source Enable and Source Mode 394
22 AMFM Metrics (SA Only and Option 355)
Using AMFM Metrics 395
Overview of Measurement Types 395
How to Set Up AMFM Metrics 398
SINAD and THD Calculations 402
Interpreting AMFM Metrics Error Messages 405
Test Tone Not Found 405
23 Channel Scanner (Option 312)
Using Channel Scanners 409
How to Set Up Channel Scanner 410
How to Define a Channel and Use Channel Scanner 412
Field Strength Measurements 424
Using the AntennaCable Editor 430
24 Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
Using Noise Figure 436Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 17
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement 440
Example Typical Noise Figure Measurement Procedure 440
Overview of Softkey Menus 441
How to Use DUT Measurement Setups 448
Single Continuous Restart 460
Points 460
Resolution Bandwidth (Res BW) 461
Alignments 461
Calculating Noise Figure Measurement Uncertainty 462
Using ENR Tables 467
About ENR (*enr) Preamplifier (*amp) and DUT (*dut) Files 468
Using Markers (Noise Figure) 470
Calibration Wizard 471
When to Calibrate 471
How to use AutoIntegration 474
About AutoIntegration 474
AutoIntegration Procedure 475
Other Features Available 480
Troubleshooting 481
25 Data Analysis Features
All about Markers 484
How to create Markers 484
How to move a Marker after it is created 484
About Delta Markers 485
Signal Track Marker (NF and SA Mode ONLY) 486
Marker Table 486
Coupled Markers (NA Mode) 487
Marker Colors 488
Marker Trace (CAT NA NF Modes) 488
Marker Trace (IQA and SA Mode) 488
Marker Format 489
Searching with Markers 490
What Is a Peak’ 495
Marker Functions 497
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Marker Functions 498
SA Marker Functions 498
All about Limit Lines 499
How to Create Fixed Limit Lines 499
Relative Limit Lines 500
Build From Trace 50018 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Limit Options 501
How to Save and Recall Limits 502
Display Line (IQ NF and SA Modes Only) 503
All about Trace Math 504
How to display data and memory traces 504
How to perform Trace Math 504
About Math Operations 505
All about Scale Settings 506
How to Use Scale Settings 506
Averaging (CAT NA Power Meter Channel Scanner and Pulse Measurement Modes Only)
507
26 System Settings
RunHold 510
How to perform a single sweep while in Hold 510
Preset 511
How to Preset the FieldFox 511
User Preset 511
How to set User Preset 511
How to recall User Preset 512
Audio (Volume) Control 512
How to set the FieldFox Volume Control 512
Display (Settings) 513
Display Brightness 513
Display Colors 513
Trace Width 514
Title 514
Edit Keywords 515
Full Screen Mode 515
Preferences 515
Quick Settings Table 515
Save and Reset Preferences 516
Global Settings (Overview) 517
Display 519
Audio 520
Date and Time 521
GPS – Distance Settings 521
How to select CAT distance units 521
File folders 522
How to set File Folders 522Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 19
Alpha Numeric Editing 523
File Saving Naming Options 523
CAT (Distance Units) 523
CATNA 524
SA 525
System Configuration 525
Options (Licensing) 525
GNSS (GPS+) and GPS 526
Frequency Reference Source 530
Variable Voltage Source (Opt 309) 532
Security Level 533
Date and Time Format and Time Zone Settings 533
LAN Settings 535
Power ON 536
FieldFox Package Installer (N995xA N996xA and applies to N991xA2xA3xA units with
serial number prefixes ≥5607) 537
Service Diagnostics 539
System Information 539
27 Using the MiniUSB Port to send SCPI Commands and Queries (N995xA6xA and applies to
N991xA2xA3xA units with serial number prefixes ≥5607)
MiniUSB Connection to PC with IO Libraries 541
28 File Management
Saving and Recalling Files 544
Save Files 544
Recall Files 548
Move (Copy) Files 548
Set File Type and Select Device 549
Manage Files 552
Manage Folders 554
Edit Keywords 555
Prefixes and Suffixes for Filenames 555
Press Printing 558
How to print the current screen or a saved file 558
29 Working with the LithiumIon Battery
Viewing the Battery Charge Status 559
Service Diagnostics—Battery Screen 560
BuiltIn Battery Gauge 560
Charging the Battery 56120 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Internal Charging with the ACDC Adapter 561
Using the External Battery Charger (N9910X–872) 563
Reconditioning Battery 564
Battery Care 564
Maximizing Battery Life 564
LithiumIon Battery Disposal 565
30 Safety Considerations
For the FieldFox 568
For the ACDC Adapter 570
For the External Battery Charger (N9910X872) 571
For the Battery 571
High Capacity Lithium Battery (N9910X876) 571
Standard Capacity Battery (N9910X870) 573
Battery Protective Functions 575
Battery Protective Functions (N9910X876) 575
Battery Protective Functions (N9910X870) 577
Batteries Safe Handling and Disposal 578
Battery Transportation 578
Environmental Requirements 579
Electrical Requirements 579
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions 579
FieldFox Markings 580
Battery Markings 581
Packaging Markings 583
ACDC Adapter Markings 583
Certification and Compliance Statements 584
Certification 584
Manufacturer’s Declaration 584
Declaration of Conformity 584
EMC 585
Safety 585
South Korean Class B EMC Declaration 585
Acoustic Statement (European Machinery Directive) 585
AConnector Care Review
588
BSpecificationsData SheetKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 21
590
CInstrument Calibration
How Often Should Calibrate My Instrument 591
How do I Get an Instrument Calibration 591
What Are My Choices of Instrument Calibration 592
DKorean Battery Safety Translation
593
ERussian Battery Safety Translation
604
F Keysight Software EndUser Licensing Agreement (EULA)
61622 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 23
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
1Overview
Models and Options
Table 11 Models
Model Max Freq
(GHz)
Description
N9913A 4 Vector Network Analyzer AND Spectrum Analyzer
N9914A 65 Vector Network Analyzer AND Spectrum Analyzer
N9915A 9 Vector Network Analyzer AND Spectrum Analyzer
N9916A 14 Vector Network Analyzer AND Spectrum Analyzer
N9917A 18 Vector Network Analyzer AND Spectrum Analyzer
N9918A 265 Vector Network Analyzer AND Spectrum Analyzer
N9925A 9 Vector Network Analyzer
N9926A 14 Vector Network Analyzer
N9927A 18 Vector Network Analyzer
N9928A 265 Vector Network Analyzer
N9935A 9 Spectrum Analyzer
N9936A 14 Spectrum Analyzer
N9937A 18 Spectrum Analyzer
N9938A 265 Spectrum Analyzer
N9950A 32 Vector Network Analyzer AND Spectrum Analyzer
N9951A 44 Vector Network Analyzer AND Spectrum Analyzer
N9952A 50 Vector Network Analyzer AND Spectrum Analyzer
N9960A 32 Spectrum Analyzer
N9961A 44 Spectrum Analyzer
N9962A 50 Spectrum Analyzer
Minimum Frequency 30 kHz for all models 24 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Overview
Accessories
FieldFox Options For a comprehensive list view the FieldFox Configuration
Guide at httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59909836ENpdf
Accessories
The following accessories are included with every FieldFox Spare accessories
can be ordered at any time Refer to Table 12 Some of the optional
accessories—not included unless requested—are listed in Table 13 For more
refer to httpwwwkeysightcomfindfieldfox
Optional Accessories
To see a complete list of accessories that are available for the FieldFox please
visit httpwwwkeysightcomfindfieldfox
Table 12 Accessories
Accessory Part
Number
Description
N9910X–873 ACDC Adapter (except for USCanada)a
a Depending on your region the FieldFox comes with either a
N9910X873 ACDC adapter or a N9910X877 ACDC adapter
N9910X–870 LithiumIon Battery
N9910X–877 ACDC Adapter for US Canada onlya
N9910X–880 Softcase w Backpack & Shoulder Strap
N9910X–890 User’s Guide (printed copy)
N9910X–891 Quick Reference Guide (printed copy)
Table 13 Optional Accessories (partial list)
Optional Accessory
Part Number
Description
N9910X872 External battery charger
N9910X–876 17 mm torque wrench
N9910X876 LithiumIon Battery (High Capacity)
Although not supplied a USB keyboard and mouse CAN be used with the
FieldFoxKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 25
Overview
FieldFox Manuals Software and Supplemental Help
FieldFox Manuals Software and Supplemental Help
The following manuals and software are available for the FieldFox
To access all of these visit wwwkeysightcomfindfieldfoxsupport
— User’s Guide –This manual included with shipment
— Quick Reference Guide – Printed copy with laminated pages for outdoor
use included with shipment
— Supplemental Online Help Concepts and Reference information
Programming Guide – Online off line and pdf versions
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm
— FieldFox Data Link Software and Help – Free download Includes help on
editing calibration kits and cable files Refer to
httpwwwkeysightcommainsoftware
— Service Guide – Free download
— Firmware Updates – Check to see if you have the latest FieldFox firmware
Conventions that are used in the Manual
— Hardkey indicates a front panel button The functionality of these buttons
does not change
The six Softkey menus change dynamically and follow these color
conventions
— Softkey Blue indicates an available setting
— Softkey Green indicates a change in menu level when selected
— Softkey Black indicates the default or selected setting
— Softkey Yellow indicates an active entry in process
— Softkey Grey indicates a key that is NOT available
Safety Notes
The following safety notes are used throughout this manual Familiarize
yourself with each of the notes and its meaning before operating this
instrument More pertinent safety notes for using this product are located in
Chapter 30 Safety Considerations on page 567
Denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure that if not correctly
performed or adhered to would result in damage to or destruction of the
product Do not proceed beyond a caution note until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and met 26 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Overview
FieldFox Manuals Software and Supplemental Help
Denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure which if not correctly
performed or adhered to could result in injury or loss of life Do not
proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully
understood and met 27
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
2 Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
Check the Shipment
When you receive your FieldFox check the shipment according to the
following procedure
1 Inspect the shipping container for damage Signs of damage may include
a dented or torn shipping container or cushioning material that indicates
signs of unusual stress or compacting If not damaged save the packaging
material in case the FieldFox needs to be returned
2 Carefully remove the contents from the shipping container and verify that
the standard accessories and your ordered options are included in the
shipment according to the Box Contents List
3 For any question or problems refer to Contacting Keysight on page 5
Meeting Power Requirements for the ACDC Adapter
The ACDC adapter supplied with the analyzer is equipped with a threewire
power cord in accordance with international safety standards The power
cable appropriate to the original product shipping location is included with the
FieldFox
Various AC power cables are available from Keysight that are unique to specific
geographic areas You can order additional AC power cables that are correct
for use in different areas For the power cord part number information please
visit httpwwwkeysightcomfindfieldfox
Voltage 100 VAC to 240 VAC
Frequency 50 Hz to 60 Hz
Current 15 A (100 VAC) to 075 A (240 VAC) 28 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
Install the LithiumIon Battery
Install the LithiumIon Battery
Battery Usage
When you receive your FieldFox the lithiumion battery is not installed and it
is partially charged to approximately 30 to preserve battery life A lithiumion
battery has no memory effect so it can be used partially charged as shipped
A fully charged battery will power your FieldFox for about four hours so if you
plan to use it for this long you should fully charge the battery
Learn more about the lithiumion battery in Chapter 29 Working with the
LithiumIon Battery on page 559
Battery charge status is viewable
— In the upperright corner of the screen
— On the Battery screen To access the screen select System Service
Diagnostics and Battery
Step Notes
1 Open the battery door Push the button on the battery compartment door while sliding the
door outward
2 Insert the battery The terminals end of the battery is inserted into the compartment
3 Close the battery door Slide the battery compartment door upwards until it latches
The FieldFox will shut down to prevent the battery from discharging to a
level that is damaging If this occurs charge the battery either internally or
externallyKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 29
Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
FieldFox ONOFF Settings
— On the battery Open the FieldFox battery compartment door to view the
battery LCD
To conserve battery power
—Use RunHold to singletrigger a measurement when needed Hold is
shown on the display
—Press System then Display then Brightness Use the arrows the
rotary knob or numeric keypad to adjust the brightness to dim the FieldFox
display as much as possible
— Briefly press the power button > Standby to switch to Standby mode when
the FieldFox is not being used Press power button again to restore power All
current settings are preserved
To recharge a battery
Use ONLY a FieldFox charger to recharge a battery
— The battery can be fully charged while in the FieldFox in about 4 hours with
the FieldFox either ON or OFF
— The battery can be fully charged externally using the external battery
charger in about 4 hours
— When the battery is removed the FieldFox can still be powered by the
ACDC adapter
FieldFox ONOFF Settings
—To turn power ON briefly press the power button Bootup takes about 1
minute
—To switch to Standby mode (low battery drain) briefly press the power
button See the Note above concerning Stand By
When powered by the battery only the FieldFox can stay in Standby mode
for a maximum of four hours and then it powers off automatically When
the relative battery charge drops by about 20 the FieldFox will power off
to preserve the remaining charge
The FieldFox power button shut downstandby sequence includes a 10
second counter that allows you to either choose a softkey to immediately
initiate the action (Standby Shut down Restart*) or to let the countdown
counter expire after 10 seconds then perform the action *Restart can only
be enabled via the Restart softkey 30 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
FieldFox High Temperature Protection
—To turn Power OFF (very low battery drain) press the power button briefly
and press the Shutdown softkey Data and instrument state are NOT
automatically saved when the FieldFox is powered OFF Learn how to save
data and instrument state in Chapter 28 File Management on page 543
See the Note above concerning Shut down
— To restart FieldFox press the power button and press Restart See the Note
above concerning Restart
—Press Cancel to exit the power down sequence
— You can also access the power down softkey menu choices (Standby Shut
down Restart and Cancel) by using the Mode hardkey
—Press Mode
—Then More
—Then Shut down
— You can make a setting to automatically Power ON the FieldFox when a
power source is connected Learn how on Power ON on page 536
Power Button LED Status
FieldFox High Temperature Protection
The following features prevent degradation or damage in the event of high
internal temperatures in the FieldFox
How to monitor the internal FieldFox temperature
—Press System then Service Diagnostics
—Then Internal Temperatures
Solid green Power is ON
Blinking green FieldFox in Stand By mode
Blinking ambera
a LED showing a repeating rampingup of the intensity of the LED to indicate the
battery is charging
Battery charging when the FieldFox power is off
Blinking amber and green Stand By mode and battery charging
Not lit Power is Off and battery is not charging
Do NOT store the FieldFox in the softcase while powered ON or in
Standby modeKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 31
Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
FieldFox High Temperature Protection
— The temperature at which the following events occur is the average of the
RF1 RF2 SB1 SB2 temperatures These temperatures come from internal
sensors embedded within FieldFox
Temperature Control Mode
The FieldFox’s internal temperature control preserves measurement accuracy
and maintains the longterm reliability of the FieldFox See also HighTemp
Shutdown Warning (RTSA Mode Only) on page 33
Entering Temperature Control Mode
At an average internal temperature of above approximately 64°C the FieldFox
enters Temperature Control mode by reducing display intensity This should
decrease the internal temperature which preserves measurement accuracy and
maintains the longterm reliability of the FieldFox Refer to Figure 21
In addition duty cycling is enabled when the internal average temperature of
the FieldFox reaches the duty cycling threshold of above ~64°C All
applications (except RTSA) Power for internal circuitry is turned off between
sweeps and delaying occurs for the next sweep In RTSA mode power is only
turned off if the FieldFox is in Single Sweep or Hold
All applications (including RTSA) Display dims to 40 at ~64°C
For all modes except RTSA mode you will see the following messages
displayed for ~3 seconds
Automatic Meas Duty Cycling activated for thermal
management
Later if the temperatures are reduced
Temperatures reduced ending Automatic Meas Duty Cycling
For RTSA mode (where duty cycling is not possible) you will see the following
messages displayed for ~3 seconds
Entering Auto Protect mode for thermal management
Later if the temperatures are reduced
Temperatures reduced exiting Automatic Protect Mode
Entering Auto Protect (Maximum) Threshold Temperature Mode
At above approximately 75°C the FieldFox enters (Maximum) Auto Protect
temperature control mode by displaying the Entering Auto Protect mode
See also Table 21 on page 34
When you enter the Auto Protect (Maximum) Threshold the following message
is displayed
Measurement speed specifications do NOT apply in Temperature Control
Mode 32 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
FieldFox High Temperature Protection
Entering Maximum Auto Protect mode for thermal management
When temperature reaches the maximum protection threshold (~75°C) some
applications take additional measures
Figure 21 Entering Auto Protect mode message (above ~64°C)—(Displays for 3 sec)
Exiting Maximum Auto Protect Threshold Temperature Mode
When the temperature drops to approximately 735°C a message is displayed
indicating that the FieldFox is leaving Temperature Control Mode and normal
operating settings are restored (refer to Figure 22) See also Table 21 on
page 34
When you exit the Auto Protect (Maximum) Threshold control mode the
following message is displayed
Temperatures reduced exiting Maximum Auto Protect mode
Figure 22 Exiting Maximum Auto Protect mode message—(~625°C)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 33
Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
FieldFox High Temperature Protection
HighTemp Shutdown Warning (RTSA Mode Only)
In extreme situations Temperature Control mode may not stop an increase in
the FieldFox internal temperature Just prior to shut down the FieldFox will
display a warning of imminent shut down and the instrument turns off At
above approximately 77°C a Maximum Auto Protect message—(Top
WARNING message) displays for 9 sec Red text at left bottom corner of
display remains on until internal temperature returns to ~755°C At above
~78°C HighTemperature Shut down will engage and turn OFF the FieldFox
Refer to Figure 23 See also Table 21 on page 34
Figure 23 Shutdown Warning message—(above ~77°C) (RTSA Mode Only) 34 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
Avoid Overpowering the FieldFox
Summary of FieldFox Average Internal Temperature Protection
Behavior
Avoid Overpowering the FieldFox
The FieldFox can be damaged with too much power or voltage applied
Exceeding the maximum RF power levels shown below will cause an ADC Over
Range message to appear on the screen
Table 21 Summary of FieldFox Temperature Protection
Threshold Average Internal
Temperature
Description of Behavior
Duty cycling ~64°C Duty cycling is enabled when the internal average temperature of the
FieldFox reaches the duty cycling threshold of ~64°C Power is turned
off between sweeps and delaying occurs for the next sweep
In RTSA mode power is only turned off in Single Sweep or Hold This
enables you to control your instrument’s temperature when you don’t
need to make a measurement by using the RunHold hardkey to
pause the sweep
All applications (including RTSA) Display dims to 40 at ~64°C
Maximum Protect (Initial) ~75°C When temperature reaches the maximum protection threshold
(~75°C) some applications take additional measures
1 degree below shutdown
(RTSA Mode Only)
~77°C RTSA Shutdown Warning (~77°C) — (Top WARNING message
displays for 9 sec) Red text at bottom of display remains on until
internal temperature returns to ~755°C Refer to Figure 23 on
page 33
Shutdown ~78°C Instrument shuts down
Exit Duty Cycle ~625°C The temperature required to come out of the duty cycle threshold
Maximum Input Voltages and Power
— RF INOUT Connectors ±50 VDC +27 dBm RF
— DC Input 19 to 19 VDC 60 Watts maximum when charging battery
Learn more about Maximum power and voltages in the FieldFox Data
Sheet
Very often coaxial cables and antennas build up a static charge which if
allowed to discharge by connecting to the FieldFox may damage the
instrument input circuitry To avoid such damage it is recommended to
dissipate any static charges by temporarily attaching a short to the cable
or antenna prior to attaching to the FieldFoxKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 35
Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
Take the FieldFox Tour
Take the FieldFox Tour
Front Panel 36 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
Take the FieldFox Tour
No Caption Description Learn
More
1 Power ON press momentarily
STAND BY with FieldFox power ON press briefly
OFF press and hold until the FieldFox shuts off (about 4 seconds)
FieldFox
ONOFF
Settings
on
page 29
2 LED Not lit FieldFox OFF not charging
Green FieldFox ON Charging status indicated by battery icon on screen
Orange flashing FieldFox STAND BY
Orange intensity increasing flashing slowly FieldFox OFF charging
Power
Button
LED
Status
on
page 30
3 System Displays a submenu for system setup System
Settings
on
page 509
4 Function keys Includes FreqDist ScaleAmptd BW Sweep Trace Meas
Setup Measure and Mode
Refer to
specific
Mode
5 Preset Returns the analyzer to a known state How to
Preset the
FieldFox
on
page 511
6 Enter Confirms a parameter selection or configuration
7 Marker Activates marker function All about
Markers
on
page 484
8 Mkr>Tools Displays a submenu for marker functions All about
Markers
on
page 484
9 Esc Exits and closes the Active Entry dialog box or clears the character input
10 SaveRecall Saves the current trace or recalls saved data from memory Saving
and
Recalling
Files on
page 544Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 37
Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
Take the FieldFox Tour
11 Limit Sets limit lines for quick PassFail judgment All about
Limit
Lines on
page 499
12 RunHold Toggles between free Run and HoldSingle operation RunHol
d on
page 510
13 Cal Displays a submenu for calibration functions Calibrati
on
Method
Summary
on
page 143
14 Arrow keys Increases or decreases a value or setting
15 Returns to the previous menu selection
16 Rotary knob Highlights an item for selection or enables incremental changes to values
17 Softkeys Allows selection of settings for configuring and performing measurements and
for other FieldFox functions

18 Screen Transflective screen viewable under all lighting conditions If you are using your
FieldFox in direct sunlight you do not need to shield the display from the
sunlight In bright lighting conditions the display is brighter and easier to read
when you allow light to fall directly on the screen Alternative color modes exist
that maximize viewing in direct sunlight conditions as well as other conditions
such as nighttime work
Clean the Transflective screen with gentle and minimal
wiping using Isopropyl alcohol applied to a lintfree cloth
Screen
Tour on
page 41
No Caption Description Learn
More 38 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
Take the FieldFox Tour
Top Panel
Right Side Panel
Caption Descriptions Learn More
Port 1
RF Output
For CAT and NA measurements use to make reflection measurements
Maximum ±50 VDC +27 dBm RF
Also for SA source output in SA mode
CAT Mode Settings
on page 47
NA Mode Settings on
page 87
Chapter 9 SA
(Spectrum Analyzer)
Mode on page 145
Port 2
SA RF Input
For SA use to make all measurements
For CAT NA and VVM mode use to make Port 2 transmission
measurements
Maximum ±50 VDC +27 dBm RF
SA Mode Settings on
page 148
GPS Ant SMA (f) connector for use with builtin GPS Produces a 33 VDC bias
voltage for the antenna preamplifier Use with a GPS antenna such as
N9910X825 Other GPS antennas can also be used
GNSS (GPS+) and
GPS on page 526
Ref In
Trig In
SMA (f) connector for use with Frequency Reference Source and External
Trigger Input signal
Maximum 55 VDC
Frequency Reference
Source on page 530
Triggering on
page 172
Connector Description Learn More
Ethernet cable connector to read trace data using the FieldFox Data Link
Software and connect to the FieldFox remotely
Download the latest version of the software at
wwwkeysightcomfindfieldfoxsupport
LAN Settings on
page 535Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 39
Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
Take the FieldFox Tour
IF Out used in SA mode for external signal processing IF Output on
page 167
Frequency Reference Source Output
Trigger Output (ERTA mode)
Chapter 21 ERTA
(Extended Range
Transmission Analysis)
Mode Option 209 on
page 385
Secure Digital slot Use to extend the memory of the FieldFox Saving and Recalling
Files on page 544
On the N995xA6xA (Also applies to N991xA2xA3xA units with serial
number prefixes ≥5607) models the miniUSB port can be connected to
your PC’s standard USB port to send SCPI commands
IMPORTANT It is recommended that only USB
certified cables are used with the FieldFox
Chapter 27 Using the
MiniUSB Port to send
SCPI Commands and
Queries (N995xA6xA
and applies to
N991xA2xA3xA units
with serial number
prefixes ≥5607) on
page 541
Two standard USB connectors used to connect a power sensor for Power
Meter Mode Also used to save files to a USB flash drive
IMPORTANT It is recommended that only USB
certified cables are used with the FieldFox
Saving and Recalling
Files on page 544
Connector Description Learn More 40 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
Take the FieldFox Tour
Left Side Panel
Connector Description Learn More
Audio output jack for use with SA Mode Tune and Listen Tune & Listen
(AMFM) on page 161
DC Voltage Source for use with external DC Bias Variable Voltage
Source (Opt 309) on
page 532
DC power connector used to connect to the ACDC adapter Maximum 19
VDC 4 ADC
Internal Charging with
the ACDC Adapter on
page 561Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 41
Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
Take the FieldFox Tour
Screen Tour
Caption Description Learn More
1 Title – write your own text here Title on page 514
2 Current Mode
3 Run Hold RunHold on
page 510
4 Display Format Mode dependent
5 Scaledivision Mode dependent
6 Calibration Status (CAT and NA)
Detection Method (SA)
Cal ON –
Questionable
Accuracy on page 140
7 Velocity Factor (Fault Meas) About Velocity Factor
and Cable Loss on
page 65
8 Averaging Status and Count Mode dependent
9 Data Mem Display (CAT and NA)
Step FFT (SA)
All about Trace Math
on page 504
Resolution Bandwidth
(Res BW) on page 165
10 Resolution Setting Mode dependent
11 Measurement Start Freq or Distance Mode dependent 42 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
Take the FieldFox Tour
12 Bandpass Lowpass setting (Fault Meas)
IF BW in NA Mode
DTF Measurement
Settings on page 62
13 Output Power Level (CAT and NA) Output Power on
page 53
14 Measurement Stop Freq or Distance Mode dependent
15 Actual Sweep Time Mode dependent
16 Limit Line Status All about Limit Lines
on page 499
17 Time and Date Date and Time on
page 521
18 Marker Readout All about Markers on
page 484
19 Battery Status Viewing the Battery
Charge Status on
page 559
20 Measurement Type (CAT and NA)
21 acquisition Mode dependent
22 Reference Position Mode dependent
Caption Description Learn MoreKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 43
Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
How to Enter Numeric Values
How to Enter Numeric Values
Many settings on the FieldFox require the entry of numeric values
How to enter numeric values
Use any combination of the following keys
— Numeric 0–9 keys along with the polarity (+) key
— UpDown arrow keys to increment or decrement values
— Rotary knob to scroll through a set of values
— Back erases previously entered values
— Esc exits data entry without accepting the new value
To complete the setting press Enter or a different softkey or hardkey
Multiplier Abbreviations
Many times after entering numeric values a set of multiplier or suffix softkeys
are presented The following explains the meaning of these abbreviations
Select Frequency multipliers as follows
— GHz Gigahertz (1e9 Hertz)
— MHz Megahertz (1e6 Hertz)
— KHz Kilohertz (1e3 Hertz)
— Hz Hertz
Select Time multipliers as follows
— s Seconds
— ms milliseconds (1e–3)
— us microseconds (1e–6)
— ns nanoseconds (1e–9)
— ps picoseconds (1e12) 44 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Preparing for Initial Use of Your New FieldFox
Connector Care
Connector Care
— Never store connectors airlines or calibration standards loose in a box This
is a common cause of connector damage
— Install protective end caps when connectors are not in use
— Keep connector temperature the same as the test instrument Holding the
connector in your hand or cleaning connector with compressed air can
significantly change the temperature Wait for connector temperature to
stabilize before using in calibration or measurements
— Do not touch the mating plane surfaces Natural skin oils and microscopic
particles of dirt are difficult to remove from these surfaces
— Do not set connectors contactend down on a hard surface The plating and
mating plane surfaces can be damaged if the interface comes in contact
with any hard surface
— Wear a grounded wrist strap and work on a grounded conductive table
mat This helps protect the analyzer and devices from electrostatic
discharge (ESD)
— Refer to Connector Care Review on page 587
Because of the very small and precise mechanical tolerances of mmWave
connectors minor defects damage and dirt can significantly degrade
repeatability and accuracy In addition a dirty or damaged connector can
destroy connectors that are mated to it For this reason NEVER use a
damaged connector See also
httpnasupportkeysightcompnaconnectorcareConnector_Carehtm 45
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
3 CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode
In this Chapter
CAT Mode is typically used to test an entire transmission system
from the transmitter to the antenna This process is sometimes
referred to as Line Sweeping
CAT Mode is similar to NA (Network Analyzer) Mode Learn more in
the Supplemental Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpF
ieldFoxhtm
CAT Mode Distance to Fault measurements are discussed in
Chapter 4 DTF (Distance to Fault) Measurements
IMPORTANT For CAT and NA modes limit lines do not apply
where F1 F2
Measurement Selection on page 47
Quick Settings Table on page 48
Frequency Range on page 49
Scale Settings on page 49
Averaging on page 50
Smoothing on page 51
Single or Continuous Measure on page 51
Resolution (Number of Data Points) on page 52
Sweep Time on page 52
Output Power on page 53
Interference Rejection on page 53
Coupled Frequency on page 54 46 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode
Procedures
See Also
Return Loss Measurements on page 55
1Port Cable Loss Measurements on page 55
2Port Insertion Loss Measurements on page 57
Chapter 8 Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes on page 121
All about Markers on page 484
All about Limit Lines on page 499
All about Trace Math on page 504
Making 75Ω (ohm) Measurements at the FieldFox Supplemental Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtmKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 47
CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode
CAT Mode Settings
CAT Mode Settings
Select CAT Mode before making any setting in this chapter
How to select CAT Mode
—Press Mode
—Then CATTDR
Measurement Selection
How to select a CAT Mode Measurement
Learn more about the following measurements in the Supplemental Online
Help httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm
Press Measure 1
Then choose one of the following These softkeys also appear after CAT Mode
is selected
— Distance To Fault 1port reflection measurement that uses Inverse Fourier
Transform (IFT) calculations to determine and display the distance to and
relative size of a fault or disruption in the transmission line Units are in
return loss format expressed as a positive number in dB unless the
measurement selected is DTF (VSWR) Learn more about DTF
Measurements refer to Chapter 4 DTF (Distance to Fault)
Measurements
— Return Loss & DTF Displays both a Return Loss measurement and a DTF
measurement Use this format to display the frequency settings that are
used to make the DTF measurement The frequency range settings for these
two measurements can be coupled or uncoupled Learn more on page 54
Calibrations are applied to both traces
When in Hold mode and Single sweep is performed only the active
trace is triggered Use the arrows to activate a trace
— Return Loss 1port reflection measurement that displays the amount of
incident signal energy MINUS the amount of energy that is reflected The
higher the trace is on the screen the more energy being reflected back to
the FieldFox Learn how to measure Return Loss on page 55
— VSWR (Voltage Standing Wave Ratio – also known as SWR) 1port
reflection measurement that displays the ratio of the maximum reflected
voltage over the minimum reflected voltage The higher the trace is on the
screen the more energy being reflected back to the FieldFox
— DTF (VSWR) Distance to Fault in VSWR format 48 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode
CAT Mode Settings
— Cable Loss (1Port) 1port reflection measurement that displays the loss of
a transmission line Learn more on page 55
— Insertion Loss (2Port) 2port transmission measurement that accurately
displays the loss through a cable or other device in dB Both ends of the
cable must be connected to the FieldFox NO phase information is included
in this measurement Learn more at 2Port Insertion Loss Measurements
on page 57 This feature is available only with an option on some FieldFox
models For detailed information please view the FieldFox Configuration
Guide at httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59909836ENpdf
— DTF (Lin) Distance to Fault in Linear format
— TDR (Lin rho) The Yaxis of the display is linear real unitless values A trace
without reflections shows as 0 (zero) Maximum reflections from an open or
short show as 1
— TDR (ohm) The Yaxis of the display is impedance (ohms)
— TDR & DTF TDR and DTF are displayed
Quick Settings Table
Both CAT and NA Modes allow you to view and change most relevant settings
from a single location All of these settings are discussed in this chapter and
unless otherwise noted ALL of these settings can also be made using the
standard softkey menus
How to view and change Quick Settings
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Settings
—Press Next Page and Previous Page to view all settings If these softkeys
are NOT available then all available settings fit on one page
— To change a setting
— Use the arrows to highlight a setting
—Then press Edit The current setting changes to yellow
— Some settings require you to press a softkey to change the value
Otherwise use the numeric keypad arrows or rotary knob to
change the value
— When finished changing a value press Done Edit
—Press Dock Window to relocate the Settings table to a position relative to
the trace window The Dock Window setting persists through a Preset
Choose from the following
— Full (Default setting) Only the Settings table is shown on the screen
The trace window is temporarily not shownKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 49
CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode
CAT Mode Settings
— Left The Settings table is shown to the left of the trace window
— Bottom The Settings table is shown below the trace window
— When finished changing ALL settings press Done to save your settings
Frequency Range
Set the range of frequencies over which you would like to make CAT Mode
measurements
When the frequency range is changed after a calibration is performed the cal
becomes interpolated Learn more in Interpolation * on page 140
How to set Frequency Range
—Press FreqDist
— Then choose from the following
— Start and Stop frequencies beginning and end of the sweep
— Center and Span frequencies – the center frequency and span of
frequencies (half on either side of center)
— Follow each setting by entering a value using the numeric keypad
arrows or the rotary knob
— After using the keypad select a multiplier key Learn about multiplier
abbreviations in Chapter 1 Overview
— After using the arrows or the rotary knob press Enter The
amount of frequency increment is based on the current span and can
NOT be changed in CAT Mode
Scale Settings
Adjust the Yaxis scale to see the relevant portions of the data trace The Yaxis
is divided into 10 graticules
This setting can be changed at any time without affecting calibration accuracy
How to set Scale
—Press Scale Amptd
— Then choose from the following three methods
1 Autoscale Automatically adjusts the Yaxis to comfortably fit the
Minimum and Maximum amplitude of the trace on the screen
2 Set Scale acquisition and Reference Position
— Scale Manually enter a scale per division to view specific
areas of the trace 50 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode
CAT Mode Settings
— Ref Level Manually set the value of the reference line
Enter a negative value by pressing RunHold (+) either
before or after typing a value
— Ref Pos Manually set the position of the reference line
Values must be between 0 (TOP line) and 10 (BOTTOM
line)
3 Set Top and Bottom graticule values The scale per division is
calculated
— Top to set the value of the Top graticule
— Bottom to set the value of the Bottom graticule
— Enter a negative value by pressing RunHold (+) either
before or after typing a value
Averaging
Trace Averaging helps to smooth a trace to reduce the effects of random noise
on a measurement The FieldFox computes each data point based on the
average of the same data point over several consecutive sweeps
Average Count determines the number of sweeps to average the higher the
average count the greater the amount of noise reduction
An average counter is shown in the left edge of the screen as Avg N This
shows the number of previous sweeps that have been averaged together to
form the current trace When the counter reaches the specified count then a
running average’ of the last N sweeps is displayed Average Count 1 means
there is NO averaging
This setting can be changed at any time without affecting calibration accuracy
How to set Trace Averaging
—Press BW 2
Scale annotation on the FieldFox screen
Reference Line red arrow
Ref Level 40 dB
Ref Position 1
Scale 2 dB per division
Averaging is often used to increase the dynamic range of a measurement
To achieve the highest dynamic range select NA mode and reduce the IF
Bandwidth setting Learn more about dynamic range in Increase Dynamic
Range on page 107Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 51
CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode
CAT Mode Settings
—Then Average N where N is the current count setting
— Enter a value using the numeric keypad Enter 1 for NO averaging
—Press Enter
— While Trace Averaging is in process press Sweep 3 then Restart to restart
the averaging at 1
Smoothing
Trace smoothing averages a number of adjacent data points to smooth the
peaktopeak noise values on a displayed trace The number of adjacent data
points that are averaged is known as the smoothing aperture Aperture is set
by specifying a percentage of the Xaxis span
Trace smoothing does NOT significantly increase measurement time
Smoothing can be used with any CAT format
When enabled Smo appears on the FieldFox screen
How to set Smoothing
—Press BW 2
—Then Smoothing ON OFF
—Then Sm Aperture and enter a value between 0 and 25 (percent) using the
numeric keypad
—Press Enter
Single or Continuous Measure
This setting determines whether the FieldFox sweeps continuously or only once
each time the Single button is pressed Use Single to conserve battery power
or to allow you to save or analyze a specific measurement trace
This setting can be changed at any time without affecting calibration accuracy
How to set Single or Continuous
—Press Sweep 3
— Then choose one of the following
— Single Automatically sets Continuous OFF and causes FieldFox to
make ONE sweep then hold for the next Single key press Hold is
annotated in the upper left corner of the display when NOT sweeping
and changes to an arrow > while the sweep occurs
— Continuous Makes continuous sweeps This is the typical setting
when battery power is not critical
You can also use Run Hold + to toggle between Single and Continuous 52 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode
CAT Mode Settings
Resolution (Number of Data Points)
Data points are individual measurements that are made and plotted across the
Xaxis to form a trace Select more data points to increase measurement
resolution However more data points require more time to complete an entire
measurement sweep
When the Resolution is changed after a calibration is performed the cal
becomes interpolated Learn more in Interpolation * on page 140
How to set Resolution
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Resolution
— Then choose one of the following
101 | 201 | 401 | 601 | 801 | 1001 |1601 | 4001 | 10001
— Using SCPI Resolution can be set to any number of points between 3 and
10001 See the Programming Guide at
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelp
Sweep Time
The fastest possible sweep time is always used as the default setting Use the
Min Swp Time setting to slow the sweep time when measuring long lengths of
cable
Learn more in the FieldFox Supplemental Help at
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm
The actual sweep time is shown on the FieldFox screen See Take the FieldFox
Tour on page 35 To increase the sweep time enter a value that is higher than
the actual sweep time The increase will not be exactly the amount that you
enter as the actual sweep time is the composite of many factors
How to set Sweep Time
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Min Swp Time
— Enter a value using the numeric keypad
— Press a multiplier key Learn more in Multiplier Abbreviations on page 43
Measurement speed specifications do NOT apply in Temperature Control
Mode Learn more in Chapter 1 OverviewKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 53
CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode
CAT Mode Settings
Output Power
Set the power level out of the FieldFox to High Low or manually set power
level to a value between High and Low
Generally the high power setting is used when measuring passive highloss
devices to place the signal farther from the noise floor However for devices
that are sensitive to high power levels such as amplifiers use the Low power
setting
For best measurement accuracy use the Manual power setting at 15 dBm
After calibration the power level can be decreased for amplifiers or increased
for higher dynamic range
How to set Output Power
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Power
—Then Output Power
— High (Default setting) Sets output power to the maximum achievable
power at all displayed frequencies Output power is NOT FLAT across
the displayed FieldFox frequency span Please see
SpecificationsData Sheet on page 589 for expected power levels
— Low Sets output power to approximately –45 dBm FLAT across the
displayed FieldFox frequency span
— Man Set output power to an arbitrary value FLAT across the
displayed FieldFox frequency span If flattened power can NOT be
achieved a warning message and beep occurs To achieve a
flattened output power reduce the power level or stop frequency
—Then press Power Level
— Then enter a value using the numeric keypad the arrows or the
rotary knob
—Press Enter
Interference Rejection
Use this setting when you suspect that other signals in the area are interfering
with a measurement Interference may look like a spike or lack of stability in the
measurement trace While monitoring a measurement at a specific frequency
Power Level settings in this mode will NOT change Power Level settings in
other modes To help prevent damage to your DUT use caution when
changing modes with your DUT connected to the FieldFox test ports 54 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode
CAT Mode Settings
toggle this setting between ON and OFF If the measurement result decreases
while ON then there is an interfering signal in the area Continue to make
measurements with Interference Rejection ON However this will slow the
measurement speed
Once enabled up to SIX sweeps may be required before the interfering signal
is neutralized
This setting can be changed at any time without affecting calibration accuracy
How to set Interference Rejection
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Interference Rejection [current setting]
— Then choose from the following
— Off No interference rejection and fastest possible sweep speed
— Minimum The lowest level of Interference rejection
— Medium The medium level of Interference rejection
— Maximum The highest level of Interference rejection
Coupled Frequency
This setting especially useful for a Return Loss & DTF measurement allows
both measurements to have different frequency ranges
How to set Coupled Frequency
With a Return Loss & DTF measurement present
—Press Meas Setup 4
— Select the DTF measurement (Tr2) using the arrows
— Then choose from the following
— Coupled Freq ON Both the Return Loss and DTF traces have the same
frequency range settings
— Coupled Freq OFF (default setting) Both traces are allowed to have
individual frequency range settings When set to OFF
— The Return Loss measurement frequency settings are made in the
usual manner Learn how at Frequency Range on page 49 When a
new Start or Stop frequency is selected Coupled Frequency is
automatically set to OFF
— The DTF measurement is made using the frequencies as determined
by the DTF Frequency Mode setting Learn more in DTF
Measurement Settings on page 62Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 55
CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode
Return Loss Measurements
Return Loss Measurements
Return loss can be thought of as the absolute value of the reflected power
compared to the incident power
When measuring an OPEN or SHORT all incident power is reflected and
approximately 0 dB return loss is displayed
When measuring a LOAD very little power is reflected and values of 40 dB to
60 dB are displayed
The minus sign is usually ignored when conveying return loss For example a
component is said to have 18 dB return loss rather than –18 dB
How to Measure Return Loss
— Connect the jumper cable or any adapter used to connect the device under
test (DUT)
— Select Preset then Preset Returns the FieldFox to known settings
— Select Mode then CATTDR (Cable and Antenna Test)
—Then Return Loss (Default measurement)
—Press FreqDist and enter Start and Stop frequency values of the
measurement
—Press Meas Setup 4 then Settings to make appropriate settings before
calibrating
— Disconnect the jumper cable or DUT and press Cal 5 then follow the
calibration prompts
— Reconnect the jumper cable or DUT
— The return loss trace is displayed on the FieldFox screen
1Port Cable Loss Measurements
While all cables have inherent loss weather and time will deteriorate cables
and cause even more energy to be absorbed by the cable This makes less
power available to be transmitted
A deteriorated cable is not usually apparent in a Distance to Fault
measurement where more obvious and dramatic problems are identified A
Cable Loss measurement is necessary to measure the accumulated losses
throughout the length of the cable 56 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode
1Port Cable Loss Measurements
A 2port Insertion Loss measurement is usually more accurate than a 1port
Cable Loss measurement However to perform a 2port Insertion Loss
measurement both ends of the cable must be connected to the FieldFox
How to make a 1port Cable Loss Measurement
1 Press Preset then Preset
2 Then More then Cable Loss (1Port)
3 Connect the cable to be tested
4 Press FreqDist and enter Start and Stop frequency values of the
measurement
5 Press Sweep 3 then Min Swp Time Increase the Sweep Time until a stable
trace is visible on the screen The amount of time that is required increases
with longer cable lengths Learn more in the Supplemental Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm
6 Remove the cable to be tested
7 Press Cal 5 then QuickCal or Mechanical Cal Mechanical Cal
8 Follow the prompts to perform calibration at the end of the jumper cable
or adapter Learn more about Calibration in How to Perform a
Calibration on page 123
9 Connect the cable to be tested
10Connect a LOAD at the end of the cable to be tested This limits the
reflections to faults that are located in the cable under test
11Press Trace 6 then Math and Memory then Data>Mem to store the trace
into Memory
12Remove the LOAD and leave the end of the cable to be tested open
In highloss conditions a Cable Loss measurement becomes noisy’ as the
test signal becomes indistinguishable in the FieldFox noise floor This can
occur when measuring a very long cable and using relatively high
measurement frequencies To help with this condition use High Power
(page 53) and Averaging (page 50)
QuickCal is only available on N991xA2xA3xA models
Lowlevel standing waves (also known as ripple’) which may be visible in
reflection measurements can hide the actual loss of the cable Steps 10
through 13 can minimize the ripple Perform the measurement with and
without steps 10 through 13 and choose the method with the least amount
of rippleKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 57
CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode
2Port Insertion Loss Measurements
13Press Data Math then Data – Mem The ripple in the measurement is
removed These minor imperfections in the cable should not be considered
in the Cable Loss measurement
14Use Averaging to remove random noise from highloss measurements
Press BW 2 then Average
The displayed trace shows the Cable Loss values in one direction through the
cable A Return Loss measurement would show the loss for both down the
cable and back Therefore a Cable Loss measurement is the same as a Return
Loss measurement divided by 2
The average Cable Loss across the specified frequency range is shown on the
screen below the graticules
2Port Insertion Loss Measurements
A 2port Insertion Loss measurement is used to measure the loss through a
DUT (device under test) – or cable – over a specified frequency range The
FieldFox signal source is transmitted out the RF OUT connector through the
DUT and into the RF IN connector Both ends of the DUT must be connected
to the FieldFox either directly or indirectly using the cable used in the
normalization cal
Insertion’ loss simply means loss through a device usually expressed in dB It
is exactly the same measurement as S21 Transmission in NA Mode
2port Insertion Loss measurements are generally more accurate than 1port
Cable Loss measurements
How to make a 2port Insertion Loss Measurement
—Press Mode then CAT
—Then More then Insertion Loss (2Port)
—Press FreqDist and enter Start and Stop frequency values of the
measurement
—Press Sweep 3 then select a Resolution setting
—Press Cal 5 then perform a calibration Learn more on How to Perform a
Calibration on page 123
— Connect the DUT and view the insertion loss measurement results
When measuring very long lengths of cable it may be necessary to increase
the sweep time Learn how on page 52 Learn why in the Supplemental Online
Help httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm 58 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode
2Port Insertion Loss Measurements 59
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
4 DTF (Distance to Fault) Measurements
CAT Mode Distance to Fault (DTF) measurements are generally used to locate
problems or faults in a length of cable or transmission line In this chapter the
cable to be tested is referred to as the DUT (Device Under Test)
Settings that are NOT unique to DTF measurements are documented in the
CAT Mode Chapter 3 CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode
In this Chapter
How to make DTF Measurements on page 60
DTF Settings Table on page 62
DTF Measurement (Format) on page 62
DTF Start and Stop Distance on page 63
Frequency Mode on page 63 60 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
DTF (Distance to Fault) Measurements
How to make DTF Measurements
Optional settings
How to make DTF Measurements
Before starting you may need the following
— Jumper cable or adapter to connect the beginning of the DUT to the
FieldFox
— LOAD with correct connector type and gender to terminate the end of the
DUT (if possible)
— The known length and cable type of the DUT If the cable type is not known
then the Cable Loss (dBMeter) and Velocity Factor of the DUT are required
1 Connect any necessary jumper cable or adapter to the FieldFox RF OUT
port Do NOT connect the DUT
2 Press Preset then Preset to return the FieldFox to the default settings
3 Then Mode then CAT
4 Then Meas 1 then DTF
5 Press FreqDist then Stop Distance and enter the length of the DUT You
can optionally set the Start Distance
6 Press Cal 5 and follow the Cal prompts Learn all about Calibration in
How to Perform a Calibration on page 123
7 Disconnect any components or antenna that should NOT be measured and
connect a LOAD at the end of the DUT
8 Press Meas Setup 4 then DTF Cable Specifications
Coupled Frequency on page 64
Cable (Correction) Specifications on page 65
Window Settings on page 68
DTF Units on page 69
Calculated DTF values on page 69
About Alias Faults on page 69
All about Markers on page 484
All about Limit Lines on page 499
Saving and Recalling Files on page 544
Trace Math is NOT available in DTF MeasurementsKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 61
DTF (Distance to Fault) Measurements
How to make DTF Measurements
9 Either press EditSaveRecall Cables then Recall Cable or directly enter
the Velocity FactorCable Loss of the DUT using the Velocity Factor and
Cable Loss keys
10 Connect the start end of the DUT to the FieldFox
11 Press Meas Setup 4 then Settings then Next Page If the Aliasfree Range
setting is False then you may see Alias faults on the screen Learn more
on page 69 62 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
DTF (Distance to Fault) Measurements
DTF Measurement Settings
DTF Measurement Settings
DTF Settings Table
You can set and view all of the DTF settings including some calculated values
on the DTF Settings table Learn about the calculated values in Calculated
DTF values on page 69
How to make settings on the DTF settings table
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Settings
—Press Next Page and Previous Page to view all settings
— To change a setting
— Use the arrows or rotary knob to highlight a setting
— Numeric settings can be changed by pressing numbers using the
numeric keypad Then press Enter or select a suffix if available
— Other settings require you to press Edit then press a softkey to
change the value
— When finished changing a value press Done Edit
—Press Dock Window to relocate the Settings table to a position relative to
the trace window The setting persists through a Preset Choose from the
following
— Full (Default setting) Only the Settings table is shown on the screen
The trace window is temporarily not shown
— Left The Settings table is shown to the left of the trace window
— Bottom The Settings table is shown below the trace window
— When finished changing ALL settings press Done to save your settings
DTF Measurement (Format)
You can select from 3 different DTF Formats
—Press Measure 1
— Then choose from
— Distance to Fault (dB) Faults are displayed on the Yaxis in return
loss format expressed as a positive number in dB
— DTF (VSWR) Faults are displayed on the Yaxis in SWR Learn more
about SWR at the FieldFox Supplemental Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxht
m Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 63
DTF (Distance to Fault) Measurements
DTF Measurement Settings
— More then DTF (Lin) Faults are displayed on the Yaxis in linear
(unitless) format
DTF Start and Stop Distance
In DTF measurements you set the physical length of cable or other device to
be tested The FieldFox calculates the frequency range of the measurement
from this distance The longer the cable to be tested the lower the frequencies
that are used You can also set the frequencies manually using the Frequency
Mode [Bandpass] setting
How to set Start and Stop Distance
— With a DTF measurement present press FreqDist
— Then choose from the following
— Start Distance Enter a value using the numeric keypad the
arrows or the rotary knob then Enter By default the Start Distance
is set to 0 Meters This means that the measurement will display
faults starting at the point at which calibration standards are
connected
— Stop Distance Enter a value between the start distance and 5 km (or
16404 ft) using the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary
knob then Enter
Frequency Mode
All DTF measurements are made with frequency settings and using Inverse
Fourier Transform (IFT) the time and distance to faults are calculated
How to set Frequency Mode
With a DTF measurement present
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Frequency Mode
— Choose one of the following
— Lowpass The frequency range of a DTF measurement is set
automatically based on the Start and Stop Distances Use Lowpass
mode when the DUT is a cable ONLY
The start and stop frequencies for the measurement are always annotated
on the screen below the start and stop distances 64 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
DTF (Distance to Fault) Measurements
DTF Measurement Settings
— Bandpass (Default setting) The frequency range of a DTF
measurement is set manually Use Bandpass mode when the DUT
contains a diplexer or other filtering device which does not pass
some frequencies
Typically you will set the frequency range of the measurement to the passband
of the filter However you may also want to test the ability of the filter to reject
unwanted frequencies In this case set the frequency range to include those
frequencies which the filter may not be adequately rejecting
How to manually set Frequencies in Bandpass Mode
—Press FreqDist
—Then Min Start Freq and type the start frequency to use for the DTF
measurement
—Then Max Stop Freq and type the stop frequency to use for the DTF
measurement
—OR
—Press More
—Then Max Freq Span and type the frequency range to use for the DTF
measurement
—Then Center Frequency and type the center frequency of the range to use
for the DTF measurement
When the DTF frequencies are set manually they may not be the optimum
frequencies for measuring the distance to fault The distance may no longer be
aliasfree Learn more about aliasfree range on page 69
These settings specify the minimum and maximum frequencies to be used for
the DTF measurement These exact frequencies may not be used but a
narrower frequency range may be used that will still pass through the
bandpass filter
Coupled Frequency
When a Return Loss & DTF measurement is present this setting allows you to
have different frequency ranges for each measurement Learn more in
Coupled Frequency on page 54Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 65
DTF (Distance to Fault) Measurements
DTF Measurement Settings
Cable (Correction) Specifications
By default the FieldFox does NOT correct DTF measurements to account for
the inherent loss of a cable However to make more accurate DTF
measurements the Cable Loss and Velocity Factor values should be
considered
About Velocity Factor and Cable Loss
— Velocity Factor is a property of the physical material of a cable A VF of 10
corresponds to the speed of light in a vacuum or the fastest VF possible A
polyethylene dielectric cable has VF 066 and a cable with PTFE dielectric
has VF 07
— Cable Loss is specified in dBmeter In addition to the length of the cable
loss is also directly proportional to the frequency of the signal that passes
through the cable
The following is an example showing how DTF cable correction works
The DUT is a 100 meter transmission cable The Cable Loss value is
01 dBmeter This means that a signal traveling ONE WAY through the cable
will lose 10 dB of power (100 m * 1dBm) Because the FieldFox performs this
measurement with 1 port the test signal travels down the cable and then back
for a total loss of 20 dB
After a calibration has been performed for the purpose of illustrating this
point connect an OPEN to the end of the cable – a maximumsized fault for
100 reflection of the 300 MHz test signal
Without compensation for the loss of the cable a –20 dB response would be
visible at 100 meters which is the OPEN at the end of the DUT This is from
10 dB of loss through the cable in each direction
With compensation for the loss using the manufacturer’s specification the
FieldFox compensates the trace as though the signal traveling through 100
meters was increased by +20 dB Therefore the response will show 0 dB for
100 reflection
How to enter Cable Loss and Velocity Factor
Cable Loss and Velocity factor can be entered using one of the following
methods
— Manually enter cable loss and velocity factor for the measurement
— Select or create a cable file which contains the cable loss and velocity
factor
With a DTF measurement present
The following describes Coax Media type However you can create or edit
Waveguide Media Standards Learn how in Waveguide Calibrations on
page 137 66 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
DTF (Distance to Fault) Measurements
DTF Measurement Settings
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then DTF Cable Specifications
— Select Cable Corr
— Auto Use Cable Loss and Velocity Factor values from a Cable file See
How to Edit Save and Recall a Cable File below This will overwrite
a manuallyentered value
— Man (Default setting) Manually enter a value for Cable Loss and
Velocity Factor
—Then
— Velocity Factor Using the numeric keypad enter a value between
001 and 1 Then press Enter
— Cable Loss Using the numeric keypad enter a positive Cable Loss
value in dBm then press Enter
How to Edit a Cable File
The FieldFox includes many predefined cable files with the manufacturer’s
specifications You can edit these files or create new cable files using the
following procedure or using the FieldFox Data Link Software
The Cable correction data survives a Mode Preset and Preset
With a DTF measurement present
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then DTF Cable Specifications
—Then EditSaveRecall Cables
—Press New Cable then Yes to clear all data from the existing DTF Cable
table and reset header information to default settings
—Then Edit Cable to open the Cable Editor
— Then use the arrows to select a field
— When editing Cable Description information press Edit then modify
the selected field using the FieldFox labeler
— When editing FrequencyLoss pairs enter numbers using the
numeric keypad then select a frequency suffix Then Enter Learn
more about How the FreqLoss pairs are applied below
— Optionally choose from the following
— Previous Next Page Quickly scrolls through pages of FreqLoss
data
— Add Data Add a blank FreqLoss pair to the tableKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 67
DTF (Distance to Fault) Measurements
DTF Measurement Settings
— DeleteClear then
— Delete Row Remove the selected FreqLoss pair from the table
— Clear All then Yes Remove all FreqLoss pairs from the table and
resets header information
—Press Done to close the Cable Editor
How to Save or Recall a Cable
—Press Save Cable to saves your changes to the specified Storage Device
Enter a filename using the FieldFox labeler (learn more on How to use the
FieldFox labeler on page 546) Learn more about Cable files below
—Press Recall Cable to load a Cable file from the specified Storage Device
— Storage Device Changes the device used to save or recall Cable files This
is a different setting from the SaveRecall Storage Device setting Choose
from Internal (default setting) USB (must be connected) or SD card
About Cable files
— Cable files are saved to and recalled from the Cables folder If the folder
does not already exist on a USB or SD card it is created automatically
before storing the file
— Cable files are stored as *xml files Existing cable files that are preloaded
into the FieldFox firmware can be overwritten Your edited file will NOT be
overwritten when firmware is updated
—To DELETE a Cable file use the Manage Files feature Learn more in
Manage Files on page 552
How the FreqLoss pairs are applied
When the cable file contains one FreqLoss pair that correction value is
applied to the entire displayed frequency span
When the cable file contains two or more FreqLoss pairs the Loss value that is
used is interpolated from the FreqLoss pairs and the DTF center frequency
For example using a cable file with the following FreqLoss pairs
1 GHz 01 dBm
2 GHz 02 dBm 68 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
DTF (Distance to Fault) Measurements
DTF Measurement Settings
The center frequency for the measurement is determined from the
calculated (Stop – Start) frequency values (seen on the second page of
DTF Settings)
The Loss value for the measurement is interpolated from the FreqLoss pairs at
the Center Freq
The correction for loss at 5 meters in one direction 018 dBm * 5m 09 dB
All DTF measurements correct for loss for travel down the DUT and back so
double the correction 09 dB * 2 18 dB
Window Settings
Window settings provide the ability to choose between optimizing DTF
measurements for resolving closelyspaced faults or for the ability to measure
lowlevel faults
How to select Window settings
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Settings
— Then press arrows to move to the Window row
—Then press Edit
—Then press Window and choose from the following
— Maximum (Maximum – Optimized for dynamic range) the noise floor
is lowered to provide the ability to measure lowlevel responses
(Default setting)
— Medium – Compromise between Minimumand Maximum window
settings
— Minimum – Best Response Resolution providing the ability to resolve
between two closelyspaced responses
—Then press Done Edit
—Again press Done
Calculated Start 20 MHz
Calculated Stop 3598 GHz
Center Freq 180 GHz
1 GHz 01 dBm
18 GHz 018 dBm
2 GHz 02 dBmKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 69
DTF (Distance to Fault) Measurements
DTF Measurement Settings
DTF Units
The DTF Units setting is available ONLY on the DTF Settings table
By default Xaxis units for DTF measurement settings are displayed in Meters
How to change DTF units
— With a DTF measurement present press FreqDist
—Then More then Distance Unit m feet
— The current selection is underlined m (meters) Feet
Calculated DTF values
Press Next Page on the DTF Settings Table to view the following calculated
Values noted on the FieldFox screen with c
Start Frequency – Start frequency that is used to calculate DTF
Stop Frequency – Stop frequency that is used to calculate DTF
Range Resolution Indicates the accuracy of the distance to fault
measurement For example with range resolution of 500 mm if the distance to
fault is 10 meters this value could be inaccurate by + 500 mm or between
95 to 105 meters This value is calculated from frequency span resolution
(points)
Response Resolution not displayed indicates the distance that could be
between two faults and still show as separate faults Learn more in Window
Settings on page 68
Maximum Distance The distance that could be viewed with the current
settings Defined by Vf*c*Points(2*Bandwidth) where
— Vf velocity factor
— c speed of light
— Points resolution
— Bandwidth frequency range
Aliasfree Range (OnOff)
—On No Alias images
— Off Alias images may appear in the response
About Alias Faults
An alias fault is not a true device response An alias fault appears because of
the method used to convert frequency to time
On the DTF Settings page (above) the c Aliasfree Range Off setting
indicates alias images MAY appear on the screen 70 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
DTF (Distance to Fault) Measurements
DTF Measurement Settings
Shorter stop distances (less than 10 meters) and a higher resolution (1001
points) will be more likely to result in Aliasfree Range Off
When the Aliasfree Range Off the following procedure will help to
determine if a response is true or an alias response
1 Put a marker on the response in question and note the distance to the
fault
2 Change the start or stop distance
A true fault response will not move in distance That is if a true fault is present
at 103 meters changing the stop distance from 15 m to 20 m will not move
the fault the fault will remain at 103 meters However an alias response will
appear to move
An unterminated cable (with NO perfect load at the end) will show faults that
appear to be beyond the end of the cable These are NOT alias faults These
faults appear as the signal reflects off the open at the end of the cable and
travels back down the cable toward the connection at the FieldFox
Rereflections are measured at the FieldFox as mirror images of the original
faults The largest fault is the open end of the cable To avoid confusion set
the Stop distance shortly after that fault 71
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
5 TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) Option 215
CAT Mode Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) measurements are generally
used to locate problems and identify the type of problem in a length of cable
or transmission line
Settings that are NOT unique to TDR measurements are documented in
Chapter 3 CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode on page 45
In this chapter the cable to be tested is referred to as the DUT (Device Under
Test)
In this Chapter
TDR Measurement (Format) on page 74
TDR Settings Table on page 74
TDR Start and Stop Distance on page 75
TDR Sweep on page 75 72 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) Option 215
Optional Settings
How to make TDR Measurements
Before starting you may need the following
— Jumper cable or adapter to connect the beginning of the DUT to the
FieldFox
— LOAD with correct connector type and gender to terminate the end of the
DUT (if possible)
— The known length and cable type of the DUT If the cable type is not known
then the Cable Loss (dBMeter) and Velocity Factor of the DUT are required
1 Connect any necessary jumper cable or adapter to the FieldFox RF
OUT port Do NOT connect the DUT
2 Press Preset then Preset to return the FieldFox to the default settings
3 Then Mode then CATTDR
4 Then Meas 1 then More then DTF (Lin) or TDR (Lin rho) or (ohm)
5 Press FreqDist then Stop Distance and enter the length of the DUT You
can optionally set the Start Distance
6 Press Cal 5 and follow the Cal prompts Learn all about Calibration in
How to Perform a Calibration on page 123
7 Disconnect any components or antenna that should NOT be measured and
connect a LOAD at the end of the DUT
8 Press Meas Setup 4 then DTF Cable Specifications
Frequency Mode on page 76
Cable (Correction) Specifications on page 77
Window Settings on page 80
TDR Units on page 81
Calculated TDR values on page 81
About Alias Faults on page 82
How to Prevent Undersampling on page 83
All about Markers on page 484
All about Limit Lines on page 499
Saving and Recalling Files on page 544
Trace Math is NOT available in DTF MeasurementsKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 73
TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) Option 215
9 Either press EditSaveRecall Cables then Recall Cable or directly enter
the Velocity FactorCable Loss of the DUT using the Velocity Factor and
Cable Loss keys
10 Connect the start end of the DUT to the FieldFox
11 Press Meas Setup 4 then Settings then Next Page If the Aliasfree Range
setting is Off then you may see Alias faults on the screen Learn more in
About Alias Faults on page 82 74 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) Option 215
TDR Measurement Settings
TDR Measurement Settings
Select CAT Mode then TDR before making any setting in this chapter
How to select CAT Mode
—Press Mode
—Then CATTDR
TDR Measurement (Format)
You can select from 3 different TDR Formats
—Press Measure 1
—Then More
— Then choose from
— TDR (Lin rho) The Yaxis of the display is linear real unitless values
A trace without reflections shows as 0 (zero) Maximum reflections
from an open or short show as 1
— TDR (ohm) The Yaxis of the display is impedance (ohms)m
— DTF (Lin) The Yaxis of the display is linear real unitless values
XAxis displays distance to fault in meters
— TDR & DTF TDR and DTF are displayed
TDR Settings Table
You can set and view all of the TDR settings including some calculated values
on the TDR Settings table Learn more in Calculated TDR values on page 81
How to make settings on the TDR settings table
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Settings
—Press Next Page and Previous Page to view all settings
— To change a setting
— Use the arrows or rotary knob to highlight a setting
— Numeric settings can be changed by pressing numbers using the
numeric keypad Then press Enter or select a suffix if available
— Other settings require you to press Edit then press a softkey to
change the value
— When finished changing a value press Done EditKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 75
TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) Option 215
TDR Measurement Settings
—Press Dock Window to relocate the Settings table to a position relative to
the trace window The setting persists through a Preset Choose from the
following
— Full (Default setting) Only the Settings table is shown on the screen
The trace window is temporarily not shown
— Left The Settings table is shown to the left of the trace window
— Bottom The Settings table is shown below the trace window
— When finished changing ALL settings press Done to save your settings
The following TDR settings are available ONLY on the settings table
Mkr Format – The format of marker readout Choose from
— Z Magnitude – Impedance (magnitude only)
— Default – The current TDR measurement format
Auto Max Freq – When TDR Sweep is set to Auto this is the maximum stop
frequency of the measurement The minimum value of this setting is 100 MHz
TDR Start and Stop Distance
In TDR measurements you set the physical length of the DUT The FieldFox
calculates the frequency range of the measurement from this distance The
longer the DUT the lower the frequencies that are used
You can NOT set the frequencies manually in TDR However you CAN limit the
maximum frequency using the TDR Sweep setting Learn more in TDR Sweep
on page 75
How to set Start and Stop Distance
— With a TDR measurement present press FreqDist
— Then choose from the following
— Start Distance Enter a value using the numeric keypad the
arrows or the rotary knob then Enter By default the Start Distance
is set to 0 Meters This means that the measurement will display
faults starting at the point at which calibration standards are
connected
— Stop Distance Enter a value between the start distance and 5 km (or
16404 ft) using the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary
knob then Enter
TDR Sweep
This setting allows you to choose the method by which the Stop Frequency and
Resolution are set 76 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) Option 215
TDR Measurement Settings
—Press Sweep 3
—Then TDR Sweep
— Choose one of the following
— Auto Low pass frequency settings are calculated based on the
current number of points The Stop Frequency and Resolution
settings can be changed to any value
——To set Stop Frequency press Meas 4 then Settings then
scroll to Auto Max Freq
——To set Resolution press Sweep 3 then Resolution
— Cable Provides a higher resolution measurement Use when
undersampling is suspected The Stop Frequency is limited to 500
MHz maximum The Resolution is fixed to 1601
Frequency Mode
All TDR measurements are made with frequency settings and using Inverse
Fourier Transform (IFT) the time and distance to faults are calculated
How to set Frequency Mode
With a TDR measurement present
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Freq Mode
— Choose one of the following
— Lowpass The frequency range of a TDR measurement is set
automatically based on the Start and Stop Distances Use Lowpass
mode when the DUT is a cable ONLY
— Bandpass This setting changes the measurement to DTF Bandpass
is NOT ALLOWED with TDR because the DC component is required
for TDR measurements
Because of its greater measurement accuracy Cable is the default setting
in CPU1 units with firmware A0818 and greater and CPU2 units with
firmware A0957 and greater Refer to Preferences on page 515
The start and stop frequencies for the measurement are always annotated
on the screen below the start and stop distancesKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 77
TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) Option 215
TDR Measurement Settings
Cable (Correction) Specifications
By default the FieldFox does NOT correct TDR measurements to account for
the inherent loss of a cable However to make more accurate TDR
measurements the Cable Loss and Velocity Factor values should be
considered
About Velocity Factor and Cable Loss
— Velocity Factor is a property of the physical material of a cable A VF of 10
corresponds to the speed of light in a vacuum or the fastest VF possible A
polyethylene dielectric cable has VF 066 and a cable with PTFE dielectric
has VF 07
— Cable Loss is specified in dBmeter In addition to the length of the cable
loss is also directly proportional to the frequency of the signal that passes
through the cable
The following is an example showing how DTF cable correction works
The DUT is a 100 meter transmission cable The Cable Loss value is 01
dBmeter This means that a signal traveling ONE WAY through the cable will
lose 10 dB of power (100 m * 1dBm) Because the FieldFox performs this
measurement with 1 port the test signal travels down the cable and then back
for a total loss of 20 dB
After a calibration has been performed for the purpose of illustrating this
point connect an OPEN to the end of the cable – a maximumsized fault for
100 reflection of the 300 MHz test signal
Without compensation for the loss of the cable a –20 dB response would be
visible at 100 meters which is the OPEN at the end of the DUT This is from 10
dB of loss through the cable in each direction
With compensation for the loss using the manufacturer’s specification the
FieldFox compensates the trace as though the signal traveling through 100
meters was increased by +20 dB Therefore the response will show 0 dB for
100 reflection
How to enter Cable Loss and Velocity Factor
Cable Loss and Velocity factor can be entered using one of the following
methods
— Manually enter cable loss and velocity factor for the measurement
— Select or create a cable file which contains the cable loss and velocity
factor
With a TDR measurement present
—Press Meas Setup 4
The following describes Coax Media type Waveguide Media can NOT be
measured with TDR as waveguide is inherently a high pass device 78 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) Option 215
TDR Measurement Settings
—Then DTF Cable Specifications
— Select Cable Corr
— Auto Use Cable Loss and Velocity Factor values from a Cable file See
How to Edit Save and Recall a Cable File below This will overwrite
a manuallyentered value
— Man (Default setting) Manually enter a value for Cable Loss and
Velocity Factor
—Then
— Velocity Factor Using the numeric keypad enter a value between
001 and 1 Then press Enter
— Cable Loss Using the numeric keypad enter a positive Cable Loss
value in dBm then press Enter
How to Edit a Cable File
The FieldFox includes many predefined cable files with the manufacturer’s
specifications You can edit these files or create new cable files using the
following procedure or using the FieldFox Data Link Software
The Cable correction data survives a Mode Preset and Preset
With a TDR measurement present
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then DTF Cable Specifications
—Then EditSaveRecall Cables
—Press New Cable then Yes to clear all data from the existing DTF Cable
table and reset header information to default settings
—Then Edit Cable to open the Cable Editor
— Then use the arrows to select a field
— When editing Cable Description information press Edit then modify
the selected field using the FieldFox labeler
— When editing FrequencyLoss pairs enter numbers using the
numeric keypad then select a frequency suffix Then Enter Learn
more about How the FreqLoss pairs are applied below
— Optionally choose from the following
— Previous Next Page Quickly scrolls through pages of FreqLoss
data
— Add Data Add a blank FreqLoss pair to the table
— DeleteClear then
— Delete Row Remove the selected FreqLoss pair from the table Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 79
TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) Option 215
TDR Measurement Settings
— Clear All then Yes Remove all FreqLoss pairs from the table and
resets header information
— Press Done to close the Cable Editor
How to Save or Recall a Cable
—Press Save Cable to save your changes to the specified Storage Device
Enter a filename using the FieldFox labeler (see How to use the FieldFox
labeler on page 546 Learn more about Cable files below
—Press Recall Cable to load a Cable file from the specified Storage Device
— Storage Device Changes the device used to save or recall Cable files This
is a different setting from the SaveRecall Storage Device setting Choose
from Internal (default setting) USB (must be connected) or SD card
About Cable files
— Cable files are saved to and recalled from the Cables folder If the folder
does not already exist on a USB or SD card it is created automatically
before storing the file
— Cable files are stored as *xml files Existing cable files that are preloaded
into the FieldFox firmware can be overwritten Your edited file will NOT be
overwritten when firmware is updated
—To DELETE a Cable file use the Manage Files feature Learn more in
Manage Files on page 552
How the FreqLoss pairs are applied
When the cable file contains one FreqLoss pair that correction value is
applied to the entire displayed frequency span
When the cable file contains two or more FreqLoss pairs the Loss value that is
used is interpolated from the FreqLoss pairs and the TDR center frequency
For example using a cable file with the following FreqLoss pairs
The center frequency for the measurement is determined from the calculated
(Stop – Start) frequency values (seen on the second page of TDR Settings)
1 GHz 01 dBm
2 GHz 02 dBm
Calculated Start 20 MHz
Calculated Stop 3598 GHz
Center Freq 180 GHz 80 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) Option 215
TDR Measurement Settings
The Loss value for the measurement is interpolated from the FreqLoss pairs at
the Center Freq
The correction for loss at 5 meters in one direction 018 dBm * 5m 09 dB
All TDR measurements correct for loss for travel down the DUT and back so
double the correction 09 dB * 2 18 dB
Window Settings
Window settings provide the ability to choose between optimizing TDR
measurements for resolving closelyspaced faults or for the ability to measure
lowlevel faults
How to select Window settings
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Settings
— Then press arrows to move to the Window row
—Then press Edit
—Then press Window and choose from the following
— Maximum (Maximum – Optimized for dynamic range) the noise floor
is lowered to provide the ability to measure lowlevel responses
(Default setting)
— Medium – Compromise between Min and Max window settings
— Minimum – Best Response Resolution providing the ability to resolve
between two closelyspaced responses
—Then press Done Edit
—Again press Done
1 GHz 01 dBm
18 GHz 018 dBm
2 GHz 02 dBmKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 81
TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) Option 215
TDR Measurement Settings
Network Analyzer Windows Frequency Span and TDR Window
Selection for Step Rise Time (Approximated)
The following table shows the approximated relationship between the
frequency span and the window selection for impulse width and step rise time
Refer to Figure 51 on page 81
Figure 51 Network Analyzer TDR Rise Time
TDR Units
By default Xaxis units for TDR measurement settings are displayed in Meters
How to change TDR units
— With a TDR measurement present press FreqDist
—Then More then Distance Unit m feet
— The current selection is underlined m (meters) Feet
The TDR Units setting is also available on the TDR Settings table
Calculated TDR values
Press Next Page on the TDR Settings Table to view the following calculated
Values noted on the FieldFox screen with c
Window Lowpass step
(10 to 90)
Lowpass impulse Bandpass impulse
Minimum 045 f span 060 f span 120 f span
Medium 099 f span 098 f span 195 f span
Maximum 148 f span 139 f span 277 f span 82 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) Option 215
TDR Measurement Settings
Start Frequency – Start frequency that is used to calculate TDR
Stop Frequency – Stop frequency that is used to calculate TDR
Range Resolution Indicates the accuracy of the distance to fault
measurement For example with range resolution of 500 mm if the distance to
fault is 10 meters this value could be inaccurate by + 500 mm or between
95 to 105 meters This value is calculated from frequency span resolution
(points)
Response Resolution not displayed indicates the distance that could be
between two faults and still show as separate faults Learn more in Window
Settings in Window Settings on page 80
Maximum Distance The distance that could be viewed with the current
settings Defined by Vf*c*Points(2*Bandwidth) where
— Vf velocity factor
— c speed of light
— Points resolution
— Bandwidth frequency range
Aliasfree Range (OnOff)
—On No Alias images
— Off Alias images may appear in the response
About Alias Faults
An alias fault is not a true device response An alias fault appears because of
the method used to convert frequency to time
On the TDR Settings page (above) the c Aliasfree Range Off setting
indicates alias images MAY appear on the screen
Shorter stop distances (less than 10 meters) and a higher resolution (1001
points) will be more likely to result in Aliasfree Range Off
When the Aliasfree Range Off the following procedure will help to
determine if a response is true or an alias response
1 Put a marker on the response in question and note the distance to the
fault
2 Change the start or stop distance
A true fault response will not move in distance That is if a true fault is present
at 103 meters changing the stop distance from 15 m to 20 m will not move
the fault the fault will remain at 103 meters However an alias response will
appear to moveKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 83
TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) Option 215
TDR Measurement Settings
An unterminated cable (with NO perfect load at the end) will show faults that
appear to be beyond the end of the cable These are NOT alias faults These
faults appear as the signal reflects off the open at the end of the cable and
travels back down the cable toward the connection at the FieldFox
Rereflections are measured at the FieldFox as mirror images of the original
faults The largest fault is the open end of the cable To avoid confusion set
the Stop distance shortly after that fault
How to Prevent Undersampling
Undersampling is when the TDR measurement is inaccurate because the
frequency step size (resolution) is too large The predominant symptom of this
is when the measured impedance is incorrect For example when measuring a
75Ω cable a marker that is on a part of the trace without reflections shows
56Ω
To prevent undersampling set TDR Sweep to Cable If undersampling still
occurs set TDR Sweep to Auto Then set Auto Max Frequency to a lower
value Manually increase the Resolution so that the Start Frequency setting is
less than about 500 kHz 84 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry) Option 215
TDR Measurement Settings 85
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
6 NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
Learn more about NA Mode measurements in the FieldFox Supplemental
Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm
In this Chapter
About Sparameters on page 87
MixedMode SParameters on page 88
Parameter Conversion on page 89
Receiver Measurements on page 90
MultiTrace Configurations on page 91
Quick Settings on page 92
Calibration Settings on page 93
Format on page 94
Frequency Range on page 95
Scale Settings on page 95
Magnitude Offset on page 96
Electrical Delay on page 97
Phase Offset on page 97
Averaging on page 98
IF Bandwidth on page 99
Smoothing on page 99
Single or Continuous Measure on page 100
Resolution (Number of Data Points) on page 100
Sweep Time on page 101
Output Power on page 102
System Impedance (Z0) on page 103 86 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
See Also
Port Extensions on page 103
Velocity Factor on page 104
Increase Dynamic Range on page 107
Why and When to Calibrate on page 122
All about Markers on page 484
All about Limit Lines on page 499
All about Trace Math on page 504
Learn how to make 75Ω (ohm) Measurements in the
Supplemental Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHel
pFieldFoxhtmKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 87
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
NA Mode Settings
Select NA Mode before making any setting in this chapter
How to select NA Mode
—Press Mode_
—Then NA
About Sparameters
Sparameters (scattering parameters) are used to describe the way a device
modifies a signal The FieldFox can measure four Sparameters The syntax for
each parameter is described by the following
S (out | in)
out FieldFox receiver port
in FieldFox source port
The FieldFox automatically switches the internal source and receivers to make
both forward and reverse measurements Therefore the FieldFox can measure
all four Sparameters with a single connection
When the source comes from port 1 the measurement is said to be in the
forward direction
When the source comes from port 2 the measurement is said to be in the
reverse direction
S11 and S22 reflection measurements are used to measure the amount of
reflections off the corresponding DUT port Low reflections means there is a
good impedance match between the source and DUT 88 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
S21 and S12 transmission measurements are used to measure the loss or gain
through a DUT over a specified frequency range Both ends of the DUT must be
connected to the FieldFox The FieldFox signal source is transmitted out one of
the test port connectors through the DUT and into the other test port
connector
How to measure Sparameters
1 Press Preset then Mode Preset (Factory)
2 Press Measure 1 then choose from the following
— S11 Reflection measurement at port 1
— S21 Forward 2port transmission measurement
— S12 Reverse 2port transmission measurement May require an
option
— S22 Reflection measurement at port 2 May require an option
OR select a multitrace configuration Learn more on MultiTrace
Configurations on page 91
3 Press FreqDist then either Start and Stop or Center and Span to enter a
Frequency Range for the measurement
4 Press BW 2 then IFBW to select the IF Bandwidth for the measurement
Narrower bandwidths require more time to sweep but lowers trace noise
5 Press Sweep 3 then Resolution to select the number of data points for the
measurement More data points require more time to sweep
6 Press Cal 5 to calibrate the measurement Learn more in How to Perform
a Calibration on page 123
7 All other settings can be made AFTER calibration without compromising
measurement accuracy
MixedMode SParameters
In NA Mode ONLY mixedmode Sparameters (also known as Balanced
measurements) are available with Option 212
Because the FieldFox has only two test ports only reflection measurements are
available Connect the balanced input or output of your DUT to the FieldFox
ports 1 and 2
For highest accuracy a Full 2port calibration is requiredKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 89
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
All FieldFox settings and features are supported (except Parameter Conversion)
with mixedmode Sparameters
How to make mixedmode Sparameter measurements
—Press Measure 1
—Then More
— Then choose from the following
— Scc11 Common reflectcommon incident for logical port 1
— Sdd11 Differential reflectdifferential incident for logical port 1
— Sdc11 Differential reflectcommon incident for logical port 1
— Scd11 Common reflectdifferential incident for logical port 1
To make balanced reflection measurements at the DUT output connect the
DUT output to the FieldFox ports
Parameter Conversion
In NA Mode ONLY converts the active Sparameter trace to an equivalent
impedance (Z) admittance (Y) or reciprocal 1Sparameter
How to select parameter conversions
—Press Measure 1
—Then select an Sparameter
—Then More
—Then Conversion
— Then choose from the following
—Off (default) No conversion is performed
—Z Conv () or Y Conv () Perform conversion for impedance (Z) or
admittance (Y) Then choose from the following for either
——Auto The displayed Sparameter is converted to the
appropriate Z or Y parameter Refl for S11 and S22 Trans for
S21 and S12 When the Sparameter is changed the
appropriate conversion changes automatically
——Refl The displayed Sparameter is converted to Z or Y
reflection regardless of whether the Sparameter is reflection
(S11 or S22) or transmission (S21 or S12)
Learn more about Balanced Measurements with the FieldFox in the
FieldFox Supplemental Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm 90 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
——Trans The displayed Sparameter is converted to Z or Y
transmission regardless of whether the Sparameter is
reflection (S11 or S22) or transmission (S21 or S12)
—11S The displayed Sparameter is converted to 1Sparameter
Receiver Measurements
In NA Mode ONLY you can make unratioed uncorrected receiver
measurements These measurements are typically used as diagnostic tools for
service personnel
How to make receiver measurements
—Press Measure 1
—Then More then Advanced
— Then choose from the following
—Auto The FieldFox sets the source port based on the selected receiver
—Port 1 Select when measuring transmission at B receiver
—Port 2 Select when measuring reverse transmission at A receiver
Learn more about Raw Receiver Measurements at the FieldFox Supplemental
Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm
Receiver measurements are NOT corrected for absolute power They are
only useful for making relative measurements The YAxis and markers are
labeled in dB NOT dBm Specifically R1 and R2 do NOT indicate the
actual power levels out of the source ports
A Port1 test port (*1) B Port2 test port (*2)
R1 Port1 reference receiver (*1) R2 Port2 reference receiver (*2)
(*) indicates the Autoselected source port for the measurement
Source Port The FieldFox port to provide the source signal Choose from the
followingKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 91
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
MultiTrace Configurations
In NA Mode you can display multiple traces on the FieldFox screen
The graphic above shows a x3H configuration Tr2 is the ACTIVE trace as
indicated by the highlighted Tr2
Trace Setting Notes
— The Frequency Range IF BW Resolution Average and Output Power
settings are common for all displayed traces
— All other trace settings such as measurement format and limit lines are
applied individually to the ACTIVE trace in the same manner as when a
single trace is present
— By default a marker is created on ALL traces However they can be created
individually by disabling Coupled Markers Learn more in Coupled Markers
(NA Mode) on page 487
IMPORTANT For CAT and NA modes limit lines do not apply
where F1 F2 92 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
How to select a multitrace configuration
—Press Trace 6
—Then Num of Traces
— Then choose from the following
The default measurements depend on the options that are installed
How to activate a trace in order to change a setting
—Use the arrows OR
—Press Trace 6 then select Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 or Trace 4 Only traces
that are shown can be activated
How to maximize the viewing of the active trace
—Press System 7
—Then Full Screen
— Press any key to return to the standard display
Quick Settings
Both CAT and NA Modes allow you to view and change most relevant settings
from a single location All of these settings are discussed in this chapter and
unless otherwise noted ALL of these settings can also be made using the
standard softkey menus
x1 1 trace standard configuration
x2 2 traces overlayed on a single graticule
x2H 2 traces on separate graticules
x3H 3 traces on separate graticules
x3 3 traces overlayed on a single graticule
x4 4 traces overlayed on a single graticule
x4H 4 traces on separate graticulesKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 93
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
How to view and change Quick Settings
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Settings
—Press Next Page and Previous Page to view all settings If these softkeys
are NOT available then all available settings fit on one page
— To change a setting
—Use the arrows to highlight a setting
—Then press Edit The current setting changes to yellow
—Some settings require you to press a softkey to change the value
Otherwise use the numeric keypad arrows or rotary knob to
change the value
—When finished changing a value press Done Edit
—Press Dock Window to relocate the Settings table to a position relative to
the trace window The Dock Window setting persists through a Preset
Choose from the following
—Full (Default setting) Only the Settings table is shown on the screen
The trace window is temporarily not shown
—Left The Settings table is shown to the left of the trace window
—Bottom The Settings table is shown below the trace window
When finished changing ALL settings press Done to save your settings
Calibration Settings
NA Mode has a page specifically for making settings that pertain to Port
Extensions including Velocity Factor and Media Type
Learn more in Port Extensions on page 103
Learn more about Media Type in Waveguide Calibrations on page 137
How to view and change Calibration Settings
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Calibration Settings
— Make these settings in the same manner as Quick Settings in the previous
section 94 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
Format
Select the display format in which to present measurement results This setting
can be changed at any time without affecting calibration accuracy
The marker on screen readout can be changed to formats other than the
display format Learn more in Marker Format on page 489
How to select a NA Format
—Press Measure 1
—Then Format [current setting]
— Then choose from the following
—Log Magnitude Displays magnitude in dB
—Linear Displays positive values only Yaxis Unitless (U) for ratioed
measurements Watts (W) for unratioed measurements
—VSWR Used mainly for S11 and S22 Displays unitless reflection data
—Phase Displays phase in degrees The trace wraps’ every 360 degrees
from +180 to –180 for easy scaling
—Smith Used mainly for S11 and S22 which are plotted on a Smith
Chart Displays series resistance and reactance
— More then…
—Polar Used mainly for S11 and S22 Displays magnitude and phase
of the reflection coefficient
— Group Delay Used mainly for S21 and S12 Displays signal
transmission (propagation) time through a device in seconds The
Group Delay aperture is the current Smoothing aperture Default is
15 of the Xaxis
——Learn how to set Smoothing aperture on Smoothing on
page 99
——Learn more about Group Delay measurements at the FieldFox
Supplemental Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldF
oxhtm
—Real Displays only the real (resistive) portion of the measured complex
data The Yaxis is Unitless Often used for Time Domain
measurements
Learn more about Display Formats in the FieldFox Supplemental Online
Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtmKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 95
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
—Imaginary Displays only the reactive portion of the measured complex
data The Yaxis is Unitless
—Z Magnitude Displays the effective impedance in ohms
—Unwrap Phase Same as Phase but without 180 degree wrapping
Frequency Range
Set the range of frequencies over which you would like to make measurements
When the frequency range is changed after a calibration is performed the cal
becomes interpolated Learn more in Interpolation * on page 140
How to set Frequency Range
This can be done in two ways
—Press FreqDist
— Then choose from the following
— Start and Stop frequencies – Specify the beginning and end of the
sweep
— Center and Span frequencies Specify the center frequency and
span of frequencies (half on either side of center)
— Follow each by entering a value using the numeric keypad the arrows
or the rotary knob
— After using the arrows or the rotary knob press Enter The increment
setting of the arrows is based on the current span and can NOT be changed
in NA Mode
— After using the keypad select a multiplier key Learn more in Multiplier
Abbreviations on page 43
Scale Settings
Adjust the Yaxis scale to see the relevant portions of the data trace The Yaxis
is divided into 10 graticules
This setting can be changed at any time without affecting calibration accuracy
Phase is unwrapped by comparing the phase from one data point to the
next If the phase difference between two data points is greater than 180
degrees or if the phase of the first data point is greater than 180 degrees
from DC than the phase measurement is probably NOT accurate To
ensure that the phase measurement is accurate increase the resolution
setting When making a narrow band measurement reduce the start
frequency for the unwrapped phase measurement to ensure the first data
point is less than 180 degrees from DC 96 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
How to set Scale
—Press Scale Amptd
— Then choose from the following method
—Autoscale Automatically adjusts the Yaxis to comfortably fit the
Minimum and Maximum amplitude of the trace on the screen
—Autoscale All Autoscales all of the traces on the screen useful only for
multitrace configurations
—3Set Scale acquisition and Reference Position
——Scale Manually enter a scale per division to view specific areas
of the trace
——Ref Level Manually set the value of the reference line Enter a
negative value by pressing RunHold (+) either before or
after typing a value
——Ref Pos Manually set the position of the reference line Values
must be between 0 (TOP line) and 10 (BOTTOM line)
Magnitude Offset
Magnitude Offset allows you to offset the magnitude (not phase) data by a
fixed and or sloped value in dB If the display format is Linear Magnitude or
Real (unitless) the conversion from dB is performed and the correct amount of
offset is implemented
The Magnitude offset setting affects only the active trace
How to set Magnitude Offset
—Press Scale Amptd
—Then More
—Then Magnitude Offset Offsets the entire data trace by the specified
value
Scale annotation on the FieldFox screen
—Reference Line red arrow
—Ref Level –40 dB
—Ref Position 1
—Scale 2 dB per divisionKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 97
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
—Then enter a positive or negative offset value in dB using the numeric
keypad the arrows or the rotary knob Press a multiplier key
Learn about multiplier abbreviations
—Andor press Slope Offsets the data trace by a value that changes linearly
with frequency The offset slope begins at 0 Hz and continues to the stop
frequency The offset value at the start frequency is then calculated from 0
Hz
—Then enter a positive or negative offset slope value in dBGHz using
the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary knob Press a
multiplier key Learn about multiplier abbreviations in Multiplier
Abbreviations on page 43
Electrical Delay
Electrical delay is a mathematical function that simulates a variable length of
lossless transmission line Use the electrical delay feature to compensate for
the linear phase shift through a device and view only the deviation from linear
phase of the device
You can set the electrical delay independently for each measurement trace To
apply an electrical delay to all measurement traces use Port Extensions Learn
how in Port Extensions on page 103
Learn how to set Phase formats in Phase Offset on page 97
How to set Electrical Delay
—Press Scale Amptd
—Then More
—Then Electrical Delay
— Enter a time value using the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary
knob
— Press a multiplier key Learn about multiplier abbreviations in Multiplier
Abbreviations on page 43
Electrical Delay can also be set using the Mkr>Delay feature Learn how on
Marker Functions on page 497
Phase Offset
Phase offset mathematically adjusts the phase measurement by a specified
amount up to 360° Use this feature in the following ways
Improve the display of a phase measurement This is similar to the way you
would change the acquisition in an amplitude measurement Change the
phase response to center or the response on the screen 98 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
Emulate a projected phase shift in your measurement For example if you
know that you need to add a cable and that the length of that cable will add a
certain phase shift to your measurement you can use phase offset to add that
amount and simulate the complete device measurement
You can set the phase offset independently for each measurement trace
How to set Phase Offset
—Press Scale Amptd
—Then More
—Then Phase Offset
— Enter a value in degrees using the numeric keypad the arrows or the
rotary knob Press Enter
Averaging
Averaging helps to reduce the effects of random noise on a measurement You
specify the number of measurements to be averaged The more measurements
averaged the greater the amount of noise reduction An average counter is
shown in the left edge of the screen as Avg where is the number of
measurements that are averaged
Averaging can be set before or after calibration When set before calibration
each calibration standard is measured times and averaged More time is
needed to perform the calibration but there will be less noise in the resulting
error terms which means that subsequent measurements will also have less
noise In addition noise is further reduced by continuing to average after
calibration
How to set Averaging
—Press BW 2
—Then Average where is the number of measurements to average
— Enter a value using the numeric keypad Enter 1 for NO averaging
—Press Enter
—Then Average Mode Choose from the following
—Sweep Each data point is based on the average of the same data
point being measured over consecutive sweeps The average
counter shows the number of previous sweeps that have been
averaged together to form the current trace When the counter
reaches the specified count then a running average’ of the last
sweeps is displayedKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 99
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
—Point Each data point is measured times and averaged before
going to the next data point On subsequent sweeps averaging
restarts by measuring each data point again times The average
counter is not updated because data is not displayed until all the
averages have been applied
—Point averaging is usually faster than sweep averaging However you
may need to increase the Point Average count to obtain the same
level of noise reduction as with sweep averaging
— While averaging is in process press Sweep 3 then Restart to restart the
averaging at 1
IF Bandwidth
The FieldFox converts the received signal from its source to a lower
intermediate frequency (IF) The bandwidth of the IF bandpass filter is
adjustable Reducing the IF receiver bandwidth reduces the effect of random
noise on a measurement However narrower IF bandwidths cause longer
sweep times
How to set IF BW
— Press BW 2
—Then IF BW
— Then choose from the following
— 10 Hz | 100 Hz | 1 kHz | 10 kHz | 100 kHz
More 30 Hz | 300 Hz | 3 kHz | 30 kHz
Smoothing
Trace smoothing averages a number of adjacent data points to smooth the
peaktopeak noise values on a displayed trace The number of adjacent data
points that are averaged is known as the smoothing aperture Aperture is set
by specifying a percentage of the Xaxis span
Trace smoothing does NOT significantly increase measurement time
Smoothing is used in Group Delay measurements although it can be used with
any NA formatEXCEPT Polar or Smith Chart Learn more about NA Mode
formats including Group Delay in Format on page 94
When enabled Smo appears on the FieldFox screen
How to set Smoothing
— Press BW 2
—Then Smoothing ON OFF
—Then Sm Aperture and enter a value between 0 and 25 (percent) using the
numeric keypad 100 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
—Press Enter
Single or Continuous Measure
This setting determines whether the FieldFox sweeps continuously or only once
each time the Single button is pressed Use Single to conserve battery power
or to allow you to save or analyze a specific measurement trace
This setting can be changed at any time without affecting calibration accuracy
How to set Single or Continuous
—Press Sweep 3
— Then choose one of the following
— Single Automatically sets Continuous OFF and causes FieldFox to
make ONE sweep then hold for the next Single key press Hold is
annotated in the upper left corner of the display when NOT sweeping
and changes to an arrow > while the sweep occurs
— Continuous Makes continuous sweeps This is the typical setting
when battery power is not critical
— You can also use Run Hold + to toggle between Single and Continuous
Resolution (Number of Data Points)
Data points are individual measurements that are made and plotted across the
Xaxis to form a trace Select more data points to increase measurement
resolution However more data points also takes more time to complete an
entire measurement sweep
When the Resolution is changed after a calibration is performed the cal
becomes interpolated Learn more in Interpolation * on page 140
How to set Resolution
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Resolution
— Then choose from the following
101 |201 | 401 | 601 | 801 | 1001 | 1601 | 4001 | 10001
— Using SCPI Resolution can be set to ANY number of points between 3 and
10001 See the Programming Guide at
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpProgrammingwebhelpFFP
rogrammingHelphtmKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 101
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
Sweep Time
The fastest possible sweep time is always used as the default setting Use the
Min Swp Time setting to slow the sweep time when measuring long lengths of
cable Learn more at the FieldFox Supplemental Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm
The actual sweep time is shown on the FieldFox screen See the Screen Tour
on Screen Tour on page 41 To increase the sweep time enter a value that is
higher than the actual sweep time The increase will not be exactly the amount
that you enter as the actual sweep time is the composite of many factors
How to set Sweep Time
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Min Swp Time
— Enter a value using the numeric keypad
— Press a multiplier key Learn about multiplier abbreviations in Multiplier
Abbreviations on page 43
Triggering
External triggering (NA and SA modes ONLY) allows you to initiate a sweep
when an external DC voltage is sensed at the Ref InTrig In connector on the
FieldFox top panel See External Triggering for SA Mode in Triggering on
page 172
Trigger Source
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger
—Then Trig Source
— Then choose from the following
—Internal Sweeps are initiated by the FieldFox internal circuitry When
Sweep is set to Continuous a new sweep begins automatically when
the previous sweep ends
—External A sweep is initiated on the rising or falling edge of an external
TTL signal at the Ref InTrig In connector on the FieldFox top panel
——When the FieldFox is armed for an external trigger signal Wait
is annotated on the display
——A sweep can NOT be initiated by an external signal while a
sweep is in progress
Measurement speed specifications do NOT apply in Temperature Control
Mode Learn more in Temperature Control Mode on page 31 102 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
——A sweep can NOT be initiated by an external signal when in
HOLD mode Learn more about HOLD mode in
Trigger Slope
Determines which edge of an External trigger signal initiates a sweep
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger
—Then Trig Slope
— Then choose from the following
—Positive Sweep is initiated by the rising edge of signal at about 17 V
—Negative Sweep is initiated by the falling edge of signal at about 10 V
Output Power
Set the power level out of the FieldFox to High Low or manually set power
level to a value between High and Low
Generally the high power setting is used when measuring passive highloss
devices to place the signal farther from the noise floor However for devices
that are sensitive to high power levels such as amplifiers use the Low power
setting
For best measurement accuracy use the Manual power setting at 15 dBm
After calibration the power level can be decreased for amplifiers or increased
for higher dynamic range
How to set Output Power
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Output Power
— High Sets output power to the maximum achievable power at all
displayed frequencies Output power is NOT FLAT across the
displayed FieldFox frequency span Please see SpecificationsData
Sheet on page 589 for expected power levels
— Low Sets output power to approximately –45 dBm FLAT across the
displayed FieldFox frequency span
Power Level settings in this mode will NOT change Power Level settings in
other modes To help prevent damage to your DUT use caution when
changing modes with your DUT connected to the FieldFox test portsKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 103
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
— Man (default setting at 15 dBm) Set output power to an arbitrary
value FLAT across the displayed FieldFox frequency span If flattened
power can NOT be achieved a warning message and beep occurs To
achieve a flattened output power reduce the power level or stop
frequency
—Then press Power Level
— Then enter a value using the numeric keypad the arrows or the
rotary knob
—Press Enter
System Impedance (Z0)
To accurately view data presented in Smith Chart format first set the System
Impedance
Learn how to select Smith Chart format in Format on page 94
Learn how to make 75Ω measurements at the FieldFox Supplemental Online
Help httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm
How to set System Impedance
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Settings
— Then scroll to System Z0 and press Edit
— Then type either 50 or 75 and press Enter
Port Extensions
Port extensions allow you to electrically move the calibration reference plane
on either port 1 or port 2 after you have performed a calibration
Why use Port Extensions
Use port extensions if you are unable to perform a calibration directly at your
device because the location is not accessible Perform a calibration at a
convenient place then use port extensions to compensate for the time delay
(phase shift) to the desired reference plane On the FieldFox port extensions
does not compensate for the loss of the additional electrical length nor any
mismatch errors beyond the calibration reference plane
Also use port extensions if you have already performed a calibration and then
decide that you need to add a length of transmission line in the measurement
configuration Use port extensions to tell the FieldFox that you have added
the length to a specific port 104 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
— With S11 and S22 reflection measurements the FieldFox doubles the port
extension valued that you enter to account for the additional delay in the
forward and reverse directions
— With S21 and S12 transmission measurements the port 1 and port 2
extensions are added together This accounts for the total transmission
delay going through ports 1 and 2
Port extensions and Electrical Delay differ in the following ways
— Electrical delay applies to a specific trace
— Port extensions apply to specific hardware ports
Port Extensions and Electrical Delay can be set independently When both are
set the delay adds together Learn more about Electrical Delay in Electrical
Delay on page 97
How to apply Port Extensions
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Port Extensions
—Then Port Extensions ON
—Then Port1 Extension
— Then enter time value using the numeric keypad the arrows or the
rotary knob Press Enter or select a seconds (time) multiplier
You can also set Port Extensions by pressing Meas Setup 4 then Calibration
(settings)
While setting Port Extension the physical length of the extension at the
current Velocity Factor setting is visible to the right (red box in above
image)
Velocity Factor
The electrical delay or port extension value is entered as delay or electrical
length in units of time
Entering the velocity factor causes the FieldFox to accurately display the
equivalent physical length in meters (NOT available in feet) that corresponds
to the entered electrical delayKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 105
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
Velocity factor is the ratio of the velocity of wave propagation in a coaxial cable
to the velocity of wave propagation in free space This velocity depends on the
relative permittivity of the cable dielectric (er)
Velocity factor 1sqrt(er)
VF 066 corresponds to wave propagation through a polyethylene dielectric
VF 10 (default setting) corresponds to wave propagation through free space
(a vacuum)
How to set Velocity Factor
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Port Extensions
—Then Velocity Factor
— Then enter a value between 01 and 1 using the numeric keypad then press
Enter
You can also set Velocity Factor by pressing Meas Setup 4 then Calibration
(settings)
Big Marker Display States (A and B)
This feature available ONLY in NA Mode allows you to view up to three Big or
Super Big marker readouts This is done by using up to two different display
states called A and B Each display state is comprised of the settings listed
below When the Big Readout setting is toggled through A and B these display
states are recalled
How to create Big Marker Display States
To have big readouts markers MUST be created using the following procedure
If you have already set up your display and do not want to lose it then save the
current state to a state file Learn how in State Files on page 548 The
following procedure will overwrite your display state
—Press Mkr > Tools
—Then Big Readout
—A or B The A or B display state is recalled If none have been defined
then the default display state is recalled
—OFF The B display state is visible but without the Big Marker
Readout
— With A or B selected then press Edit Big Marker (A or B)
— Then edit the following display state settings
— Num Traces – Choose the MultiTrace configuration x1 x2 or x3 Only
Overlayed configurations are allowed Learn more in MultiTrace
Configurations on page 91 106 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
— Font Size – Choose either Big or Super Big Super Big marker readout #3
will cover some of the measurement grid
— Trace Settings For each possible trace (1 2 and 3) select from the
following
—Measurement – SParameter or Receiver measurement to display
S11 is default Learn more in About Sparameters on page 87
—Meas Format – Log is default Learn more in Format on page 94
— Bandwidth (ON) – Marker readout for marker bandwidth search
OFF is default Learn how to set BW parameters in How to Search
with Markers on page 490
— Big Readout For each marker readout (1 2 and 3) select from the
following
—Marker # Enter a number from 1 to 6 to create the marker 1 is
created by default
—Trace # The marker# is created on this trace Tr1 is selected by
default The corresponding Num Traces must first be selected For
example to create a marker on Trace 3 first select Num Traces x3
—Format – Format for the marker readout Select Default to make the
marker readout format the same as the display format Default is
selected by default
— Mkr Tracking – ON Select the parameter to track on the standard
Marker Search menu OFF is selected by default When set to ON
Peak tracking is set by default Learn about Marker Tracking in
Marker Functions on page 497
— State – Choose from Normal Delta or OFF The default marker (1) is
created in Normal Learn more in Marker Functions on page 497
—Enabled – Turns the Big Readout of the corresponding marker ON and
OFF The default marker (1) is set ON by default
Notes
— To move a marker press Marker then Marker then scroll to the marker
number to be moved The new marker position can NOT be saved with the A
or B display state
— Settings that are NOT listed above are NOT affected by the recalled display
states
— Changes to the above settings outside the Big Readout menu will be
overwritten when Big Readout (A or B) is selected For example suppose
the display format for the B state is Log If you change the display format to
Lin using the standard menu (Meas 1 Format) the setting will show on the
display But if you then use the Big Readout (A | B | OFF) setting when B is
recalled the Lin setting will be overwritten with the original Log settingKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 107
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings
Increase Dynamic Range
Dynamic range is the difference between maximum input power to the
FieldFox receiver (without compressing the receiver) and the minimum
measurable power (noise floor) Measurement accuracy is increased when the
DUT response is at least 10 dB above the noise floor For a measurement to be
valid input signals must be within these boundaries
The following settings will increase the dynamic range of your NA mode
measurement
—Increase Power Level Press Meas 4 then Output Power High
— Lower the IFBW Press BW 2 then IF BW
— Increase Averaging Press BW 2 then Average
The following procedure MAY increase the dynamic range of your NA mode
measurement The results you see will depend on the performance of your
DUT
With an S21 trace active
1 With RF OUT (port2) open press Trace 6 then Math and Memory then
Data>Mem
2 Reconnect the DUT
3 Press Data Math then DataMem 108 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
NA (Network Analyzer) Mode
NA Mode Settings 109
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
7 Time Domain – Option 010
With NA Mode Time Domain (Opt 010) frequency information is used to
calculate and display measurements with time as the horizontal display axis
The response values appear separated in time allowing a different perspective
of the test device＇s performance and limitations
NA Mode settings that are NOT unique to Time Domain are documented in
Chapter 6 NA (Network Analyzer) Mode on page 85
In This Chapter
Time Domain (Transform) Settings
Trace Settings
Overview on page 111
Transform Settings Table on page 112
StartStop (Frequency Range) and Points on page 112
Stimulus (Mode) on page 113
Set Frequency Lowpass on page 113
StartStop Time on page 113
Distance Units on page 114
Window Layout on page 114
Transform Window on page 114
Line Loss and Velocity Factor on page 115
Data Chain on page 116
Gating Type on page 119
Transform Enable on page 117
Gate Enable on page 117 110 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Time Domain – Option 010
Gating Settings
Start Stop Center and Span Gate Times on
page 119
Gating Type on page 119Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 111
Time Domain – Option 010
Overview
Overview
In normal NA Mode operation the FieldFox measures the characteristics of a
test device as a function of frequency With Time Domain (opt 010) frequency
information is used to calculate the inverse Fourier transform and display
measurements with time on the horizontal display axis The response values
appear separated in time allowing a different perspective of the test device＇s
performance and limitations
The graphic below compares the same cable reflection measurement data in
both the frequency and time domain The cable has two bends Each bend
creates a mismatch or change in the line impedance
The frequency domain of an S11 measurement shows reflections caused by
mismatches in the cable It is impossible to determine where the mismatches
physically occur in the cable
The Time Domain response shows both the location and the magnitude of each
mismatch The responses indicate that the second cable bend is the location of
a significant mismatch This mismatch can be gated out allowing you to view
the frequency domain response as if the mismatch were not present Learn
more about gating in Gating on page 118
Markers that are created on a Time Domain trace can be used to pinpoint the
distance of the mismatch from the reference plane
For more information on Time Domain theory see
httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59895723ENpdf 112 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Time Domain – Option 010
Time Domain (Transform) Settings
Time Domain (Transform) Settings
You can set and view most of the Time Domain settings on the Transform
Settings table
Transform Settings Table
The following settings (from Transform Stimulus Settings to Data Processing)
are listed in the order they appear on the Transform Settings menu selection
How to make settings on the Transform settings table
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Transform
—Then Transform Settings
—Press Next Page and Previous Page to view all settings
— To change a setting
— Use the arrows or rotary knob to highlight a setting
— Numeric settings can be changed by pressing numbers using the
numeric keypad Then press Enter or select a suffix if available
— Some settings allow you to press Edit to toggle the value Other
settings require that you then press a softkey to change the value
— When finished changing a value press Done Edit
—Press Dock Window to relocate the Settings table to a position relative to
the trace window The Dock Window setting persists through a Preset
Choose from the following
— Full (Default setting) Only the Settings table is shown on the screen
The trace window is temporarily not shown
— Left The Settings table is shown to the left of the trace window
— Bottom The Settings table is shown below the trace window
— When finished changing ALL settings press Done to save your settings
StartStop (Frequency Range) and Points
All Time Domain measurements are made in the frequency domain and using
Inverse Fourier Transform (IFT) time is calculated Select the frequency range
from which Time Domain measurements are calculated Increasing the data
points will improve measurement resolution However more data points will
usually result in slower sweep updates
Set frequency range and points before selecting Stimulus ModeKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 113
Time Domain – Option 010
Time Domain (Transform) Settings
Stimulus (Mode)
— There are three variations on how the Time Domain transform algorithm is
applied to the frequency domain measurement Each method has a unique
application
— Lowpass Impulse Highest resolution Most useful for seeing small
responses in devices that pass low frequencies such as cables
— Lowpass Step Easiest to identify inductive and capacitive discontinuities
in devices that pass low frequencies such as cables
In both Lowpass modes frequencies down to DC and negative frequencies are
extrapolated Therefore when either Lowpass mode is selected Set FreqLow
Pass is automatically applied to adjust the start frequency Learn more about
Set Frequency Lowpass below
When the Start Frequency or resolution is changed AFTER selecting a Lowpass
mode then Stimulus mode is set to Band Pass and Transform is disabled
— Bandpass Impulse Easiest method can be used with any frequency
sweep Most useful for measuring band limited devices such as filters and
DC blocked cables This mode does NOT show capacitive and inductive
reactance For the same frequency span and number of points band pass
mode has twice the impulse width which hides closely spaced responses
degrading the response resolution
Set Frequency Lowpass
USE ONLY IN LOW PASS MODES The Low Pass Start frequency is adjusted so
that the Low Pass Stop frequency is at harmonics of the Low Pass Start
frequency Start frequency is computed by the following formula
Low Pass Start Frequency Stop Frequency Number of points
StartStop Time
The following settings adjust the display resolution allowing you to zoom IN
or OUT on a response When the start or stop time is updated they may be
automatically adjusted to limit the display to one aliasfree response on either
side of zero time
How to set Start and Stop time
—Press Measure Setup 4
—Then Transform
—Then Transform Start Stop
This setting is made automatically when either Lowpass mode is selected 114 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Time Domain – Option 010
Time Domain (Transform) Settings
— Then choose from
— Start Sets the transform start time
— Stop Sets the transform stop time
Distance Units
When markers are present on a Time Domain trace marker Xaxis values are
shown both in units of time (seconds) and distance Select the units in which
the marker distance data is presented
Distance Units are also used when setting Time Domain Line Loss Learn more
in Distance Units on page 114
Choose from m (meters) or Feet
Window Layout
This setting is used to create additional traces or select a new layout for traces
that are already created
Choose from x1 x2 x2H x3H x3 x4H
Learn more about multitrace configurations in MultiTrace Configurations
on page 91
Transform Window
There are abrupt transitions in a frequency domain measurement at the start
and stop frequencies causing overshoot and ringing in a Time Domain
response The Window setting reduces the abruptness of the frequency domain
transitions This causes you to make a trade off in the Time Domain response
Zero (0) seconds is always the calibration reference plane Negative values
are useful if moving the reference planeKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 115
Time Domain – Option 010
Time Domain (Transform) Settings
The Window setting applies to ALL traces
How to make Window setting
—Press Measure Setup 4
—Then Transform
—Then More
—Then Transform Window
— A settings table appears that allows you to navigate and select the
following settings These settings are made exactly like those made on the
Transform Settings table Learn how in Transform Settings Table on
page 112
Line Loss and Velocity Factor
By default the FieldFox does NOT correct Time Domain measurements to
account for the inherent loss of a cable However to make more accurate
measurements Line Loss and Velocity Factor should be considered
Any of the following four methods can be used to make this same Window
setting Impulse Width values are calculated from the frequency span and
Kaiser Beta value
1 Window Min Medium Max
2 Percent 0 50 100
3 Kaiser Beta 0 650 1300
4 Impulse Width 100455 ps 168501 231284 116 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Time Domain – Option 010
Time Domain (Transform) Settings
About Velocity Factor and Line Loss
— Velocity Factor is a property of the physical material of a cable A VF of 10
corresponds to the speed of light in a vacuum or the fastest VF possible A
polyethylene dielectric cable has VF 066 and a cable with PTFE dielectric
has VF 07
— Line Loss is specified in dBm (or ft) In addition to the length of the cable
loss is also directly proportional to the frequency of the signal that passes
through the cable
The following is an example showing how Line Loss works
The DUT is a 100 meter transmission cable The Line Loss value is1 dBmeter
This means that a signal traveling ONE WAY through the cable will lose 10 dB
of power (100 m *1dBm) Because the FieldFox performs this measurement
with 1 port the test signal travels down the cable and then back for a total
loss of 20 dB
For the purpose of illustrating this point connect an OPEN to the end of the
cable – a maximumsized fault for 100 reflection of the 300 MHz test
signal
Without compensation for the loss of the cable a –20 dB response would be
visible at 100 meters which is the OPEN at the end of the DUT This is from 10
dB of loss through the cable in each direction
With compensation for the loss using the manufacturer’s specification the
FieldFox compensates the trace as though the signal traveling through 100
meters was increased by +20 dB Therefore the response will show 0 dB for
100 reflection
Data Chain
This setting available only on the Transform Settings Table reverts to
Standard when the FieldFox is Preset Choose from the following
— Standard – The normal FieldFox data processing chain Transform
calculations are performed AFTER error correction and trace math
— 8510 – The data processing chain used by the Keysight 8510 network
analyzer Transform calculations are performed BEFORE error correction
and trace math Learn more at the FieldFox Supplemental Online Help
website
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 117
Time Domain – Option 010
Trace Settings
Trace Settings
The following two settings apply to specific traces
Transform Enable
Enable Time Domain transform for the specific trace
— Select the trace
—Press Measure Setup 4
—Then Transform
— Then choose from
— Transform On Trace displays Time Domain data
— Transform Off Trace displays frequency domain data
Gate Enable
Enable Gating for the specific trace
— Select the trace
—Press Measure Setup 4
—Then Transform
— Then choose from
— Gating On Trace displays Time Domain data
— Gating Off Trace displays frequency domain data 118 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Time Domain – Option 010
Gating
Gating
Perhaps the most beneficial feature of Time Domain transform is the Gating
function When viewing the Time Domain response of a device the gating
function can be used to virtually remove undesired responses You can then
simultaneously view a frequency domain trace as if the undesired response did
not exist This allows you to characterize devices without the effects of external
devices such as connectors or adapters
Gating is best performed while viewing a Time Domain trace Then either
disable Transform or separately view a frequency domain trace to see the
trace with the gated effects removed
The following image shows how gating can affect measurement results
All 4 traces show the same S11 measurement
Trace 1 shows the frequency response without gating enabled
Trace 2 shows the transform response without gating enabled
Trace 3 shows the transform response with gating enabled
When a discontinuity in a test device reflects energy that energy will not
reach subsequent discontinuities This can MASK or hide the true
response which would have occurred if the previous discontinuity were not
present The Gating feature does NOT compensate for thisKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 119
Time Domain – Option 010
Gating
Trace 4 shows the frequency response with gating enabled
How to make Time Domain Gating settings
—Press Measure Setup 4
—Then Transform
—Then Gating
— Then choose from
— On Gating is being performed
— Off Gating is NOT being performed
Start Stop Center and Span Gate Times
These settings specify the time in the trace to be gated (in or out) The gate
times can be specified using either Start and Stop or Center and Span
—Press Gating Start Stop
— A settings table appears that allows you to navigate and select the
following settings These settings are made exactly like those made on the
Transform Settings table Learn how in Transform Settings Table on
page 112
Gating Type
This setting defines the type of filtering that will be performed for the gating
function The gate start and stop flags on the display point toward the part of
the trace you want to keep
Choose from the following
— Bandpass KEEPS the responses within the Gating Start and Stop times
— Notch REMOVES the responses within the Gating Start and Stop times 120 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Time Domain – Option 010
Gating
Gating Shape
This setting defines the filter characteristics of the gate function Choose from
Minimum Normal Wide Maximum
Time domain Gate Shape setting is shown in the graphic above
Cutoff time is the time between the stop time (6 dB on the filter skirt) and the
peak of the first sidelobe
—T1 is the gate span which is equal to the stop time minus the start time
—T2 is the time between the edge of the passband and the 6 dB point
representing the cutoff rate of the filter
—T3 is the time between the 6 dB point and the edge of the gate stopband
For all filter shapes T2 is equal to T3 and the filter is the same on both sides of
the center time
Minimum gate span is twice the cutoff time Each gate shape has a minimum
recommended gate span for proper operation This is a consequence of the
finite cutoff rate of the gate If you specify a gate span that is smaller than the
minimum span the response will show the following effects
— distorted gate shape that has no passband
—distorted shape
— incorrect indications of start and stop times
— may have increased sidelobe levels
Gate Shape Passband
Ripple
Sidelobe
Levels
Cutoff Time Minimum Gate
Span
Minimum ±01 dB 48 dB 14Freq Span 28Freq Span
Normal ±01 dB 68 dB 28Freq Span 56Freq Span
Wide ±01 dB 57 dB 44Freq Span 88Freq Span
Maximum ±001 dB 70 dB 127Freq Span 254Freq Span 121
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
8 Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
Calibration removes the systematic errors that are associated with
measurements in NA CAT and VVM Modes Key presses are identical in all of
these Modes
In this Chapter
Why and When to Calibrate on page 122
Definitions on page 122
CalReady on page 123
How to Perform a Calibration on page 123
QuickCal (N991xA2xA3xA Only) on page 125
Mechanical Cal on page 127
ECal on page 130
Simple Response Cals on page 132
View Cal on page 134
Calibration Type on page 134
Enhanced Response Optimization on page 139
Interpolation * on page 140
Cal ON – Questionable Accuracy on page 140
Compatible Mode Calibrations on page 140
Save the Calibration on page 140
CalReady Properties on page 141
Verify a Calibration on page 142
Test the Jumper Cable on page 142 122 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
See Also
Learn How to Make 75 ohm Measurements at the FieldFox Supplemental
Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm
Why and When to Calibrate
There are welldefined and understood systematic errors that are measured
and calculated during the calibration process These errors are caused by
leakage signals inside the FieldFox by the frequency response of the FieldFox
receivers and by reflections inside the FieldFox that interact with the DUT
After calibration these errors are removed from subsequent measurements
To maintain highest measurement accuracy perform a new calibration when
any of the following changes occur
— When any of the following measurement settings change Frequency
Range Power Level IF BW and Resolution Therefore make these
measurement settings before calibrating Increased Averaging lower IF BW
and higher Resolution all cause slower sweeps and slower calibration times
Learn about Interpolation and Questionable Accuracy in Interpolation *
on page 140
— When the FieldFox temperature changes more than about 10°F (5°C) Learn
more in How to monitor the internal FieldFox temperature on page 30
— When the connection to the DUT changes requiring a different jumper
cable or adapter
Definitions
DUT (Device Under Test) The cable antenna transmission line amplifier or
anything else that is connected to the FieldFox that is to be measured
Calibration Standards OPEN SHORT LOAD and THRU
— OPEN SHORT and LOAD are reflection’ standards that are used during
calibration When an RF signal hits’ these components the signals are
reflected in a predictable manner These components can also be used to
terminate a DUT port during some measurements
— SHORT and OPEN standards both cause 100 of an RF signal to be
reflected The difference between these two standards is what
happens to the phase of the reflected signal which is beyond the Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 123
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
scope of this discussion Although an OPEN standard is a precision
component simply leaving nothing connected at the end of a cable
can be a reasonable substitute for an OPEN
— A LOAD standard absorbs almost ALL of the incident signal and very
little signal is reflected back to the source
—A THRU standard is used during some calibration steps to connect PORT 1
to PORT 2 in place of the DUT A Flush THRU connection can be made
when cables that connect with the DUT can mate with each other Learn
more in Mechanical Cal on page 127 Otherwise any reasonably short
cable can be used as a THRU standard
Calibration Reference Plane is the point (or points) at which the DUT and cal
standards are connected during a calibration This can be at the FieldFox test
port connectors or at the end of jumper cables or adapters
CalReady
Every FieldFox contains a factory calibration that was performed at the port 1
and port 2 connectors with 15 dBm input power over the entire frequency
range of the FieldFox using a number of data points that allows reasonable
interpolation over the FieldFox frequency range
This calibration known as CalReady allows you to immediately make
measurements of a DUT that is connected directly at the test ports (PORT 1
andor PORT 2) CalReady corrects measurements when the FieldFox is turned
ON and when a measurement is created with no other correction in place
When measuring a DUT using a jumper cable or adapter NOT a direct
connection to a test port connector – then a QuickCal or Mechanical Cal is
recommended CalReady can also be used to check the integrity of the jumper
cable that is attached to the test ports
CalRdy is shown when a measurement is corrected using CalReady
You can change the properties of the CalReady calibration Learn more in
CalReady on page 123
Learn how to see when your factory CalReady calibration was performed in
System Information on page 539
How to Perform a Calibration
In CAT NA or VVM Mode press Cal 5
Press Esc at any time to end the calibration process
When performing a calibration that contains a large number of points
(5000 to 10001 points) be aware that the calibration progress bar may not
move for 2 or 3 minutes during the calibration process 124 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
The following appears
Choose Calibration Method screen
— Response Cal – Used to quickly calibrate ONE type of measurement using
mechanical standards Measurement accuracy is generally low Learn more
in Simple Response Cals on page 132
— Quick Cal – Using builtin cal standards and CalReady quickly and
accurately calibrate measurements when using a jumper cable or adapter
to connect the DUT to the FieldFox test ports Learn more in QuickCal
(N991xA2xA3xA Only) on page 125
— Mechanical CalECal – Using mechanical cal standards from a cal kit
perform an accurate calibration at one or both test ports adapters or
jumper cables Full 2port mechanical calibration is the most accurate
calibration available with FieldFox Learn more in ECal on page 130
— User Cal OFF ON – Turns ON and OFF the effects of the user calibration that
you performed The OFF state reverts to CalReady
— View Cal – Shows the properties of the current calibration Learn more in
View Cal on page 134
— More – Learn about Cal Ready Properties in CalReady on page 123Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 125
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
QuickCal (N991xA2xA3xA Only)
QuickCal is ideal for a quick and simple calibration of the measurement when
using a jumper cable or adapter to connect the DUT to the FieldFox test ports
QuickCal corrects for phase shift time delay and loss of adapters or jumper
cables
QuickCal does not require a specific Cal Kit and is a very simple calibration If
the highest accuracy is required a mechanical calibration with a high quality
calibration kit is recommended
QuickCal is designed and most accurate when calibrating for DUTs fitted with
TypeN and 716 connectors
If the DUT has different connectors such as 35 mm (male) or SMA male
connectors QuickCal can still be used by selecting ＇Other＇ connector
However the accuracy of QuickCal with Other’ connectors is not specified
If the DUT has 35 mmfemale or SMAfemale connectors QuickCal is NOT
recommended For accurate and repeatable measurements of devices with
female 35 mm or SMA connectors use mechanical calibration
Important QuickCal Notes
— 716 connectors can be used with QuickCal ONLY up to 6 GHz
— TypeN 75 Ohm can be used with QuickCal ONLY up to 3 GHz
— QuickCal cannot be used with waveguides or if the test fixture or test setup
(before DUT) includes an attenuator
How to perform a QuickCal
— In CAT NA or VVM Mode press Cal 5
—Then QuickCal
—Press Change DUT Connectors to select the correct connector types
that are on your DUT Although there is no Cal Kit required selecting
the connector type (limited to TypeN and 716) and gender from the
list provides an accurate OPEN model which means a more accurate
calibration If the DUT connector type is not listed select
UnknownOther
Source Unleveled errors During calibration the frequency range of the
measurement MAY be extended to provide maximum flexibility During the
calibration the output power may become unleveled at the added high
frequencies You can ignore the Source Unleveled error or to avoid the
error select either High power or 15 dBm before calibrating Learn more
about setting Output Power in Output Power on page 53 126 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
— The connector choices that are offered depend on the frequency
range For example if you have selected a frequency range that
exceeds 18 GHz the only connector options you will be presented
with in QuickCal are ＇other 50 ohm＇ or ＇other 75 ohm＇ This is because
35 mm connectors which go beyond 18 GHz are not supported with
QuickCal
—For each DUT port
— Select the connector type of the DUT using the arrows or rotary
knob
—Press Change Gender to change the gender of the DUT connector
—Press Next… to make the selection
— If present press Finish
— SelectChange Cal Type The FieldFox always RECOMMENDS a Cal Type
that will quickly and accurately calibrate all of the displayed Sparameters
The other Cal Types that are listed will NOT necessarily calibrate all of the
displayed Sparameters Learn more about Cal Types in Calibration Type
on page 134
— Using the arrows or rotary knob select a Cal Type then press
Select and Finish
—Press Start Calibration
No Connection
— Disconnect the DUT from the FieldFox
— If a jumper cable or adapter is required to connect the DUT to the FieldFox
connect those components to the FieldFox test ports connectors The
effects of those components will be measured and removed during the
calibration and only the effects of the DUT will be displayed in the
measurement results These should be highquality components
— Do NOT connect anything at the cal reference plane where the DUT
connects
—Press Measure
Optionally Connect Load(s)
— Connect a Load standard at the point where the DUT will be connected and
press Measure under the following conditions
— When a jumper cable has too much loss If a Cal Failed’ error
appears and you skipped the Load measurement then perform the
Cal again but include measuring the Load Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 127
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
— When your DUT has high return loss such as the reject band of a
filter Then measuring the load improves accuracy Even with the
optional Load phase accuracy begins to degrade when the return
loss is greater than about 20dB
—Press Skip Step in all other cases and when making DTF measurements
Measuring a load would do little to improve accuracy
Connect THRU (Not used for 1port cals)
— Connect port 1 to port 2 either by mating the connectors that attach to the
DUT (Flush THRU) or by using a short jumper cable Learn more about
Flush THRU in Calibration Type on page 134 Then press Measure
—Press Finish
CAL ON Q is shown on the screen for all displayed measurements that are
corrected with QuickCal
Using QuickCal with a Long Jumper Cable
QuickCal requires a sufficient frequency span to adequately characterize the
jumper cable (the cable between the instrument port and the DUT) If a Cal
Failed’ error appears and you connected the optional Load standard then
increase the frequency span of the measurement until the error no longer
appears After the calibration you can then decrease the frequency span as
needed and rely on interpolation Learn more about Interpolation in
Interpolation * on page 140
QuickCal is also limited in how much jumper cable loss it can tolerate If
QuickCal without the Load is failing then measure the Load during the
QuickCal to see if that resolves the issue
Mechanical Cal
Mechanical Calibration is performed using discrete standards from a Cal Kit
Several Cal Kit definitions are built into the FieldFox To learn about Cal Kit
definitions refer to the Application Note Specifying Calibration Standards
and Kits for Keysight Vector Network Analyzers available online at
httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59894840ENpdf
Mechanical Cals are extremely accurate when performed using the correct Cal
Kits with standards that are clean and in good repair and when using correct
connection procedures
How to perform a Mechanical Cal
— Disconnect the DUT from the FieldFox
Visit wwwkeysightcomfindfieldfoxsupport to see a complete list of
supported Cal Kits Also at this website download DataLink software that
allows you to edit Cal Kit definitions or add a new Cal Kit 128 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
— If a jumper cable or adapter is required to connect the DUT to the FieldFox
then connect those components to the FieldFox connectors The effects of
those components will be measured and removed during the calibration
and only the effects of the DUT will be displayed in the measurement
results These should be highquality components
— In NA CAT or VVM Mode press Cal 5
—Then Mechanical Cal
This page summarizes the Mechanical Cal to be performed and allows you to
make changes For best results review the screen and make changes in the
following order
1 Sparameters – Verify that these are all of the Sparameters that you want
calibrated If not press Esc to terminate the calibration process then
return to the Trace menu to display all of the traces to be calibrated Learn
how in MultiTrace Configurations on page 91
2 DUT Connectors – For each DUT port that is shown verify the correct type
and gender of the DUT connector If a DUT port is not shown then that
port is not included in the list of Sparameters to be calibrated
3 Cal Kit Verify the correct Cal Kit for each DUT port to be calibrated See a
list of supported Cal Kits in the FieldFox Data Sheet Learn more in
Appendix B
If the DUT connector type gender or Cal Kit is NOT correct for the DUT
ports to be calibrated then
— Press Change DUT Connectors to select the correct connector types
that are on your DUT
— For each port
— Use the arrows or rotary knob to change the DUT
connector type Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 129
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
— Press Change Gender to change the gender of the DUT
connector
— Then press Next… to confirm the selection and continue
the process
— For each port
— Use the arrows or rotary knob to select the Cal Kit
that you have and are going to use for the specified ports
— Press Next… to confirm the selection and continue the
process
— Then press Finish to end the selection process
4 Calibration Type The FieldFox always RECOMMENDS a Cal Type that will
quickly and accurately calibrate all of the displayed Sparameters
Change from the RECOMMENDED Cal Type ONLY if you understand the
implications Learn more about Cal Types in Calibration Type on
page 134
To select a different Cal Type
— Press Change Cal Type
— Then using the arrows or rotary knob select a Cal Type
— Then press Select and Finish
Begin Calibration
—Press Start Calibration
— Follow the Cal Wizard prompts Connect the specified standard at the point
where the DUT will be connected then press Measure
— At any time press Back to remeasure a standard if you feel it was not
properly connected
—Press Finish to complete the calibration
CAL ON U is shown on the screen for all displayed measurements that are
corrected with the Mechanical Cal
If an error appears (Failure to compute calibration steps…) check to
ensure that the frequency range of the Cal Kit covers the frequency range
of the measurement You can verify the frequency range of your Cal Kit at
wwwkeysightcomfindfieldfoxsupport Click Cal Kits 130 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
ECal
ECal is a complete solidstate calibration solution Every ECal module contains
electronic standards that are automatically switched into position during a
calibration These electronic standards have been measured at the factory and
the data stored within the memory of the ECal module The FieldFox uses this
stored data along with the measured data to calculate the error terms for a
measurement calibration
You can perform the following calibrations with ECal
— 1Port Reflection calibration
— Full 2Port calibration
All Keysight USB ECal modules are supported ECal modules are available in a
variety of connector types covering many frequency ranges For information
about available ECal modules see httpwwwkeysightcomfindecal
ECals each have a recommended input power level Depending on the
measurement setup the FieldFox may default to an input power level that
exceeds your ECal’s recommended input power level Refer to the
reference guide for your ECal module to determine the correct input power
levels Exceeding an ECal’s recommended input power level results in a
compression and an invalid data condition Refer to
wwwkeysightcomfindecal
Simple ECal ON When choosing Full 2port calibration if you are able to
connect your ECal simultaneously to both device ports you should use
Simple ECAL (ie this ensures that you are using the correct Thru
calibration model)

Simple ECal OFF Set simple ECal to OFF when you have a test setup
where you cannot connect port 1 and port 2 simultaneously to the ECAL
module (Then during the calibration when prompted Connect port 1 to
port 2 use a coaxial cable or an appropriate thru adapter to connect port
1 to port 2)

’Unknown THRU’ When prompted Connect port 1 to port 2 then you
can connect them using a coaxial cable or an appropriate thru adapter Do
NOT use the internal ECal THRU because the thru calibration will be
incorrect

Flush THRU’ When prompted Connect port 1 directly to port 2 then
you must connect the ports directly together at the calibration reference
plane with no adapter or other cabling

Learn more in Calibration Type on page 134Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 131
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
Select an ECal module that has connectors of the same type and gender as the
DUT If such an ECal module is not available a module with connectors
different from the DUT can be used by selecting a User Characterization This
selection is located on the Mechanical Cal Setup page of the CalWizard
However a User Characterization can NOT be PERFORMED using the
FieldFox It must be performed using a bench top Keysight VNA such as the
PNA or ENA Learn more about User Characterization at the PNA Help website
httpnasupportkeysightcompnahelplatestS3_CalsECal_User_Charact
erizationhtm
How to Perform a Calibration Using ECal
— Make measurement settings on the FieldFox (frequency range number of
points etc)
— Connect the ECal module USB cable to the FieldFox USB
— Allow the module to warm up until it indicates READY This may take several
minutes
— Connect the ECal module ports to the FieldFox at the calibration reference
plane (where the DUT will be connected)
—Press Cal 5 to start the Calibration
—Press Mechanical Cal ECal
—Press Change DUT Connectors For each test port to be calibrated select
the Connector Type and Gender of the DUT ECal module The connected
ECal module and relevant User Characterizations will appear with the ECal
factory default as the default Cal Kit
— Optionally press Advanced then ECal Auto Orient
— ON (default) The FieldFox automatically senses the direction in which
the ECal module ports are connected to the FieldFox ports
— OFF If power to the ECal module is too low it cannot detect which
FieldFox ports it is connected to If you are having this problem
select OFF Then during the calibration the FieldFox will prompt you
to connect the ECal module ports to specific FieldFox ports
— Optionally press Advanced then Extended Cal (N995xA6xA Only)
— ON The FieldFox Extended Cal measures additional points outside
the current frequency range in order to enable adjusting the
frequency range after the calibration procedure With these extra
points the error correction may be applied when it otherwise might
The frequency range of the measurement MUST be within the frequency
range of the ECal module or an error will appear when Calculating Steps
during the calibration 132 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
not Without extended cal if you adjust your frequency outside the
calibrated range after the calibration has been completed the error
correction is turned off
— OFF (default) The FieldFox does not measure any frequency points
outside the current displayed frequency range If the frequency is
adjusted outside of the set of points calibrated the error correction is
turned off and the following message is displayed
Error correction disabled Stimulus outside
calibrated range
—Press Start Calibration When prompted verify the ECal module
connection then press Measure The standards within the ECal module are
automatically connected and measured
Simple Response Cals
Simple Response Cals are used to quickly calibrate the magnitude and phase
of a measurement using any Open Short or Thru component These may be
calibration standards but because a Cal Kit is not selected they are not
modeled Measurement accuracy is generally low Use a Simple Response Cal
to make quick measurements when using a jumper cable to connect the DUT
to the FieldFox Otherwise CalReady is usually more accurate
When prompted choose a standard based on the displayed measurements to
be calibrated For example to calibrate S11 connect either an OPEN or
SHORT to the port 1 reference plane
When Simple Response Cals are performed the source match and reflection
tracking terms from CalReady are updated by the measured Short or Open that
is used during the calibration
1port response cals are also available from the Mechanical Cal menu Learn
more in Calibration Type on page 134
’Unknown THRU’ When prompted Connect port 1 to port 2 then
connect port and port 2 using a coaxial cable or an appropriate thru
adapter Do NOT use the internal ECal THRU because the ECal thru
calibration model is incorrect for this calibration type

Flush THRU’ When prompted Connect port 1 directly to port 2 then
you must connect the ports directly together at the calibration reference
plane with no adapter or other cabling

Learn more in Calibration Type on page 134
You can perform a Simple Response Cal for either S11 or S22 or S21 AND
S12Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 133
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
Normalize uses a THRU standard or cable between port 1 and port 2 to cal an
S21 and S12 Transmission measurement (NA Mode) and a 2port Insertion
Loss measurement (CAT Mode) In VVM Mode this is performed using Zero
When a Normalization is performed the forward and reverse transmission
tracking terms from CalReady are updated to account for the THRU that is
used during the normalization process
How to perform a Simple Response Cal
— Select the measurements to be calibrated See the relevant Mode (NA CAT
or VVM) for measurement selections
—Press Cal 5 then Response Cal
— For 1port measurements
— Select either Open Response or Short Response for the port to be
calibrated The availability of this calibration on Port 2 may require an
option
— Connect an OPEN or SHORT standard to the specified port and press
Measure
— For 2port measurements
— Select Normalization
— Connect a short highquality phase stable cable between the
FieldFox port 1 and port 2 connectors then press Measure
—Press Finish
— Connect the DUT
CAL ON U is shown on the screen when a User Cal (Ex Response Cal) is
correcting ONLY the appropriate measurement For example when an Open
Response Cal on Port 2 is performed CAL ON U is shown for an S22
measurement only
With a Normalization Cal all subsequent insertion loss measurements are
made relative to the insertion loss of the cable used as the THRU standard
For example if you use a cable with 1 dB of loss then after Normalization
the display will show 0 dB of loss with this cable in place Therefore for
highest accuracy when measuring the DUT also attach the cable that was
used in the normalization cal 134 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
View Cal
From the Choose Calibration screen (see How to Perform a Calibration on
page 123) press View Cal to see the following screen
The top box shows the properties of the current calibration that you performed
and the displayed Sparameters that it is correcting
The bottom box shows the Sparameters that are displayed but NOT corrected
by the current performed calibration but rather the CalReady calibration
Learn more about CalReady in CalReady on page 123
Calibration Type
The FieldFox simplifies the calibration process by recommending the most
accurate and efficient calibration type based on the displayed Sparameters
However there may be times when you may want a little more accuracy or a
little faster sweep time The following information can help you learn about the
various calibration choices Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 135
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
Definitions
Defined THRU – A THRU standard for which there is a Cal Kit definition such as
in the 8551xA Cal Kits
Flush THRU (also known as Zero length THRU) – When the test port cables
mate together when measuring an Insertable DUT No actual THRU standard is
required because the test port cables are directly connected Flush THRU is
also a Defined THRU with a definition of zero loss and zero length
Unknown THRU Any THRU connection between the test ports For more
information see the FieldFox Supplemental Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm
Sweep Directions – Both FULL 2Port Cals listed below result in correction
that requires background measurements sweeps in both directions regardless
of the displayed measurements The displayed traces are updated at a slower
rate than Enhanced Response and 1port calibrations which require sweeps in
one direction only
1Port (OSL)
DUT No restrictions
Sparameters Corrected S11 or S22
Standards OPEN SHORT LOAD
Sweeps in ONE direction
FULL 2Port (May require an option)
Most comprehensive calibration Corrects all Sparameters
DUT NonInsertable or Insertable
Standards OPEN SHORT LOAD on BOTH ports Any THRU between ports
Noninsertable DUT – A device whose
connectors could NOT mate together They
either do not have the same type of connector
or they have the same gender This also means
that the test port cables could NOT mate
together as in the above diagram
Insertable DUT – A device whose connectors
could mate together They have the same type
of connector and opposite or no gender This
also means that the test port cables could
mate together as in the above diagram 136 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
Based on the SOLRUnknown THRU calibration For more information on
the Unknown THRU process see the FieldFox Supplemental Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm
Sweeps in BOTH directions
FULL 2Port (QSOLT) – Mechanical Cal ONLY (May require an option)
Quicker to perform QSOLT than Full 2port Corrects all Sparameters
DUT Insertable only
Standards OPEN SHORT LOAD on port 1 Flush THRU between ports
Recommended cal type for Insertable DUTs A Cal Kit is NOT required for
port 2
Sweeps in BOTH directions
Enhanced Response Cal Forward OR Reverse (May require an option)
Faster measurements than Full 2Port
DUT NonInsertable or Insertable Sparameters PARTIALLY Corrected
S21 and S11 (Forward) OR S12 and S22 (Reverse)
Standards OPEN SHORT LOAD on ONE port Defined or Flush THRU
between ports
Sweeps in ONE direction
TRL – Mechanical Cal ONLY
A complete 2Port calibration with potentially better accuracy than Full
2port Corrects all Sparameters
DUT NonInsertable or Insertable
Standards Thru Reflect Line or variations of these A TRL Cal Kit MUST be
selected to see this Cal Type
Sweeps in BOTH directions
Learn more about TRL Calibration in the Supplemental Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm
1port Response Cals (Open or Short)
Calibrate the magnitude and phase of a measurement using modeled’
mechanical standards Measurement accuracy is better than Simple
Response Cals (available on the main Cal page see Calibration Type on
page 134) but NOT as good as full 1port cal Corrects either S11 or S22
Can be used with Isolation (see following section) Learn more in Simple
Response Cals on page 132
Also select an Enhanced Response Optimization Learn more in Enhanced
Response Optimization on page 139Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 137
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
DUT NonInsertable or Insertable
Sparameters Corrected S11 or S22
Standards OPEN or SHORT on ONE port
Sweeps in BOTH directions
Isolation Step
The optional isolation step of a calibration corrects for crosstalk which is the
internal signal leakage between the test ports The Isolation step measures
Load standards that are connected to one or both FieldFox test ports
Perform an isolation calibration when you are testing a device with high
insertion loss such as the stop band of a filter or a switch in the open position
The isolation step can add noise to the error model when the measurement is
very close to the noise floor of the analyzer To improve measurement
accuracy set a narrow IF Bandwidth during the calibration
The Isolation step is NOT allowed with ECal or QuickCal
How to perform the Isolation step
—Press Cal 5 then Mechanical Cal ECal
—Then Advanced
—Then Omit Isolation
— OFF Perform the Isolation step
— ON (default) Omits the Isolation step
—Then — Configure and perform the calibration as usual At the first step of the Cal
you will be prompted to connect a Load standard to one or both test ports
— This setting survives an Instrument Preset
Waveguide Calibrations
In general calibrating with Waveguide is very similar to calibrating with coax
However most coax mechanical Cal Kits have standards that can be used over
a very wide frequency range Waveguide Cal Kits are used over a narrow
frequency range Therefore it is VERY IMPORTANT to set the frequency range
If the first calibration step does NOT prompt you to connect Load standards
then the Cal Kit probably does not contain an Isolation standard You can
use DataLink software to edit the Cal Kit and add an isolation standard
using a Load standard See Data Link Help for more information
httpnasupportkeysightcomhelpDataLinkHelpDataLinkhtm 138 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
of the measurement WITHIN the frequency range of the waveguide Cal Kit
Otherwise an error message will appear during the Calculating Steps’ portion
of the calibration
Waveguide Cal Kits
Keysight sells two waveguide Cal Kit series the premium 11644A series and
the economy N9911X series Both are available online at wwwKeysightcom
Effective Velocity Factor
Velocity factor is the speed at which an electromagnetic signal passes through
the transmission medium relative to the speed of light This value is important
when distance is being calculated in DTF measurements (CAT mode) and Time
Domain (NA mode)
When the media is waveguide the velocity factor changes with frequency
FieldFox calculates this effective’ velocity factor automatically However the
settings are different for CAT mode and NA mode
CAT Mode How to make Waveguide settings
These settings are necessary ONLY when making DTF measurements
—Press Measure 1 then Distance to Fault (dB) to select a DTF measurement
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Settings (Learn how to use the Quick Settings table in How to view
and change Quick Settings on page 48)
—Set Media Waveguide Frequency Mode BandPass is automatically
selected for you
—Scroll down to Waveguide Definitions Select the Waveguide Standard
being used If your waveguide standard is NOT listed
— Select User Waveguide Then press Done
—Then DTF Cable Specifications then EditSaveRecall Cables then
Edit Cable
—Scroll to set Waveguide Definition The default setting is VF Corr
Auto
— Set the Min Max and Cutoff Frequencies
—Press Done then press Back
— Cable Correction Auto is the default setting The Effective Velocity Factor
is calculated automatically based on the frequencies of the waveguide
standard To override this setting set Cable Corr Man
NA Mode How to make Waveguide settings
These settings are necessary ONLY when your measurement requires electrical
delay or port extensions or if using Time Domain TransformKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 139
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Transform
—Then Transform Settings
—Under Transform Stimulus Settings set the Start and Stop frequencies to
those of the Waveguide
—Set Stimulus Bandpass Impulse
—Press Done
—Press Meas Setup 4 or Back
—Then Calibration Settings
—Set Media Waveguide
—Set Cutoff Frequency This is the absolute minimum frequency of the
waveguide This value must be less than the Start Frequency of the
Waveguide
Enter the calculated Effective VF value into the Velocity Factor setting
Enhanced Response Optimization
When Enhanced Response Cal Type is selected either for one calibration or for
CalReady this setting optimizes the calibration based on the type of DUT
being measured See also CalReady Properties in CalReady on page 123
This setting does NOT survive Preset
—Press Cal 5 then More
—Then EnhResponse
— Then choose from
— NonReciprocal (default) An amplifier is a NonReciprocal device
because it has gain in the forward direction and very high loss
(isolation) in the reverse direction This choice provides the best
correction for nonreciprocal devices and reasonable correction for
reciprocal devices
— Reciprocal A reciprocal DUT is a device in which the insertion loss
through the device is equal in both the forward (S21) and reverse
(S12) directions A cable is a reciprocal device This choice provides
the best correction for reciprocal devices However S11
measurements on nonreciprocal devices will appear to have more
return loss than the nonreciprocal choice 140 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
Interpolation *
Highest measurement accuracy is achieved when the frequency range or
resolution settings remain the same during the measurement as when the
FieldFox was calibrated If these settings change after performing a calibration
the FieldFox will interpolate the calibration so that VERY accurate
measurements continue to be made
Interpolated Calibrations are only slightly less accurate than a calibration
performed at the measurement settings Learn more about the relative
accuracy of FieldFox calibrations in Cal ON – Questionable Accuracy on
page 140
When a calibration that you performed is being interpolated an asterisk is
added to the Cal annotation For example Cal ON U* is shown on the screen
when the current Response or Mechanical cal is being interpolated An * is
never added to a CalRdy
Cal ON – Questionable Accuracy
When the Output Power Interference Rejection or IF BW (NA Mode ONLY)
setting is changed AFTER performing a calibration a question mark is added to
the Cal annotation For example Cal ON Q is shown on the screen when the
current QuickCal is being interpolated A is never added to CalRdy
The resulting measurement accuracy depends on how much the setting has
changed For highest accuracy recalibrate using the new settings
Compatible Mode Calibrations
The FieldFox can have only ONE calibration present for all modes Because NA
CAT and VVM modes are very similar a calibration that is performed in one
mode can also be applied in the other modes with the same type of
measurements (1port or 2port)
To apply a Cal that was performed in a different mode press Cal 5 then select
User Cal ON
Save the Calibration
After performing any type of calibration you can save the FieldFox settings
along with the calibration into a STATE (*sta) file These settings and
calibration can then be recalled as necessary To learn how see Saving and
Recalling Files on page 544
QuickCal is only available on N991xA2xA3xA modelsKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 141
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
CalReady Properties
There are several factory calibrations (CalReady) on every FieldFox These can
be selected based on the type of DUT that you measure most often and the
compromise that you prefer to make between measurement speed versus
measurement accuracy Remember CalReady was performed at the test ports
Therefore a CalReady calibration is most accurate when the DUT is directly
connected to the test ports Learn more in CalReady on page 123
This setting does NOT survive Preset or Power ONOFF
—Press Cal 5 then More
—Then press CalReady to toggle between the following selections
— 2Port Cal (default) Corrects all four Sparameters Requires a
forward and reverse sweep which causes slower trace
measurements Learn why in Calibration Type on page 134
— Enh Response Corrects forward (S21 and S11) and reverse (S12 and
S22) measurements separately Therefore when measurements in
only one direction are required this choice provides faster trace
measurements than a full 2port cal Also choose an Enhanced
Response Optimization Learn more in Enhanced Response
Optimization on page 139
To find the best choice for your DUT
—Press Preset then Preset
— Select the appropriate SParameter and other settings (frequency range
resolution and so forth)
—Press Trace 6 then Math and Memory then Data>Mem
—Press Data & Memory
—Press Cal 5 then More
— Select a CalReady Cal to compare with the current setting
—Press Esc to exit the cal menu
— View the differences in the two traces 142 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
Verifying Calibration and Jumper Cable Integrity
Verifying Calibration and Jumper Cable Integrity
After calibrating it is important to verify that the calibration is good When
using a jumper cable also verify that the cable is of high quality
Verify a Calibration
— Connect a LOAD standard at the calibration reference plane (where
calibration standards were connected) This may be at the end of the
jumper cable or at FieldFox PORT 1 connector
—In CAT Mode select Return Loss
—In NA Mode select S11 with Log Mag format
— For frequencies lower than 9 GHz observe the trace on the FieldFox
screen
— Lower than 35 dB indicates a GOOD calibration
— Higher than 30 dB indicates that you should recalibrate
Verifying Phase Accuracy
— Connect a LOAD standard at the calibration reference plane (where
calibration standards were connected)
— In NA Mode select a S11 Reflection with Polar or Smith Chart format
— Because all LOAD standards have delay you should see a small amount of
phase rotation as a function of frequency In general the measurement
result should agree with the characteristics of the calibration standard
Test the Jumper Cable
With the LOAD standard still connected move the jumper cable while
observing the trace
— If the measurement trace is relatively stable the jumper cable is of good
quality
— If you observe significant movement in the peaks of the measurement trace
when moving the cable (>5 dB) the jumper cable may need to be replacedKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 143
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
Calibration Method Summary
Calibration Method Summary
— Mechanical Full 2port Cal is ALWAYS the most accurate Cal method The
quality of a Mechanical Cal is completely dependent on the quality of the
OPEN SHORT LOAD standards and the quality of the standard
connections Use the correct high quality standards to ensure the most
accurate calibration
— QuickCal is ideal for DTF measurements QuickCal should be performed
when good accuracy is required and when using a jumper cable or adapter
— QuickCal is NOT recommended when the DUT has 35 mmfemale or
SMAfemale connectors
— Even with the optional Load phase accuracy begins to degrade when
the return loss is greater than about 20dB
— CalReady is accurate ONLY when the DUT is directly connected at the test
ports and most accurate at room temperature
— For highest accuracy a new QuickCal or Mechanical Cal should be
performed
— When the temperature changes more than about 10°F (5°C)
— When the connection to the DUT requires a different jumper cable or
adapters
— When any of the following measurement settings change Frequency
Range Power Level IF BW and Resolution
QuickCal is only available on N991xA2xA3xA models 144 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Calibration for NA CAT and VVM Modes
Calibration Method Summary 145
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
9 SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode measures signals at the SA RF IN connector
SA Mode measurements require NO calibration
For a comprehensive SA mode tutorial see Spectrum Analysis Basics (App
Note 150) at httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59520292pdf
For information on using the FieldFox Remote Viewer which enables you to
view the FieldFox from your iOS device refer to
httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59912938ENpdf
Figure 91 SA Display with Markers
The graphic above shows an SA display with markers
Carrier with 5 kHz frequency modulation and deviation of 1 kHz
To better reflect the enhancements implemented during the alignment
process for firmware versions >A1015 IF Flatness Alignment is now
referred to as Channel Equalization or Channel Equalization Alignment
(ChanEQ Alignment) 146 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
In this Chapter
Frequency Range on page 148
Radio Standard on page 150
Channel Selection on page 151
Reverse Swap on page 153
Scale and Units on page 153
External Gain on page 154
Attenuation Control on page 154
Preamplifier Control (Opt 235) on page 155
Check for Compressed Measurements on page 155
Field Strength Measurements on page 156
Using the AntennaCable Editor on page 158
Source Tracking Offset and Offset Reversal on page 160
Tune & Listen (AMFM) on page 161
Independent SourceTracking Generator on page 163
Resolution Bandwidth (Res BW) on page 165
Video Bandwidth (Video BW) on page 166
Sweep Type on page 166
IF Output on page 167
Sweep Acquisition on page 169
Very Long Sweep Times on page 170
Zero Span Measurements on page 170
Triggering on page 172
FFT Gating (Opt 238) on page 175
Single Continuous Restart on page 177
Points on page 177
Trace Display States (SA Mode) on page 178
Average Type on page 179
Average Count on page 179
Alignments on page 180Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 147
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
See Also
RF Burst Amplitude Alignment on page 185
Detection Method on page 187
Display Line on page 189
Noise Marker on page 190
BandInterval Power Marker on page 190
Frequency Counter at Marker on page 191
Audio Beep at Marker Power on page 192
Meas UNCAL Error on page 193
Old Data Indicator (*) on page 193
Radio Standards and Channel Measurements on page 194
Measurement Preset on page 194
Averaging on page 194
Traces on page 195
Channel Power (CHP) on page 195
Interference Analyzer
RecordPlayback (SA Option) on page 313
Waterfall Display on page 311
RecordPlayback (SA Option) on page 313
Optional Settings
All about Markers on page 484
All about Limit Lines on page 499
Saving and Recalling Files on page 544 148 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
SA Mode Settings
Select SA Mode before making any setting in this chapter
Because there is no calibration these settings can be made in any order
How to select SA Mode
—Press Mode_
—Then SA
Frequency Range
The Xaxis frequency range determines the frequencies that are measured for
each sweep The default Start frequency is 0 Hz However the Start frequency
can be set as low as –100 MHz The internal LO of the FieldFox can be seen at
0 Hz which will mask signals that may be present
Available ONLY with Opt 209 and while in Step sweep SA mode allows reverse
sweeps This means the Start frequency can be higher than the Stop
frequency In addition the Reverse Swap feature can be used to quickly
reverse the Start and Stop frequencies Learn how in Reverse Swap on
page 153
The frequency range of the measurement can be changed using the following
methods
— Set Center and Span frequencies
— Set Start and Stop frequencies
— Toggle between Zero and Last selected span
— Set Full Span of the FieldFox
— Using Channel selection Learn how in Channel Selection on page 151
— Using Marker > Center (frequency) Learn how in SA Marker Functions
on page 498
How to set Frequency Range
—Press FreqDist
— Then choose from the following
—Center and Freq Span frequencies This is the most common method
of entering frequency range Enter the frequency of interest The
Center frequency is at the exact center of the Xaxis The Frequency
Although the start frequency can be set as low as 100 MHz amplitude
accuracy is specified above 100 kHz Below 100 kHz frequency accuracy
is maintained but amplitude accuracy is degradedKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 149
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
Span places half of the frequency range on either side of center
When the Center and Frequency Span values are entered then the
Xaxis annotation on the screen shows the Center and Span
frequencies
—Start and Stop frequencies Start is the beginning of the Xaxis and
Stop is the end of the Xaxis When the Start and Stop frequencies
are entered then the Xaxis annotation on the screen shows the Start
and Stop frequencies
— Follow each of these by entering a value using the numeric keypad the
arrows or the rotary knob
— When using the arrows press Enter The increment setting of the
arrows is based on the current span This can be changed in SA Mode See
How to change frequency step size below
— After using the keypad select a multiplier key Learn more in Multiplier
Abbreviations on page 43
Two more ways to change the frequency range
—Press FreqDist
— Then choose from the following
—ZeroLast Span Each key press toggles the frequency span between 0
Hz and the last specified frequency span Learn more about Zero
Span in Zero Span Measurements on page 170
—More
—Then Full Span Selects the entire frequency span of the FieldFox The
Center frequency is set automatically
How to change frequency step size
When using the arrows to change any of the frequency settings the size
of the frequency step can be changed
—Press FreqDist
—Then More
—Then CF Step Auto Manual
—Auto Each press of the arrows increments or decrements the
value by 110th (one division) of the current frequency span Note To
change this setting from Manual to Auto press CF Step twice
—Manual Type a step size value using the numeric keypad then select a
multiplier key Learn more in Multiplier Abbreviations on page 43 150 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
Radio Standard
A Radio Standard is a collection of settings that are applied to the FieldFox for
specific RF protocols When a Radio Standard is applied the FieldFox
frequency and channel settings change to that of the standard
By default the FieldFox locates the center frequency of the standard in the
middle of the screen and sets the frequency span to cover all of the Uplink and
Downlink frequencies The selected Radio Standard name appears in the
center of the screen below the Xaxis
After a Radio Standard has been selected the frequency range can be
changed by selecting channel numbers rather than frequency Learn how in
How to set Frequency Range on page 148
When a Channel Measurement is selected such as ACPR other relevant
settings will be changed such as Integration BW Learn more about Radio
Standards and Channel Measurements in Radio Standards and Channel
Measurements on page 194
How to select a Radio Standard
—Press Measure 1 OR FreqDist then More
—Then Radio Standard
—Then Radio Standard
— Then select a standard using the arrows or rotary knob and press
Enter
Custom Radio Standards
Your own custom Radio Standards can be imported into the FieldFox Custom
standards are created in *csv (spreadsheet) format
A template and instructions for creating your custom Radio Standard is at
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpReferenceCustomRa
dioStandardhtm
Once imported the *csv file is stored in the FieldFox ＼User Data＼ folder The
custom Radio Standards are read and presented at the top of the list of internal
Radio Standards
How to Import and Delete a Custom Radio Standard
First press SaveRecall and select the Device from which the Radio Standard
will be read Most likely this will be USB or SD Card
—Press Measure 1 OR FreqDist then More
—Then Radio Standard
—Then Radio StandardKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 151
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
—Then Import Radio Standards
— Then select the *csv file using the arrows or rotary knob and press
Enter
— Custom Radio Standards can be removed from the FieldFox by selecting
Measure 1 then Radio Standard then Delete Radio Standard
— Then select the *csv file to delete using the arrows or rotary knob and
press Enter
Channel Selection
After a Radio Standard has been selected the frequency range can be
changed by selecting channel numbers rather than frequency Once enabled
the channel number is appended to the Xaxis frequency range
How to Enable Channel selection
—Press FreqDist
—Then More
—Then Unit Freq Chan
With Unit Chan Channel Direction becomes available and CF Step alters to
Channel Step
How to change the Channel Number of the Measurement
With Unit Chan the FieldFox will NOT allow you to specify channels outside
of the selected Radio Standard
—Press FreqDist
— Then choose from the following
—Center Channel Places the center frequency of the specified channel
in the middle of the Xaxis
—Start Channel Places the lowest frequency of the specified channel at
the beginning of the Xaxis
—Stop Channel Places the highest frequency of the specified channel at
the end of the Xaxis
—Freq Span Changes the span of frequencies while the center frequency
remains unchanged
To overwrite a custom standard that is already uploaded to the FieldFox
you must first delete the *csv file from the FieldFox then reupload the file
that contains the standard A predefined internal standard (such as GSM
450) can NOT be deleted from the FieldFox 152 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
—Follow each of the above settings by entering a value using the
numeric keypad or the rotary knob
—Use the arrows to increment the channel number by an amount
specified by the Channel Step value (see below)
—Then press Enter or Enter
Select either Uplink or Downlink Frequencies
Press FreqDist then More Press Chan Direction to toggle between Uplink
and Downlink If either of these selections is not available then the selected
Radio Standard does not contain those frequencies In that case Chan
Direction is grayed out
Channel number Xaxis annotation
— Dn indicates Downlink channels
— Up (not shown) indicates Uplink channels
— (−) indicates that the lowest frequency in the channel (128) is at the left
edge of the screen
— (+) indicates that the highest frequency in the channel (130) is at the right
edge of the screen
— When Center Channel or Freq Span is specified the Xaxis shows the
Center Freq (Channel) and Frequency Span
— When Start or Stop Channel is specified the Xaxis shows the Start Freq
(Channel) and Stop Freq (Channel)
Change Channel Step Size (Optional)
This setting allows you to use the arrows to increment the channel
number by the specified value The Channel Step softkey appears only when it
is valid Learn how to make it valid in the section See How to change the
Channel Number of the measurement
—Press FreqDist then More
—Press Channel Step
— Enter a step value using the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary
knob Then press Enter Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 153
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
Reverse Swap
Available ONLY with Opt 209 and while in Step sweep mode Each press of the
softkey causes the Start and Stop frequencies to swap The Start becomes the
Stop and vice versa Learn more about Step versus FFT sweeps in FFT Gating
(Opt 238) on page 175
—Press FreqDist then More
—Then Reverse Swap
Scale and Units
Adjust the Yaxis scale to see the relevant portions of the data trace
The Yaxis is divided into 10 graticules A acquisition is shown on the screen as
a solid horizontal bar that can be placed at any graticule
When RF Attenuation set to Auto the RF Attenuation is coupled to acquisition
How to set Scale
Press Scale Amptd Then choose from the following
— Scale Type [current setting]
—Log Logarithmic scale (default setting) The Yaxis reference line
represents the specified absolute acquisition in the current Unit
selection Yaxis graticules show dB below or above the reference
line
—Lin Linear scale The Yaxis reference line represents the specified
absolute acquisition in the current Unit selection Yaxis graticules
show percent of acquisition () below or above the reference line
Manually set Scale acquisition and Reference Position
—Press More then Autoscale Automatically adjusts the Yaxis to comfortably
fit the Minimum and Maximum amplitude of the trace on the screen
— Scale Manually adjust the scale per division to view specific areas of the
current trace Enter a value using the numeric keypad the arrows or
the rotary knob Then press Enter
— Ref Level Manually set the value of the reference line Enter a negative
value by pressing RunHold (+) either before or after typing a value This
can also change the RF Attenuation setting See Attenuation Control on
page 154
— Ref Pos Manually set the position of the reference line Values must be
between 0 (TOP line) and 10 (BOTTOM line) Default position is zero (top) 154 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
How to Set Yaxis Units
The Unit setting appears for the reference line marker readouts and trigger
level All Unit choices are available in both Log and Linear Scale Types
The UNIT setting survives Mode Preset but NOT Preset
—Press Scale Amptd then More then Unit
— Then choose from the following
—dBm (default setting) dBmV (dB milli Volts) dBuV (dB microVolts) W
(watts) V (volts) A (amps) dBmA (dB milliAmps) dBuA (dB
microAmps)
Antenna correction units are available ONLY by loading or editing an Antenna
file that contains the desired units setting Learn more In
External Gain
When using an external amplifier or attenuator the SA mode trace amplitude
values can be offset to compensate for the effect of the external device This
effectively moves the reference plane of the SA measurement port out to just
beyond the external device For example when using an external preamp with
gain of +10 dB enter this value for External Gain and the data trace across the
displayed frequency span will be adjusted down by 10 dB
When RF Atten is set to Auto you may see a change in the RF Attenuation
value This is an attempt to measure the signal at top of screen (the
acquisition) without overloading the SA first mixer
How to Set External Gain
—Press ScaleAmptd
—Then More
—Then External Gain
— Enter a value using the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary knob
(positive for gain negative for loss) Values less than 5 dB must be typed
using the numeric keypad Then press Enter
ExtGain xx dB is shown at the top of the screen
Attenuation Control
Both the RF Attenuation and Preamp functions control the power level into the
SA
When too much power is present at the RF Input port ADC Over Range
appears on the FieldFox screen This does not necessarily mean that damage
has occurred but that the measurement is probably compressed Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 155
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
When high power levels are present at the RF Input port internal attenuation
can be switched in to keep the FieldFox receiver from compressing At
extremely high power levels use external attenuation to protect the internal
circuitry from being damaged
The displayed power level is automatically adjusted for RF Attenuation As the
attenuation value changes the displayed power level should NOT change
How to set Attenuation
—Press ScaleAmptd
—Then RF Atten Auto Man
— Auto RF Attenuation is set by adjusting the acquisition As the acquisition is
lowered for example from –10 dBm to –30 dBm the FieldFox assumes that
you are looking at lowlevel signals The RF Attenuation value is
automatically lowered in 5 dB steps to allow lowlevel signals to be viewed
The RF Attenuation value is never automatically lowered below 5 dB
— Man RF Attenuation is set manually The default Attenuation setting is 10
dB Enter a value between 0 to 30 dB in 5 dB steps using the numeric
keypad the arrows or the rotary knob Then press Enter
#Atten xx dB is shown at the top of the screen (#) means manual setting
Preamplifier Control (Opt 235)
When very lowlevel signals are analyzed an internal preamplifier can be used
to boost the signal level by approximately 22 dB The gain of the preamp is
NOT adjustable The displayed signal level is automatically adjusted for the
increase in system gain
How to control the Preamp
By default the preamp is OFF
—Press ScaleAmptd
—Then Preamp ON OFF The underlined setting is the current setting When
ON PA is shown to the left of the graticules on the display
Check for Compressed Measurements
Compression occurs when too much power into an amplifier causes it to no
longer amplify in a linear manner When too much power goes into the
FieldFox RF Input connector the amplifiers in the SA receiver compress and
The FieldFox can be damaged with too much power
RF Damage Level +25 dBm (N995xA & N996xA) and +27 dBm (all others)
DC Damage Level ±50 VDC 156 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
signal power will not be displayed accurately This can occur even if ADC Over
Range is not displayed because devices other than the ADC such as the mixer
might be compressed Increase the RF Attenuation value to prevent the SA
receiver from being compressed
How to Check for a Compressed Measurement
— Using a marker at the signal peak make note of the signal power level
— Increase the RF Attenuation level by 5 dB
—If the signal level does NOT change then NO compression exists This
indicates that the signal is in the linear region of the FieldFox
receiver
—If the signal level DOES increase then the receiver was compressed
Set the RF Attenuation value at the setting when further increases no
longer result in an increase in the displayed power level
Field Strength Measurements
To measure the strength of any signal transmitted through the air an antenna
must be connected to the FieldFox The Field Strength feature allows you to
enter the frequency response of the receiving antenna (the Antenna Factor)
and associated cabling and then have amplitude corrections automatically
compensate the displayed trace for that response
Field Strength Measurements
Trace 1 Corrected trace with antenna factor (Antenna ON Apply Corr
ON)
Trace 2 Uncorrected trace (Apply Corr OFF) The Trace 2 trace state is
View For information refer to Trace Display States (SA Mode) on page 178
Pink Trace Current correction factor See below
— Learn how to set YAxis Units on How to Set Yaxis Units on page 154Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 157
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
— Use a Band Power marker to measure total power over a range of
frequencies Learn how in BandInterval Power Marker on page 190
How to select and edit corrections for Field Strength measurements
The Antenna and Cable correction data survives a Mode Preset and Preset
All Correction ONOFF states survive a Mode Preset but NOT a Preset
—Press ScaleAmptd
—Then More
—Then Corrections
— Then choose from the following
—Apply Corrections ON OFF Turn ON and OFF correction for all settings
—SrcSide Antenna Off On EditRecall an Antenna file to be used to
transmit
—RcvrSide Antenna Off On EditRecall an Antenna file to be used to
receive
—SrcSide Cable Off On EditRecall a Cable file to be used on the
Source side
—RcvrSide Cable Off On EditRecall a Cable file to be used on the
Receiver side
—View Corrections ON OFF Turn ON and OFF Pink Trace
AntennaCable corrections This is a composite of all cableantenna
corrections that are currently applied Available as a useful visual aid
the zero dB level (no net correction) is mapped to appear at the
50 dBm onscreen level
The following menu appears when any of the above Antenna or Cable softkeys
are pressed
— AntennaCable ON OFF Turn correction ON or OFF for this AntennaCable
— Edit AntennaCable Edit an AntennaCable Correction table See Using the
AntennaCable Editor (below) for more information
— New Create a new AntennaCable See Using the AntennaCable Editor
(below) for more information
— Save AntennaCable Save the modified AntennaCable to a file on the
specified Storage Device
— Recall AntennaCable Read an existing AntennaCable file from the
specified Storage Device
— Storage Device Choose from Internal USB SD Learn more about these
selections in Set File Type and Select Device on page 549
When finished press Back to return to the previous menu 158 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
Using the AntennaCable Editor
The Antenna Editor and the Cable Editor menus are very similar Both tables
include header information and a FrequencyValue table
Figure 92 FieldFox Antenna Editor
How to use the AntennaCable Editor
—Press New then Yes to clear all data from the existing Antenna or Cable
table and reset header information to default settings
—Then Edit Antenna or Edit Cable to open the Antenna Cable Editor
— Then use the arrows to select a field
— To edit header information press Edit then modify the selected field
using the FieldFox labeler
——Description Enter a description for the antenna or cable
correction table This is NOT the filename used to save the file
——Antenna Unit (Rcvrside Antennas only) Units in which the
measurement will be displayed Select NONE (default setting)
to select from standard SA Units on the Scale menu Learn how
in Scale and Units on page 153
——Choose from dB μVm (dB micro Volts per meter) dB μAm
(dB micro Amps per meter) dBG (gauss) dBpT (tesla)
——Freq Interpolation Set to LINear and can NOT be edited
— To edit FrequencyValue pairs enter numbers using the numeric
keypad and a frequency suffix when necessaryKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 159
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
——For both Cable and Antenna correction Positive numbers
indicate loss (we need ADD something positive to compensate
for it) and Negative is indicative of some existing gain
——Antenna Factor describes the dB value needed to accurately
display a farfield signal in terms that are in the units listed
below When the antenna has low gain or low efficiency the
dB value to be added is larger
—When one FreqValue pair is entered that correction value is applied
to the entire displayed frequency span
—When two or more FreqValue pairs are entered the data points
between the lowest and highest frequencies are corrected Linear
interpolation is applied between frequencies when necessary
— Optionally choose from the following
—Previous Next Page Quickly scrolls through pages of FreqValue
data
— Add Row Add a blank FreqValue pair to the table
—DeleteClear then
——Delete Row Remove the selected FreqValue pair from the
table
——Clear All then Yes Remove all FreqValue pairs from the table
and resets header information to default settings
When the table edits are complete
—Press Done to close the AntennaCable Editor
—Press Save Antenna or Save Cable to save your changes to the specified
Storage Device Enter a filename using the FieldFox labeler (learn more in
How to use the FieldFox labeler on page 546) Learn more about
Antenna and Cable files below
—Press Recall Antenna or Recall Cable to load an Antenna or Cable file from
the specified Storage Device
— Storage Device Changes the device used to save or recall files Choose
from Internal (default setting) USB (must be connected) or SD card This is
a different setting from the SaveRecall Storage Device setting
About Antenna and Cable files
— Cable files are saved and recalled from the Cables folder
— Antenna files are saved and recalled from the Antenna folder
—To DELETE Cable or Antenna files use the Manage Files feature Learn more
in Manage Files on page 552
— If the folder does not already exist on a USB or SD card it is created
automatically before storing the file 160 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
— All SA mode Antenna and Cable files are saved and recalled as *csv files
which allows them to also be read by spreadsheet programs
— The FieldFox can also read *ANT (Antenna) files that were created from
older Keysight Spectrum Analyzers
— SA Mode cable or antenna (*csv or *ANT) files can NOT be edited in Data
Link software
How to create a Cable file from an S21 (NA mode) or an Insertion Loss
(CAT mode) measurement
1 Measure the S21 or Insertion Loss of a cable In NA mode select either
LogMag Linear or VSWR formats
2 Use Manage Folders to change the active folder to CABLES Learn how in
Manage Files on page 552
3 While in NA mode save the measurement as a *csv file Learn how in How
to Save a File on page 544
4 In SA mode select Corrections then recall the *csv file for correction
Source Tracking Offset and Offset Reversal
This feature requires
— N991xA and N995xA FieldFox Combination Analyzers to have Options 209
210 and 233
— N993xA and N996xA Spectrum Analyzers to have Options 209 and 220
Source offset tracking is used to offset the Source frequency from the Receiver
frequency by a fixed offset at every tune frequency This feature is used when
the DUT contains a frequency translation device or mixer
How to set Tracking Offset and Offset Reversal
— On the Receiver unit press Meas 1
—Then Source
—Then Advanced
— Then choose one or both of the following
—Tracking Offset Enter an offset value
—OffsetReversal Determines whether Receiver Freq is added to or
subtracted from the Offset Freq
——OFF SourceFreq Offset + RecFreq Use to measure
UpconvertersKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 161
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
——ON SourceFreq Offset RecFreq Use to measure
Downconverters The source sweeps in Reverse direction
Note The Offset Freq MUST be larger than the Receiver Stop
Freq
Tune & Listen (AMFM)
The Tune & Listen feature can be used to identify an interfering AM or FM
signal
The demodulated AM or FM signal can be heard through the internal speaker
or through headphones using the 35 mm jack located on the FieldFox side
panel
The Tune & Listen tuner is separate from the SA display This allows you to
listen to one frequency while displaying a different range of frequencies The
Tune & Listen measurement alternates between normal SA sweeps for the
display and performing audio demodulation at the Tune Frequency See the
Listen Time setting for more information
Figure 93 Tune & Listen ON
In the graphic above Tune & Listen ON with Tune Frequency is indicated by a
vertical bar (highlighted)
How to select Tune & Listen
—Press Measure 1
—Then Analog Demod Tune & Listen 162 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
— Then choose a demodulation type Select a setting based on the type of
interfering signal you suspect is being broadcast
—None Turns Tune & Listen OFF
—AM Amplitude Modulation
—FM Narrow Frequency Modulation Narrow bandwidth Choose when
interfering transmission consist of voice or data
—FM Wide Frequency Modulation Wide bandwidth Choose for high
quality music transmissions of FM broadcast radio
Tune Frequency
The Tune & Listen tuner is separate from the SA display This allows you to
listen to one frequency while displaying a different range of frequencies
Set the Tune Frequency using one of three methods
1 Selecting Preset > Mode Preset sets Tune Frequency to 325 GHz(eg for
a N9914B FieldFox)
2 Specify Tune Frequency
— Press Meas Setup 4
— Then Tune Freq
— Enter a value using the numeric keypad arrows or the rotary
knob Then select a multiplier key Learn about multiplier
abbreviations Multiplier Abbreviations on page 43
3 Using Mkr>Tune Freq
— Create a normal marker at the frequency of interest Learn how in
How to create Markers on page 484
— Press Mkr>Tools
— Then Mkr>TuneFreq to change the Tune Frequency to that of the
marker
Listen Time
While Tune & Listen is actively demodulating a signal the SA does not sweep
and update the display Listen Time sets the amount of time that the FieldFox
demodulates then stops to perform a single sweep and update the display
then again demodulates
To improve sound quality try increasing power by reducing the
Attenuation setting and if available turn ON the Preamplifier Learn how
in Attenuation Control on page 154Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 163
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
To select Listen Time
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Listen Time
— Enter a value using the numeric keypad arrows or the rotary knob
Then select a multiplier key Learn about multiplier abbreviations
Volume Control
To increase or decrease the Volume of the demodulated signal
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Volume
— Enter a value in percent between 0 and 100 (loudest) using the numeric
keypad arrows or the rotary knob
— Volume can also be changed and easily muted from the System menu
Learn more in How to set the FieldFox Volume Control on page 512
Demod ON and OFF
To quickly stop the audio demodulation and perform only the normal SA
sweeps select the following
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Demod ON OFF
Independent SourceTracking Generator
This feature may require an option For a comprehensive list view the FieldFox
Configuration Guide at
httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59909836ENpdf
A tracking generator a popular option with Spectrum Analyzers is a source
which always tracks the SA receiver
Like a traditional tracking generator the Independent Source feature can set
the internal FieldFox source to track the SA receiver frequency range It can
also set the internal source to a CW frequency that is independent of the SA
frequency
Independent Source can be enabled ONLY when the FieldFox is in SA mode
To view the internal source you must connect a cable or device between the
RF Output connector and the RF Input connector
For best results when using the independent source feature InstAlign and
the battery saver features should be turned off Refer to How to Access
Individual Alignments on page 184 and Preferences on page 515 164 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
How to make Independent Source Settings
—Press Measure 1
—Then Source
— Source Enable ON OFF
— ON Turns ON the internal source
— OFF Turns OFF the internal source
— Source Mode Choose from the following
— Tracking The internal source frequency can track the SA receiver
Center frequency Src is annotated on the screen
— CW The source is set to a CW frequency independent from the SA
settings Srcw is annotated on the screen
— Coupled CW The source is set to a CW frequency but that frequency
tracks the SA receiver Center Frequency settings Therefore the
signal always appears at center of the display Srcp is annotated on
the screen
— Normalize ON OFF With Source Enable ON and Source Mode Tracking
Normalize ON stores the current measurement trace into Trace 4 in View
state as a reference trace All subsequent trace measurements subtract
this Trace 4 reference trace and therefore become relative to it SrcN is
annotated on the screen Normalize is automatically turned OFF when the
frequency range or Resolution is changed Learn more about Trace Display
States in Trace Display States (SA Mode) on page 178
— Source Power Sets the source power level Choose from
— Leveled Enter a value from 45 dBm to 0 dBm using the numeric
keypad arrows or the rotary knob1 The source power is
reasonably flat across the frequency span
— MAX The power level is set to the maximum achievable power level at
each frequency This results in the power level NOT being flat across
the frequency span
— Source CW Freq Sets the CW frequency that is used when Source Mode is
set to CW
To cause the source to stay ON at the end of each sweep turn battery saver
OFF (Learn more in How to Access Individual Alignments on page 184)
1 N995xA6xA cannot have the Leveled value set lower than –35 dBm
By default the source output will turn off momentarily at the end of each
IQA and SA sweep and also every 300 seconds during the InstAlign
process Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 165
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
—Press System 7
—Then Preferences
—Then Preferences
— In the table select Battery Saver Press Edit then Battery Saver ON OFF
To suspend InstAlign (Learn more in How to Access Individual
Alignments on page 184)
—Press Cal 5
—Then Amptd Alignment OFF
Resolution Bandwidth (Res BW)
In SA Mode the Res BW provides the ability to resolve or see closely spaced
signals The narrower (lower) the Res BW the better the spectrum analyzer can
resolve signals In addition as the Res BW is narrowed less noise is measured
by the spectrum analyzer ADC and the noise floor on the display lowers as a
result This allows low level signals to be seen and measured However as the
Res BW is narrowed the sweep speed becomes slower See Very Long Sweep
Times on page 170
How to set Res BW
—Press BW 2
—Then Res BW
— Then choose from the following
—Auto Res BW is coupled to the frequency span As the frequency span
is narrowed the Res BW is also narrowed providing increased ability
to resolve signals
To change this setting from Man to Auto press Res BW twice
—Man Enter a Res BW value using the numeric keypad the arrows
or the rotary knob Then press a multiplier if necessary or press Enter
The current Res BW setting is shown at the bottom of the screen
#Res BW xxx XHz (#) means manual setting
This setting could impact the accuracy of the measurement See Specifications
in Appendix B
The Res BW setting also affects the Sweep Type setting Learn how in
Sweep Type on page 166 166 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
Video Bandwidth (Video BW)
Video BW is a smoothing operation that is performed after measurement data
is acquired The trace data is effectively smoothed so that the average power
level of the displayed noise is the same but the peaks and valleys of adjacent
data points are smoothed together More smoothing occurs as the Video BW is
set lower However as the Video BW is narrowed the sweep speed becomes
slower
How to set VBW
—Press BW 2
—Then Video BW
— Then choose from the following
—Auto Couples Video BW to the ResBW in a 1to1 ratio
—Man Enter a Video BW value using the numeric keypad the
arrows or the rotary knob Then press a multiplier if necessary or
press Enter Setting VBW higher than RBW may smooth the trace

The current Video BW setting is shown at the bottom of the screen
# VBW xxx XHz (#) means manual setting
When the Res BWVideo BW ratio exceeds 10000 a Meas UNCAL warning
may appear to indicate that the Video BW filter has reached the maximum
capacity for averaging
Sweep Type
In SA mode the FieldFox uses two sweep types to process inputs signals The
sweep type that is currently being used (FFT or Step) is displayed in the
lowerleft corner of the FieldFox screen
For a more comprehensive tutorial see Spectrum Analysis Basics (App Note
150) at httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59520292pdf
How to set Sweep Type
—Press BW 2
—Then Advanced
—Then Sweep Type
— Then choose from the following
To change this setting from Man to Auto press Video BW twiceKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 167
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
—Auto The FieldFox selects the most efficient sweep type based on the
Res BW When Res BW is set to 200 kHz and below FFT sweep type
is selected Above 200 kHz Step sweep type is being performed
—FFT The FieldFox uses FFT sweep type regardless of the Res BW
—Step The FieldFox uses Step sweep type regardless of the Res BW
This is useful for capturing impulsive noise that may be generated
from nearby electrical equipment
IF Output
The FieldFox IF (intermediate frequency) can be output for external signal
processing The signal is available from the IF Out connector on the FieldFox
rightside panel See the connector in Right Side Panel on page 38
The IF Out signal centered at approximately 3375 MHz is simply a
downconverted version of the RF Input signal that is present at the tuned
frequency
While outputting an IF signal the FieldFox stops performing the InstAlign
process Therefore the amplitude of traces on the FieldFox screen is NOT
accurate and Meas UNCAL appears on the screen to indicate this Learn more
in Individual Alignments on page 183
Learn more about the IF Output frequencies and bandwidths in the
Supplemental Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm 168 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
Figure 94 IF Output Wide with CF3375 MHz
How to select IF Output
The IF Output signal is useful only in Zero Span Learn more about Zero Span in
Zero Span Measurements on page 170
At least one sweep must be made in order to tune the FieldFox
—Press BW 2
—Then Advanced
—Then IF Output Use
— Then choose from the following
—OFF The translated IF signal at the IF OUT connector is no longer
guaranteed to be centered at 3375 MHz
—Narrow The IF output signal has approximately 5 MHz bandwidth
—Wide The IF output signal has approximately 25 MHz bandwidthKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 169
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
Sweep Acquisition
Available only in nonzero span measurements when Sweep Acquisition is set
to Auto the fastest sweep rate is achieved while maintaining full amplitude
accuracy
However you can adjust this setting in order to increase the probability of
intercepting and viewing pulsed RF signals
For example with SwpAcquisition set to Auto a pulsed GSM signal is NOT
visible on the FieldFox screen as shown in a blue trace in the following image
While watching the trace increase the SwpAcquisition value until the pulse
spectrum rises out of the noise and reaches its maximum level Increasing the
SwpAcquisition value beyond this point only slows the update rate (increases
the actual Sweep time readout) but does not improve measurement quality
Figure 95 GSM Signal in Framed Data Format
In the graphic above a GSM signal in a framed data format timeslot zero ON
all others OFF
PRF 218Hz Duty Cycle 125 The pulsed signal becomes visible on every
sweep update with SwpAcquisition 50
How to set Sweep Acquisition
SwpAcquisition is NOT an absolute measure of time but a relative number
between 1 (fastest) and 5000 (slowest) sweep time The actual time that was
required to complete a sweep is annotated on the screen
—Press Sweep 3
For zero span measurements refer to Zero Span Measurements on
page 170 170 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
—Then SwpAcquisition Auto Man
— Then choose from the following
——Auto Sweep is set to the fastest sweep possible with the current
settings
——Man Enter a relative acquisition value between 1 and 5000
where
— Man Enter a relative acquisition value between 1 and 5000 where
——1 Fastest sweep possible
——5000 Slowest sweep possible
——# is shown in front of the actual sweep time to indicate a
manual setting
Some Detector and Video Bandwidth settings will raise the Auto Sweep
Acquisition value greater than 1 In these cases manually setting Sweep
Acquisition lower than the Auto value may have NO effect
Learn more about SA mode SwpAcquisition time in the Supplemental Online
Help httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm
Very Long Sweep Times
Two primary settings are responsible for the sweep time Res BW and
SwAcquisition
— When the sweep time exceeds 1200 seconds (20 minutes) an informational
message Alert Very long sweep in progress… is annotated on the screen
for the duration of the sweep
— When the sweep time exceeds 4000 seconds (about 1 hour) Meas UNCAL
is annotated on the screen Accuracy cannot be guaranteed
— InstAlign is always performed only at the beginning of the sweep regardless
of the sweep time Learn more in How to Access Individual Alignments
on page 184
Zero Span Measurements
When setting the frequency span to Zero there is NO spectrum of frequencies
to display so the Xaxis units becomes Time The SA becomes like a tunable
oscilloscope with the center frequency being the frequency of interest This
capability is useful for analyzing modulation characteristics such as pulsed
measurements
Measurement speed specifications do NOT apply in Temperature Control
Mode Learn more in Temperature Control Mode on page 31Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 171
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
Figure 96 GSM Signal Framed Data Format
The graphic above shows a GSM signal framed data format with timeslot 0
and 3 on Sweep Time is set to approximately the frame interval Press Single
several times until the waveform section of interest is viewable and stable
Then markers can be used to measure the timeslot width and interval as
shown
How to set Zero Span
—Set Center to the frequency of interest
— then set Span to 0 Hz
—or select ZeroLast Span Each key press toggles the frequency span
between 0 Hz and the last specified frequency span
How to change Sweep Time in Zero Span
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Sweep Time
— Enter a value using the numeric keypad Sweep time is limited to 1000
seconds for N991xA2xA3xA models and 6000 seconds for N995xA &
N996xA models
— Then select a multiplier key Learn more in Multiplier Abbreviations on
page 43
For nonzero span measurements refer to Sweep Acquisition on
page 169 172 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
Previous FieldFox versions limited the sweep time ResBW settings This
restriction is no longer necessary with release A0625
Learn more about SA mode Sweep Time in the Supplemental Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm
Triggering
External Video and RF Burst triggering allows you to initiate an SA mode
sweep using an external event such as a signal burst
All three trigger types can be used in either Zero Span (time domain) or FFT
frequency sweeps Learn more in Zero Span Measurements on page 170
Learn more in Sweep Type on page 166
FFT Gating is available for nonzero span measurements Learn more about
FFT Gating in FFT Gating (Opt 238) on page 175
Trigger Type
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger Settings
—Then Trig Type
— Then choose from the following
—Free Run Triggering is provided by the FieldFox internal circuitry A
new sweep begins when the previous sweep ends
—External A sweep is triggered on an external TTL signal at the Ref
InTrig In connector on the FieldFox top panel Choose to trigger on
the rising slope at about 17 V or on the falling slope at about 10 V
using the Trigger Slope setting (below)
The following two selections are similar in that they both a trigger a sweep
from a signal at the SA RF Input connector Experiment with both selections to
find the best trigger type for your application
— Video A sweep is initiated when the displayed amplitude of an incoming
signal crosses the settable Trigger Level This selection can detect
lowamplitude signals but also has been filtered considerably and may not
be a true representation of the incoming signal
— RF Burst A sweep is initiated when the signal at the third IF (analog) stage
crosses the settable Trigger Level This selection offers a wider bandwidth
and may be a better representation of the incoming signal than Video
trigger However RF Burst is not as sensitive to triggering on lowlevel
signals
Trigger Slope
Trigger Slope determines which edge of an External Video or RF Burst trigger
signal initiates a sweep Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 173
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger Settings
—Then Trig Slope
— Then choose from the following
—Po Sweep is triggered by the rising (positive) edge of signal
—Neg Sweep is triggered by the falling (negative) edge of signal
Trigger Delay
After a valid trigger signal is received the sweep begins after the specified
Trigger Delay time
To see the rising edge of a repetitive signal which is triggered on that edge
enter a negative trigger delay value (also known as pretrigger) Adjust the
sweep time to observe the pretrigger time if necessary
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger Settings
—Then Trig Delay
— Enter a value using the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary
knob
— Then select a multiplier key or press Enter Learn more in Multiplier
Abbreviations on page 43
In Zero span you can use Trigger Position as an easy way to set Trigger Delay
by positioning the trigger event on the FieldFox screen See Triggering on
page 172
Trigger Level
Used with Video and RF Burst triggering a sweep is initiated when an
incoming signal crosses this level The units depend on the Units setting Learn
more in Scale and Units on page 153
RF Burst Trigger Level uses an alignment process which is performed in the
background to set the detected signal level accuracy Learn more in RF Burst
Amplitude Alignment on page 185 Video Trigger Level is a zero span signal
level comparison Therefore the sweep will trigger close to the displayed level
in zero span measurements In nonzero span measurements processing can
cause broadband signal energy to display at lower power levels than the
originating time domain signal Therefore you may need to set the trigger level
higher than the displayed level
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger Settings
—Then Trig Level 174 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
— Enter a value using the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary
knob
— Then select a multiplier key or press Enter Learn more in Multiplier
Abbreviations on page 43
Auto Trigger Time
While waiting for a valid trigger signal Wait is annotated in the top left corner
of the FieldFox screen
If a valid trigger signal is not received before the specified Auto Trig Time a
sweep will occur automatically
Enter 0 to set Auto Trigger OFF When Auto Trigger is OFF the FieldFox does
NOT sweep unless a valid trigger signal is received
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger Settings
—Then Auto Trigger [current setting]
— Enter an Auto Trig Time using the numeric keypad
— Then select a multiplier key See Multiplier Abbreviations on page 43
Trigger Position
Available ONLY in zero span measurements this setting is an easy way to
automatically set the Trigger Delay by positioning the trigger event (also
known as Tzero) at any graticule along the Xaxis With Tzero in the center of
the screen you can zoom in and out by increasing or decreasing the sweep
time Using the Trigger Position and Sweep Time settings is a quick and
efficient way to examine artifacts of a pulse much easier than trying to set the
Trigger Delay manually
When Trigger Position is set to OFF the Trigger Delay softkey is not available
The amount of Trigger Delay that is being used is displayed on the softkey The
Trigger Position is annotated on the screen Learn how in the following section
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger Settings
—Then Trig Position If Sweep Time is longer than 015 sec this softkey is
grayed out
—ON The position of Tzero is set by the trigger delay
—OFF Select then enter a position value from 0 to 10 using the numeric
keypad the arrows or the rotary knob
——0 Tzero occurs at the left graticule
——5 Tzero occurs at the center of the screenKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 175
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
——10 Tzero occurs at the far right graticule
—Then press Enter
Trigger Settings Annotation
Trigger settings are annotated on the FieldFox screen as highlighted in red in
the following image
—Square Trig Type (VidT) AutoTrigger (a) Pos Slope () Neg Delay (delay)
— Horizontal arrow Trig Level (green horizontal graticule at 20 dBm)
— Vertical arrow Trig Position Tzero indicators (green arrows at 2nd vertical
graticule)
FFT Gating (Opt 238)
Timegated spectrum analysis allows you to obtain spectral information about
signals occupying the same part of the frequency spectrum that are separated
in the time domain Using an external trigger signal to coordinate the
separation of these signals you can perform the following operations
— Measure any one of several signals separated in time for example you can
separate the spectra of two radios timesharing a single frequency
— Measure the spectrum of a signal in one time slot of a TDMA system
— Exclude the spectrum of interfering signals such as periodic pulse edge
transients that exist for only a limited time 176 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
FFT Gating is a simple efficient way to set the proper amount of trigger delay
and capture time so that signal artifacts of a repeating waveform or pulse can
be examined in the frequency domain Learn more about trigger settings in
Triggering on page 172
For best results Auto Trigger should be used with this feature to ensure that
the sweep does not wait indefinitely for a trigger Set Auto Trigger to a time
that is longer than the expected periodic rate of the signal This is especially
important when using RF Burst or Video triggering in wider spans because the
signal providing those triggers has limited bandwidth Learn more about Auto
trigger in Auto Trigger Time on page 174
For more conceptual information on this topic please refer to Spectrum
Analysis Basics (App Note 150) pages 31 35 at
httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59520292pdf
How to set FFT Gating
— Create a nonzero span measurement Wider frequency spans take more
time to acquire
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger Settings
—Then FFT Gating Setup
— Then choose from the following
—Gate View OFF ON When ON a separate zero span measurement is
displayed below the nonzero span window The gate view
measurement helps to configure the gate width and delay by
revealing (with green markers) the location of the gate relative to the
trigger event The zero span measurement is tuned to the center
frequency of the nonzero span measurement with about 5 MHz of
bandwidth The Yaxis scale is the same for both windows
—Gate View Time Set the Xaxis span for the nonzero span window
Enter a value using the numeric keypad the | arrows or the rotary
knob This value is annotated as Swp (nn) below the window
—FFT Gating OFF ON When ON the trigger type gate width and delay
are applied to the nonzero span measurement The Res BW is set to
a value that is inversely proportional to the gate width
—Gate Width Set the width of the gating area within the nonzero span
window The gating area is indicated by two vertical green lines Enter
a value using the numeric keypad the | arrows or the rotary knob
—Gate Delay Effectively moves the gating area left (negative delay) or
right (positive delay) relative to the trigger event Enter a value using
the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary knobKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 177
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
When you have properly setup the Gate Trigger Width and Delay using the
Gate View measurement you can turn Gate View OFF to return to the full
screen nonzero span measurement with FFT Gating ON the RBW set and the
Trigger settings active
Single Continuous Restart
This setting determines whether the FieldFox measures continuously or only
once each time the Single or Run Hold + button is pressed Use Hold
Single or to conserve battery power or to allow you to save or analyze a
specific trace
How to set Single or Continuous
—Press Sweep 3
— Then choose one of the following
—Continuous
——ON Causes the SA to make continuous sweeps This is the
typical setting for making measurements Each Run Hold +
press causes the SA to toggle between continuous sweep and
Hold
——OFF Causes the SA to Hold Each Run Hold + or Single
press causes the SA to make ONE sweep then Hold The Hold
annotation changes to an arrow > while the sweep occurs
—Single Automatically sets Continuous OFF and causes the SA to make
ONE sweep then Hold
—Restart Resets the Average counter to 1 The Average counter also is
used with MaxHold and MinHold Trace States Learn more in
Average Count on page 179
Points
Points is the number of measurements that are displayed along the Xaxis The
higher number of data points the better the ability to resolve closely spaced
signals and the slower the sweep speed
How to set number of points
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Points [current setting]
— Then choose from
— 101 | 201 | 401 | 601 | 801 | 1001
— # Points to enter a trace points value manually (Maximum 20001) 178 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
Trace Display States (SA Mode)
In SA Mode you can display up to four of the following types of trace states All
SA settings are applied to all displayed traces See also Marker Trace (IQA
and SA Mode) on page 488
A colorcoded legend for displayed traces is visible in the left pane of the SA
mode screen
W ClearWrite M MaxHold m MinHold A Average V View
How to display the Trace States
—Press Trace 6
—Then Trace 1234 repeatedly to select a trace number to display or change
its state Traces are displayed in the following colors
—Trace 1 – Yellow Trace 2 – Blue
—Trace 3 – Orange Trace 4 – Green
—Then State [current setting]
— Then choose from the following Trace States
—Clr Wr (ClearWrite) Displays the actual measured data for each
sweep
—MaxHold Displays the maximum response of the input signal at each
data point over multiple sweeps See also Average Count in Average
Count on page 179
—MinHold Displays the minimum response of the input signal at each
data point over multiple sweeps See also Average Count in Average
Count on page 179
—Average Each data point is averaged over multiple sweeps as set by
the Average Count setting Learn more in Average Count on
page 179
—View Displays and then holds the last complete measurement trace on
the screen This is similar to storing a trace in memory
—Blank Displays no trace
—Press Default All to return all traces to their default settings Trace 1
(ClearWrite) all other traces (Blank)
Trace 4 data WILL be overwritten by the FieldFox when using the
Independent Source Normalize feature (Independent SourceTracking
Generator on page 163) or using Field Strength antenna or cable
corrections (Field Strength Measurements on page 156)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 179
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
Average Type
In SA Mode there are four different processes in which Averaging is performed
—Average Traces – Learn more in Averaging on page 194
— Detection Method Averaging – Learn more in Detection Method on
page 187
— Noise Marker Averaging Learn more in Noise Marker on page 190
— Video BW filtering (for nonZero Span measurements) Learn more in
Video Bandwidth (Video BW) on page 166
There are three types of mathematical averaging that can be performed – Log
Linear or Voltage (see Average Type on page 179) Select ONE of these
types and it is used for all of the above averaging processes
How to set Average Type
—Press Meas Setup 4 then Average Type [current setting]
— Then choose from the following
—Auto The FieldFox chooses the most appropriate type of averaging
for the current settings When Detection Method is set to Average a
Noise Marker is present or a Channel measurement is active then
Power Average is ALWAYS selected Otherwise Log Average is
selected
—Log Averaging – Best for displaying Trace Averaging LgAv is shown on
the left side of the FieldFox screen when selected
—Power (Linear) Averaging – Best for measuring true power levels Used
in Detection Average and Noise Marker Average Mathematically
trace noise is 25 dB higher than when using Log Average PAvg is
shown on the left side of the FieldFox screen when selected
—Voltage
Average Count
The Average Count setting is used mainly with the Average Trace State
described above In this Trace State the Average Count setting determines the
number of sweeps to average The higher the average count the greater the
amount of noise reduction
When Trace (display) State is set to Average MaxHold or MinHold the
average counter is shown in the left edge of the screen below the Average
Type
For all three of these Trace States when Sweep 3 Continuous is set to OFF
press Restart to reset the sweep count to 1 perform sweeps then return
to Hold 180 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
How to set Average Count
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Average Count
— Enter a value from 1 to 10000 using the numeric keypad the arrows
or the rotary knob
—Press Enter
Alignments
This section contains the following
— Overview on page 180
— All Alignment and Align All Now on page 182
— Individual Alignments on page 183
Overview
All Alignment or Align All Now corrects for receiver drift over temperature and
time SA measurement applications monitor changes in internal temperature
and the time since last alignment update and trigger the need for a new
update when the alignment becomes stale The alignment is deemed stale
after a significant change in temperature or a significant time elapsed from the
last update The temperature change and time duration necessary to trigger an
alignment update is predetermined in the factory Until the update is
performed annotation indicating questionable amplitude is displayed
AMPTD
When All Alignment is enabled (by default) the FieldFox performs an
alignment process using the internal RF source Although some sweeps are
delayed measurement results are never disturbed
If the Independent Source (tracking generator) is enabled for your
measurement it will be borrowed to perform the alignment Again the
measurement results are not disturbed Learn about the Independent Source in
Independent SourceTracking Generator on page 163
The alignment process can be disabled You may want to do this for example
if you are analyzing the amplitude stability of a signal
SA and all modes built on its infrastructure require three types of alignments
— InstAlign Amplitude Alignment
To better reflect the enhancements implemented during the alignment
process for firmware versions >A1015 IF Flatness Alignment is now
referred to as Channel Equalization or Channel Equalization Alignment
(ChanEQ Alignment)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 181
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
— RF Burst Amplitude Alignment
— Channel Equalization
These are referred to as Individual Align
All three or a subset of the individual alignments are required for each specific
mode depending on the type of measurement supported by it
SA
— InstAlign Amplitude Alignment
— RF Burst Amplitude Alignment
RTSA
— InstAlign Amplitude Alignment
— RF Burst Amplitude Alignment
— Channel Equalization
Channel Scanner
— InstAlign Amplitude Alignment
ERTA
— InstAlign Amplitude Alignment
IQA
— InstAlign Amplitude Alignment
— RF Burst Amplitude Alignment
— Channel Equalization
Builtin Power meter
— InstAlign Amplitude Alignment
Default settings and recommended use model for many applications
— Coupled individual alignments
—Coupled state is Auto
— Individual alignments are not accessible via front panel softkeys
— Individual alignments cannot be UnCoupled
For special cases the individual alignments can be accessible via the front
panel softkeys using the Preference setting SA Individual Alignment
Control > OnOff This enables a softkey for access to Individual Alignments
when this preference is set to ON Cal 5 > Individual Align For more refer to
Preferences on page 515 in Chapter 26 System Settings 182 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
The individual alignments may be
— Coupled (default) when they are in the same state or
— UnCoupled when at least one of them is in a different state than the other
ones
— Executed on demand all of them using the Align All Now softkey
Each of the individual alignments
— could be in one of three states
— Off the alignment is not applied and is not updated automatically
— Auto (default) the alignment will be updated over time and
temperature as needed no user interaction required
— Hold the unit holds the alignment values from the last
alignmentexecution and does not execute another alignment
automatically
— can be updated on demand using the corresponding Align Now softkey
Refer to Individual Alignments on page 183
—The All Alignment softkey has the following functionality
— when the individual alignments are Coupled the state of all of them
can be changed simultaneously using the All Alignment softkey
submenus
— when the individual alignments are UnCoupled they will be coupled
when using the All Alignment softkey submenus and their state
will be simultaneously changed accordingly
All Alignment and Align All Now
How to set All Alignment and Align All Now
—Press Cal 5
IMPORTANT It is recommended that you use Align All Now because it
includes the individual alignment InstAlign Amptd Align Now as well as
Burst Align Now and ChanEQ Align Now But if you would prefer to have
manual control over the individual alignments then refer to the SA
Individual Alignment Control setting in Preferences on page 515 in
Chapter 26 System Settings
The notification AMPTD displayed on screen means the InstAlign amplitude alignment or
channel equalization is stale (if its state is Hold) and requires an update or it is in the OFF state
This situation does not occur when the respective alignment is in the Auto state To clear this
notification press the Align All Now softkeyKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 183
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
—Then All Alignment [Auto] (to enable or disable the All Alignment) –
Default is Auto
—or
—Then Align All Now (to manually perform an Align All Now) This performs
an alignment on all three individual alignments Amptd Align Now Burst
Align Now and ChanEq Now) Refer to Individual Alignments on
page 183
—Press Enter
If you want to disable the All Alignment [Auto] you can do so in the FieldFox
preferences (ie you may want to do this for example if you are analyzing the
amplitude stability of a signal)
Refer to the SA Individual Alignment Control setting in Preferences on
page 515 in Chapter 26 System Settings See also Individual Alignments
Individual Alignments
IMPORTANT It is recommended that you use All Alignment [Auto] or Align
All Now in lieu of the individual alignments (Amptd Align Now Burst
Align Now and ChanEQ Align Now) because All Alignment [Auto] and
Align All Now includes the individual alignment InstAlign Amptd Align
Now Burst Align Now and ChanEQ Align Now But if you would prefer to
have manual control over the individual alignments then refer to the SA
Individual Alignment Control setting in Preferences on page 515 in
Chapter 26 System Settings
The Individual Alignment softkey is only available when the preference SA Individual
Alignment Control is set to On in the FieldFox Preferences menu Refer to
Preferences on page 515 in Chapter 26 System Settings 184 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
How to Access Individual Alignments
This section assumes access to individual alignments was activated using the
FieldFox’s system settings’ Preferences Once enabled an Individual
Alignments softkey is displayed Refer to Preferences on page 515 in
Chapter 26 System Settings
—Press Cal 5
—Then Individual Align
—Then Amptd Align Now or
—Then Burst Align Now or
—Then ChanEq Align Now
—Press Enter
How to make Amplitude Alignment settings
SA IQA RTSA and other modes use a proprietary amplitude alignment
algorithm to make extremely accurate amplitude measurements over the full
frequency range of the FieldFox
These settings do NOT survive a Preset or Mode Preset
—Press Cal 5
—Then Individual Align
—Then Amptd Alignment
— Then choose from the following
— Auto (Default setting) Alignments are required and are performed
automatically when necessary at times when interrupting the RF
Output is deemed acceptable The alignment process is performed
opportunistically when changes in settings require the measurement
to stop momentarily and a significant time elapsed since the last
alignment (predetermined in the factory) or the internal instrument
temperature has changed sensibly (predetermined in the factory)
During continuous sweep (acquisition for IQA) operation automatic
Alignments will NOT interrupt the ongoing measurement but when
necessary will occur opportunistically as settings are changed When no
automatic alignment updates occur existing alignments can become stale
over time and temperature drift so a warning annotation on the left panel
will light up indicating that alignments need updating Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 185
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
Some examples of the conditions when alignments occur are This
could be a Center frequency change or it could be as simple as
requesting a Single sweep Also unique alignments are required at
different FieldFox receiver frequency bands so even if the
temperature hasn＇t changed an alignment may be required when
one changes the Center frequency
If a needed alignment cannot be performed the user is notified about
questionable amplitude AMPTD
— OFF Alignments are not performed The most recent alignment result
is cleared Only factory corrections are applied to SA Receiver
measurements Questionable amplitude AMPTD is always
displayed
— Hold The alignment process is stopped but the last alignment
values are applied to subsequent sweeps
— Amptd Align Now An alignment is performed immediately thus updating
(clearing) any questionable amplitude status If the Mode was previously
Off it is changed to Hold
Amptd is annotated in the lower left corner of the FieldFox screen when
amplitude alignment is questionable This is always true when OFF and is
conditionally true in Auto or Hold when the most recent alignment is deemed
stale
RF Burst Amplitude Alignment
RF Burst alignment calibrates the circuitry to provide accurate external RF
Burst triggering Learn more about RF Burst triggering in Triggering on
page 172
When enabled (by default) the FieldFox performs an alignment process using
the internal RF source Although some sweeps are delayed measurement
results are never disturbed
If the Independent Source is enabled for your measurement it will be borrowed
to perform the alignment Again the measurement results are not disturbed
Learn about the Independent Source in Independent SourceTracking
Generator on page 163
The alignment process can be disabled You may want to do this for example
if you are analyzing the amplitude stability of a signal
How to make Burst Alignment settings
These settings do NOT survive a Preset or Mode Preset
—Press Cal 5
—Then Individual Align 186 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
—Then Burst Alignment
— Then choose from the following
— Auto (Default setting) SA measurement applications monitor
changes in internal temperature and the time since last alignment
update and trigger the need for a new update when the alignment
becomes stale The alignment is deemed stale after a significant
change in temperature or a significant time elapsed from the last
update The temperature change and time duration necessary to
trigger an alignment update is predetermined in the factory
— OFF The alignment process is NOT performed Only factory correction
values are used
— Hold The alignment process is stopped but the last alignment values
are applied to subsequent sweeps
Burst Align Now An alignment is performed once and applied to subsequent
sweeps
Channel Equalization (IQA and RTSA Only)
IQA and RTSA modes use proprietary channel equalization algorithms to make
extremely accurate channel measurements over the full frequency range of the
FieldFox
How to make Channel Equalization Alignments settings
These settings do NOT survive a Preset or Mode Preset
—Press Cal 5
—Then Individual Align
—Then ChanEq Alignment
— Then choose from the following
— Auto (Default setting) SA measurement applications monitor
changes in internal temperature and the time since last alignment
update and trigger the need for a new update when the alignment
becomes stale The alignment is deemed stale after a significant
During continuous sweep operation for RTSA and continuous acquisition
for IQA automatic Alignments will NOT interrupt the ongoing
measurement but when necessary will occur opportunistically as settings
are changed When no automatic alignment updates occur existing
alignments can become stale over time and temperature drift so a
warning annotation on the left panel will light up indicating that
alignments need updating When alignments need updating you will see a
Channel Equalization or ChanEq error message displayedKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 187
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
change in temperature or a significant time elapsed from the last
update The temperature change and time duration necessary to
trigger an alignment update is predetermined in the factory
Some examples of the conditions when alignments occur are This
could be a Center frequency change or it could be as simple as
requesting a Single sweep Also unique alignments are required at
different FieldFox receiver frequency bands so even if the
temperature hasn＇t changed an alignment may be required when
one changes the Center frequency
—Hold The alignment process is stopped but the last alignment values
are applied to subsequent sweeps
— OFF The alignment process is NOT performed and the channel
equalization is deactivated
— ChanEq Align Now An alignment is performed immediately
The Amptd annotation lights up whenever the current channel equalization is
deemed stale
Detection Method
In SA Mode the Xaxis is comprised of data points also known as buckets
The number of data points is specified using the Points setting Learn more in
Points on page 177
Regardless of how many data points are across the Xaxis each data point
must represent what has occurred over some frequency range and time
interval
From the frequency span of the measurement the span of each data point is
calculated as (frequency span (data points1)) The detection method allows
you to choose how the measurements in each bucket are displayed 188 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
Figure 97 Detection using One Bucket
In the graphic above there is one bucket showing Positive peak Sample and
Negative peak Detection methods
How to set Detection Method
The current Detection method is labeled on the left edge of the screen When a
method is selected manually a # precedes the label For example # Nrm
means that Normal was selected from the softkeys
—Press Trace_6
—Then Detector
— Then choose from the following
—Auto Displays the most appropriate Detection method based on other
settings [# is NOT shown]
—Normal [#Nrm] Provides a better visual display of random noise than
Positive peak and avoids the missedsignal problem of the Sample
Mode Should the signal both rise and fall within the bucket interval
then the algorithm classifies the signal as noise An oddnumbered
data point displays the maximum value encountered during its
bucket An evennumbered data point displays the minimum value
encountered during its bucket If the signal is NOT classified as noise
(does NOT rise and fall) then Normal is equivalent to Positive Peak
—Positive Peak [#Pk] Displays the maximum value of all the
measurements in each bucket This setting ensures that no signal is
missed However it is not a good representation of the random noise
in each bucket Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 189
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
—Negative Peak [#NPk] Displays the minimum value of all the
measurements in each bucket
—Sample [#Smp] Displays the center measurement of all the
measurements in each bucket This setting gives a good
representation of the random noise in each bucket However it does
not ensure that all signals are represented
—Average [#RMS] Displays the Root Mean Squared (RMS) average
power of all the measurements in each bucket This is the preferred
method when making power measurements
Display Line
A display line is a simple horizontal line that can be placed at any amplitude
level on the SA screen or set to any level in IQA Use a display line as mental
guide for visual feedback A display line is similar to a Limit Line except that no
PASSFAIL testing occurs A display line is easier to create than a Limit Line
Learn more in All about Limit Lines on page 499
Figure 98 Display Line with Annotations
How to create and move a Display Line
—Press Limit __8
—Then Display Line OFF ON
— Then enter a Yaxis value using the arrows or the rotary knob then
press Enter Or enter a value using the numeric keypad and press a suffix
key or press Enter 190 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
Noise Marker
For comparison purposes electronic noise measurements are often displayed
as though the measurement was made in a 1 Hz Res BW However making an
actual measurement at a 1 Hz Res BW is extremely slow
A Noise Marker unique to SA Mode mathematically calculates the noise
measurement as though it were made using a 1 Hz bandwidth
Several data points (or buckets’) are averaged together to calculate the Noise
Marker readout To accurately measure noise the Noise Marker should NOT be
placed on or too close to a signal The distance from a signal depends on
several factors To know if an accurate reading is being made move the Noise
Marker until consistent measurements are displayed in adjacent data points
In addition when a Noise Marker is displayed the Detection method is
automatically switched to Average and PAvg is shown on the FieldFox screen
This occurs only when Detector is set to Auto Learn more in Detection
Method on page 187
With a Noise Marker present the Res BW can be changed and the displayed
noise floor will also change but the Noise Marker readout will remain about
the same
Noise Markers can be used like regular markers A Noise Marker is
distinguished from a regular marker by (1Hz) after the marker readout value
Learn more about regular markers in All about Markers on page 484
How to measure Noise with a marker
—Press Marker to create or select a Normal or Delta marker to use to
measure Noise
—Then More
—Then Marker Function
—Then Noise ON OFF
BandInterval Power Marker
A BandInterval Power marker—available in IQA and SA Modes—accumulates
the power that is measured over several adjacent data points (or buckets’)
The range of buckets being measured is displayed with vertical posts around
the marker This Band Span value is selectable
This feature is very similar to a channel power measurement (Channel Power
(CHP) on page 195)
When the frequency span is set to Zero span the marker is referred to as an
Interval Band Marker because it averages power over a specific time interval
In this case the range is specified as the Interval Span Learn more about Zero
span measurements in Zero Span Measurements on page 170Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 191
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
If the Detection method and Averaging type are set to Auto when you enable a
BandInterval Power marker the Detection method will change to Average
(RMS) and Averaging type will change to Power average Other Detection
methods or Averaging type settings will usually cause measurement
inaccuracy Learn more about Detection method in Detection Method on
page 187 and Averaging Type in Average Type on page 179
Summary
— In Zero span an Interval Power Marker yields the average power over the
specified time interval
— In nonZero span a Band Power Marker yields the total power over the
specified frequency range
How to measure BandInterval Power with a marker
—Press Marker to create or select a Normal or Delta marker to use to
measure BandInterval Power
—Then press More
—Then Marker Function
—Then BandInt Power
—Then Band (or Interval) Span
— Then choose from the following
—Auto Measures power over 5 of the displayed span or ½ graticules
The Band Span is automatically updated to remain at 5 when you
change the frequency span
—Man Enter a frequency or time value using the arrows or the
rotary knob then press Enter Or enter a value using the numeric
keypad and select a frequency or time suffix The Band Span remains
at the frequency or time value that you set as the span changes
Frequency Counter at Marker
Available in SA Mode ONLY Use any existing marker to make highlyaccurate
frequency counter readings For highest accuracy lock the FieldFox to a stable
external frequency reference Learn how in Frequency Reference Source on
page 530
When Frequency Counter is ON the FieldFox uses background sweeps to
zoom on the signal measure the signal peak with 1 Hz resolution and display
the frequency of the signal peak in the marker annotation area The marker
does not move to the signal peak
When Freq Counter is ON measurement sweeps are considerably slower 192 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
How to use Frequency Counter
—Press Marker
— Press Normal Delta or Peak or select an existing marker to use as a
frequency counter
— Locate the marker somewhere on a CW signal It does NOT have to be on
the peak
—Then More
—Then Freq Count ON
— With Freq Count ON you can scroll through the existing markers that are
located on a discrete CW signal and read the frequency of the signal peak
However each frequency count update requires another sweep If the
FieldFox is in HOLD press Single to update the frequency count results
Time Zero Fixed Marker
This feature was created to allow recall of vintage instrument states (older than Rev
70) that included Zero span sweep with a trigger delay and at least one marker Before
Rev 70 these instrument states were saved and recalled with the equivalent of the
ON state of this setting The default setting is OFF Learn more about Triggering with
negative delay in Triggering on page 172
—Press Mkr>Tools
—Then More
—Then Mkr Properties
—Then Time Zero Fixed
— Then choose from the following
—ON Time Zero is fixed at the leftedge of the screen A marker in
negative delay resides at this point This is the vintage behavior
—OFF (default) Time Zero is located at the Tzero indicators A marker in
negative delay appears to the left of Tzero
Audio Beep at Marker Power
When enabled the Audio Beep feature emits a repetitive beep sound which
varies in tone pitch and repetition rate to indicate the relative power level of the
active marker The highest tone pitch and fastest beep rate occurs when the
marker Yaxis position is at the top of the display Conversely the lowest pitch
and repetition rate occurs at the bottom of the display Therefore it is
important to scale the signals that you intend to measure between the top and
bottom of the screen Learn more about Scale in Scale and Units on
page 153
Audio Beep can be used with any marker type or function including Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 193
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
SA Mode Settings
BandInterval Power Learn more in Audio on page 520
How to use Audio Beep
—Press Marker
— Optionally press Marker 1 2 3 4 5 6 to select an existing marker to use with
Audio Beep A marker will be created if one does not already exist
—Then More
—Then Marker Function
—Then Audio Beep ON OFF
Audio Beep does NOT beep when the FieldFox is in Hold mode
While Audio Beep is ON press Marker 1 2 3 4 5 6 to toggle Audio Beep
through the existing markers
To set FieldFox speaker volume control press System then Volume Learn
more in Audio on page 520
Meas UNCAL Error
Meas UNCAL appears in the lowerleft corner of the screen when the FieldFox
can NOT display accurate measurement results with the current settings
Usually the part of the trace that is inaccurate is shown at –200 dB
The following situation can produce Meas UNCAL
— When the ResBWVBW ratio exceeds 10000 causing the VBW filter to
reach the maximum capacity for averaging
Old Data Indicator (*)
In SA mode when the current trace does not exactly match the annotation that
is on the screen an asterisk is displayed in the upperright corner of the screen
graticule area This would occur for example when the Res BW setting is
changed while in sweep Hold mode The annotation is changed immediately
but the trace is not updated until the next sweep occurs Therefore the current
data trace does not match the screen annotation See the asterisk in Figure
91 on page 145 194 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
Channel Measurements
Channel Measurements
The following Channel Measurements are offered in SA Mode
Channel Power Channel Power (CHP) on page 195
Occupied Bandwidth Occupied Bandwidth on page 197
Adjacent Channel Power Ratio Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR)
on page 199
Radio Standards and Channel Measurements
To tune the frequency range of any of the Channel Measurements using
channels instead of frequency first select a Radio Standard then select Units
CHAN Learn how to select a Radio Standard and channels in How to select a
Radio Standard on page 150
When you first select a Radio Standard then select a Channel Measurement
— With Units FREQ selected the center frequency and span will ALWAYS
change to the full frequency range of that standard (Uplink and Downlink)
to allow for a quick scan of energy The Xaxis annotation indicates the
frequency range
— With Units CHAN selected the FieldFox chooses either the uplink or
downlink band and displays that range of frequencies You can then tune
within that Standard using Start CHAN Stop CHAN or Center CHAN The
Xaxis annotation indicates the frequency range
When you first select a Channel Measurement then select a Radio Standard
the BW Offset RRC Integration BW and Span settings are changed to those
of the standard In addition Res BW can also change when set to
Auto(couple)’ However center frequency is NOT changed unless you first
select Units CHAN
Measurement Preset
Measurement Preset allows you to easily reset any of the channel
measurements to its default settings The Center Frequency Preamp ON|OFF
RF Attenuation Markers Limits and Radio Standard settings are NOT reset
How to select Measurement Preset
—Press Preset then Mode Preset
Averaging
By default in ALL Channel measurements averaging is enabled and set to
display the average of the last 15 measurements When enabled this average
setting is automatically making the following averaging’ settings in order to
provide the most accurate power measurements Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 195
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
Channel Measurements
— Averaging Type is set to Power
— Trace State is set to Average
— Detector is set to Average
— Count is set to 15
Any of these settings can be changed manually during a Channel
measurement Learn more about these settings starting in Average Type on
page 179
To change Averaging
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Average Enable ON OFF OFF effectively sets the Average Count to 1
—Then Average Count
— Enter a value between 1 and 10000 using the numeric keypad
arrows or the rotary knob
—Press Enter
Traces
Only one measurement trace can be displayed in Channel Measurements
Channel Power (CHP)
Channel Power measures total power over the specified Integrated BW The
Integration Bandwidth (IBW) can be adjusted to measure the power over
multiple channels 196 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
Channel Measurements
Figure 99 Channel Power Measurement
The following two Channel Power levels are displayed
— Channel Power measures total power over the specified Integrated BW
— Power Spectral Density – same measured power but mathematically
normalized to a 1 Hz bandwidth using the same algorithm as Noise Marker
Learn more about the Noise Marker in Noise Marker on page 190
How to select Channel Power
—Press Measure 1
—Then Channel Measurements
—Then Channel Power
When Channel Power is selected the following settings are maintained from a
previous measurement Center Frequency Preamp ON|OFF and RF
Attenuation
Integration Bandwidth
When Channel Power is selected vertical posts appear on the display to mark
the current Integration Bandwidth setting The displayed Channel Power and
Power Spectral Density values are measured and calculated over the specified
Integration Bandwidth Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 197
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
Channel Measurements
By default the displayed frequency span is automatically coupled to the
Integration Bandwidth As you change the Integration Bandwidth the
frequency span is adjusted so that the vertical posts appear to NOT move
However when you manually change the frequency span the Integration
Bandwidth is no longer coupled to the frequency span
When a Radio Standard is selected the appropriate Integration Bandwidth is
set automatically Learn more about Radio Standards in Radio Standard on
page 150
To change Integration Bandwidth
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Integrating BW
— Enter a value between 100 Hz and 3 GHz using the numeric keypad
arrows or the rotary knob
—Press Enter
Other Channel Power Settings
All relevant FieldFox settings are made automatically to ensure the highest
accuracy such as ResBW VideoBW and sweep (SwpAcquisition) speed
These and all other SA Mode settings can be changed manually in a Channel
Power measurement
— Learn about Measurement Preset in Measurement Preset on page 194
— Learn about Averaging in Averaging on page 194
— Learn about RRC Weighting in RRC Weighting on page 203
Occupied Bandwidth
Occupied Bandwidth measures the power of the displayed frequency span and
displays vertical posts at the frequencies between which the specified
percentage of the power is contained The frequency span between the two
vertical posts is the Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Power the power that
is contained between the two posts is also displayed in dBm 198 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
Channel Measurements
Figure 910 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement
The graphic above shows an OBW measurement Chan 190 Downlink GSM850
Radio Standard
How to Select Occupied Bandwidth
—Press Measure__1
—Then Channel Measurements
—Then Occupied BW
When Occupied Bandwidth is selected the following settings are maintained
from a previous measurement Center Frequency Preamp ON|OFF and RF
Attenuation
Frequency Span
Occupied BW is calculated from power that is measured over the entire
displayed Frequency Span The frequency span can be entered using arbitrary
frequencies or by using a Radio Standard in conjunction with channel
numbers Learn how to select a Radio Standard and channels in Channel
Selection on page 151
To change Frequency Span
—Press FreqDist Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 199
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
Channel Measurements
—Then Freq Span
— Enter a value using the numeric keypad arrows or the rotary knob
—Press Enter
Power Percent
This setting specifies the percentage of total measured power to display
between the vertical posts The measurement defaults to 99 of the occupied
bandwidth power The remaining power (1 of default setting) is evenly
distributed5 of the power on the outside of each side of the vertical posts
To change Power Percent
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Power Percent
— Enter a value between 10 and 9999 using the numeric keypad
arrows or the rotary knob
—Press Enter
Other Occupied Bandwidth Settings
All relevant FieldFox settings are made automatically to ensure the highest
accuracy such as ResBW VideoBW and sweep (SwpAcquisition) speed
These and all other SA Mode settings can be changed manually in a Occupied
Bandwidth measurement
— Learn about Measurement Preset in Measurement Preset on page 194
— Learn about Averaging in Averaging on page 194
Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR)
ACPR measures the power of a carrier channel and the power in its adjacent
(offset) channels The measurement results can help you determine whether
the carrier power is set correctly and whether the transmitter filter is working
properly
You can measure the channel power in one two or three adjacent (offset)
channels on the low frequency and high frequency side of the carrier channel
Limits can be used to quickly see if too much power is measured in the
adjacent channels 200 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
Channel Measurements
Figure 911 GSM 850Ch 251Up with one Offset
In the graphic above red frequencies (MHz) are added to illustrate offset and
integ BW
Data in the ACPR graphical chart is always presented in dBm for the carrier
and dBc (dB below the carrier) for the offsets This can NOT be changed Use
the Meas Type setting (next page) to change how the data is presented in the
table below the graph
How to select ACPR
—Press Measure__1
—Then Channel Measurements
—Then Adjacent Channel Power
When ACPR is selected the following settings are maintained from a previous
measurement Center Frequency Preamp ON|OFF and RF Attenuation Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 201
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
Channel Measurements
Frequency RangeChannel
When a Radio Standard is selected the appropriate center frequency or
channel and span is set automatically The frequency or channel number can
then be changed from the FreqDist menu Learn how to select a Radio
Standard and channels in Radio Standard on page 150
The frequency range of an ACPR measurement can also be entered using
arbitrary frequencies
When a Radio Standard is NOT selected the center frequency of a previous
measurement is maintained when ACPR is selected
Integration Bandwidth
The Integration Bandwidth of the carrier and offsets is the frequency span over
which power is measured
To change Integration Bandwidth
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Integrating BW
— Enter a value between 100 Hz and 100 MHz using the numeric keypad
arrows or the rotary knob
—Press Enter
How to define adjacent (Offset) channels
An offset represents a difference in center frequencies of the carrier channel
and its adjacent channel to be measured The frequency range for each offset
is specified with an Offset Freq and Integ BW Each offset that is created has a
Lower (carrier MINUS Offset Freq) and Upper (carrier PLUS Offset Freq) set of
frequencies
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Offsets
—Press Offset 1 2 3 to select an offset
—Then Offset State to set that offset ON or OFF
— Select Offset Freq This is the difference between the carrier center
frequency and the center frequency of the offset channel Then enter a
value using the numeric keypad
— Select Offset Integ BW This is the frequency range over which power is
measured in that offset half of the range below and half above the Offset
Freq 202 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
Channel Measurements
How to set limits for adjacent channels
You can set a unique threshold power for each of the offsets that will cause a
FAIL indication (RED bar) This occurs when the calculated dBc power (on top
of the offset bar) is ABOVE the specified level
To set limits with an ACPR measurement on the screen
—Press Limit 8
—Then Offset (123)
— Then choose from the following
—LowerOffsetLimit Sets a limit for the lowerfrequency offset
—Upper OffsetLimit Sets a limit for the higherfrequency offset
— Then enter a value using the numeric keypad arrows or the rotary
knob
—Then Limit Test ON OFF
Measurement Type
This setting determines how the measured carrier and offset power levels in
the table are presented (Data in the graphical chart is always presented in
dBm for the carrier and dBc for the offsets)
To select Meas Type
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then More
—Then Meas Type
— Then choose from the following
—Total Pwr Ref – Integrated carrier power is represented in dBm and
relative powers between offsets and carrier are represented as dBc
(dB below the carrier)
—PSD Ref (Power Spectral Density) – Integrated carrier power is
normalized to a 1 Hz density as dBmHz using a similar algorithm as
Noise Marker Learn more about the Noise Marker in Noise Marker
on page 190
For both Meas Types choose the reference for the offset data
—Press Ref Value to toggle between these settings
—Auto dB or dBc value is computed by subtracting the measured
carrier power from the measured offset power
—Man – dB or dBc value is computed by subtracting the entered
RefValue from the measured offset powerKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 203
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
Channel Measurements
—Then enter a value to be used to reference the data using the numeric
keypad arrows or the rotary knob
Other ACPR Settings
All relevant FieldFox settings are made automatically to ensure the highest
accuracy such as ResBW VideoBW and sweep (SwpAcquisition) speed
These and all other SA Mode settings can be changed manually in a ACPR
measurement
— Learn about Measurement Preset in Measurement Preset on page 194
— Learn about Averaging in Averaging on page 194
RRC Weighting
RRC or RootRaisedCosign weighting is offered with Channel Power and
ACPR measurements
When RRC Weighting is applied to transmitted and received power the edges
of the channel are smoothed’ to help prevent interference To accurately
measure a channel that has RRC weighting set the same value of RRC
weighting as that used in the transmitter and receiver
Figure 912 Channel power measurement with22 RRC applied
RRC Weighting is set and enabled automatically when included in a selected
radio standard
To set and enable RRC Weighting
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then RRC Weighting ON OFF
—Then More
—Then RRC Alpha [current setting] 204 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
Channel Measurements
— Enter a value between 0 (no smoothing) and 1 (most smoothing) using the
numeric keypad arrows or the rotary knob A standard level of filtering
is 22
—Press Enter 205
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
10 RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option
350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode measures signals at the SA RF IN connector
For a comprehensive RTSA mode tutorial see Understanding and Applying
Probability of Intercept in RealTime Spectrum Analysis (App Note) at
httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59914317ENpdf
Figure 101 RTSA Display using Markers
The graphic above shows an RTSA display of a Bluetooth signal using
markers 206 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
In this Chapter
See Also
Frequency Range on page 207
Scale and Units on page 208
External Gain on page 209
Attenuation Control on page 209
Preamplifier Control (Opt 235) on page 210
Check for Compressed Measurements on page 211
Resolution Bandwidth (Res BW) on page 214
Triggering on page 215
Single Continuous Restart Time Per Div on page 218
Points (not user settable) on page 219
Trace Display States on page 220
Average Count Show Density Blue and Red Percentage Limits on
page 222
Average Count on page 223
Alignments on page 223
Detection Method on page 221
Display Line on page 223
Spectrogram Display (RTSA Option) on page 225
RecordPlayback (RTSA Option) on page 227
Optional Settings
All about Markers on page 484
All about Limit Lines on page 499
Saving and Recalling Files on page 544Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 207
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
RTSA Mode Settings
Select RTSA Mode before making any setting in this chapter
Because there is no calibration these settings can be made in any order
How to select RTSA Mode
—Press Mode_
—Then RealTime SA
Frequency Range
The Xaxis frequency range determines the frequencies that are measured for
each sweep The default Start frequency is 995 MHz However the Start
frequency can be set as low as –100 MHz The internal LO of the FieldFox can
be seen at 0 Hz which will mask signals that may be present
The frequency range of the measurement can be changed using the following
methods
— Set Center and Span frequencies (Freq Span is settable from 280 Hz to
10 MHz)
— Set Start and Stop frequencies
— Using Marker > Center
How to set Frequency Range
—Press FreqDist
— Then choose from the following
—Center and Freq Span frequencies This is the most common method
of entering frequency range Enter the frequency of interest The
Center frequency is at the exact center of the Xaxis The Frequency
Span places half of the frequency range on either side of center
When you initially select IQ Analyzer RealTime SA or some of the other
spectrum settings (such as center frequency) a factory channel
Equalization measurement is applied to the signal During channel
equalization measurement the FieldFox displays a Start Channel
Equalization Stopping channel equalization is not permitted See also
Alignments on page 180 in Chapter 9 SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
Although the start frequency can be set as low as 100 MHz amplitude
accuracy is specified above 9 kHz to 100 kHz (depending on your model)
Below 9 kHz to 100 kHz (depending on model) frequency accuracy is
maintained but amplitude accuracy is degraded Refer to
httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59909783ENpdf 208 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
When the Center and Frequency Span values are entered then the
Xaxis annotation on the screen shows the Center and Span
frequencies
—Start and Stop frequencies Start is the beginning of the Xaxis and
Stop is the end of the Xaxis When the Start and Stop frequencies
are entered then the Xaxis annotation on the screen shows the Start
and Stop frequencies
— Optionally press More then
——CF Step then type a step size value using the numeric keypad
then select a multiplier key
——Freq Annotation and one of the following
——Full Span the frequency span changes to 10 MHz
— Follow each of these when prompted by entering a value using the
numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary knob
— When using the arrows press Enter The increment setting of the
arrows is based on the current span This can be changed in RTSA Mode
— After using the keypad select a multiplier key Learn more in Multiplier
Abbreviations on page 43
Scale and Units
Adjust the Yaxis scale to see the relevant portions of the data trace
The Yaxis is divided into 10 graticules A acquisition is shown on the screen as
a solid horizontal bar that can be placed at any graticule
RTSA always uses logarithmic scale The Yaxis reference line represents the
specified absolute acquisition (dBm) Yaxis graticules show dB below or above
the reference line
When RF Attenuation set to Auto the RF Attenuation is coupled to acquisition
How to set Scale
Press Scale Amptd Then choose from the following
AutoSelect (Default) – The FieldFox selects a frequency annotation
setting (CenterSpan or StartStop)
CenterSpan The center frequency and span are displayed
StartStop The start and stop frequencies of the frequency span are
displayedKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 209
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
Manually set Scale acquisition and Reference Position
— Scale Manually adjust the dB scale per division to view specific areas of the
current trace Enter a value using the numeric keypad the arrows or
the rotary knob Then press Enter
— Ref Level Manually set the value of the reference line Enter a negative
value by pressing RunHold (+) either before or after typing a value This
can also change the RF Attenuation setting See Attenuation Control on
page 209
— Ref Pos Manually set the position of the reference line Values must be
between 0 (top line) and 10 (bottom line) Default position is zero (top)
External Gain
When using an external amplifier or attenuator the RTSA mode trace
amplitude values can be offset to compensate for the effect of the external
device This effectively moves the reference plane of the RTSA measurement
port out to just beyond the external device For example when using an
external preamp with gain of +10 dB enter this value for External Gain and the
data trace across the displayed frequency span will be adjusted down by 10
dB
When RF Atten is set to Auto you may see a change in the RF Attenuation
value This is an attempt to measure the signal at top of screen (the
acquisition) without overloading the RTSA first mixer
How to Set External Gain
—Press ScaleAmptd
—Then External Gain
— Enter a value using the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary knob
(positive for gain negative for loss) Values in increments less than 5 dB
must be typed using the numeric keypad Then press Enter
ExtGain xx dB is shown at the top of the screen
Attenuation Control
Both the RF Attenuation and Preamp functions control the power level into the
RTSA
When too much power is present at the RF Input port ADC Over Range
appears on the FieldFox screen This does not necessarily mean that damage
has occurred but that the measurement is probably compressed 210 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
When high power levels are present at the RF Input port internal attenuation
can be switched in to keep the FieldFox receiver from compressing At
extremely high power levels use external attenuation to protect the internal
circuitry from being damaged
The displayed power level is automatically adjusted for RF Attenuation As the
attenuation value changes the displayed power level should NOT change
How to set Attenuation
—Press ScaleAmptd
—Then RF Atten Man Auto
— Auto RF Attenuation is set by adjusting the acquisition As the acquisition is
lowered for example from –10 dBm to –30 dBm the FieldFox assumes that
you are looking at lowlevel signals The RF Attenuation value is
automatically lowered in 5 dB steps to allow lowlevel signals to be viewed
— Man RF Attenuation is set manually Enter a value between 0 to 30 dB in
5 dB steps using the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary knob
Then press Enter
#Atten xx dB is shown at the top of the screen (#) means manual setting
Preamplifier Control (Opt 235)
When very lowlevel signals are analyzed an internal preamplifier can be used
to boost the signal level by approximately 15 to 20 dB (depending on model)
The gain of the preamp is NOT adjustable The displayed signal level is
automatically adjusted for the increase in system gain therefore turning the
Preamp ON should NOT cause a change to the displayed signal
How to control the Preamp
By default the preamp is OFF
—Press ScaleAmptd
— Preamp ON OFF When ON PA is shown to the left of the graticules on the
display
The FieldFox can be damaged with too much power Refer to the FieldFox
Data Sheet for your model on
httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59909783ENpdf
RF Damage Level +25 dBm (N995xA & N996xA) and +27 dBm (all others)
DC Damage Level ±50 VDCKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 211
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
— Auto When Auto is selected the preamp setting is coupled to the RF
attenuation and to the acquisition When the acquisition reaches a certain
value the preamp is turned on and PA is shown to the left of the graticules
on the display
Check for Compressed Measurements
Compression occurs when too much power into an amplifier causes it to no
longer amplify in a linear manner When too much power goes into the
FieldFox RF Input connector the amplifiers in the RTSA receiver compress and
signal power will not be displayed accurately This can occur even if ADC Over
Range is not displayed because devices other than the ADC such as the mixer
might be compressed Increase the RF Attenuation value to prevent the RTSA
receiver from being compressed
How to Check for a Compressed Measurement
— Using a marker at the signal peak make note of the signal power level
— Increase the RF Attenuation level by 5 dB
—If the signal level does NOT change then NO compression exists This
indicates that the signal is in the linear region of the FieldFox
receiver
—If the signal level DOES increase then the receiver was compressed
Set the RF Attenuation value at the setting when further increases no
longer result in an increase in the displayed power level
Spectrum Selection
To select the spectrumtype for your measurement
How to make Spectrum Settings
—Press Measure 1
—Then Press
— Density Spectrum The signal displayed is a realtime spectrum with
a histogram bitmap Refer to Figure on page 212 and Figure 102 on
page 213
— Spectrogram The signal is displayed is a realtime spectrum with a
spectrogram bitmap Spectrogram views are valuable in capturing
signals that include both time and frequency variations Refer to
Figure 103 on page 213
Density Spectrum and Spectrogram data is lost when you change modes
because the FieldFox optimizes the instrument’s resources during mode
changes 212 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
— Realtime Spectrum The signal is displayed as a realtime spectrum
Use realtime spectrogram to quickly display measurements Refer to
Figure 104 on page 214
In all three spectrum measurements there are four available traces
for representation of the realtime spectrumDensity Spectrum
(Histogram) FM Signal with 1 MHz FM Deviation & 400 Hz FM RateKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 213
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
Figure 102 Density Spectrum (Histogram) with 2 Pulses (Blue color indicates pulse that
occurs less frequently)
Figure 103 Spectrogram 214 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
Figure 104 RealTime Spectrum
Resolution Bandwidth (Res BW)
In RTSA Mode the Res BW provides the ability to resolve or see closely
spaced signals The narrower (lower) the Res BW the better the spectrum
analyzer can resolve signals In addition as the Res BW is narrowed less noise
is measured by the spectrum analyzer ADC and the noise floor on the display
lowers as a result This allows low level signals to be seen and measured
How to set Res BW
—Press BW 2
—Then Res BW
For best results use the AUTO setting for the Res BW values Increasing
the resolution BW could reduce pulse measurement capability by
affecting the 100 POI duration and the minimum detectable signal level
The resolution BW must be as narrow as possible to maintain gapless
measurements
When Manual RBW is selected the FieldFox attempts to set the RBW to
the setting you request but this setting is coupled to the current span
settings If the manually set RBW is not settable with the current
frequency span value the FieldFox defaults to the nearest achievable
RBW setting to meet the manual RBW value Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 215
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
— Then choose from the following
— Auto Res BW is coupled to the frequency span As the frequency
span is narrowed the Res BW is also narrowed providing increased
ability to resolve signals
To change this setting from Man to Auto press Res BW twice
— Man Enter a Res BW value using the numeric keypad the
arrows or the rotary knob Then press a multiplier if necessary or
press Enter
The current Res BW setting is shown at the bottom of the screen
#Res BW xxx XHz (#) means manual setting
This setting could impact the accuracy of the measurement See Specifications
in Appendix B
Triggering
External Video and RF Burst triggering enable you to initiate an RTSA mode
sweep using an external event such as a signal burst
Trigger Type
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger Settings
—Then Trig Type
— Then choose from the following
— Free Run Triggering is provided by the FieldFox internal circuitry A new
sweep begins when the previous sweep ends
— External A sweep is triggered on an external TTL signal at the Ref InTrig In
connector on the FieldFox top panel Choose to trigger on the rising slope
at about 17 V or on the falling slope at about 10 V using the Trigger Slope
setting (below)
The following two selections are similar in that they both trigger a sweep from
a signal at the SA RF Input connector Experiment with both selections to find
the best trigger type for your application
Triggering only applies to Density Spectrum and RealTime Spectrum 216 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
— Video A sweep is initiated when the amplitude of an incoming signal
crosses the settable trigger level The comparison is done in the time
domain before conversion to frequency domain Refer to Trigger Slope
Trigger Delay Trigger Level on page 217 Auto Trigger Time on
page 217 and to Trigger HoldOff on page 218
— RF Burst A sweep is initiated when the signal at the third IF (analog) stage
crosses the settable Trigger Level This selection reacts to a wider
bandwidth of the incoming signal than Video Trigger which could be
beneficial However RF Burst is not as sensitive to triggering on lowlevel
signals Refer to Trigger Slope Trigger Delay Trigger Level on
page 217 Auto Trigger Time on page 217 and to Trigger HoldOff on
page 218
— Periodic Trigger repeats at the period rate entered Periodic trigger’s phase
can be altered by the Offset value
Then choose from the following
— Period Enter a value for the trigger to repeat (100 ns to 400 ms)
— Offset Enter a offset value to offset the phase of the periodic trigger
(–100 ms to 100 ms)
— Reset Offset Display Resets Offset to default 0000000 s
Trigger Slope
Trigger Slope determines which edge of an External Video or RF Burst trigger
signal initiates a sweep
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger Settings
—Then Trig Slope
— Then choose from the following
— Pos Sweep is triggered by the rising (positive) edge of signal
— Neg Sweep is triggered by the falling (negative) edge of signal
Trigger Delay
After a valid trigger signal is received the sweep begins after the specified
Trigger Delay time
—Press Sweep 3
If your trigger level is set too high for the current measurement gain setup
you will see an error message similar to this one displayed Video
TrigLevel was HW Limited it is xxx dB above current capability Adjust
your trigger level settings until the message is no longer displayed Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 217
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
—Then Trigger Settings
—Then Trig Delay
— Enter a value using the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary
knob (0 to 10 seconds)
— Then select a multiplier key or press Enter Learn more in Multiplier
Abbreviations on page 43
Trigger Level
Used with Video and RF Burst triggering a sweep is initiated when an
incoming signal crosses this level See also Scale and Units on page 208
RF Burst Trigger Level uses an alignment process which is performed in the
background to set the detected signal level accuracy Video Trigger Level is a
comparison done on the time domain signal before conversion to the spectral
frequency domain Processing from the time to frequency domain can cause
broadband (eg pulsed) signal energy to display at lower power levels than
the peak power levels of the time domain signal Therefore you may need to
the set trigger level higher than the displayed spectral level
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger Settings
—Then Trig Level
— Enter a value using the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary
knob (–210 to 30 dBm)
— Then select a multiplier key or press Enter Learn more in Multiplier
Abbreviations on page 43
Auto Trigger Time
While waiting for a valid trigger signal Wait is annotated in the top left corner
of the FieldFox screen
If a valid trigger signal is not received before the specified Auto Trig Time a
sweep will occur automatically
When Auto Trigger is OFF the FieldFox does NOT sweep unless a valid trigger
signal is received
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger Settings
—Then Auto Trigger
— Enter an Auto Trig Time using the numeric keypad (1 ms to 100 seconds)
— Then select a multiplier key See Multiplier Abbreviations on page 43 218 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
—Enter 0 to set Auto Trigger OFF or press the Auto Trigger softkey a second
time to turn OFF Auto Trigger
Trigger HoldOff
Used with External Video and RF Burst triggering sets the holdoff time
between triggers (Range 0000000 to 10000000 seconds)
Once a trigger occurs future triggers are ignored until the trigger holdoff time
expires Setting the trigger holdoff to zero essentially turns off the trigger
holdoff feature Also you can press Trig HoldOff > OFF
Trigger Settings Annotation
Trigger settings are annotated on the FieldFox screen as shown in the following
figure
—Trig Type (VidT) AutoTrigger (a) Pos Slope ()
— Horizontal arrow Trig Level (green horizontal graticule at 35 dBm)
Single Continuous Restart Time Per Div
This setting determines whether the FieldFox measures continuously or only
once each time the Single or Run Hold + button is pressed Use Hold
Single to conserve battery power or to allow you to save or analyze a specific
trace
To conserve battery power in addition to using Hold Single you must
also set the System > preferences >Preferences > Battery Saver to On For
more refer to the System Settings chapter and Preferences on page 515 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 219
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
How to set Single or Continuous
—Press Sweep 3
— Then choose one of the following
— Continuous
——ON Causes the RTSA to make continuous sweeps This is the
typical setting for making measurements Each Run Hold +
press causes the RTSA to toggle between continuous sweep
and Hold
——OFF Causes the RTSA to Hold Each Run Hold + or Single
press causes the RTSA to make ONE sweep then Hold The
Hold annotation changes to an arrow > while the sweep
occurs
— Single Automatically sets Continuous OFF and causes the RTSA to
make ONE sweep then Hold
— Restart Resets the average counter to 1 If Continuous sweep is OFF
it also causes Average Count (n) sweeps to occur if any Trace State is
set to RMS Average MinHold or MaxHold This softkey is also used
to clear the Spectrogram display Learn more in Average Count on
page 223
Acq Time
Use the Acq Time setting to adjust acquisition time interval for each trace
update in Density or RealTime Spectrum measurements
How to set Acq Time
—Press Sweep 3
—Then choose
— Acq Time Acq Time affects the quantity of information being
captured during a density or realtime spectrum measurement
——Auto (default) the FieldFox chooses the optimum Acq Time
based on the span setting (default is 20 ms)
——Manual enables user settable acquisition time values
Points (not user settable)
Points is the number of measurements that are displayed along the Xaxis
RTSA automatically sets the points to 561 and is not user settable 220 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
Trace Display States
In RTSA Mode you can display up to four of the following types of trace states
All RTSA settings are applied to all displayed traces These traces represent the
RealTime Spectrum in each of the three measurement modes
A colorcoded legend for displayed traces is visible in the left pane of the RTSA
mode screen
W ClearWrite M MaxHold m MinHold A Average V View
How to display the Trace States
—Press Trace 6
—Then Trace 1234 repeatedly to select a trace number to display or change
its state Traces are displayed in the following default colors (ie the colors
are user settable)
—Trace 1 – Yellow Trace 2 – Blue
—Trace 3 – Orange Trace 4 – Green
—Then State [current setting]
— Then choose from the following Trace States
—Clr Wr [W] (ClearWrite) Displays the actual measured data for each
sweep
—MaxHold [M] Displays the maximum response of the input signal at
each data point over multiple sweeps See also Average Count in
Average Count on page 223
—MinHold [m] Displays the minimum response of the input signal at
each data point over multiple sweeps See also Average Count in
Average Count on page 223
—RMS Average [A] Each data point is averaged over multiple sweeps as
set by the Average Count setting Learn more in Average Count on
page 223
—View [V] Displays and then holds the last complete measurement trace
on the screen This is similar to storing a trace in memory
—Blank Displays no trace
You can use the FieldFox’s Remote Server mode (89600 VSA software
connectivity) to parse playback files and captured data as MATLAB files
(*mat) Learn more about FieldFox and 89600 VSA software refer to
Chapter 13 Remote Server Mode (Requires CPU2 and SA HardwareSA
Option 233) and to
httprfmwemkeysightcomwirelesshelpfiles89600BWebHelp89600
htmKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 221
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
—Press Default All to return all traces to their default settings Trace 1
(ClearWrite) all other traces including trace detectors (Blank)
Detection Method
In RTSA Mode the Xaxis is comprised of data points also known as buckets
Learn more in Points (not user settable) on page 219
Regardless of how many data points are across the Xaxis each data point
must represent what has occurred over some frequency range and time
interval
From the frequency span of the measurement the span of each data point is
calculated as (frequency span (data points1)) The detection method allows
you to choose how the measurements in each bucket are displayed
Using the RTSA feature each of the four available traces can have an
independent detection method
How to set Detection Method
The current Detection method for each trace is labeled on the left edge of the
screen A corresponding letter appears below the corresponding Trace number
selected For example N means that Normal was the selected detector
—Press Trace_6
—Then Detector
— Then choose from the following
—Auto [] Displays the most appropriate Detection method based on
other settings
— Normal [N] Provides a better visual display of random noise than
Positive peak and avoids the missedsignal problem of the Sample
Mode Should the signal both rise and fall within the bucket interval
then the algorithm classifies the signal as noise An oddnumbered
data point displays the maximum value encountered during its
bucket An evennumbered data point displays the minimum value
encountered during its bucket If the signal is NOT classified as noise
(does NOT rise and fall) then Normal behaves equivalently as Positive
Peak
—Positive Peak [P] Displays the maximum value of all the measurements
in each bucket This setting ensures that no signal is missed
However it is not a good representation of the random noise in each
bucket
—Negative Peak [p] Displays the minimum value of all the
measurements in each bucket 222 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
—Sample [S] Displays the center measurement of all the measurements
in each bucket This setting gives a good representation of the
random noise in each bucket However it does not ensure that all
signals are represented
—RMS Average [A] Displays the Root Mean Squared (RMS) average
power of all the measurements in each bucket This is the preferred
method when making power measurements
Repeat the detection setup process as needed for up to 4 traces and 4
detection methods
Average Count Show Density Blue and Red Percentage Limits
How to set
—Press Meas Setup 4
Then choose one of the following
— Average Count – Changes the quantity of traces averaged for certain
trace states (ie MaxHold MinHold or RMS Average) Refer to
Average Count
— Show Density – (Density Spectrum Only) Displays a histogram image
of the traces
— Blue Limit – (Density Spectrum Only) Changes the percentage of
the trace that has a blue limit (005 to 100 default is 005) This
setting is coupled to the color bar in the upper right corner of the
FieldFox display
— Red Limit – (Density Spectrum Only) Changes the percentage of
the trace that has a blue limit (005 to 100 default is 100) This
setting is coupled to the color bar in the upper right corner of the
FieldFox display
— Blue Limit dBm – (Spectrogram Only) Changes the power level
(dBm) of the trace that has a blue limit (–210 dBm to 30 default is –
90 dBm) This setting is coupled to the color bar in the upper right
corner of the FieldFox display
— Red Limit dBm – (Spectrogram Only) Changes the power level
(dBm) of the trace that has a blue limit (–210 dBm to 30 default is –
50 dBm) This setting is coupled to the color bar in the upper right
corner of the FieldFox display
Blue limit and red limit percentages are coupled to the density percentage
limit bar in the upper right of the FieldFox display Or for the blue limit and
red limit power levels (dBm) are coupled to the Spectrogram power level
(dBm) limit bar in the upper right of the FieldFox display Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 223
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
Average Count
The Average Count setting is used mainly with the RMS Average Trace State
described above (But also applies to the MaxHold or MinHold trace states) In
the RMS Average Trace State the Average Count setting determines the
number of sweeps to average The higher the average count the greater the
amount of noise reduction
For all three of these Trace States (RMS Average MaxHold or MinHold) when
Sweep 3 Continuous is set to OFF press Restart to reset the sweep count to 1
perform sweeps then return to Hold
How to set Average Count
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Average Count
— Enter a value from 1 to 10000 using the numeric keypad the arrows
or the rotary knob
—Press Enter
Alignments
The RTSA mode requires all three alignment types amplitude RF burst and
channel equalization Refer the SA chapter’s Alignments on page 180 for
information on all Alignments
Display Line
A display line is a simple horizontal line that can be placed at any amplitude
level on the RTSA screen Use a display line as mental guide for visual
feedback 224 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RTSA Mode Settings
Figure 105 Display Line with Annotations
How to create and move a Display Line
—Press Limit __8
—Then Display Line OFF ON
— Then enter a Yaxis value using the arrows or the rotary knob then
press Enter Or enter a value using the numeric keypad and press a suffix
key or press EnterKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 225
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
Spectrogram Display
Spectrogram Display
Spectrogram display provides a visual history of the measured spectrum This
display type can be used to locate intermittent signals or to view signal levels
and frequencies over time
This display can NOT be used with Channel Measurements
Spectrogram Display (RTSA Option)
Spectrogram draws the most recent trace record at the bottom of the stack of
previouslydrawn trace records Drawing the live trace on the display is
optional
Figure 106 Spectrogram display Overlay view
How to select Spectrogram
—Press Meas 1
—Then Spectrogram
How to modify the Spectrogram
You can change how the spectrogram is displayed relative to the data trace
This setting affects the total number of trace records that can be displayed
For RTSA Mode
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Spectrogram View
— Then choose from the following
— Overlay Displays the data trace over the spectrogram with NO
graticules Total trace records 340 226 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
Spectrogram Display
— Top Displays the data trace below the spectrogram Total trace
records 130
— Bottom Displays the data trace above the spectrogram Total trace
records 130
Common Settings for Spectrogram
Set Red and Blue Limits
The colors displayed on the Waterfall and Spectrogram represent the various
measured power levels
— Red Highest power levels
— Blue Lowest power levels
Adjust the Red and Blue limits to the power levels that you expect to measure
The Blue limit must always be less than the Red limit
For RTSA Mode
—Press Meas Setup 4
— Then choose from the following
— Red Limit Using the arrows rotary knob or keypad select the
HIGHEST power level that you expect to measure This power level
and those measured higher than this level appear Red
— Blue Limit Using the arrows rotary knob or keypad select the
LOWEST power levels that you expect to measure This power level
and those measured lower than this level appear Blue
How to Restart the Spectrogram
Press Sweep 3 then Restart
The full RedtoBlue color spectrum is visible only with Indoor display
colors Learn more in Display Colors on page 513Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 227
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RecordPlayback (RTSA Option)
RecordPlayback (RTSA Option)
Record Playback allows you to record RTSA trace sweeps and play them back
at a later time Use this feature to monitor spectrum activity over a period of
time
You can record traces continuously or record a specified number of traces
(segments)
When GPS is enabled the current location and elevation are saved and played
back with traces
Recordings can be saved to the FieldFox Internal memory an SD Card or a
USB flash drive
About Sessions
A Recording Session is a collection of recorded traces and the instrument
states that generated them
Before recording can occur a new session must be initiated or an existing
session must be opened Sessions can later be opened for playing or continued
recording Only one session can be open at a time
You close the session when finished recording or playing A session is also
closed when the FieldFox is Preset (or Mode Preset) an Instrument State is
recalled or when Mode is changed from RTSA
Each session is saved as a folder containing a set of files on the specified
storage device
How long can a recording session last
There are many variables that determine the possible length of a recording
session But one key variable is the amount of available memory
When a session is opened or a new session is initiated an estimate is made of
the maximum number of traces that can be saved based on the available disk
space and the current number of data points (resolution) Recording will stop
when that number is reached This estimate always keeps 4 MB of available
disk space on the specified storage device You can decrease the number of
traces to further limit recording
To maximize the amount of space that is available save recorded traces to a
USB Flash drive or SD card Learn how in Manage Sessions on page 234
Density Spectrum information is not recorded Only the trace data is
saved See How to Record a Session on page 230
RecordPlayback is only available in Density Spectrum and RealTime
Spectrum measurements RecordPlayback is not supported on
Spectrogram See How to Record a Session on page 230 228 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RecordPlayback (RTSA Option)
You can determine the length of time over which recording can occur by
setting the Record Interval (the time between recorded traces) and other
settings Learn more in Recording Configuration on page 232
To view and edit the maximum number of records
Just after opening or initiating a session
—Press Session Data
—Then TraceRecordLimit (n Max number of traces that can be
recorded)
— Clear All Records Empties that session of recorded traces Learn more in
Manage Sessions on page 234
FieldFox Setting Changes during Record and Playback
During Recording
When any of the following State settings are changed during recording the
State counter is incremented (About State and User Tags on page 229) and
the settings are saved to the Session file along with the first trace to be
recorded with the new setting During playback the trace and display
annotation will reflect the change on the screen
State settings
Refer to Table 101 on page 229 for a list of the applicable state settings for
the RTSA options
IMPORTANT Pressing Clear All Records causes a loss of ALL of the session
data Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 229
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RecordPlayback (RTSA Option)
Other display settings such as Scale and acquisition can also be changed
during recording but are not saved with the session file Think of these as
settings that help YOU see the recording and playback activity They do NOT
change the data that is recorded
During Playback
Changes to the states listed above are NOT allowed during playback
However all other display settings can be changed during playback to help
you analyze the recorded data
In RTSA mode trace recordings are played back as is and the Trace State
cannot be modified No measurement post processing is allowed and no
Density or Spectrogram information can be recovered This is because RTSA’s
RealTime Spectrum and Density displays are not derived from the trace data
but instead require independent high speed hardware acquisition
RecordPlayback Exceptions
Markers can be activated and moved to help analyze recorded data However
marker position control is only available when playback is Paused
About State and User Tags
When any of the State settings (listed above) are changed during a recording
a state tag’ is inserted at the first trace number to be recorded with the new
setting
Table 101 Summary of RTSA State Settings
Option Settings
RTSA
Acquisition Time
Detector(s)
External Gain
Frequency Range
Preamp OnOff
Resolution BW
RF Attenuation
Trace State(s)
Trigger Settings 230 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RecordPlayback (RTSA Option)
In addition you can insert a User Tag’ at any time during a recording session
to indicate an external event such as when an antenna is moved During
playback you can move quickly to any of these tags or scroll through these
tags
A symbol is used on the screen annotation to distinguish a User Tag from a
State Tag when scrolling through tags during playback
Screen Annotation
During a record or playback session the following is displayed in the topleft
area of the screen
— AutoSession02 9295 (state 45)_*_
Sep222018 091515 AM
where
— AutoSession is an autogenerated name for sessions 02 is the
autogenerated number incremented with each new session The name
can be changed using Manage Sessions Learn more in Manage Sessions
on page 234
— 9295 is the current and total trace number currently trace is 92 of 95 total
traces
— state 45 is the current and total state tag or user tag number 4 of 5 total
tags
— * (Asterisk) indicates that a state has changed # (Pound) indicates that a
User Tag has been inserted
— Sep22 is the date and time of recording
When GPS is enabled` the current location and elevation are annotated at the
bottom of the playback display Learn more in GNSS (GPS+) and GPS on
page 526
How to Record a Session
—Press Trace 6
—Then Record Playback
— Then either
If Recording or Playback is not occurring when you think it should check
the following
— Is the sweep in HOLD (upperleft annotation) or check the Sweep
menu for Continuous set to OFF
— Is Recording or Playback Paused (midleft annotation)
— Is the Record or Playback Interval set too long (Configuration
settings)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 231
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RecordPlayback (RTSA Option)
— New Session OR
— Recall Session then Open and select a session
—Then Recorder Player
—Then Record
REC is displayed in the left of screen graticules
During recording choose from the following
— Pause Resume Temporarily halts recording until pressed again The
incoming trace continues to sweep Press again to continue recording
— Stop Immediately stops recording Then choose from the following
—Press Play to start replaying the recording from the beginning
—Press Record to continue recording
— User Tag Press to insert a User Tag at the current recorded trace This
allows you to quickly move to this location during playback Learn more in
About State and User Tags in About State and User Tags on page 229
How to Playback a Session
—Press Trace 6
— If the session is already open skip the following step Otherwise
—Then Record Playback Setup
—Press Recall Session Then select a session to playback and press
Open
—Then Recorder Player
—Then Play
PLAY is displayed in the left of screen graticules during playback When the
end of the recording is reached playback begins again at trace 1 and
continues to loop indefinitely
During playback choose from the following
— Pause Resume Temporarily halts playback Then choose from the
following
— Pause Resume Press to continue playing
If these are large recordings on a device it could take several seconds for
the FieldFox to display the list 232 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RecordPlayback (RTSA Option)
— Playback StateTag Allows you to continue playback from a state
tag or scroll through the state tags Enter a value between 1 and the
total number of state tags using the numeric keypad arrows or
the rotary knob Active when playback is paused Learn more in
About State and User Tags in About State and User Tags on
page 229
— Playback Trace Activated automatically when Paused Allows you to
continue playback from a specific trace or scroll through traces
manually Enter a value between 1 and the total number of traces
using the numeric keypad arrows or the rotary knob
— Stop Immediately stops playback Then choose from the following
— Play Start playback from trace 1
— Record Resume recording from the last recorded trace
— Record Playback Setup Return to the setup menu to change
Configuration settings or Close the session
Recording Configuration
To change Recording Configuration settings
—Press Trace 6
—Then Record Playback
—Then New Session or Recall an existing session
—Then Recording Configuration
Then choose from the following
— Record Time Sets the amount of time to record traces Default is MAX
which is to record indefinitely Enter a value between 1s and 1 Ms (million)
seconds using the numeric keypad arrows or the rotary knob When
set a timer appears during recording in the lowerleft corner which counts
DOWN from the specified time
— Record Source Determines which trace is recorded Sets where in the
FieldFox data flow data is recorded Learn more in Record Source on
page 233 Choose from the following
— First Active Trace (Default) This setting automatically selects the first
active trace (12 3 or 4) (ie any state other than View or Blank)
— Trace 1234 Records data from the corresponding trace in its
current state Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 233
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RecordPlayback (RTSA Option)
— Record Interval Sets the amount of time to wait between individual trace
recordings Default is MIN which is to wait 0 seconds (record traces as fast
as possible) Enter a value in seconds between 0 (no delay) and 10000
seconds about 3 hrs) using the numeric keypad arrows or the rotary
knob
— Segment Count Sets the number of traces to record after which the
recording will automatically pause Press PauseResume or Record to
capture another N traces or Stop to end recording Default is OFF which is
NO limit to the number of traces to be recorded
When set a counter appears in the lowerleft corner which counts UP to
the specified number of recordings
Record Source
Figure 107 FieldFox RTSA Mode Data Flow and Record Playback Data Points
RTSA Data Recording
— Data is recorded at the trace state processing block
— Data can be recorded from Traces 123 or 4 which includes the trace state
(Max Hold Min Hold and so forth)
For this discussion it is important to understand Trace States Learn more
in Trace Display States (SA Mode) on page 178
Density Spectrum information is not recorded Only the trace data is saved 234 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RecordPlayback (RTSA Option)
— Data is ALWAYS played back into the same trace number that was
recorded If four traces were active during the recording but only one trace
was recorded then during Playback only that one recorded trace is visible
Playback Configuration
By default trace sweeps are played back as fast as the trace can be drawn on
the screen The following setting allows you to slow playback In addition you
can manually scroll through individual traces using Playback Trace or scroll
through State and User Tags using Playback StateTag Learn more in How to
Playback a Session in How to Playback a Session on page 231
To slow playback of a session
— Record a new session or Open an existing session
—Press Playback Configuration
—Then Playback Interval
— Enter a value in seconds between 0 (no delay) and 100 using the numeric
keypad arrows or the rotary knob After using the keypad select a
multiplier key Learn about multiplier abbreviations
—Press Enter
Manage Sessions
—Press Trace 6
—Then Record Playback
—Then Record Playback Setup The following selections are available ONLY
when a session is NOT open
—Then Storage Device to select the media which stores the sessions to be
managed This is a different setting from the SaveRecall Storage Device
setting
— Then choose from the following
— Internal FieldFox memory (default)
— SD Card An external SD Card (must be inserted)
— USB An external USB flash drive (must be inserted)
—Then Manage Sessions
— Then choose from the following
If these are large recordings on a device it could take several seconds for
the FieldFox to display the listKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 235
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RecordPlayback (RTSA Option)
— Rename Using the FieldFox labeler change the name of the session
AutoSession (n) is the default name where (n) is the nextavailable
number Learn more in How to use the FieldFox labeler on
page 546
— Sort Arrange the listing of sessions by Name by Date or by Size
Sort can also be used during a Recall Session before choosing a
session to open
— Delete After a confirmation prompt removes the contents of the
selected session from the list
— Copy Copies the selected session to a different storage device or the
same storage device with Copy(n)_’ appended to the beginning of
the name so that duplication is prevented
— Copy All Copies ALL of the listed sessions to a different storage
device or the same storage device with Copy(n)_’ appended to the
beginning of the names so that duplication is prevented
— Delete All Deletes ALL of the listed sessions
Record Playback Example (RTSA Mode Only)
The following Interval Recording example shows how you can record spectral
activity over a longer period of time with less trace storage
—Press Trace 6
—Then Record Playback
—Then New Session
—Then Recording Configuration
—Then Record Source to Trace1
—Then Back
—Then Recorder Player
—Then Record let the recorder run for several seconds
—Then Stop to end the recording
This session can be played back For example
—Press Trace 6
—Then Record Playback
—Then Play 236 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
RTSA (RealTime Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only)
RecordPlayback (RTSA Option) 237
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
11 IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
IQA mode measures signals at the SA RF IN connector
IQA mode requires the FieldFox to have SA mode and CPU2 installed
Figure 111 IQ Analyzer (IQA) Display LTE–TDD signal captured using the FieldFox’s IQ analyzer 238 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
In this Chapter
About IQ Analyzer (IQA) Measurements on page 240
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings on page 241
— How to Make Measurements Using the IQ Analyzer Mode on
page 241
— How to Capture IQ Data to a File on page 242
— How to modify the IQ data measurement parameters on page 245
Using Markers (IQA) on page 256
— Noise Marker on page 256
— BandInterval Power Marker on page 257
— Band Span Marker (Spectrum Only) on page 258
— Interval Span Marker (Waveform Only) on page 258
— Coupled Markers (Waveform Only) on page 258
— Continuous Peak Search Marker on page 260
Alignments on page 261
Trace Display States (IQA Mode) on page 261
— How to display the Trace States on page 261
Other Features Available on page 263
— External Gain (SA chapter) – External Gain on page 154
— Display lines (SA chapter) –Display Line on page 189
— Limit Lines (Data Analysis chapter) – All about Limit Lines on page 499Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 239
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
See Also
Why and When to Calibrate on page 122
All about Markers on page 484
All about Limit Lines on page 499
All about Trace Math on page 504
Chapter 25 Data Analysis Features
Chapter 28 File Management 240 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
About IQ Analyzer (IQA) Measurements
About IQ Analyzer (IQA) Measurements
The IQ Analyzer Mode makes general purpose frequency domain and time
domain measurements The mode enables two types of IQ measurements
— frequency domain and
— time domain measurements
In order to ensure consistent results between frequency domain and time
domain spectrum measurement and waveform measurement are based on the
same IQ acquisition The following acquisition parameters are automatically
calculated to satisfy these requirements
1 RBW and IF BW specified in Spectrum measurement BW (BW 2) menu
2 Start time and Stop time specified in Waveform measurement Sweep
(Sweep 3) menu and IF BW specified in Waveform measurement BW
(BW 2) menu
3 IQ signal capture related parameters specified in the Measurement Setup
(Meas Setup 4) menu
Some measurement parameters are autocoupled and are not usersettableKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 241
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings
Select IQA Mode before making any settings in this chapter
How to select IQA Mode
—Press Mode_
—Then More (may not be available—number of installed options dependent)
—Then IQ Analyzer
How to Make Measurements Using the IQ Analyzer Mode
The Measure menu is used to set common parameters predefined views
selection and measurement switching
Spectrum has only one predefined view and Waveform measurement has two
predefined views There is a User Defined measurement which can be used to
display up to four different views (windows) simultaneously on the display
screen You can select which type of data to display in each of the views from
the Trace menu
See also How to Capture IQ Data to a File on page 242
1 Press Preset then Mode Preset (Factory)
2 Press Measure 1 then choose from the following
— Spectrum (Freq Domain) (Default) – Selects frequency spectrum as
the current displayed measurement
— Waveform then choose one of the following
— RF Envelope Selects log RF envelope in time domain
(default)
— IQ Waveform Selects linear Real and imaginary IQ
waveform values
— User Defined Selects a default user defined 4quadrant display
showing the following data
— Log magnitude of the spectrum of the IQ data versus
frequency
— Log magnitude of the IQ data (RF Envelope) versus time
When you initially select IQ Analyzer RealTime SA or some of the other
spectrum settings (such as center frequency) a factory channel
Equalization measurement is applied to the signal During channel
equalization measurement the FieldFox displays a Start Channel
Equalization Stopping channel equalization is not permitted See also
Alignments on page 180 in Chapter 9 SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode 242 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings
— The real component of the IQ data versus time
— The imaginary component of the IQ data versus time
The user defined measurement can be modified to change the
number of displays from 4 to 3 2 or 1
— Capture Data File Opens a menu to enable saving IQ data to a file
When you press the Start capture softkey the data is saved to a file
and the default file IQDataFilecsv is stored in the internal
memory Refer to How to Capture IQ Data to a File on page 242
How to Capture IQ Data to a File
There are two IQ data file count capture modes Single and Multiple To
capture your IQA data measurements
—Press Measure 1 > Capture Data File then choose one of the following
— File Settings Opens a menu to set the file choices
——File Count File count can be set to Single or 1 (all data saved
into a single file for the current displayed data) or Multiple
When using Multiple as the file count the user can enter the
number of files to save and the FieldFox is autocoupled to
Continuous acquisition mode and to Multiple capture and all
data is saved to either an external SD card or USB storage
device Each acquisition is saved before the next data
acquisition occurs (default 1 minimum 1 maximum
1000000000)
——Single capture example (default) IQDataFilecsv
——Multiple capture (default)
Example is IQDataFile_20171031 1433261050csv)
(format is IQDataFile_yyyymmdd hhmmssffffcsv)
——Refer to the Start softkey on page 243 and to the
Example on page 245
——File Type Selects the format of the output data file (CSV TXT
SDF or MAT) (Default CSV)
——Device Selects the storage location for your data files (Internal
SD Card or USB) Internal is not available if the File Count is
set to Multiple (default Internal)
IQ data cannot be recalled or displayed in the FieldFox instrument The
data file is intended for use in a PC Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 243
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings
If you do not have an external device connected and attempt to
save your data a warning message is displayed Warning
Only an external storage device can be used in
multiple file mode
Then select
——Internal (default) Selects the internal memory of the
FieldFox as the storage location for all data files Internal
is only available when File Count is set to Single
——SD Card Selects the external SD card slot as the storage
location for all data files
——USB Selects an external USB storage device as the
storage location for all data files
——Filename Opens a file manager Labeler menu that enables you
to customize your data filenames Refer to Chapter 28 File
Management (default IQDataFile)
——Back Returns to the previous softkey menu
— Capture Settings then choose one of the following
——Capture Time Sets the length of the IQ trace capture time
(default 100 μs range 80 ns to dynamic (ie Maximum
capture time is 335544 ms which is associated with a sample
rate of 125 MHz))
——Sample Rate Sets the IQ data sample rate value (default
125 MHz maximum 125 MHz couplings 125 * IF
Bandwidth)
——Sample Period Sets the 1Sample Rate value (default 80 ns
maximum 80 ms couplings Sample Rate)
——Capture Samples Sets the capture length using a sample
number (default 1251 minimum 1 maximum 4194304
couplings Capture Time)
——Back Returns to the previous softkey menu
— Start Starts the IQ data capture and stores the data into a default
file and location (internal) Filenames and storage location can be
customized See also the Example on page 245 and to Chapter
28 File Management
——Refer to the File Count softkey on page 242 244 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings
— Stop immediately stops the IQ data file capture and stops writing
data to the current IQ data file (no data is saved) If the IQ data was
being saved when the Stop softkey is pressed the file is deleted
Refer to Example on page 245
Each time you press the Start softkey the IQ data writes to the current
filename (ie Single capture default is IQDataFilecsv or for Multiple
format is IQDataFile_yyyymmdd hhmmssffffcsv) To avoid overwriting
your Single capture data or to add a unique filename for Single or Multiple
capture data use the Measure 1 > Capture Data Settings > File Settings >
Filename softkey to modify your filename Refer to the File Count softkey
on page 242Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 245
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings
Example
Single
——If the Capture Time is set to 100 µs and you press the Start
softkey in Single mode the FieldFox saves 100 µs of the
current IQ data
Multiple
——If the File Count is set to 200 and you press the Start softkey
the FieldFox saves your 200 IQ data files and stops The IQ
data files are saved into 200 files similar to
IQDataFile_yyyymmdd hhmmssffffcsv
——If you press Stop before the 200 IQ data files have been
saved the FieldFox stops (interrupts) the multiple IQ data file
saving at the number of the current file So if you press Stop
on file number 175 the saving process stops If file number 175
has not been saved it is deleted But IQ data files 1 through
174 that have been saved prior to pressing Stop are still saved
for reference
See also Chapter 28 File Management
How to modify the IQ data measurement parameters
The following sections assume you have already selected your IQ data
measurement type (ie Spectrum Waveform (RF Envelope or IQ Waveform)
or User Defined)
This section contains the following
Adjusting the Bandwidth Settings
—Press BW 2
— Then choose from the following
Adjusting the Bandwidth Settings on page 245
Changing between the Continuous and Single captures and
adjusting the Trigger settings on page 248
Adjusting the Measurement Setup Settings on page 250
Adjusting the Trace Settings on page 251
Adjusting the Frequency Settings on page 252
Adjusting the Scale and Amplitude Settings on page 253
Preamplifier Control (Opt 235) on page 255 246 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings
— Res BW (Spectrum only) – Sets the resolution bandwidth of the FFT
analysis Changing this value changes the FFT window size analysis
length and the sweep time (data acquisition capture length) This
softkey is only available when IQA is set to Spectrum (Freq Domain)
When the resolution bandwidth value is set to Auto (default) the
FieldFox automatically sets the optimum resolution bandwidth value
(Default 200 kHz Minimum 01 Hz maximum 3 MHz)
— Analysis Length Sets the FFT analysis length that is the length of the
complex IQ data points (IQ–pairs) vector that is used for spectrum
analysis expressed in the number of samples (Couplings In Auto
this setting is directly coupled to the Res BW and to Span Minimum
8 Maximum 524288 Where each FFT length point is equal to 1 I
and 1 Q point So 237 is equal to 237 I and 237 Q points)
— FFT Window Sets the FFT filtering window (spectrum analysis
window) shape for the IQ data Default Flat Top
Then select one of the following
There is a significant difference between resolution BW in FFT
measurements and the resolution BW of a traditional sweeping
spectrum analyzer (SA) measurement The resolution BW in FFT
measurements does not directly control the IF BW like a traditional SA
swept measurement Resolution bandwidth is directly related to the
analysis length (window) and or data acquisition capture length (sweep
time)
FFT Window Description
Uniform No windowing
Triangular Barlett windowing
Hanning This is a Hann window sometimes called Hanning or raised
cosine
Hamming This window has lower sidelobe peaks than the Hann window
but has worse mainlobe flatness and poor sidelobe rolloff
Blackman This window is similar to the threeterm BlackmanHarris
window but it has simpler fixedform coefficients and better
sidelobe rolloff
Blackman Harris 3 This is the threeterm BlackmanHarris window This has the
minimum sidelobe level for a threeterm cosine window
Blackman Harris This is the fourterm BlackmanHarris window This has the
minimum sidelobe level for a fourterm cosine window with
60 dBdecade rolloff
Gaussian Top This is a fiveterm cosine window that resembles a Gaussian
window Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 247
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings
— IF BW Sets the Digital IF bandwidth of the instrument The
relationship between the IF bandwidth and sample rate can be
described by the following equation
sample rate 125 * IF BW
(Default 10 MHz minimum 10 Hz maximum 10 MHz)
Flat 4 This is a fourterm flattop window
Flat Top (default) This is the fiveterm flattop window
Flat 6 This is a sixterm flattop window
Flat 7 This is a seventerm flattop window
P501 This is an alternative sixterm flattop window
P601 This is an alternative seventerm flattop window
KB (70 dB) This is a KaiserBessel window whose maximum sidelobe
level is 70 dB
KB (80 dB) This is a KaiserBessel window whose maximum sidelobe
level is 80 dB
KB (90 dB) This is a KaiserBessel window whose maximum sidelobe
level is 90 dB
KB (100 dB) This is a KaiserBessel window whose maximum sidelobe
level is 100 dB
KB (110 dB) This is a KaiserBessel window whose maximum sidelobe
level is 110 dB
KB (120 dB) This is a KaiserBessel window whose maximum sidelobe
level is 120 dB
Gaussian (60 dB) This is a Gaussian window whose maximum sidelobe level is
60 dB
Gaussian (70 dB) This is a Gaussian window whose maximum sidelobe level is
70 dB
Gaussian (80 dB) This is a Gaussian window whose maximum sidelobe level is
80 dB
Sinc This window is the central lobe of the sin(x)x (often called
sinc(x)) function
Tukey25 This is a tukey (cosinetapered) window with alpha equal to
025
FFT Window Description 248 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings
Changing between the Continuous and Single captures and adjusting
the Trigger settings
—Press Sweep 3
— Then choose from the following
— Single When pressed Single automatically sets Continuous to OFF
and causes the application to make one acquisition
— Continuous Toggles Continuous between ON and OFF When
Continuous is ON each RunHold press causes the application to
toggle between continuous acquisitions and Hold When Continuous
is OFF each RunHold or Single press causes the application to
make one acquisition
— Restart When pressed Restart causes the FieldFox to restart trace
averaging at count of 1 When in Single sweep mode the IQA will
perform a complete set of averages before returning to the hold
state
— Start Time (Waveform only) Sets the start time of the waveform
measurement (default 0s minimum 0s maximum dynamic) In
Waveform mode Setting the Start and stop time enables you to
display a subset of the data on the display in order to speed up the
refresh rate when the acquisition time is long Changing the Start
Time changes which data point is displayed on the left side of the
screen
Couplings When the change of Stop Time makes time domain
display length exceed the limitation the Start Time will change to
satisfy time domain display length limitation
——The maximum value is determined by current Sample Rate and
the maximum capture samples
——Start Time is adjusted to the nearest sample point based on
the Sample Period
——The maximum time domain display length is 524288 points
Time Domain Display Length [pts] {[Sample
Rate[ptss] x (Stop Time[s] Start Time[s])] +
1}
Where
pts points
s seconds
— Stop Time (Waveform only) Sets the stop time for the waveform
display (default 100 μs minimum 0s maximum dynamic) In
Waveform mode Setting the Start and stop time enables you to
display a subset of the data on the display in order to speed up the Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 249
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings
refresh rate when the acquisition time is long Changing the Stop
Time changes which data point is displayed on the right side of the
screen
Couplings When the change of Stop Time makes time domain
display length exceed the limitation the Start Time will change to
satisfy time domain display length limitation
——The maximum value is determined by current Sample Rate and
the maximum capture samples
——Stop Time is adjusted to the nearest sample point based on the
Sample Period
——The maximum time domain display length is 524288 points
Time Domain Display Length [pts] {[Sample
Rate[ptss] x (Stop Time[s] Start Time[s])] +
1}
Where
pts points
s seconds
— Trigger Settings Opens the Trigger Settings softkey menu
Then
——Trig Type Then select one of the following
Softkey Description
Free Run (Default) – Triggering is provided by the FieldFox internal
circuitry A new acquisition begins when the previous
acquisition ends
External An acquisition is triggered on an external TTL signal at the
Ref InTrig In connector on the FieldFox top panel
Choose to trigger on the rising slope at about 17 V or on
the falling slope at about 10 V using the Trigger Slope
setting (below)
Video An acquisition is initiated when the displayed amplitude
of an incoming signal crosses the settable Trigger Level
This selection can detect lowamplitude signals but also
has been filtered considerably and may not be a true
representation of the incoming signal
RF Burst An acquisition is initiated when the signal at the third IF
(analog) stage crosses the settable Trigger Level This
selection offers a wider bandwidth and may be a better
representation of the incoming signal than Video trigger
However RF Burst is not as sensitive to triggering on
lowlevel signals 250 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings
——Then depending on the trigger type selected choose from the
following
Trig Level – Sets the trigger level This softkey is only active for
Video or RF Burst (default –25 dBm minimum –210 dBm
maximum 30 dBm)
Trig Slope – Sets the negativepositive trigger slope This
softkey is only active for External Video or RF Burst (default
Pos)
Trig Delay – Sets the trigger delay This softkey is only active
for External Video or RF Burst (default 0s minimum
–150 ms maximum 500 ms)
Glitch Mask – Enables the glitch mask to reduce incorrect
triggering due to fast changesglitches in the signal level that
can be mistaken to be the edge of the RF burst This softkey is
only active for RF Burst (default 0 ms minimum 0s
maximum 5 ms)
Auto Trigger – While waiting for a valid trigger signal Wait is
annotated in the top left corner of the FieldFox screen
If a valid trigger signal is not received before the specified Auto
Trig Time a acquisition will occur automatically
Enter 0 to set Auto Trigger OFF When Auto Trigger is OFF the
FieldFox does NOT perform an acquisition unless a valid
trigger signal is received
(Default 100 ms minimum 1 ms maximum 100s)
Adjusting the Measurement Setup Settings
—Press Meas Setup 4
— Then choose from the following
— Average Type Opens a menu of averaging softkeys
Then select one of the following
——Power (Linear) Averaging – Best for measuring true power
levels Used in Noise Marker Average Mathematically trace
noise is 25 dB higher than when using Log Average PAvg
annotation is displayed
——Log Averaging (default) – Best for displaying Trace Averaging
Also known as video averaging LgAvg annotation is displayed
——Voltage (Magnitude) Averaging – Converts the amplitudes to a
magnitude unit before averaging (eg Volts Amps
microVolts milliVolts etc) VAvg annotation is displayedKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 251
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings
— Average Count The Average Count setting is used with the Average
Trace State In this Trace State the Average Count setting
determines the number of acquisitions to average The higher the
average count the greater the amount of noise reduction (default
10 minimum 1 maximum 10000)
— Sample Rate Sets the IQ data sample rate value (default 125 MHz
maximum 125 MHz couplings 125 * IF Bandwidth)
— Sample Period Sets the 1Sample Rate value (default 80 ns
minimum 80 ns maximum 80 ms couplings 1Sample Rate)
Adjusting the Trace Settings
The Trace menu is used to modify the existing predefined view or create a
customized view Window and Win State softkeys are used to modify layout of
view the Data softkey is used to specify the displayed data results for the
current window Please note only in User Defined measurement are all of the
data results from Spectrum measurement and Waveform measurement
available Otherwise only the data results from the current measurement
(Spectrum or Waveform) are available See also Trace Display States (IQA
Mode) on page 261
The Trace and Trace State keys are used to choose how many traces of the
data result are displayed and the trace data type (ClrWr MaxHold MinHold
Average View or Blank) that are displayed for each measurement
—Press Trace 6
— Then choose from the following
— Window 1 2 3 4 Changes the selected window (default 1)
Then select one of the following
— Win State ON OFF Enables or disables the current Window (1 2 3
or 4) selected by the Window 1 2 3 4 softkey (default Window 1 is set
to ON)
— Data Sets the data type displayed
Then select one of the following
For Spectrum Measurement
For Waveform Measurement
Mag Spectrum
Time Summary – Time Summary result includes
the capture time spectrum analysis time and
waveform startstop time
I vs Time – Imaginary vs Time 252 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings
— Trace 1 2 3 4 Pressing the Trace key enables you to select a different
trace number This softkey is active when Data is set to Spectrum or
RF Envelope
— Trace State Sets a different trace state to each of four traces This
softkey is active when the data is set to Spectrum or RF Envelope
(Log) Pressing the Trace State softkey enables you to change the
State of the selected Trace number of the Trace Data (default ClrWr
– assigned to trace 1 Traces 2 3 and 4 are set to Blank)
Adjusting the Frequency Settings
—Press FreqDist
— Then select from the following
— Center Sets the center frequency of the measurement trace (default
1 GHz minimum 0 Hz maximum FieldFox model dependent)
— Freq Span (Spectrum Only) Sets the frequency span of the
measurement trace The analyzer＇s digital IF bandwidth is always
equal to this value
Changing the span causes the IF bandwidth and the sample rate to
change automatically
Span IF bandwidth sample rate 125 * IF bandwidth
Res BW Span 50 if resolution bandwidth Auto
Q vs Time – Quadrature vs Time
Q vs I – Quadrature vs Imaginary
RF Envelope
Phase vs Time
Unwrapped Phase vs Time
Time Summary – Time Summary result includes
the capture time spectrum analysis time and
waveform startstop time
Spectrum and RF Envelope have six markers that can be applied to any of
the 4 traces
Waveform’s six markers can be applied to RF Envelope Real Imaginary
Phase Unwrapped Phase and Q vs I
— RF Envelope has four traces
— Real Imaginary Phase Unwrapped Phase and Q vs I have 1 trace
each Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 253
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings
Default 10 MHz minimum 10 Hz maximum 10 MHz
Adjusting the Scale and Amplitude Settings
Enables you to change attenuation settings When RF Attenuation Auto is ON
the RF Attenuation is set by adjusting the acquisition As the acquisition is
lowered for example from 10 dBm to 30 dBm the FieldFox assumes that you
are looking at lowlevel signals The RF Attenuation value is automatically
lowered in 5 dB steps to allow lowlevel signals to be viewed The RF
Attenuation value is never automatically lowered below 5 dB
How to set ScaleAmptd
—Press ScaleAmptd
Manually set Log or Linear Scale Type (Spectrum and RF Envelope Only)
Then select from the following
— More
——Scale Type [current setting] (Spectrum and RF Envelope) —
Only)
——Log Logarithmic scale (default setting) The Yaxis
reference line represents the specified absolute
acquisition in the current Unit selection Yaxis
graticules show dB below or above the reference line
(default 10 dB minimum 001 dB maximum 20 dB)
——Lin Linear scale The Yaxis reference line represents the
specified absolute acquisition in the current Unit
selection
——Yaxis graticules show percent of acquisition ()
below or above the reference line (Spectrum)
——Yaxis graticules show voltage (V) – (RF
Envelope)
Manually set Scale Unit Acquisition and Reference Position
— Autoscale Automatically adjusts the Yaxis to comfortably fit the Minimum
and Maximum amplitude of the trace on the screen Also optimizes the
FieldFox’s signal level at the mixer and adjusts the reference level to with
the autoscale settings
— ScaleDiv Manually adjust the scale per division to view specific areas of
the current trace Enter a value using the numeric keypad the arrows
or the rotary knob Then press Enter 254 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings
— Ref Level Manually set the value of the reference line Enter a negative
value by pressing RunHold (+) either before or after typing a value Use
acquisition in combination with the RF attenuator and the Preamp so that
the signal at the acquisition is at the optimum level for the FieldFox
(Spectrum and RF Envelope Only) This can also change the RF Attenuation
setting (default 0) See Attenuation Control on page 254
— Ref Pos Manually set the position of the reference line Values must be
between 0 (TOP line) and 10 (BOTTOM line) Default position is zero (top)
(default 0 minimum 0 maximum 10)
— More then
— Unit Sets the display units
Attenuation Control
Both the RF Attenuation and Preamp functions control the power level into
the FieldFox mixer
When too much power is present at the RF Input port ADC Over Range
appears on the FieldFox screen This does not necessarily mean that damage
has occurred but that the receiver is probably compressed
When high power levels are present at the RF Input port internal attenuation
can be switched in to keep the FieldFox receiver from compressing At
extremely high power levels use external attenuation to protect the internal
circuitry from being damaged
The displayed power level is automatically adjusted for RF Attenuation As the
attenuation value changes the displayed power level should NOT change
How to set Attenuation
—Press ScaleAmptd
—Then RF Atten Auto Man
— Auto RF Attenuation is set by adjusting the input power level As the
acquisition is lowered for example from –10 dBm to –30 dBm the FieldFox
assumes that you are looking at lowlevel signals The RF Attenuation value
is automatically lowered in 5 dB steps to allow lowlevel signals to be
viewed
— Man RF Attenuation is set manually The default Attenuation setting is
10 dB Enter a value between 0 to 30 dB in 5 dB steps using the numeric
keypad the arrows or the rotary knob Then press Enter
The FieldFox can be damaged with too much power
RF Damage Level +25 dBm (N995xA & N996xA) and +27 dBm (all others)
DC Damage Level ±50 VDC Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 255
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Mode Settings
#Atten xx dB is shown at the top of the screen (#) means manual setting
(Default 10 dB minimum 0 dB maximum 30 dB)
Preamplifier Control (Opt 235)
When very lowlevel signals are analyzed an internal preamplifier can be used
to boost the signal level by approximately 18 to 22 dB The gain of the preamp
is NOT adjustable The displayed signal level is automatically adjusted for the
increase in system gain
How to control the Preamp
By default the preamp is OFF
—Press ScaleAmptd
—Then More
—Then Preamp Off The displayed setting is the current setting When ON PA
is shown to the left of the graticules on the display (default OFF) When
OFF nothing is displayed in the left graticules
When Auto is selected the preamp setting is determined by the RF
attenuation and to the input power level When the input power level
reaches a certain value the preamp is turned on and PA is shown to the left
of the graticules on the display 256 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
Using Markers (IQA)
Using Markers (IQA)
The markers described here are for IQ Analyzer mode (exceptions are noted)
For additional marker features refer to All about Markers on page 484
This section contains the following
Noise Marker
For comparison purposes electronic noise measurements are often displayed
as though the measurement was made in a 1 Hz Res BW However making an
actual measurement at a 1 Hz Res BW is extremely slow
A Noise Marker mathematically calculates the noise measurement as though it
were made using a 1 Hz bandwidth
Several data points are averaged together to calculate the Noise Marker
readout To accurately measure noise the Noise Marker should NOT be placed
on or too close to a signal The distance from a signal depends on several
factors To know if an accurate reading is being made move the Noise Marker
until consistent measurements are displayed in adjacent data points
With a Noise Marker present the Res BW can be changed and the displayed
noise floor will also change but the Noise Marker readout will remain about
the same
IMPORTANT When using IQ markers it is important to either be in Single
acquisition mode or for Continuous acquisition mode to set the
measurement in advance on the FieldFox to Waveform or to Spectrum
Refer to How to Make Measurements Using the IQ Analyzer Mode on
page 241
The spectrum measurement’s six markers can only be applied to a single
displayed set of traces (Magnitude Spectrum)

The waveform measurement’s six markers can be applied to any of the six
displayed parameter traces (RF Envelope I (Imaginary) Q (Real) Phase
Unwrapped Phase or Polar)
See also Trace Display States (IQA Mode) on page 261
Noise Marker on page 256
BandInterval Power Marker on page 257
Band Span Marker (Spectrum Only) on page 258
Interval Span Marker (Waveform Only) on page 258
Coupled Markers (Waveform Only) on page 258
Continuous Peak Search Marker on page 260Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 257
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
Using Markers (IQA)
Noise Markers can be used like regular markers A Noise Marker is
distinguished from a regular marker by (1Hz) after the marker readout value
Learn more about regular markers in All about Markers on page 484
How to measure Noise with a marker
—Press Marker to create or select a Normal or Delta marker to use to
measure Noise
—Then More
—Then Marker Function
—Then Noise
BandInterval Power Marker
A BandInterval Power marker—available in IQA and SA Modes—integrates the
power that is measured over several adjacent data points The range of points
being measured is displayed with vertical posts around the marker This Band
Span value is selectable
This feature is very similar to a channel power measurement (see SA chapter
Channel Power (CHP) on page 195)
When the IQA is set to a waveform measurement the marker is referred to as
an Interval Marker because it averages power over a specific time interval In
this case the range is specified as the Interval Span
How to measure BandInterval Power with a marker
—Press Marker to create or select a Normal or Delta marker to use to
measure BandInterval power
—Then press More
—Then Marker Function
—Then BandInt Power
—Then Band Span (Spectrum) or IntervalSpan (Waveform)
— Then choose from the following
—Auto Measures power over 5 of the displayed span or ½ graticule
The Band Span is automatically updated to remain at 5 when you
change the frequency span
—Man Enter a frequency or time value using the arrows or the
rotary knob then press Enter Or enter a value using the numeric
keypad and select a frequency or time suffix The Band Span remains
at the frequency or time value that you set as the span changes 258 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
Using Markers (IQA)
Band Span Marker (Spectrum Only)
Sets the width of the span (Hz) for the selected marker
How to measure with the Band Span marker
—Press Marker to create or select a Normal or Delta marker to use to
measure BandInterval Power
—Then press More
—Then Marker Function
— Band Span Enables or disables the Band Span marker (default 500 kHz
minimum 1 Hz maximum 10 MHz)
Interval Span Marker (Waveform Only)
Sets the width of the interval span (seconds) for the selected marker
How to measure with the Interval Span marker
—Press Marker to create or select a Normal or Delta marker to use to
measure BandInterval power
—Then press More
—Then Marker Function
— Interval Span Enables or disables the Band Span marker (default 5 of the
(start time – stop time) minimum 1 ns maximum 10s
Coupled Markers (Waveform Only)
When a Coupled marker is enabled in a window on the FieldFox the current
active marker in that window is enabled as the ’reference’ coupled marker on
the current trace and the xaxis value of any other active waveform markers on
any other traces in other windows are updated to track that of the ’reference’
coupled marker Refer to Figure 112 on page 259
How to measure with the Coupled marker
—Press Marker to create or select a Normal Delta or Peak marker to use the
Coupled Marker
—Then More
—Then Coupled Markers Enables or disables the coupled marker (default
OFF)
Procedure to set coupled markers (Refer to Figure 112 on page 259)
1 Press Preset > Mode Preset (Factory)
2 Press Measure 1 > User DefinedKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 259
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
Using Markers (IQA)
Four windows are displayed (Spectrum Waveform Real and Imaginary)
3 Using the arrows or the rotary knob move so Window 2 Waveform is
selected (green border)
4 Press Marker > Marker 1 > Normal
5 Press Esc
6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 while selecting the other measurement windows
and markers
— Real using marker 2 and
— Imaginary using marker 3
7 Press Marker > More > Coupled Markers ON
8 Press Marker and use the arrows or the rotary knob to move the
coupled markers along the traces in Window 2 (Waveform) Window 3
(Real) and Window 4 (Imaginary)
Figure 112 IQ Analyzer (IQA) Display Coupled markers with Waveform (marker 1) Real
(marker 2) and Imaginary (marker 3) displays 260 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
Using Markers (IQA)
Continuous Peak Search Marker
When the Continuous Peak Search marker is on a peak search is automatically
performed for the selected marker after each acquisition For additional marker
functionality refer to All about Markers on page 484
Summary
— Cont Peak Search Enables or disables the continuous peak search
— The rules for finding the peak are exactly the same as for Peak Search
including the use of peak criteria rules
How to measure with the Continuous Peak Search marker
—Press Mkr>Tools to create or select a Normal or Delta marker to use the
Continuous Peak Search marker
—Then press More (RF Spectrum Only)
—Then press Mkr Properties
—Then Peak Criteria
—Then Cont Peak Search Enables or disables the Continuous peak search
marker (default OFF) Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 261
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
Alignments
Alignments
The IQA mode requires all three alignment types amplitude RF burst and
channel equalization Refer to the SA chapter’s Alignments on page 180 for
information on all alignments
Trace Display States (IQA Mode)
In IQA Mode you can display up to four of the following types of trace states
All IQA settings are applied to all displayed traces See also Marker Trace (IQA
and SA Mode) on page 488
A colorcoded legend for displayed traces is visible in the left pane of the SA
mode screen
W ClearWrite M MaxHold m MinHold A Average V View
How to display the Trace States
—Press Trace 6
—Then Trace 1234 repeatedly to select a trace number to display or change
its state Traces are displayed in the following colors
—Trace 1 – Yellow Trace 2 – Blue
—Trace 3 – Orange Trace 4 – Green
—Then State [current setting]
— Then choose from the following Trace States
—Clr Wr (ClearWrite) Displays the actual measured data for each
acquisition
—MaxHold Displays the maximum response of the input signal at each
data point over multiple acquisitions See also Average Count in
Adjusting the Measurement Setup Settings on page 250
If you have Option 351 IQ Analyzer option you can directly save your data as
MATLAB files (*mat) Refer to Chapter 11 IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351
(CPU2 Only) on page 237 and to Chapter 28 File Management
If you have the FieldFox’s Remote Server mode (89600 VSA software
connectivity) you can use the VSA software to capture and record your
data as MATLAB files (*mat) Learn more about FieldFox and 89600 VSA
software refer to Chapter 13 Remote Server Mode (Requires CPU2 and
SA HardwareSA Option 233) and to
httprfmwemkeysightcomwirelesshelpfiles89600BWebHelp89600
htm 262 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
Trace Display States (IQA Mode)
—MinHold Displays the minimum response of the input signal at each
data point over multiple acquisitions See also Average Count in
Adjusting the Measurement Setup Settings on page 250
—Average Each data point is averaged over multiple acquisitions as set
by the Average Count setting Learn more in Adjusting the
Measurement Setup Settings on page 250
—View Displays and then holds the last complete measurement trace on
the screen This is similar to storing a trace in memory
—Blank Displays no traceKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 263
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
Other Features Available
Other Features Available
— External Gain Refer to refer to the SA chapter’s section External Gain
on page 154
— Limit Lines For information on using Limit Lines refer to All about Limit
Lines on page 499
— Display Lines For information on using Limit Lines refer to the SA
chapter’s section Display Line on page 189 264 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option 351 (CPU2 Only)
Other Features Available 265
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
12 Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option
370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2 Only)
OTA mode measures signals at the SA RF Input Port 2 connector
OTA mode requires the FieldFox to have SA mode (Option 233 on combination
analyzers) GPS (Option 307) and CPU2 installed
Recommended but not required preamplifier (Option 235) to improve receiver
sensitivity
With Options 370 (LTE FDD) and 377 (5GTF) network designers can ensure
that networks have enough resources to carry out handovers (reselection)
when users move between cell towers on the same 5G network as well as in
between 5G and 4G networks (intrainterradio access technology) The
FieldFox OTA measurements support LTE FDD (Option 370) and Verizon 5GTF
(Option 377) overtheair demodulation of single acquisition multiple cell
towers or multiple acquisitions for multiple component carriers (CCs) The
FieldFox display can be configured to show data formats such as table bar
chart spectrum and strip chart of key performance indicators (KPI＇s)
By integrating overtheair (OTA) measurements with cable and antenna test
(CAT) full 2port vector network analysis spectrum analysis and realtime
spectrum analysis (RTSA) the FieldFox can be used for base station setup and
verification 266 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
In this Chapter
See Also
Using OTA (Options 370 – LTE FDD and 377 – 5GTF) on page 267
About Over–the–Air (OTA) Measurements on page 268
— LTE FDD Features (Option 370) on page 268
— 5GTF Features (Option 377) on page 271
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings on page 273
— OTA Setup Procedure on page 273
— Optional Using RTSA to verify the signal quality (Requires Option 350
and Preamp Option 235) on page 283
— How to Define a Cell or Cell(s) and Use OTA on page 284
How to RecordPlayback (OTA Options 370 and 377) on page 294
— Screen Annotation on page 294
— How to Record on page 295
— To change Recording Configuration settings on page 295
— How to Playback on page 296
Other Features Available on page 297
— Alignments (SA chapter) – Alignments on page 180
— External Gain (SA chapter) – External Gain on page 154
Troubleshooting on page 298
Glossary (OTA) on page 299
Why and When to Calibrate on page 122
Chapter 26 System Settings (Changing display colors)
Chapter 28 File ManagementKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 267
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
Using OTA (Options 370 – LTE FDD and 377 – 5GTF)
Using OTA (Options 370 – LTE FDD and 377 – 5GTF)
OTA enables you to do the following
Measure and display one component carrier (CC) with multiple cells or multiple cells with
multiple component carriers (CCs)ab
a When multiple component carriers are selected the results of the component carrier
(CC) with the highest power is displayed
b LTE FDD can measure and display multiple cells 5GTF only has the ability to measure
and display a single cell
Four Display Types
— Bar chart
—Table
—Strip Chart
— Spectrum
Color Coded Display Types
— Specify high and low power with
color bars
Flexible Data Sorting
— LTE FDD Sort Cells component
carriers (CCs) Frequency RSRP
RSRQ RSSI PSS SSS and SINR
scan results displayed by low to
high or high to low or Auto (no
order is involved)
— 5GTF Sort Carrier Info PCI (aka Cell
IDs) Power PSS SSS Sync
Correlation () scan results
displayed by low to high or high to
low or Auto (no order is involved)
Data Logging Record GPS stamped data measurements
— Define measurement interval by time
or distance
— Show results in Table or Bar Chart
— Display files (KML) on Google Maps
or Google Earth 268 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
About Over–the–Air (OTA) Measurements
About Over–the–Air (OTA) Measurements
OTA mode supports these standards
—LTE FDD and
—5GTF measurements
Some measurement parameters are autocoupled and are not usersettable
LTE FDD Features (Option 370)
LTE FDD has the following features
Cell Scan Results
— Center frequency
— Physical Cell Information (PCI) – (Cell ID) – (CSG)
— RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power) (dBm)
— RSRQ (Reference Signal Received Quality) (dB)
— RSSI (Reference Signal Strength Indicator) (dBm)
— PSS (Primary Synchronization Signal) (dBm)
— SSS (Secondary Synchronization Signal) (dBm)
— SINR (Signal to Interference & Noise Ratio) (dB)
— Frequency error (Hz)
Data Formats
User can set up and display 1 2 3 or 4 simultaneous measurements of key
performance indicators (KPI＇s) for any component carrier (CC0 through CC4)
up to 5 carriers in any combination of the following
— Table – Cell scan numeric results (for up to 6 cell sites (CCs) including
Physical Channel Information (PCI) – (Cell ID) RSRP RSRQ RSSI PSS
SSS SINR Freq Err
— Bar Chart – Vertical power bar graph of selectable cell scan result metric
for up to 6 cell sites with adjustable color heat amplitude scale
— Spectrum – Magnitude spectrum frequency domain (fixed span) You can
only view a single component carrier at a time with Spectrum (eg CC0 or
CC2 etcetera)
IMPORTANT LTE FDD and 5GTF only demodulate PSS and SSS signals
using the FieldFox’s 10 MHz demodulation path User data channels are
not demodulatedKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 269
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
About Over–the–Air (OTA) Measurements
— Strip Chart – Magnitude of selectable cell scan result metric graphed over
time
Figure 121 Example of the LTE FDD with Four Multiple Display Options 270 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
About Over–the–Air (OTA) Measurements
Figure 122 Example of the 5GTF with Four Multiple Display Options Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 271
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
About Over–the–Air (OTA) Measurements
5GTF Features (Option 377)
5GTF has the following features
Cell Scan Results
— Center frequency
— Physical Cell Information (PCI) – (Cell ID)
— Power (Channel Power) (dBm)
— PSS (Primary Synchronization Signal) (dBm)
— SSS (Secondary Synchronization Signal) (dBm)
— Sync correlation ()
Data Formats
User can set up and display 1 2 3 or 4 simultaneous measurements of key
performance indicators (KPI＇s) for any component carrier (CC0 through CC7)
up to 8 carriers in any combination of the following
— Table – Cell scan numeric results (for up to 6 cell sites (ID＇s) including Cell
ID Channel Power PSS SSS Sync Corr
— Bar Chart – Vertical power bar graph of selectable cell scan result metric
for up to 8 cell sites with adjustable color heat amplitude scale
— Spectrum – Magnitude spectrum frequency domain (fixed span) You can
only view a single component carrier at a time with Spectrum (eg CC0 or
CC2 etcetera)
— Strip Chart – Magnitude of selectable cell scan result metric graphed over
time
IMPORTANT LTE FDD and 5GTF only demodulate PSS and SSS signals
using the FieldFox’s 10 MHz demodulation path User data channels are
not demodulated 272 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
About Over–the–Air (OTA) Measurements
Figure 123 Example of 5GTF Single Carrier and Single CellKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 273
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
This section reviews the steps in setting up an OTA measurement If you are not
familiar with this process or would like more information refer to How to
Define a Cell or Cell(s) and Use OTA
This section consists of
— OTA Setup Procedure
— Optional Using RTSA to verify the signal quality (Requires Option 350
and Preamp Option 235)
OTA Setup Procedure
1 Modifying the Frequency Reference and GPS settings
Press System
— Then System Configuration) > GNSS (GPS+) > GNSS Receiver >
Internal > Esc
— The left portion of the screen displays satellites and the
corresponding number on the adjacent Satellite Power
chart
— The right portion of the screen displays Satellite Power
Carrier to Noise (CNo) dBHz values on the tops of the
satellite power chart
— Then System > System Configuration > Frequency Ref > Freq Ref
Source [GPS] >Back
Refer to Example of the LTE FDD Scan Results Table (Five CCs and one
cell) on page 279
And refer to Example of the 5GTF Scan Results Table (Two cc and one
cell) on page 280
See also GNSS (GPS+) and GPS on page 526
2 Selecting OTA mode
— Press Mode_
IMPORTANT See also Alignments on page 180 in NA modeChapter 9
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode and Chapter 10 RTSA (RealTime
Spectrum Analyzer) Mode—Option 350 (CPU2 Only) mode
IMPORTANT It is not sufficient to be locked to the GNSS satellite the
frequency reference must be locked to GPS 274 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
— Then More (may not be available—number of installed options
dependent)
— Then OTA
3 Selecting LTE FDD or 5GTF
Press Measure – (When you initially select OTA mode the FieldFox
defaults to the Measure menu)
— The Measure menu is used to select an OTA format (ie Option 370
LTE FDD or Option 377 5GTF)
— LTE FDD (default) or
— 5GTF
The OTA format chosen begins scanning for signals
Additional FieldFox setting changes are required for OTA to
display the available signals Refer to the steps below and
see also How to Define a Cell or Cell(s) and Use OTA on
page 284
4 Define some carrier and cell measurement information See also How to
Define a Cell or Cell(s) and Use OTA
Then modify the carrier and cells based on the selected OTA technology
(ie LTE FDD or 5GTF)
5 Press FreqDist
Then Center – You can enter a frequency or for LTE FDD (only) you can use
the Channel Table > Band and Channel softkeys to enter an autocoupled
Center frequency (see Channel Table softkey menu below)
6 Select Trace 6—choose
— Window 1 2 3 4
— Then Win State OFF ON to ON
— Then Data
— Table or
— Bar Chart or
— Spectrum or
If after making the setting changes in the steps below no data is
displayed refer to Troubleshooting on page 298
Display does not update (refresh) until all active component carriers (CCs)
have been scannedKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 275
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
— Strip Chart
— Then CC (select component carriers)
— All (Not applicable for Spectrum When All is specified for
Spectrum the FieldFox defaults to CC0) or
— CC0 CC1 CC2 CC3 or CC4 (ie 5GTF has up to eight
component carrier choices (CC5 CC6 and CC7))
Repeat process as needed for additional Windows Data and CC settings
7 Then Enabled ON (Window 1 defaults to ON If used other windows must
be enabled)
8 Optional Press FreqDist > Freq Mode > Chan
This changes the Center frequency value
Press Channel Table opens a softkey menu where you can select define
your carrier by Band and Channel The Center frequency value is
autocoupled to the BandChannel entered
— Then Band > n > Enter
(The Channel Band and the Center values are autocoupled)
— Then Favorites List opens a softkey menu where you can save your
current Band and Channel setup
— Then Setup 1 In the Favorites list softkey menu the
softkey displays the current Band and Channel displayed
(eg Setup 1 31200) Select the Favorites List softkey
again to observe the updated Setup 1 softkey
— Then Back
9 Then Sort Enables you to sort your LTE FDD5GTF carrier settings
Then Sort Order and choose Up or Down (Default Auto) Refer to About
Over–the–Air (OTA) Measurements on page 268
The Spectrum view in 5GTF uses a center frequency that is +26 MHz offset
from the carrier’s center frequency This is done so that FieldFox can
capture the necessary xPBCH (physical broadcast channel) information to
demodulate the signal Be aware that all of the instrument’s displayed
numbers are rounded to three significant digits (eg 50026 GHz is
displayed as 5003 GHz)
IMPORTANT When you select a multiple CCs (eg CC0 CC1 etcetera)
and record data you may actually see other cell signals that do not have
sufficient power to be displayed but are still detectable When multiple
component carriers are selected the results of the component carrier (CC)
with the highest power are displayed Refer to Figure 124 on page 279 276 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
10 Modify RF attenuator Preamp and other settings
Press ScaleAmptd > More
Then press the following
— RF Atten to set the attenuator power (default –10 dB) Set to 0 dB
— Preamp change to ON
— Range to set the absolute power (dBm)
— Others (optional) External Gain
11 Optional Modify scale and specify color bar limit values—Modify the scale
and assign colors to low and high power channels (bars)
Press ScaleAmptd
Then one of the following
— Red Limit to set the power level and color scale for high power
channels
— Blue Limit to set the power level and color scale for low power
channels
— Others Scale Ref Level etcetera as desired
12 Optional (ie If the Scan Results table does not populate) Press Meas
Setup
— LTE FDD
— Then FreqError Th > 5 kHz (enables data with larger
frequency error to be displayed)
or Extend Freq Lock > ON (disables FreqError Th softkey
and displays all available cell results (This may result in
longer scan times because display does not update until
all potential cells and their frequency offsets are detected
between signal and the OTA center frequency)
— 5GTF Then SyncCorr Th > 0 (enables data with greater than 0 of
the specified Sync Correlation percentage to be displayed)
— Once the table populates enter the desired frequency error (LTE
FDD) or Sync Correlation (5GTF) threshold for your measurement
(LTE FDD Default 900 Hz ie if a carrier signal’s error is greater Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 277
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
than 900 Hz no data is displayed 5GTF Default 1 ie if a
carrier signal’s sync correlation is smaller than 1 no data is
displayed)
13 Enable the Record Playback settings
— Press Measure 1
— To set Record Playback—choose
— Record or
— Playback (If you have previously stored data recordings)
——Play or
——Recall Logs
— Settings
——To set File Settings choose
——File Name enter a filename
——Device choose where to store your data
files
——File Type > CSV or KML choose a file
type (Default KML)
or
——File Overwrite OFF ON
——Then Back
If after making the setting changes in this section no data is displayed
refer to Troubleshooting on page 298
Display does not update (refresh) until all active component carriers (CCs)
have been scanned
Spectrum and Strip Chart information is not recorded Only the Table and
Bar Chart data are saved See How to Record on page 295
RecordPlay files are saved to
——RecordPlay files are saverecalled to
[CurrentDevice]＼Ota＼RecordPlayback＼
Learn more about file settings refer to Chapter 28 File Management 278 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
——Optional Then Meas Interval > ON
——Then Interval Type > choose Time or
Distance
——Then if applicable Time Interval enter
time interval in seconds
Or
——Then if applicable Distance Interval
enter distance interval in miters
——Then Back
14 If recording then
— Pause Resume Temporarily halts recording until pressed again The
incoming trace continues to sweep Press again to continue
recording
— Stop Immediately stops recording Then choose from the following
— Press Save Log File to save the current Table data (ie
default save device is Internal) ie *KML (default) or
*CSV files are saved to the filename and device type See
Settings below and To change Recording Configuration
settings on page 295
— Press Record to continue recording
— Then Settings To change your file settings or and
measurement interval Learn more refer to To change
Recording Configuration settings on page 295
— Save Log File
15 Export KML file into 3rd party mapping software (ie Google Map or
Google Earth) Refer to Step 6 Import and Play back KML Files into 3rd
Party Software (Example Google Earth with Animation Tool) on page 292
RecordPlay files are saved to
— RecordPlay files are saverecalled to
[CurrentDevice]＼Ota＼RecordPlayback＼Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 279
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
Figure 124 Single cell selected but other cells displayed when CC0 to CCn has been
enabled If ALL is selected only the CC with the highest power is displayed
(Not all of the detected data is displayed)
Figure 125 Example of the LTE FDD Scan Results Table (Five CCs and one cell)1
1 When multiple component carriers are selected the results of the component carrier (CC) with the highest
power is displayed 280 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
Figure 126 Example of the 5GTF Scan Results Table (Two cc and one cell)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 281
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
Additional LTE FDD Examples
Figure 127 Example of LTE FDD with Single Carrier Multiple Cell Sites KPIs 282 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
Figure 128 Example of LTE FDD with Multiple Carriers Single Cell Site and KPI’sKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 283
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
Optional Using RTSA to verify the signal quality (Requires Option 350
and Preamp Option 235)
—Press Mode > RTSA
—Then Density Spectrum (Default)
—Press FreqDist > Center (Default) > 751 MHz
(For this example Center 751 MHz)
—Press ScaleAmptd
—Then Preamp [ON]
—Then Ref Level (Default) Then use the arrows the rotary knob
or numeric keypad to position the trace for optimum viewing on the
FieldFox display Refer to Figure 129 on page 283
You should see a ~20 dB or greater LTE FDD signal–to–noise level If not
refer to Troubleshooting on page 298
Figure 129 Using RTSA to verify LTE FDD 751 MHz signal quality–20 dB Signal to Noise
Displayed (Requires Option 350 and Preamp Option 235) 284 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
How to Define a Cell or Cell(s) and Use OTA
LTE FDD and 5GTF have only one predefined view (Table) You can define
measurements which can be used to display up to four different views
(windows) simultaneously on the display screen You can select which type of
data to display in each of the views from the Trace menu
Cell definitions consist of the following
— Set frequency according to DUT requirements
— Define cell settings
— Define component carrier(s) (CCs) settings
Example Using OTA LTE FDD or 5GTF refer to
— Step 1 LTE FDD (Option 370) and 5GTF (Option 377) Component Carrier
(CC) and Cell Defined on page 284
Then
— Step 2 Select Trace Type on page 287
— Step 3 Modify Scale and the Display Color Bar Settings on page 288
— Step 4 Enable Recording and Record Data Logging Results on page 289
— Save 5 Save the Log Results on page 291
— Step 6 Import and Play back KML Files into 3rd Party Software (Example
Google Earth with Animation Tool) on page 292
Figure 1210 Cell Definition
Step 1 LTE FDD (Option 370) and 5GTF (Option 377) Component
Carrier (CC) and Cell Defined
1 Press Preset then Mode Preset (Factory)
2 Selecting LTE FDD Press Measure > LTE FDD or 5GTF
3 Optimizing the FieldFox to scan for signalsKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 285
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
— Set the System > System Configuration > Frequency Ref > Freq Ref
Source [GPS] >Back
— Set the GNSS (GPS+) > GNSS Receiver > Internal > Esc
See also GNSS (GPS+) and GPS on page 526
— Set the ScaleAmptd to
— RF Atten > 0 dB
— Preamp > ON
— Set the FreqDist > Center to
— For LTE FDD (instrument dependent)
Optional (LTE FDD only)
——Freq Mode > Chan
——Then Channel Table – Opens a menu to choose
your CC Band Channel and then use Favorites
List to open a softkey menu to save your Setup
n
— For 5GTF (instrument dependent)
4 Select Trace 6—choose
— Window 1 2 3 4
— Then Win State OFF ON to ON
— Then Data
— Table or
— Bar Chart or
— Spectrum or
— Strip Chart
— Then CC (select component carriers)
— All (Not applicable for Spectrum When All is specified for
Spectrum the FieldFox defaults to CC0) or
— CC0 CC1 CC2 CC3 or CC4 (ie 5GTF has up to seven
component carrier choices (CC5 CC6 and CC7))
The Spectrum view in 5GTF uses a center frequency that is +26 MHz offset
from the carrier’s center frequency This is done so that FieldFox can
capture the necessary xPBCH (physical broadcast channel) information to
demodulate the signal Be aware that all of the instrument’s displayed
numbers are rounded to three significant digits (eg 50026 GHz is
displayed as 5003 GHz) 286 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
Repeat process as needed for additional Windows Data and CC settings
5 Optional Press Sweep 3 and modifyselect items
— Single
— Continuous OFF ON to ON (default)
— Restart
— Strip Points
6 Press Trigger Settings
— Freerun (default) or
— External
7 Optional Press Meas Setup 4 – Only required if scan does not display
data
—LTE FDD Press FreqError Th and change to 5 kHz – Wait a few
seconds until Table populates or set FreqLock Range to Extended
— Then change back to the desired Frequency Error
Threshold for your measurement
—5GTF Press SyncCorr Th and change to 0 – wait a few seconds
until the Table populates and
— Then change back to the desired Sync Correlation
Threshold for your measurement

8 Press Trace 6
— And set up your Windows and component carriers (CCs) as
indicated in How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings on
page 273
9 Press System
— Press GNSS > GNSS Receiver > Internal > Esc
IMPORTANT When you select a multiple CCs (eg CC0 CC1 etcetera)
and record data you may actually see other cell signals that do not have
sufficient power to be displayed but are still detectable When you select
ALL multiple component carriers are selected but the results of the
component carrier (CC) with the highest power is displayed Refer to
Figure 124 on page 279Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 287
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
— Press System > FrequencyRef > Internal > Back
Step 2 Select Trace Type
Select one of the following display orientations
—Press Trace 6—choose
— Table or
— Bar Chart or
— Spectrum or
— Strip Chart or
Figure 1211 Table and Bar Chart Display Types – LTE FDD
IMPORTANT It is not sufficient to be locked to the GNSS satellite the
frequency reference must be locked to GPS 288 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
Figure 1212 Spectrum and Strip Chart Display Type – 5GTF
Step 3 Modify Scale and the Display Color Bar Settings
To assign colors to low and high power values
1 Press ScaleAmptd > Red Limit to set high power values and to set the
color
2 Press Blue Limit to set low power values and to set the color
3 And then press System > Display > Display Colors to set Indoor Outdoor
or other display colors See also Chapter 26 System SettingsKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 289
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
Figure 1213 Outdoor Display Colors
Figure 1214 Indoor Display Colors
Step 4 Enable Recording and Record Data Logging Results
Recording creates a record of your data with a timestamp and GPS stamp
(refer to GNSS (GPS+) and GPS on page 526) GPS must be enabled for the
log results to include a GPS stamp or use Preferences to enable the timestamp
Refer to Chapter 26 System Settings
Spectrum and Strip Chart information is not recorded Only the Table and
Bar Chart data are saved See How to Record on page 295 290 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
Features
— Log files contain cell results for different component carriers (CCs)
including timestamps andor distance stamps
— Timestamps are included in log files with or without GPS
— GPS must be enabled for log altitude results
See also GNSS (GPS+) and GPS on page 526
—Data results can be logged
— Data results can be saved to a *CSV or *KML file Refer to Save 5 Save
the Log Results on page 291
— User specifies how often results are stored
— Time Store results every n seconds
— Altitude Store results every n meters GPS must be enabled to
store results by altitude
Procedure
1 Press Measure 1 > Record Playback > Settings > Meas Interval ON
2 Press Interval Type > Time (default) or Distance then
— Time Interval 1 sec to 999 seconds or
— Distance Interval from 1m to 10 km
— When done press Back
3 Press Settings > File Settings > File Type CSV or KLM (Default KLM)
4 To begin recording Press Record
5 Optional Settings > File Settings > File Overwrite ON (default)—When File
Overwrite is ON when Save Log File is pressed the FieldFox stores the
results to an intermediate file (ie OTARecorderklm or OTARecorderxml)
Select Recall Logs Select the OTARecorder file name
6 When done press Stop The log file is automatically saved to the defined
Device Type and File Type
Else edit the file name under Settings > File Settings where the file
results will be stored
Data log files are saved to
— Data log files are saverecalled here
[CurrentDevice]＼Ota＼RecordPlayback＼
Learn more about file settings refer to Chapter 28 File ManagementKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 291
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
7 Press Back >Back
Playing a Recorded Log and Viewing the Data
To play the log results
1 Press Playback > Recall Logs
And use the Use the RPG or the arrow keys to highlight the file to be
played
2 Press Recall File >Play
3 Optional Press ScaleAmpltd
Then choose
— Optional (Bar Chart and Spectrum only) To adjust the following use
the RPG (fine adjust) or the arrow keys (coarse adjust) to
change the color bar
— Ref Level to change the top reference position in the Bar
Chart Strip Chart and Spectrum
— Red Limit to change the color bar
— Blue Limit to change the color bar
4 Press Stop to exit the log playing
To pause the log play
1 Press Pause Resume to pause or resume the log playing
— Optional When the recording is paused press PlayTrace ID to
specify the trace number of the recorded data log to display when
playback is paused
2 Press Stop to stop the log playing
Save 5 Save the Log Results
Two file types are supported for save or recall log results
—KML file format
— Files stored in this format can be imported into 3rd party applications
like Google Earth or Google Maps
— CSV file format Files stored into this format can be imported into
spreadsheet applications
Procedure
1 Press When done press Stop 292 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
Else edit the file name under Settings > File Settings where the file
results will be stored and set the File Overwrite settings
— Press Device > Internal (default) or USB SD
— Press File Type CSV or KLM > Back
— Press File Overwrite > ON (default) or OFF
2 To begin recording Press Record
3 When done press Stop The file is automatically saved to the defined
Device Type and File Type
Else edit the file name under Settings > File Settings where the file
results will be stored and the File Overwrite settings
4 Press Back >Back
Step 6 Import and Play back KML Files into 3rd Party Software
(Example Google Earth with Animation Tool)
Features
Use the Playback Slider to replay measurement results See also Google Maps
and or Google Earth’s help
— Open the FieldFox *KML file in Google Earth Time Slider appears in upper
left of the map
— Manual Mode – Move the time slider cursor to see colorcoded icons
popup according to the timestamp
— Loop mode has a FastSlow Replay Option
— Click on each color coded balloon to see the table of measurement results
for that location
Learn more about file settings refer to Chapter 28 File ManagementKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 293
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA) Mode Settings
Figure 1215 Importing a KML File Into Google Earth 294 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to RecordPlayback (OTA Options 370 and 377)
How to RecordPlayback (OTA Options 370 and 377)
Record Playback allows you to record OTA trace data and play them back at a
later time Use this feature to monitor table data activity over a period of time
Recordings can be saved to the FieldFox Internal memory an SD Card or a
USB flash drive
This section assumes you have already completed the initial setup and have
either an LTE FDD cell or 5GTF setup displayed on the FieldFox
Screen Annotation
During a record or playback session the following is displayed in the
topcenter area of the screen
— Rec 5555 20181231 032611 PM
where
— 5555 is the current and total trace number currently trace is 55 of 55 total
scans
— 20181231032611 PM is the date and time of recording
— The name of a recording can be changed using Manage Sessions Learn
more in To change Recording Configuration settings on page 295
See also Chapter 26 System Settings
Spectrum and Strip Chart information is not recorded Only the Table data
is saved See How to Record on page 295
While the RecordPlayback softkey is displayed in all measurements
RecordPlayback only records and plays back Table and Bar Chart data
See How to Record on page 295
RecordPlay files are saved to
— RecordPlay files are saverecalled to
[CurrentDevice]＼Ota＼RecordPlayback＼Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 295
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to RecordPlayback (OTA Options 370 and 377)
When GPS is enabled GPS R is indicated at the bottom of the FieldFox
display Learn more in GNSS (GPS+) and GPS on page 526
How to Record
—Press Trace 6
—Then Record Playback
—Then Record
is displayed in the left of screen graticules
During recording choose from the following
— Pause Resume Temporarily halts recording until pressed again The
incoming trace continues to sweep Press again to continue recording
— Stop Immediately stops recording Then choose from the following
—Press Save Log File to save the current Table data (ie default save
device is Internal)
—Press Pause Resume to continue recording
—Then Settings To change your file settings or and measurement
interval Learn more refer to To change Recording Configuration
settings on page 295
To change Recording Configuration settings
—Press Measure 1
—Then Record Playback
If Recording or Playback is not occurring when you think it should check
the following
— Is the sweep in HOLD (upperleft annotation) or check the Sweep
menu for Continuous set to OFF
— Is Recording or Playback Paused (midleft annotation)
— Is the Record or Playback Interval set too long (Configuration
settings)
RecordPlay files are saved to
— RecordPlay files are saverecalled to
[CurrentDevice]＼Ota＼RecordPlayback＼ 296 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
How to RecordPlayback (OTA Options 370 and 377)
—Then Settings
—Optional Then Meas Interval > ON
—Then Interval Type > choose Time or Distance
— Then if applicable Time Interval enter time interval in seconds
Or
— Then if applicable Distance Interval enter distance interval in miters
—Then File Settings
—Then File Name
—Then Device (Internal (default) SD Card or USB)
—Then File Type (CSV or KML (default))
—Then File Overwrite (OFF or ON (default)) – EnableDisable File
Overwrite
—Then Back > Back
Learn more refer to Chapter 28 File Management
How to Playback
—Press Measure 1
— If the session is already open skip the following step Otherwise
—Then Record Playback
—Then Playback
—Then Recall Logs
——The Recall File
—Then Play to playback your Table data
is displayed in the left of screen graticules during playback When the
end of the recording is reached playback begins again at trace 1 and
continues to loop indefinitely
During playback choose from the following
— Pause Resume Temporarily halts playback Then choose from the following
— Pause Resume Press to continue playing
If these are large recordings on a device it could take several seconds for
the FieldFox to display the listKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 297
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
Other Features Available
— Stop Immediately stops playback Then choose from the following
— Play Start playback from trace 1
— Recall Logs Opens a list of stored data files
Select a file to playback
— Recall File
— Back
Other Features Available
— Alignments For information on using alignments refer to the SA chapter’s
section Alignments on page 180
— Scale Settings – For information on using scale settings refer to the Data
Analysis chapter’s section All about Scale Settings on page 506 (not all
settings apply to OTA Options 370 and 377)
— External Gain Refer to refer to the SA chapter’s section External Gain
on page 154 298 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
If your OTA setup is not behaving as expected
— Verify setup is correct by referring to How to Set Up Over–the–Air (OTA)
Mode Settings on page 273
— Attenuator set to 0 dB
— Preamplifier set to ON
—Correct Band Channel and Center Frequency entered
— GNSS set to Internal
—Frequency Ref set to GPS
— For LTE FDD Verify that the Frequency Error Threshold (dB)—
(FreqError Th) value is large enough or not too large
— For LTE FDD Verify that the Extend Freq Lock value is enabled and
then adjust settings to improve your measurement
— For 5GTF Check that the Frequency Correction Threshold value ()—
(Sync Corr Th ) is small enough or not too large
— ADC errors Use ScaleAmptd > Range to adjust the absolute power
level (dBm)
For some data views you need to press More to view the Range
softkey
— No data displayed Press Meas Setup 4 – Only required if scan does
not display data
——LTE FDD Press FreqError Th and change to 5 kHz – Wait a few
seconds until table populates or set FreqLock Range to
Extended
——Then change back to the desired Frequency Error
Threshold for your measurement
——5GTF Press SyncCorr Th and change to 0 – wait a few
seconds until the Table populates and
——Then change back to the desired Sync Correlation
Threshold for your measurement
Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 299
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
Glossary (OTA)
Glossary (OTA)
This section provides a description of some of the terms used in the FieldFox’s
OTA mode
Table 121 OTA Abbreviations and Descriptions
Abbreviation Description
LTE FDD
Center
Frequency
The specified LTE FDD carrier center frequency
CSG Physical Cell information (PCI) or Cell ID – C S G
Cell ID (PCI) Physical cell ID – The Primary Sync Signal and Secondary Sync Signal largely define the PCI PCI is also
referred to sometimes as Cell ID
PSS PSS (dBm) is the Primary Synchronization signal for an LTE downlink frame
RSRP Reference Symbol Received Power (dBm)
RSRQ Reference Signal Received Quality (dBm)
RSSI Reference Signal Strength Indicator (dBm)
SINR Signal to Interference & Noise Ratio (dB)
SSS SSS is the Secondary Synchronization signal for an LTE downlink frame (dBm)
Freq Error Th LTE FDD Frequency Error Threshold (Hz) Any data that is does not meet the defined Frequency Error
value is not displayed
5GTF
Center
Frequency
The specified 5GTF carrier center frequency
Cell ID (PCI) Physical cell ID – The Primary Sync Signal and Secondary Sync Signal largely define the PCI PCI is also
referred to sometimes as Cell ID
Power (Channel Power) (dBm)
PSS PSS (dBm) is the Primary Synchronization signal for an LTE downlink frame
SSS SSS is the Secondary Synchronization signal for an 5GTF downlink frame (dBm)
SyncCorr Th 5GTF Synchronization Correlation Threshold () Any data with errors that are less than the
Synchronization Correlation Threshold () are not displayed 300 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Over–the–Air Measurements (OTA) – LTE FDD Option 370 and 5GTF Option 377 (CPU2
Only)
Glossary (OTA) 301
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
13 Remote Server Mode (Requires CPU2 and SA
HardwareSA Option 233)
Remote server mode enables you to connect your FieldFox to compatible
PCbased licensed software applications (eg 89600 VSA software1) Refer to
httpwwwkeysightcomfindassist
1 To order the 89600 VSA Software refer to httpwwwkeysightcomfindassist
FieldFox with a Remote Server mode (available with FieldFox firmware
≥A1000) does not display a mode softkey because Remote Server mode
is only enabled when you have a SA Option 233 on the FieldFox
compatible 89600 VSA software license loaded and running on a remote
PC and connected via LAN to your FieldFox (ie Requires 89600 VSA
software version ≥2201) Refer to httpwwwkeysightcomfindassist
When in Remote Server mode most of the front panel hardkeys are locked
and will beep but perform no actions when pressed (ie the FieldFox front
panel hardkeys are not relevant when connected via LAN to the 89600 VSA
software on your remote PC) In Remote Server mode only
— System 7 hardkey lets you change the system settings
— Esc (escape) hardkey lets you forcefully disconnect from the PCbased
software
To gracefully disconnect (recommended) from the software exit using the
PCbased software’s disconnect option or shutdown the software Refer to
Initial Waiting for a Connection from a PCbased and Compatible
Licensed Software or No Remote Connection on page 303
If you to attempt connect a noncompatible FieldFox you will see the
following error message
Error 38 The requested functionality is not available 302 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Remote Server Mode (Requires CPU2 and SA HardwareSA Option 233)
In this Chapter
In this Chapter
See Also
Connecting Using Remote Server on page 303
89600 VSA Software Overview (Requires CPU2 and N991xA3xA5xA6xA
and SA Option 233) on page 305
Optional Settings
LAN Settings on page 535
All about Markers on page 484
All about Limit Lines on page 499
All about Trace Math on page 504Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 303
Remote Server Mode (Requires CPU2 and SA HardwareSA Option 233)
Connecting Using Remote Server
Connecting Using Remote Server
This section provides an overview of the FieldFox’s Remote Server mode
instrument display messages that occur during the remote connection
process For more information on specific compatible PCbased licensed
procedures refer to
— 89600 VSA Software Overview (Requires CPU2 and N991xA3xA5xA6xA
and SA Option 233) on page 305
Figure 131 Initial Waiting for a Connection from a PCbased and Compatible Licensed
Software or No Remote Connection
The graphic above shows the FieldFox in the process of connecting to a
PCbased and compatible licensed software 304 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Remote Server Mode (Requires CPU2 and SA HardwareSA Option 233)
Connecting Using Remote Server
Figure 132 FieldFox Display When Remotely Connected to a PCbased Software
The graphic above shows the FieldFox successfully connected to a PC—with
an example hostname PC123—and to a compatible licensed PCbased
softwareKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 305
Remote Server Mode (Requires CPU2 and SA HardwareSA Option 233)
89600 VSA Software Overview (Requires CPU2 and N991xA3xA5xA6xA and SA
Option 233)
89600 VSA Software Overview (Requires CPU2 and
N991xA3xA5xA6xA and SA Option 233)
Connecting the FieldFox remotely to a PC running the 89600 VSA software will
start the FieldFox’s Remote Server mode The 89600 VSA software is powerful
PCbased software offering the industry＇s most sophisticated general purpose
and standards specific signal evaluation and troubleshooting tools for R&D
engineers Even for proprietary and nonstandard signals in SATCOM or
MILCOM applications you can make signal quality measurements with
customized IQ constellation Reach deeper into signals gather more data on
signal problems and gain greater insight
— Generalpurpose analog and digital demodulators ranging from 2FSK to
4096QAM
— Flexible and custom IQ and OFDM signal analysis
— Standards specific modulation analysis including
— Cellular 5G LTE & LTEAdvanced (FDD TDD) WCDMA
GSMEDGE cdma2000 1xEVDO TDSCDMA
— Wireless connectivity 80211ax 80211nac 80211abgjp
80216 WiMAX (fixedmobile) 802154 WiSUN
—RFID
— Digital satellite video and other satellite signals radar LMDS
— Up to 400K bin FFT for the highest resolution spectrum analysis
— A full suite of time domain analysis tools including signal capture and
playback time gating and CCDF measurements
— Unlimited trace displays and the industry＇s most complete set of marker
functions
IMPORTANT The following is a description of the 89600 VSA Software’s
overall capabilities Your instrument may not have all of the hardware and
firmware required to use all of the 89600 VSA Software’s listed features
The FieldFox remote server mode requires 89600 VSA Software with
firmware version ≥2201
If you have the FieldFox’s Remote Server (89600 VSA software
connectivity) you can use the VSA software to capture and record your
data as MATLAB files (*mat) Learn more about FieldFox and 89600 VSA
software refer to httpwwwkeysightcomfindassist
If you have Option 351 IQ Analyzer option you can directly save your data
as MATLAB files (*mat) Refer to Chapter 11 IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option
351 (CPU2 Only) on page 237 and to Chapter 28 File Management 306 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Remote Server Mode (Requires CPU2 and SA HardwareSA Option 233)
89600 VSA Software Overview (Requires CPU2 and N991xA3xA5xA6xA and SA
Option 233)
— Easytouse Microsoft Windows graphical user interface
For a comprehensive FieldFox VSA mode help refer to
httprfmwemkeysightcomwirelesshelpfiles89600BWebHelp89600ht
m
For additional information on the 89600 VSA Software brochure refer to
httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59906553ENpdf
For Technical Overview refer to
httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59906405ENpdf 307
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
14 Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
Option 236 provides Spectrogram display Waterfall display and
RecordPlayback
In this Chapter
Spectrogram Display (SA Option) on page 308
Common Settings for Waterfall and Spectrogram on page 310
Waterfall Display on page 311
About Sessions on page 313
FieldFox Setting Changes during Record and Playback on
page 314
About State and User Tags on page 315
How to Record a Session on page 316
How to Playback a Session on page 317
Recording Configuration on page 317
Playback Configuration on page 321
Manage Sessions on page 321
Record Playback Example (SA Only) on page 322 308 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
Spectrogram and Waterfall Displays
Spectrogram and Waterfall Displays
Spectrogram and Waterfall displays provide a visual history of the measured
spectrum Each display type can be used to locate intermittent signals or to
view signal levels and frequencies over time
Spectrogram is a single horizontal line of colorcoded power while Waterfall
uses a 3D colorcoded display The functional difference between these two
displays is that Spectrogram provides less trace detail than Waterfall display
However it also allows more traces to be viewed
These two displays can NOT be used with Channel Measurements
In SA mode Traces can be recorded from or played back into any
measurement type (such as Channel Power or Occupied BW) or any display
type (such as Spectrogram and Waterfall) See How to Record a Session on
page 316 to learn how to save traces
Spectrogram Display (SA Option)
Spectrogram draws the most recent trace record at the bottom of the stack of
previouslydrawn trace records Drawing the live trace on the display is
optional
Figure 141 Spectrogram display Overlay view with time markers 23 seconds apart
The following settings all contribute to the sweep time of an individual trace
and therefore the total elapsed time that can appear on the screen in
Spectrogram display
— Frequency Range Learn more in Frequency Range on page 148
— Resolution BW and Video BW Learn more in Resolution Bandwidth (Res
BW) on page 165 and Video Bandwidth (Video BW) on page 166
— Sweep Time (Acquisition) Learn more inSweep Acquisition on page 169Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 309
Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
Spectrogram and Waterfall Displays
— Resolution (Number of Points) Learn more in Points on page 177
How to select Spectrogram
—Press Meas 1
—Then Interference Analysis
—Then Spectrogram
How to modify the Spectrogram
You can change how the spectrogram is displayed relative to the data trace
This setting affects the total number of trace records that can be displayed
For SA Mode
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Spectrogram Settings
—Then Spectrogram View
— Then choose from the following
— Overlay Displays the data trace over the spectrogram with NO
graticules Total trace records 340
— Full Screen Displays the spectrogram with NO data trace Total trace
records 340
——Top Displays the data trace below the spectrogram Total trace
records 130
——Bottom Displays the data trace above the spectrogram Total
trace records 130
How to create Time Markers (SA Only)
Use Time Markers to determine the elapsed time between any two displayed
records The most recent record appears at the bottom of the screen
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Time Markers
—Then Time
— Then enter a value from 0 (the most recent sweep record) to the maximum
value using the numeric keypad arrows or the rotary knob A >
indicates the Time Marker
—Then Delta
— Then enter a value from 0 (the most recent sweep record) to the maximum
value using the numeric keypad arrows or the rotary knob A >>
indicates the Delta Marker 310 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
Spectrogram and Waterfall Displays
— At the current sweep speed the difference in time between these two
markers appears at the upperright corner of the view as Delta Time
hhmmss Sec
— An invalid number (very large positive or negative) appears when a trace
record is not available at either marker 000000 Sec appears when both
markers are not available
Common Settings for Waterfall and Spectrogram
Set Red and Blue Limits
The colors displayed on the Waterfall and Spectrogram represent the various
measured power levels
— Red Highest power levels
— Blue Lowest power levels
Adjust the Red and Blue limits to the power levels that you expect to measure
The Blue limit must always be less than the Red limit
For SA Mode
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Spectrogram Settings or Waterfall Settings
— Then choose from the following
— Red Limit Using the arrows rotary knob or keypad select the
HIGHEST power level that you expect to measure This power level
and those measured higher than this level appear Red
— Blue Limit Using the arrows rotary knob or keypad select the
LOWEST power levels that you expect to measure This power level
and those measured lower than this level appear Blue
How to Restart the SpectrogramWaterfall
Press Sweep 3 then Restart
Waterfall settings only apply to the SA option
The full RedtoBlue color spectrum is visible only with Indoor display
colors Learn more in Display Colors on page 513Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 311
Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
Spectrogram and Waterfall Displays
Averaging
Averaging can be enabled on the underlying measurement Press Meas 4 then
Average Type Learn more in Average Type on page 179
Mode Preset
Mode Preset resets ONLY the Spectrogram and Waterfall display settings It
does not reset the measurement settings
—Press Preset
—Then Mode Preset
Waterfall Display
The live trace is always drawn on a Waterfall display Older trace records scroll
up from the displayed trace and eventually off the screen Because of this
locate the live trace on the bottom of the screen using the scale and reference
settings Learn how in Scale and Units on page 153
Figure 142 Waterfall display moderate angle with time markers 1 minute apart
The following settings all contribute to the sweep time of an individual trace
and therefore the total elapsed time that can appear on the screen in Waterfall
display
— Frequency Range Learn more in Frequency Range on page 148
— Resolution BW and Video BW Learn more in Resolution Bandwidth (Res
BW) on page 165 and Video Bandwidth (Video BW) on page 166
— Sweep Time (Acquisition) Learn more inSweep Acquisition on page 169
Although this document refers to past traces as records’ these traces are
not saved They are only drawn on the FieldFox screen See Record
Playback Example (SA Only) on page 322 for how to save traces 312 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
Spectrogram and Waterfall Displays
— Resolution (Number of Points) Learn more in Points on page 177
Waterfall Angle
This setting allows you to show more or less detail More detail provides fewer
(time) records
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Waterfall Settings
—Then Waterfall Angle
— Then choose from the following
— Moderate Compromise between detail and number of records
— Steep Least detail with highest number of records
— Gradual Most detail with lowest number of records
— Wide Angle Moderate angle with increased space between records
Learn how to set Red and Blue Limits in Set Red and Blue Limits on
page 310Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 313
Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
RecordPlayback (SA Option)
RecordPlayback (SA Option)
Record Playback allows you to record SA trace sweeps and play them back at a
later time Use this feature to monitor spectrum activity over a period of time
You can record traces continuously record a specified number of traces
(segments) or record when triggered by a specified power level
Traces can be recorded from or played back into any measurement type (such
as Channel Power or Occupied BW) or any display type (such as Spectrogram
and Waterfall)
When GPS is enabled the current location and elevation are saved and played
back with traces
Recordings can be saved to the FieldFox Internal memory an SD Card or a
USB flash drive
About Sessions
A Recording Session is a collection of recorded traces and the instrument
states that generated them
Before recording can occur a new session must be initiated or an existing
session must be opened Sessions can later be opened for playing or continued
recording Only one session can be open at a time
You close the session when finished recording or playing A session is also
closed when the FieldFox is Preset (or Mode Preset) an Instrument State is
recalled or when Mode is changed from SA
Each session is saved as a folder containing a set of files on the specified
storage device
How long can a recording session last
There are many variables that determine the possible length of a recording
session But one key variable is the amount of available memory
When a session is opened or a new session is initiated an estimate is made of
the maximum number of traces that can be saved based on the available disk
space and the current number of data points (resolution) Recording will stop
when that number is reached This estimate always keeps 4 MB of available
disk space on the specified storage device You can decrease the number of
traces to further limit recording The resolution setting can NOT be changed
after a session is opened
To maximize the amount of space that is available save recorded traces to a
USB Flash drive or SD card Learn how in Manage Sessions on page 321
You can determine the length of time over which recording can occur by
setting the Record Interval (the time between recorded traces) and other
settings Learn more in Recording Configuration on page 317 314 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
RecordPlayback (SA Option)
To view and edit the maximum number of records
Just after opening or initiating a session
—Press Session Data
—Then TraceRecordLimit (n Max number of traces that can be
recorded)
— Clear All Records Empties that session of recorded traces Learn more in
Manage Sessions on page 321
FieldFox Setting Changes during Record and Playback
During Recording
When any of the following State settings are changed during recording the
State counter is incremented (About State and User Tags on page 315) and
the settings are saved to the Session file along with the first trace to be
recorded with the new setting During playback the trace and display
annotation will reflect the change on the screen
State settings
Refer to Table 141 for a list of the applicable state settings for the SA option
Table 141 Summary of SA State Settings
Option Settings
SA
Average Type
Detector(s)
External Gain
Frequency Range
Preamp OnOff
Resolution BW
RF Attenuation
Source Settings
Sweep Acquisition
Trigger Settings
Video BW
Zero Span Sweep TimeKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 315
Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
RecordPlayback (SA Option)
Other display settings such as Scale and acquisition can also be changed
during recording but are not saved with the session file Think of these as
settings that help YOU see the recording and playback activity They do NOT
change the data that is recorded
During Playback
The State setting changes listed above are NOT allowed during playback
However all other display settings can be changed during playback to help
you analyze the recorded data
In SA mode when recordings are played back further trace processing is
possible The Trace State(s) can be modified for post processing and different
measurements such as Channel Power Occupied BW Spectrogram and
Waterfall can be activated This is because in SA all these measurements are
derived from the raw traces If not compatible with the measurement type a
MEAS UNCAL message will appear on the screen
RecordPlayback Exceptions
— Markers can be activated and moved to help analyze recorded data
However marker position control is only available when playback is Paused
— Field Strength Corrections is saved with the session file and it is also
allowed during playback Learn about this Field Strength Corrections in
Field Strength Measurements on page 156
— Frequency Counter at Marker is NOT allowed during Recording or Playback
Learn about this feature in Frequency Counter at Marker on page 191
About State and User Tags
When any of the State settings (listed above) are changed during a recording
a state tag’ is inserted at the first trace number to be recorded with the new
setting
In addition you can insert a User Tag’ at any time during a recording session
to indicate an external event such as when an antenna is moved During
playback you can move quickly to any of these tags or scroll through these
tags
A symbol is used on the screen annotation to distinguish a User Tag from a
State Tag when scrolling through tags during playback
Screen Annotation
During a record or playback session the following is displayed in the topleft
area of the screen
— AutoSession02 9295 (state 45)_*_
Sep222018 091515 AM
where 316 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
RecordPlayback (SA Option)
— AutoSession is an autogenerated name for sessions 02 is the
autogenerated number incremented with each new session The name
can be changed using Manage Sessions Learn more in Manage Sessions
on page 321
— 9295 is the current and total trace number currently trace is 92 of 95 total
traces
— state 45 is the current and total state tag or user tag number 4 of 5 total
tags
— * (Asterisk) indicates that a state has changed # (Pound) indicates that a
User Tag has been inserted
— Sep22 is the date and time of recording
When GPS is enabled` the current location and elevation are annotated at the
bottom of the playback display Learn more in GNSS (GPS+) and GPS on
page 526
— Is the sweep in HOLD (upperleft annotation)
— Is Recording or Playback Paused (midleft annotation)
—Is the Record or Playback Interval set too long (Configuration settings)
How to Record a Session
—Press Trace 6
—Then Record Playback
— SA Only Optionally set resolution (points) Learn how in Points on
page 177 This can NOT be changed after a session is opened
— Then either
— New Session OR
— Recall Session then Open and select a session
—Then Recorder Player
—Then Record
REC is displayed in the left of screen graticules
During recording choose from the following
— Pause Resume Temporarily halts recording until pressed again The
incoming trace continues to sweep Press again to continue recording
— Stop Immediately stops recording Then choose from the following
If Recording or Playback is not occurring when you think it should check
the followingKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 317
Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
RecordPlayback (SA Option)
—Press Play to start replaying the recording from the beginning
—Press Record to continue recording
How to Playback a Session
—Press Trace 6
— If the session is already open skip the following step Otherwise
—Then Record Playback Setup
—Press Recall Session Then select a session to playback and press
Open
—Then Recorder Player
—Then Play
PLAY is displayed in the left of screen graticules during playback When the
end of the recording is reached playback begins again at trace 1 and
continues to loop indefinitely
During playback choose from the following
— Pause Resume Temporarily halts playback Then choose from the
following
— Pause Resume Press to continue playing
— Playback StateTag Allows you to continue playback from a state
tag or scroll through the state tags Enter a value between 1 and the
total number of state tags using the numeric keypad arrows or
the rotary knob Active when playback is paused Learn more in
About State and User Tags in About State and User Tags on
page 315
— Playback Trace Activated automatically when Paused Allows you to
continue playback from a specific trace or scroll through traces
manually Enter a value between 1 and the total number of traces
using the numeric keypad arrows or the rotary knob
— Stop Immediately stops playback Then choose from the following
— Play Start playback from trace 1
— Record Resume recording from the last recorded trace
— Record Playback Setup Return to the setup menu to change
Configuration settings or Close the session
Recording Configuration
To change Recording Configuration settings 318 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
RecordPlayback (SA Option)
—Press Trace 6
—Then Record Playback
—Then New Session or Recall an existing session
If New Session is selected
—Then Session Data and choose one of the following
—Then CSV SaveStyle
——Single Trace (default) saves the currently displayed trace
——Range Traces saves the currently displayed trace This
selection requires you to manually select a range of traces to
be recorded in the Playback Configuration menu Refer to
Playback Configuration on page 321
——AllTraces saves all traces
—Then TraceRecordLimit to change the maximum recording file size
—Then Clear AllRecords to clear all traces out of memory
—Then Back to return to previous menu
—Then Recording Configuration
Then choose from the following
— Record Time Sets the amount of time to record traces Default is MAX
which is to record indefinitely Enter a value between 1s and 1 Ms (million)
seconds using the numeric keypad arrows or the rotary knob When
set a timer appears during recording in the lowerleft corner which counts
DOWN from the specified time
— Record Source Sets where in the FieldFox data flow data is recorded
Learn more in Record Source on page 320 Choose from the following
— RawMeas Records raw measurement data
— Trace 1234 Records data from the corresponding trace in its
current state
— Record Interval Sets the amount of time to wait between individual trace
recordings Default is MIN which is to wait 0 seconds (record traces as fast
as possible) Enter a value in seconds between 0 (no delay) and 10000
seconds about 3 hrs) using the numeric keypad arrows or the rotary
knob
— Segment Count Sets the number of traces to record after which the
recording will automatically pause Press PauseResume or Record to
capture another N traces or Stop to end recording Default is OFF which is
NO limit to the number of traces to be recorded Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 319
Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
RecordPlayback (SA Option)
When set a counter appears in the lowerleft corner which counts UP to
the specified number of recordings
— FreqMaskTrigger OFF ON
Sets the power level which will trigger a recording Set these power levels
(mask) exactly as you would set Limit Lines (See All about Limit Lines on
page 499) With Record ON when any data point measurement is higher
than an upper limit or lower than a lower limit recording begins See
Frequency Mask Trigger Configuration in the following section to learn how
to configure the mask
Typically you would use FreqMaskTrigger with Segment Count but it can also
be used with Record Time and Record Interval
When used with Segment Count
— When a mask limit is exceeded subsequent traces are recorded until the
specified segment count is reached Once segment count is reached
exceeding another mask limit will again cause traces to be recorded until
the segment count is reached and so forth
— To record only those traces that exceed the limit set Segment Count to 1
— To record ALL traces after a limit is exceeded set Segment Count OFF
When used with Record Time the timer counts down even when traces are not
being recorded (limits are not being exceeded) Recording starts when a limit is
exceeded and stops when the timer reaches 0
When used with Record Interval a trace is recorded when a limit is exceeded
then no recordings during the specified wait’ interval then the next trace is
recorded followed by another time delay and so forth This pattern repeats
indefinitely if Segment Count is OFF or (if ON) until Segment Count is reached
Frequency Mask Trigger Configuration (SA Mode Only)
Create or recall a Frequency Mask to be used with the FreqMaskTrigger
feature
A mask that is in use during a recording is NOT saved with the recording and
does NOT automatically appear during playback Like Limits Lines it is saved
and recalled with a state file
Frequency Mask Trigger only applies to SA mode
— The Mask file is saved to and recalled from the Save Recall Storage
Device location – NOT from the Record Playback Storage Device
location These are two different settings Learn how to set the Save
Recall Storage Device in Set File Type and Select Device on
page 549 320 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
RecordPlayback (SA Option)
Although they are created in the same manner Limit Line files and FreqMask
files can NOT be used interchangeably
—Press Trace 6
—Then Record Playback
—Then New Session or Recall an existing session The current mask appears
as soon as a session is opened
—Then FreqMaskTrigger Configuration
— Then choose from the following
— Edit Mask Create or modify the current mask Learn how to edit the
Mask Limit Line table in All about Limit Lines on page 499
— Save Mask Saves the current mask to a file
— Recall Mask Loads a mask file
Record Source
For SA mode the simplest way to use Record Playback is to record RawMeas
data which can then be played back into all of the current Trace States
However for more complicated processing refer to the following diagrams
These figures illustrate where in the FieldFox data flow data is recorded and
played back
Figure 143 FieldFox SA Mode Data Flow and Record Playback Data Points
The RawMeas data setting only applies to SA Mode
For this discussion it is important to understand Trace States Learn more
in Trace Display States (SA Mode) on page 178 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 321
Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
RecordPlayback (SA Option)
SA Data Recording
— Data can be recorded at the Raw Meas block where data is acquired after
ResBW VideoBW and Detector processing but before any trace state
processing
— Data can be recorded from Traces 123 or 4 which includes the trace state
(Max Hold Min Hold and so forth)
— Recording from a ClearWrite trace yields exactly the same data as
recording from the Raw Meas block
— Data is ALWAYS played back at the same location in the data flow just after
the Raw Meas block through all currently active Traces and onto the
display
— See an example using Record Playback with Max Hold traces in Record
Playback Example (SA Only) on page 322
Playback Configuration
By default trace sweeps are played back as fast as the trace can be drawn on
the screen The following setting allows you to slow playback In addition you
can manually scroll through individual traces using Playback Trace or scroll
through State and User Tags using Playback StateTag Learn more in How to
Playback a Session in How to Playback a Session on page 317
To slow playback of a session
— Record a new session or Open an existing session
—Press Playback Configuration
—Then Playback Interval
— Enter a value in seconds between 0 (no delay) and 100 using the
numeric keypad arrows or the rotary knob After using the
keypad select a multiplier key Learn about multiplier abbreviations
—Press Enter
— First Trace to define the first trace in a Range of traces to be
recordedplayedsaved
— Last Trace to define the last trace in a Range of traces to be
recordedplayedsaved
— Back to return to the previous menu
Manage Sessions
—Press Trace 6
—Then Record Playback 322 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
RecordPlayback (SA Option)
—Then Record Playback SetupThe following selections are available ONLY
when a session is NOT open
—Then Storage Device to select the media which stores the sessions to be
managed This is a different setting from the SaveRecall Storage Device
setting
— Then choose from the following
— Internal FieldFox memory (default)
— SD Card An external SD Card (must be inserted)
— USB An external USB flash drive (must be inserted)
—Then Manage Sessions
— Then choose from the following
— Rename Using the FieldFox labeler change the name of the session
AutoSession (n) is the default name where (n) is the nextavailable number
Learn more in How to use the FieldFox labeler on page 546
— Sort Arrange the listing of sessions by Name by Date or by Size
— Delete After a confirmation prompt removes the contents of the
selected session from the list
— Copy Copies the selected session to a different storage device or the
same storage device with Copy(n)_’ appended to the beginning of
the name so that duplication is prevented
— Copy All Copies ALL of the listed sessions to a different storage
device or the same storage device with Copy(n)_’ appended to the
beginning of the names so that duplication is prevented
— Delete All Deletes ALL of the listed sessions
Record Playback Example (SA Only)
The following Interval Recording example shows how you can record spectral
activity over a longer period of time with less trace storage
—Press Trace 6 then with Trace 1 press State then Max Hold
—Then Record Playback
—Then New Session
—Then Recording Configuration
—Then Record Source to Trace1
—Then Record Interval to 10 s (seconds)
—Then Back
—Then Recorder PlayerKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 323
Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
RecordPlayback (SA Option)
—Then Record At the end of each 10 second record interval the Max Hold
trace is recorded and the Max Hold processing is reset for the next 10
second record interval
—Then Stop to end the recording
This session can be played back into any Trace State For example
Play the Max Hold recording into a ClearWrite trace to see the data exactly as
it was recorded
—Press Trace 6 then with Trace 1 and press State then ClrWr
—Then Record Playback
—Then Play
Play the Max Hold recording into a Max Hold trace to show the accumulation
of Max Hold activity over the entire recording
—Press Trace 6 then with Trace 1 and press State then Max Hold
—Then Record Player
—Then Play 324 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Interference Analyzer (SA Mode) – Option 236
RecordPlayback (SA Option) 325
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
15 Reflection Mode (SA Models) Option 320
This feature may require an option Please view the FieldFox Configuration
Guide at httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59909836ENpdf
Reflection Mode measurements are very similar to CAT mode reflection
measurements They provide 1port scalar reflection measurements in selected
FieldFox SAOnly models The FieldFox source is routed internally to Port 1
and used to stimulate a Device Under Test (DUT) The energy that is reflected
off the DUT is measured and displayed on the screen
Option 320 requires Option 220 Tracking Generator N9938A models
require Option 100 35 mm connectors and Option 220
— Option 100 35 mm connectors must be installed by the factory Option
100 is only available on N9938A at the time of purchase It is not
available as a trialupgrade
— Option 220 Tracking Generator can be ordered via software license on
wwwkeysightcom
Option 320 is not available on N991xA N992xA or N995xA models 326 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Reflection Mode (SA Models) Option 320
SA mode reflection measurements are CalReady Learn more in CalReady on
page 123 In addition Normalization is available Learn how Normalize on
page 328 However other calibration types are NOT offered
In this Chapter
How to select Reflection Mode on page 328
Measurement Selection on page 328
Normalize on page 328Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 327
Reflection Mode (SA Models) Option 320
The following settings are available exactly as they function in CAT mode
Frequency Range on page 49
Scale Settings on page 49
Averaging on page 50
Single or Continuous Measure on page 51
Resolution (Number of Data Points) on page 52
Sweep Time on page 52
Output Power on page 53
Interference Rejection on page 53
All about Markers on page 484
All about Limit Lines on page 499 328 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Reflection Mode (SA Models) Option 320
Reflection Mode Settings
Reflection Mode Settings
Select Reflection Mode before making any setting in this chapter
How to select Reflection Mode
—Press Mode
—Then Reflection
Measurement Selection
How to select a Reflection Mode Measurement
Learn more about these two measurements in the Supplemental Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm
—Press Measure 1
— Then choose one of the following These softkeys also appear after
Reflection Mode is selected
— Return Loss 1port scalar reflection measurement that displays the
amount of incident signal energy MINUS the amount of energy that is
reflected The higher the trace is on the screen the more energy
being reflected back to the FieldFox
— VSWR (Voltage Standing Wave Ratio – also known as SWR) 1port
reflection measurement that displays the ratio of the maximum
reflected voltage over the minimum reflected voltage The higher the
trace is on the screen the more energy being reflected back to the
FieldFox
Normalize
Normalization can be used to effectively Zero’ a trace which removes
frequency response errors introduced by the components of the test setup
before making the measurement To normalize a reflection measurement the
DUT is removed and a known device is connected to Port 1 When you choose
Normalize the displayed trace is stored into memory and then the displayed
data is divided by the memory trace The displayed data trace now shows the
difference between the stored memory response and the measured response
You could normalize while measuring the reflection response of any type of
device For example the device could be
— An Open or Short (with maximum reflection)
How to perform Normalization
To Port 1 connect a known device (usually an Open or Short) to which
reflection measurements are to be normalizedKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 329
Reflection Mode (SA Models) Option 320
Reflection Mode Settings
—Press Trace 6
—Then Normalize
The yellow data trace displays the current measurement with trace math
applied The math operation symbol [DM] is displayed on the lower left corner
of the screen Learn more about Trace Math in All about Markers on
page 484
Data interpolation is NOT supported If the Resolution setting is changed
with Trace Math enabled the FieldFox will disable the math operation 330 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Reflection Mode (SA Models) Option 320
Reflection Mode Settings 331
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
16 Builtin Power Meter Mode – Option 310
Builtin Power Meter (also known as Channel Power Meter) uses the SA input
connector to make quick and simple power measurements over a selectable
frequency band A power sensor is NOT required
In this Chapter
See Also
The following Builtin Power Meter settings are identical to the standard Power
Meter settings
Frequency Span Step on page 333
Radio Standard on page 334
How to set Attenuation on page 334
Scale on page 341
Relative and Offset Power Measurements on page 342
Display Units on page 342
Averaging on page 343
Single or Continuous Measure on page 343 332 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Builtin Power Meter Mode – Option 310
Limits on page 344
The following Builtin Power Meter settings are identical to SA Mode
settings
Radio Standard on page 334
How to Access Individual Alignments on page 184Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 333
Builtin Power Meter Mode – Option 310
Builtin Power Meter Settings
Builtin Power Meter Settings
Select Builtin Power Meter Mode before making any setting in this section
How to select Builtin Power Meter Mode
—Press Mode
—Then More
—Then Power Meter (Builtin)
Frequency Span Step
Valid Builtin Power Meter measurements can be made over the entire
frequency range of the FieldFox Although it is possible to enter a center
frequency below the FieldFox minimum frequency the LO feedthru of the
internal SA hardware will invalidate these Builtin Power Meter measurements
The measurement span (also known as Channel Width and Integration BW) is
the frequency range half above and half below the center frequency over
which power is detected and displayed The maximum measurement span is
100 MHz
How to enter center frequency step size and span
The default frequency is 50 MHz
—Press FreqDist
—Then Center
— Then type a value using the numeric keypad Then press a multiplier key
Learn about multiplier abbreviations Multiplier Abbreviations on page 43
The current frequency (f) is shown on the FieldFox screen
— Optionally use the arrows or rotary knob to quickly change Center
frequency The size of the frequency step can also be changed Press CF
Step then type a step size value using the numeric keypad then select a
multiplier key
— Optionally press Span Type a value using the numeric keypad Then press a
multiplier key The default span is 20 MHz The maximum span is 100 MHz
The current span setting is shown as the dividend in the digital display For
example 10 dBm 100 MHz
Please observe the SA RF Input port damage level
+27 dBm (320 mW) average
+33 dBm peak (2 W) <10μs
+50 VDC 334 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Builtin Power Meter Mode – Option 310
Builtin Power Meter Settings
Radio Standard
A Radio Standard can used to integrate power within specific radio channels
When a Radio Standard is selected the Span setting is automatically coupled
to the defined Channel Width for that standard (Width is the same for all
channels within a standard) Also Unit is set to Chan and CF is set to the
nearest specific Channel defined in the standard
Learn more about Radio Standards including Importing and Deleting Custom
Radio Standards beginning in Custom Radio Standards on page 150
How to select a Radio Standard
—Press Measure 1 OR FreqDist
—Then Radio Standard
— Then select a standard using the arrows or rotary knob and press
Enter
Attenuation
The Attenuation setting controls the power level into the FieldFox
To compare Builtin Power Meter Mode measurements to SA Channel Power
measurements use the same attenuation settings Builtin Power Meter Mode
defaults to 30 dB attenuation while SA mode defaults to 10 dB attention In
Builtin Power Meter the attenuation setting is NOT annotated on the screen
How to set Attenuation
—Press ScaleAmptd
—Then More
—Then RF Atten
— Then use the arrows or rotary knob to choose from either 30 dB or 10
dB
The following Builtin Power Meter settings are identical to the standard
Power Meter settings To learn about these settings please refer to the
following pages
Scale on page 341
Relative and Offset Power Measurements on page 342
Display Units on page 342
Averaging on page 343
Scale on page 341
Limits on page 344 335
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
17 Power Meter (USB) Mode Option 302
Power Meter measurements available with Option 302 are made with
Keysight USB power sensors Power readings are displayed on the FieldFox
screen
In this Chapter
Supported Power Sensors on page 337
How to Connect the Power Sensor on page 337
Average Peak on page 339
Zeroing on page 339
Frequency on page 340
Source Control on page 340
Relative and Offset Power Measurements on
page 342
Display Units on page 342
Resolution on page 342
Averaging on page 343
Single or Continuous Measure on page 343 336 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Power Meter (USB) Mode Option 302
See Also
Step Detection Mode on page 344
Limits on page 344
FOPS Settings on page 349Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 337
Power Meter (USB) Mode Option 302
Supported Power Sensors
For a complete list of supported Keysight USB Power Sensors please visit
wwwkeysightcomfindusbsensorsforfieldfox
How to Connect the Power Sensor
Connect your Power Sensor to one of the FieldFox USB ports
A sequence of status lights are displayed on the base of the power sensor
when the FieldFox is in Power Meter (USB Sensor) mode
— Green blinking light indicates the power sensor is communicating or
selftests are being performed Because the FieldFox is usually
communicating with the power sensor when it is connected this is the
normal mode of operation
— Amber light indicates Zeroing is being performed
— Red light indicates an error has occurred with the power sensor Refer to
power sensor documentation
The FieldFox does NOT support the following Keysight USB Power Sensor
features External Triggering (Time Gated Burst Power Measurement)
Power Sweep Operation and Frequency Sweep Operation External
Zeroing is NOT allowed on the U2020 Xseries Power Sensors
Please refer to your USB Power Sensor User’s Guide and observe the
damage levels of your device
IMPORTANT When a USB power sensor is initially connected to the
FieldFox it may take ~10 seconds for the USB power sensor to finish
zeroing and for the FieldFox to recognize the USB power sensor If your
USB power sensor is not operating as expected
— Verify the latest firmware is loaded on the FieldFox Refer to
wwwkeysightcom＼find＼fieldfoxsupport
— Verify the latest firmware is loaded on the Power Sensor Refer to
httpswwwkeysightcommaineditorial
— Remove and reconnect the USB power sensor
Use an attenuator between the DUT and the power sensor when
measuring power levels that are higher than +20 dBm The attenuator
value can be subtracted from the measurement using the Offset feature
discussed in Relative and Offset Power Measurements on page 342 338 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Power Meter (USB) Mode Option 302
— No light indicates the FieldFox is not communicating with the power
sensor This is the case when in Hold mode or when NOT in Power Meter
ModeKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 339
Power Meter (USB) Mode Option 302
USB Power Meter Settings
USB Power Meter Settings
Select Power Meter Mode before making any setting in this section
How to select Power Meter Mode
—Press Mode_
—Then Power Meter (USB Sensor)
Average Peak
—Press Measure 1
— Then choose from the following
— Average Measures and reports the average of the power
measurements
— Peak Available ONLY on the U202x power sensors Measures and
reports peak power detected at sensor input
Zeroing
The Keysight USB Power Sensors perform Internal Zeroing automatically
Because Keysight USB Power Sensors have an internal switch Internal Zeroing
does NOT require that the power source be turned OFF
For highest measurement accuracy when measuring power levels below –30
dBm External Zeroing should be performed
During External Zeroing the power source MUST be turned OFF or the power
sensor disconnected from the power source (device under test) Power is OFF
when power sensor measurements are below –60 dBm When power higher
than this is detected at the sensor a warning message is shown on the
FieldFox and External Zeroing will not proceed
How to perform External Zeroing
—Press Cal 5
—Then External Zero
While either Internal or External Zeroing is being performed Zeroing is
shown on the FieldFox screen While this message is present do NOT make
any changes to the FieldFox
External Zeroing is NOT allowed on the U2020 Xseries Power Sensors 340 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Power Meter (USB) Mode Option 302
USB Power Meter Settings
In addition once External Zeroing has started the power source must be OFF
for the entire time that the Zeroing message is present Otherwise the
calibration will be compromised but NO warning is shown
Frequency
A table of correction factors versus frequency is stored within Keysight Power
Sensors The frequency of the power to be measured is entered in the FieldFox
so that the appropriate correction factor can be used
The Source Control feature (see following section) will determine the frequency
range of the power measurement
How to enter Frequency of the Power Measurement
—Press FreqDist or Meas Setup 4
—Then Frequency
— Then type a value using the numeric keypad The default frequency is 50
MHz
— Then press a multiplier key Learn about multiplier abbreviations in
Multiplier Abbreviations on page 43
The current frequency is shown on the FieldFox screen
Source Control
This feature may require an option on some FieldFox models
With the FieldFox internal source enabled these settings allow you to make
simple absolute power measurements The source and the power sensor can
be physically separated by a long distance when using a long USB cable
Set the internal source frequency by setting the frequency of the power
measurement Learn how in the previous section
Power Meter measurements are limited by the combined frequency ranges of
the internal source when enabled and the frequency range of the power
sensor For example assume the frequency range of your sensor is 9 kHz to 18
GHz and the frequency range of the FieldFox is 2 MHz to 6 GHz
— With the Source ON measurements are limited to 2 MHz to 6 GHz
— With the Source OFF measurements are allowed from 9 kHz to 18 GHz
How to Set Source Control and Power Level
—Press FreqDistKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 341
Power Meter (USB) Mode Option 302
USB Power Meter Settings
—Then Advanced
—Then Source Enable
— ON Turn ON the internal source
— OFF Turn OFF the internal source
Optionally set the power level
—Press Src Nom Power (15 dBm default setting) Set output power to an
arbitrary value at the displayed CW frequency
— Then enter a value using the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary
knob
—Press Enter
Scale
The scale of the Power Meter display can be set manually or automatically The
major and minor ticks are set automatically and can NOT be changed
Although the scale settings are limited you can view measurements beyond
these settings by performing Autoscale
How to Scale the Power Meter Display
Manually
—Press Scale Amptd
— Then choose from the following
— Scale Min Sets the low power level of the power meter display Type
a number and select the units or press Enter This value is limited to –
100 dBm
— Scale Max Sets the high power level of the power meter display
Type a number and select the units or press Enter This value is
limited to 100 dBm
Autoscale
Using Autoscale the current reading is used for the center of the scale and
Min and Max values are set accordingly
—Press Scale Amptd
—Then More
—Then Autoscale
When Option 208 (FOPS) is enabled to access Source Control press
Sweep 3 then Power Setup Learn more about FOPS beginning on page
Chapter 18 Frequency Offset Using Power Sensor (FOPS) – Option 208
on page 345 342 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Power Meter (USB) Mode Option 302
USB Power Meter Settings
Relative and Offset Power Measurements
Power measurements can be made that are relative to another reading or that
are offset by a fixed value
— Use Relative to measure the difference between power levels
— Use Offset to account for components or a long length of cable that is used
before the power sensor For example if using a 10 dB attenuator to protect
the FieldFox enter an Offset Value of 10 to read the power as it would
appear without attenuation If using a 10 dB amplifier enter an Offset Value
of –10 to read the power as it would appear without amplification
How to set Relative and Offset Power Measurements
—Press Scale Amptd
— Then choose from the following
— Relative Off On When switched to ON the FieldFox measures and
stores the current power level Subsequent power measurements
display a power level which is relative to the stored value When
relative is ON the units change from dBm to dB or from Watts to
— Offset Off On Toggles ON and OFF the displayed power level using
the Offset value
— Offset Val Value by which the power meter display is offset A
positive value compensates for a component with loss A negative
value compensates for a component with gain Offset values are
limited to + 100 dB
Display Units
Select whether to display power in dBm or Watts When making relative power
measurements these change to dB and
How to set Power Meter display units
—Press Meas Setup 4 or Scale Amptd More
—Then Unit
— Then choose from the following
— dBm (dB) Sets Power Meter display to dBm or dB
— Watt () Sets Power Meter display to Watts or
Resolution
Resolution sets the number of digits to display after the decimal point on the
digital power meter displayKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 343
Power Meter (USB) Mode Option 302
USB Power Meter Settings
How to set Resolution
—Press Scale Amptd
—Then More
—Then in Resolution choose from 0 1 2 or 3
Averaging
Averaging is used to improve measurement accuracy in low power or noisy
power situations Increased averaging improves measurement accuracy but
also reduces measurement speed
How to set Power Meter Averaging
—Press BW 2 or Meas Setup 4
— Then choose from the following
— Averaging Auto Man Off
— Auto Allows the USB Power Sensor to use its Auto Averaging
settings See the USB Power Sensor documentation for details
— Man Manually enter an averaging count by setting Num Averages
— OFF Performs NO averaging
— Num Averages Sets the number of Power Meter readings to be
averaged before a valid reading is displayed When the number is
changed Averaging is automatically set to Man
Single or Continuous Measure
This setting determines whether the FieldFox measures continuously or only
once each time the Single button is pressed Use Single to conserve battery
power or to allow you to save or analyze a specific measurement
This setting can be changed at any time without affecting calibration accuracy
How to set Single or Continuous
—Press Sweep 3
— Then choose one of the following
— Single Automatically sets Continuous OFF and causes FieldFox to
make ONE measurement then hold for the next Single key press
When a data trace is displayed the entire trace is measured then
holds The Hold annotation changes to an arrow > while the
measurement occurs
— Continuous OFF ON Makes continuous measurements This is the
typical setting when battery power is not critical 344 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Power Meter (USB) Mode Option 302
USB Power Meter Settings
You can also use Run Hold + to toggle between Single and Continuous
Step Detection Mode
The FieldFox supports the Step Detection feature that is present in Keysight
USB power sensors When enabled this feature reduces settling time after a
significant step in the measured power For more information please refer to
the USB Power Meter documentation
How to set Step Detection mode
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Step Detection OFF ON
— Then choose from the following
— ON Enables step detection (default setting)
— OFF Disables step detection
Limits
In Power Meter Mode Minimum and Maximum limits set a visible range of
acceptable readings between these two values Readings that are below the
minimum or above the maximum are clearly visible on the power meter display
How to set Limits
—Press Limit 8
— Then choose from the following
— Min Limit OFF ON Toggles the display of the Minimum limit ON and
OFF
— Min Limit Value Sets the Minimum limit power value Power reading
lower than this will exceed the limit
— Max Limit OFF ON Toggles the display of the Maximum limit ON and
OFF
— Max Limit Value Sets the Maximum limit power value Power reading
higher than this will exceed the limit 345
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
18 Frequency Offset Using Power Sensor (FOPS) – Option
208
FOPS is accessed through (and requires) Option 302 USB Power Meter Mode
With both options installed you can send a signal with the FieldFox internal
source at one frequency and measure this signal with a Keysight USeries USB
Power Sensor at another frequency
Figure 181 Display for FOPS
In this Chapter
How to select Power Meter (USB Sensor) on
page 349
Measurement Selection on page 349
Sweep Type and Frequency on page 350
Power Sensor Settling on page 352
Sweep Settings on page 352 346 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Frequency Offset Using Power Sensor (FOPS) – Option 208
See Also
Amplitude Markers on page 353
Trace Math on page 353
All about Scale Settings on page 506Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 347
Frequency Offset Using Power Sensor (FOPS) – Option 208
Overview
Overview
This feature allows the FieldFox source frequency to be set independently from
the power sensor (receiver) frequency With frequency offset using power
sensor (FOPS) the frequency of both the source and receiver are swept and
the two track each other The offset frequency can be negative zero or
positive
FOPS can be used to characterize the scalar transmission response of devices
such as mixers and converters This frequency offset capability is necessary for
conversion lossgain measurements on frequencytranslating devices since by
definition the input and output frequencies of the DUT are different The
FieldFox source stimulates the DUT and the power sensor is used as the
measurement receiver
Since power sensors are inherently broadband devices (not
frequencyselective) it is your responsibility to ensure that ONLY the signal of
interest is present at the power sensor input and that all others signals are
filtered appropriately
For some DUTs the output frequency may sweep in a reverse direction as
compared to the source frequency The FieldFox analyzer includes an offset
calculator that ensures a fast measurement setup
The following shows a typical use case for FOPS
— The DUT is a long section of cable and a frequency converter
— The FieldFox source is tuned to the RF frequency
— The USB power sensor with an equally long USBLAN cable is connected
to the IF Output USBLAN extenders are NOT provided with the FieldFox or
Keysight USB power sensors
— Conversion gainloss is measured at power sensor 348 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Frequency Offset Using Power Sensor (FOPS) – Option 208
Overview
The dynamic range with FOPS may be significantly different when using
various power sensors In general the lower frequency range sensors have
better dynamic range Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 349
Frequency Offset Using Power Sensor (FOPS) – Option 208
FOPS Settings
FOPS Settings
The following settings are unique to FOPS Standard USB Power Meter mode
settings which may be useful with FOPS are documented in that chapter
starting in USB Power Meter Settings on page 339
Select Power Meter (USB Sensor) before making any setting in this section
How to select Power Meter (USB Sensor)
—Press Mode
—Then Power Meter (USB Sensor)
— Then connect a USB Power Sensor to either FieldFox USB port
— For a complete list of supported Keysight USB Power Sensors please visit
wwwkeysightcomfindusbsensorsforfieldfox
Measurement Selection
—Press Measure 1
— Then choose from the following
— Src Power Measure Similar to a normalization’ cal this selection guides
you through the following steps to make a measurement at the reference
plane and then store the data trace into memory
— Connect the power sensor to the measurement reference plane This
is the location to where power measurements are to be referenced
For example to measure only the conversion loss through a
converter attach the power sensor to the cable that connects to the
converter input
—Press Measure When finished press Src Data > Mem to store the
measured data into FieldFox memory Preset or Mode Preset will
clear the stored memory
— 3Optionally choose from the following
——ReMeasure Make another measurement
——Src Data View only the remeasured data
——Src Memory View only the stored memory data
——Src Data & Memory View both the remeasured data and the
stored memory data
—4Press Done
— Src Power Memory Not available until source data is stored into memory
Displays only the source power memory trace 350 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Frequency Offset Using Power Sensor (FOPS) – Option 208
FOPS Settings
— Gain Not available until source data is stored into memory Displays the
Output power Source power (memory trace)
— Rx Power Displays the raw received power at the USB power sensor
Sweep Type and Frequency
Set the source and receiver frequencies for the FOPS measurements The
receiver is a Keysight USeries Power Sensor These are broadband
measurement devices which means that they measure power over a very wide
frequency range Tables of frequency and power correction factors are stored
within the power sensors The receiver (Rx) frequencies are used ONLY to apply
the appropriate correction factors to the power levels measured with the power
sensor
How to set Sweep Type and Frequency
—Press FreqDist
—Then Sweep Type
— Then choose from the following
— CW Used to make standard (nonoffset) power meter measurements at a
single frequency Learn more in USB Power Meter Settings on page 339
— Swept Used to make swept FOPS measurements
—— Then enter source (Src) frequencies as either Center and Span
or Start and Stop Both methods set the FieldFox internal
source sweep range out the Port 1 RF Output connector
——The frequency limits are determined by the limits of both the
FieldFox and the power sensor
——The LOW frequency is limited by the higher of either the
FieldFox or the power sensor minimum frequencies
——The HIGH frequency is limited by the lower of either the
FieldFox or the power sensor maximum frequencies
——Then More
——Then Freq Display This determines how the receiver
frequencies below the graticules are displayed Choose from
the following
It is YOUR responsibility to ensure that ONLY the signal of interest is
present at the power sensor All other signals MUST be filtered
appropriately
To make FOPS measurements at a single frequency choose Swept then
enter a Src Center frequency then Span 0 HzKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 351
Frequency Offset Using Power Sensor (FOPS) – Option 208
FOPS Settings
——Start Annotated as Start and Stop frequencies
——Center Annotated as Center and Span frequencies
——Then choose from the following two methods to determine the
offset frequency (the frequency that the receiver is offset from
the source) This is typically the frequency of the LO that is
used with the frequency converter The frequency offset may
be positive negative or zero
——Freq Offset Enter an Offset frequency The receiver frequencies
are calculated
——Offset Calculator Enter the Receiver Start and Stop
frequencies Then press Calculate Offset
——Press Rx Sweep to select the receiver sweep direction
——Fwd Used for systems for which the output frequency is
Offs + Src The output frequency of the DUT and the
receiver sweeps in the same direction as the source
——Rev Used for systems for which the output frequency is
Offs Src The output frequency of the DUT and the
receiver sweeps in reverse direction as compared to the
source
Invalid Settings
Violations of the following conditions will return an error message
— The frequency span for the source and receiver must be the same
— Both the source and receiver frequencies must be positive
FOPS Configuration Examples
Negative Offset RxSwp Fwd (Offs + Src)
Src 2 GHz to 3 GHz
Offset 1 GHz
Rx 1 GHz to 2 GHz
Positive Offset RxSwp Rev (Offs Src)
Src 2 GHz to 3 GHz
Offset 38 GHz
Rx 1800 GHz to 800 MHz
Positive Offset RxSwp Fwd (Offs + Src)
Src 2 GHz to 3 GHz
Offset 38 GHz 352 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Frequency Offset Using Power Sensor (FOPS) – Option 208
FOPS Settings
Rx 58 GHz to 68 GHz
Power Sensor Settling
The following two settings work together to allow you to choose the right
compromise between measurement speed and accuracy
Each power sensor reading is considered settled when either
— The difference between two consecutive readings are within the Tolerance
value
— Or the Max (number of) Readings has been made
The readings that were taken are averaged together to become the displayed
reading
How to choose Power Sensor settling
—Press BW 2
—Then Tolerance Enter a value in dB between 0 and 10 using the numeric
keypad the arrows or the rotary knob Tolerance of 0 will never be
achieved so the Max Readings will always be made Press Enter
—Then Max Readings Enter a value between 1 and 20 using the numeric
keypad the arrows or the rotary knob Press Enter
Sweep Settings
These settings provide added control of the FOPS measurement
How to make additional sweep settings
—Press Sweep 3
— Then choose from the following
— Power Setup
— Source Enable
——ON Turn ON the internal source (required for FOPS)
——OFF Turn OFF the internal source
— Src Nom Power (15 dBm default setting) Set output power to an
arbitrary value at the source CW frequency Then enter a value using
the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary knob Press Enter
— Num Points or Freq Step Size Both settings control the number of power
sensor measurements between the Start and Stop frequencies Enter one
setting and the other will be changed automatically There must be at least
two data pointsKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 353
Frequency Offset Using Power Sensor (FOPS) – Option 208
FOPS Settings
— Dwell Point Specifies a settling time (in seconds) after the internal source
steps to the next frequency and before the power sensor makes a
measurement
Amplitude Markers
Amplitude markers are horizontal dotted lines that you can move to any
amplitude level on the screen The two amplitude markers can be set
independently or used as a pair of delta markers Amplitude markers can be
used as a visual comparison aid with the data trace
How to make Amplitude Marker settings
—Press Marker
—Then More
—Then Ampl Markers
— Then choose from the following
— OFF Amplitude markers are NOT displayed
— ON Amplitude markers ARE displayed at their previous positions
—Then Ampl Mkr 1 or 2
— Enter a value in dBm for the marker using the numeric keypad the
arrows or the rotary knob
—Press Delta Ampl Mkr
— Then choose from the following
— ON AmplMkr 2 value is relative to AmplMkr 1 When AmplMkr 1 is
moved AmplMkr 2 also moves to maintain the AmplMkr 2 value
between them
— OFF The two amplitude markers move independent of one another
Trace Math
Trace Math allows you to compare data traces and perform simple math Learn
how to use Trace Math in All about Markers on page 484 All Data and
Memory features work as documented EXCEPT for the following
To Compare Src Power (Input) and Rx Power (Output)
1 Meas Rx Power
2 Store to memory
3 View Data & Memory
4 Meas Src Power
When Trace then Data > Mem is pressed if a Src Power trace is active
then RxPower is actually stored into memory 354 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Frequency Offset Using Power Sensor (FOPS) – Option 208
FOPS Settings 355
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
19 Pulse Measurements Mode – Option 330
Pulsed power meter measurements available with Option 330 are made with
Keysight U2020 XSeries USB Peak Power Sensors These sensors are capable
of detecting measuring and storing data from a train of pulses at the RF input
This data is queried from the USB Power Sensor and displayed on the FieldFox
screen You can then analyze the data using several selectable settings
In this Chapter
Supported Power Sensors on page 357
Measurement Selection on page 358
Frequency Time on page 358
Zoom Window on page 359
Scale on page 360
Averaging on page 360
Video Bandwidth on page 361
Single or Continuous Measure on page 361
Resolution on page 362 356 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Pulse Measurements Mode – Option 330
— Keysight U2020 XSeries USB Peak Power Sensors Programmer’s Guide
httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdfU202190003pdf
— Best Practices For Making The Most Accurate Radar Pulse Measurements
httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59910434ENpdf
Triggering on page 362
Marker Settings on page 365
Amplitude Markers on page 366
How to Search with Markers on page 366
How to enable Auto Analysis on page 368
Pulse Top on page 368
Grid on page 368
Trace Memory on page 369
Many of the features included with the FieldFox Pulse Measurements
Mode are discussed in detail in these two documentsKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 357
Pulse Measurements Mode – Option 330
Supported Power Sensors
Supported Power Sensors
Pulse measurements are made using any of the Keysight U2020 XSeries USB
Peak Power Sensors
Zeroing of the U2020 XSeries USB Peak Power Sensors is performed
automatically at power up every 5 seconds and prior to measuring low level
signals
Switching between Pulse Measurement Mode and Power Meter Mode
NOT Supported Using a single USB Peak Power Sensor and switching
between Power Meter Mode and Pulse Measurement Mode Both modes
will attempt to program the sensor which could cause one or both modes
to hang or at least report inaccurate data
Supported Using one U2000A Average Power Sensor connected to the
top USB port for Power Meter Mode and one Peak Power Sensor
connected to the bottom USB port for Pulse Measurement Mode
How to Connect the Power Sensor
Connect your Power Sensor to one of the FieldFox USB ports
A sequence of status lights are displayed on the base of the power sensor
— Green blinking light indicates the power sensor is communicating or
selftests are being performed Because the FieldFox is usually
communicating with the power sensor when it is connected this is the
normal mode of operation
— Amber light indicates Zeroing is being performed
— Red light indicates an error has occurred with the power sensor Refer to
power sensor documentation
— No light indicates the FieldFox is not communicating with the power
sensor This is the case when in Hold mode or when NOT in Pulsed
Measurement Mode
Use an attenuator between the DUT and the power sensor when
measuring power levels that are higher than +20 dBm The attenuator
value can be subtracted from the measurement using the Offset feature
discussed in Relative and Offset Power Measurements on page 342 358 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Pulse Measurements Mode – Option 330
Pulse Measurement Settings
Pulse Measurement Settings
Select Pulse Measurement Mode before making any setting in this section
How to select Pulse Measurement Mode
—Press Mode
—Then More if your FieldFox contains more than five measurement modes
—Then Pulse Measurements
Measurement Selection
The pulse measurement results are presented as either a traditional power
meter display or as a trace graph
How to select the Measurement
—Press Measure 1
— Then choose from the following
— Average Average power (Meter display)
— Peak Peak power (Meter display)
— Pk to Avg Displays the difference between the above two
measurements (Meter display)
— Trace Graph (default) The primary trace (Tr 1) plots pulse data in
amplitude versus time Optionally you can enable a secondary
zoom’ trace Learn how in Zoom Window on page 359
— When a Meter display’ measurement is selected the following Pulse
Measurement Mode settings are identical to the standard USB Power
Meter Mode settings
—Learn how to set Scale in Scale on page 360
—Learn how to set Relative and Offset Power in Relative and Offset
Power Measurements on page 342
—Learn how to set Display Units in Display Units on page 342
—Learn how to set Limits in Limits on page 344
Frequency Time
How to set Frequency
—Press FreqDist
— Then choose from the followingKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 359
Pulse Measurements Mode – Option 330
Pulse Measurement Settings
— Frequency Sets the center frequency of the carrier on which pulse
modulation resides This is used to set amplitude correction of the
USB Power Sensor
How to set Time
Specify the time over which data will be acquired by the USB Power Sensor
When Trace Graph is selected Tr 1 is annotated with these values Time can
be specified using either of the following pairs of values
— Center 1 and Timediv 1 Specify the center time and time per division
— Start Time and Time Length Specify the start time and length of
acquisition
— A positive start time indicates a delay after the sensor detects a pulse
signal
— A negative start time displays data that is acquired BEFORE the sensor
detects a pulse signal (or Tzero)
— Follow each by entering a value using the numeric keypad the arrows
or the rotary knob
— After using the keypad select a multiplier key Learn about multiplier
abbreviations
Zoom Window
When Trace Graph is selected as the measurement a secondary Zoom Trace
can be used to view a zoomed portion of Tr 1 When Zoom Window is ON blue
vertical posts appear on Tr 1 to indicate the current start center and stop
times of the zoom window The zoom window can be scaled using the standard
Scale settings
How to make Zoom Window settings
—Press Measure
—Then Trace Graph
—Press Trace 6
—Then Zoom Window OFF ON
— Then choose from the following
— ON Opens the zoom window on the bottom half of the FieldFox
screen The window includes the zoomed trace
— OFF Closes the zoom window
— Zoom Center While monitoring the T within the blue vertical posts on Tr 1
enter a value for the center time using the numeric keypad the
arrows or the rotary knob 360 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Pulse Measurements Mode – Option 330
Pulse Measurement Settings
— Zoom Timediv While monitoring the blue vertical posts on the primary
trace enter a value for the zoom window span using the numeric keypad
the | arrows or the rotary knob
— Trace 1 Press to select Tr 1 This can also be done by using the
arrows Select a trace before making trace settings such as Scale
— Zoom Trace Press to select the zoom trace
Scale
For Meterstyle measurements learn how to set Scale Relative and Offset
Power display Units and Resolution beginning in Scale on page 360
How to set Scale for Trace Graph measurements
— Select a trace to scale using the arrows
—Press Scale Amptd
— Then choose from the following methods
— Autoscale Automatically adjusts the Yaxis to comfortably fit the Minimum
and Maximum amplitude of the trace on the screen
— Set Scale acquisition and Reference Position
— Scale Manually enter a scale per division to view specific areas of
the trace
— Ref Level Manually set the value of the reference line Enter a
negative value by pressing RunHold (+) either before or after
typing a value
— Ref Pos Manually set the position of the reference line Values must
be between 0 (TOP line) and 10 (BOTTOM line)
— Offset ON Enable Offset When only trace 1 is visible Offset ON
appears to the left of the trace
— Offset Val Enter a value by which all amplitude values will be offset
This can have the effect of virtually removing a component from the
measurement path A positive value compensates for a component
with loss A negative value compensates for a component with gain
Offset values are limited to + 100 dB
Averaging
Averaging helps to reduce the effects of random noise on a measurement The
more measurements that are averaged the greater the amount of noise
reduction Averaging is allowed for all pulse measurements
Averaging is performed in the USB Power Sensor before the data is sent to the
FieldFox Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 361
Pulse Measurements Mode – Option 330
Pulse Measurement Settings
Annotation in the left pane shows the state of the Average setting When
Manual is selected the Num of Averages’ is setting is also shown
How to set Averaging
—Press BW 2
—Then Averaging
— Then choose from the following
— Auto Averaging is set to a reasonable value by the USB Power
Sensor
— Man Averaging is set to the value specified in the Num Averages’
setting
— Off Averaging is OFF
— Num Averages Select a value using the numeric keypad then press Enter
Video Bandwidth
The Video Bandwidth setting enables an FIR (finite impulse response) filter
within the USB Power Sensor The filter setting affects the appearance of the
trace results
Video Bandwidth is allowed for all pulse measurements
How to set Video Bandwidth
—Press BW 2
—Then Video Bandwidth
— Then choose from the following
— Off Video Bandwidth is disabled
— Low Similar to a low pass filter ripple in the pass band is minimized
but allows higher sidelobes on the filter skirt
— Medium Smooth pass band with reasonable transition ripple
— High The pass band ripple is similar to the OFF setting but the
transition skirts are smoother
Single or Continuous Measure
This setting determines whether the FieldFox continuously queries the USB
Power Sensor for data or only once each time the Single button is pressed
Use Single to conserve battery power or to allow you to save or analyze
specific data 362 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Pulse Measurements Mode – Option 330
Pulse Measurement Settings
How to set Single or Continuous
—Press Sweep 3
— Then choose one of the following
— Single Automatically sets Continuous OFF and causes the FieldFox
to query the USB Power Sensor ONCE then hold for the next Single
key press Hold is annotated in the upper left corner of the display
— Continuous OFF ON Queries the USB Power Sensor whenever a valid
trigger signal is present This is the typical setting when battery
power is not critical
You can also use Run Hold + to toggle between Single and Continuous
Resolution
Resolution is the number of individual acquisitions that occur in the USB
Power Sensor This data is read by the FieldFox and plotted across the Xaxis
to form a trace More data points increases measurement resolution However
more data points requires more time to acquire query and plot
How to set Resolution
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Resolution
— Then choose from the following
— Low 240 data points
— Medium 1000 data points
— High Calculated value approximately 8000 data points
Triggering
For pulse measurements a trigger signal refers to the event that causes the
USB Peak Power Sensor to initiate measurement acquisition It does NOT refer
to triggering the FieldFox
Trigger settings can be used with ALL pulse measurements unless stated
otherwise
A Waiting for Trigger message on the FieldFox screen is posted on behalf of
the USB Power Sensor when it is waiting for a pulse signal at the RF Input
(Internal) or a TTL signal at the USB Sensor External Trigger input
How to make Trigger settings
—Press Sweep 3
—Then TriggerKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 363
Pulse Measurements Mode – Option 330
Pulse Measurement Settings
—Then Trig Type
— Then choose from the following
— Freerun The USB Power Sensor acquires data without waiting for a
trigger This mode is NOT supported for Trace Graph measurements
— Internal The USB Power Sensor acquires data when a valid pulse
signal is detected at the RF input The following Trigger settings
determine the validity of the trigger signal
— External The USB Power Sensor acquires data when a valid TTL
signal is detected at the USB Power Sensor external trigger input
Trigger Edge
This setting determines which edge of a trigger signal initiates data
acquisition
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger
—Then Trigger Edge
— Then choose from the following
— Pos Acquisition is triggered by the rising (positive) edge of a valid
signal
— Neg Acquisition is triggered by the falling (negative) edge of a valid
signal
Trigger Delay
After a valid trigger signal is received at the USB Power Sensor data
acquisition begins after the specified Trigger Delay time PLUS the specified
Start time See the Pulse Timing diagram in Trigger Settings Annotation on
page 365 for more information
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger
—Then Trigger Delay
— Then enter a value using the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary
knob
Auto Trigger
Used ONLY when Trigger Type Internal this setting determines whether the
trigger level is set manually or is set to the default level in the USB Power
Sensor firmware
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger 364 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Pulse Measurements Mode – Option 330
Pulse Measurement Settings
—Then Auto Trigger
— Then choose from the following
— ON Trigger level is determined by the USB Power Sensor firmware
— OFF The trigger level is set manually using the Trigger Level setting
Trigger Level
Used when Trigger Type Internal AND Auto Trigger OFF (Manual)
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger
—Then Trig Level
— Then set the trigger level using the numeric keypad the arrows or the
rotary knob A line appears on Tr 1 at the current trigger level setting Data
acquisition occurs when the RF input signal crosses the line This setting
can be used with either Positive or Negative edge triggering
Qualification
Use the qualification setting to avoid triggering on false pulses and to aid in
stabilizing the power trace
The qualification time defines the time the signal has to remain below the
trigger threshold before a transition through the threshold will qualify as a
trigger This can help stabilize a power trace particularly with digitally
modulated pulses that may have many transitions through the trigger
threshold By setting the qualification time longer than the short transitions of
the data signal the sensor will reliably trigger on the pulse and not on the data
It will also eliminate triggering on very short noise spikes when the trigger level
has to be set to low power
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Trigger
—Then Qualification
— Then set the qualification value using the numeric keypad or the rotary knob
(default 100 ns minimum 25 ns maximum 50 μs)
It may be may be necessary to set the qualification time to the minimum
20 ns in order to trigger on very short pulsesKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 365
Pulse Measurements Mode – Option 330
Pulse Measurement Settings
Trigger Settings Annotation
Trigger settings are annotated on the FieldFox screen as highlighted in red in
the following image
In the previous graphic the settings are Trig Level 10 dBm Trig Type (Int)
Pos Slope () Delay

Marker Settings
Markers are not allowed with Meterstyle measurements
Markers are displayed on Tr 1 and also on the zoom trace if the marker is
within the zoom window time span
Up to six standard markers can be used to provide readouts of the Yaxis
amplitude at the current Xaxis location
The six standard markers can also be used as Delta Markers
Learn more about standard markers in All about Markers on page 484 366 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Pulse Measurements Mode – Option 330
Pulse Measurement Settings
Amplitude Markers
Amplitude markers are horizontal dotted lines that you can move to any
amplitude level on the screen The two amplitude markers can be set
independently or used as a pair of delta markers
Amplitude markers can be used as a visual comparison aid with the pulse
measurement traces
How to make Amplitude Marker settings
—Press Marker
—Then More
—Then Ampl Markers
— Then choose from the following
— OFF Amplitude markers are NOT displayed
— ON Amplitude markers ARE displayed at their previous positions
—Then Ampl Mkr 1 or 2
— Enter a value in dBm for the marker using the numeric keypad the
arrows or the rotary knob
—Press Delta Ampl Mkr
— Then choose from the following
— ON AmplMkr 2 value is relative to AmplMkr 1 When AmplMkr 1 is
moved AmplMkr 2 also moves to maintain the AmplMkr 2 value
between them
— OFF The two amplitude markers move independent of one another
Marker Search
Use Marker Search to find and move markers to locations on the Tr 1 trace
How to Search with Markers
— Activate the marker to be used for the search
—Then press Mkr >Tools
—Then Marker Search
—Then Zone Search
— Then choose from the following
— ON Available ONLY when the zoom window is enabled the search is
limited to the zone defined by the zoom window
— OFF The search is performed over the entire Tr 1 traceKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 367
Pulse Measurements Mode – Option 330
Pulse Measurement Settings
Then choose from the following
— Target Peak and Minimum Learn more about these standard features
beginning in Searching with Markers on page 490
— Rise Time Select then set a value in dB Delta markers are created and
placed at the Peak and at the specified value BEFORE the Peak
— Fall Time Select then set a value in dB Delta markers are created and
placed at the Peak and at the specified value AFTER the Peak
Auto Analysis
Auto Analysis reports the following TEN pulse measurements
Rise and Fall time in Marker Search uses different criteria than in Auto
Analysis and will therefore result in different reported values
For more information on peak power measurements refer to the
documentation for your power sensor Learn more
httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59908708ENpdf
1 Average Power Average power level of all measured data
points
2 Peak Power Highest reading of all measured data
points
3 Peak minus Average Difference between the above two results
4 Pulse Top Power value based on the specified Pulse
Top setting
5 Rise Time The time it takes for a pulse to rise from
10 to 90 of its peak value
6 Fall Time The time it takes for a pulse to fall from
90 to 10 of its peak value
7 Pulse Width The time between the rising edge and
falling edge of a pulse
8 Pulse Period The time of one complete pulse cycle 368 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Pulse Measurements Mode – Option 330
Pulse Measurement Settings
How to enable Auto Analysis
—Press Mkr >Tools
—Then Auto Analysis
— Then choose from the following
— OFF Analysis OFF
— ON The Analysis values appear below trace 1
Pulse Top
Pulse Top is NOT the same as the pulse Peak Pulse Top is used to set and
report the reference power level You enter a value in percent and the Pulse
Top value is reported in the Auto Analysis table in dB down from 100 of the
reference power level
How to set Pulse Top
—Press Mkr >Tools
—Then Pulse Top
— Then enter a percent value between 0 and 100 using the numeric keypad
the arrows or the rotary knob
— When set to 10 10 dB down from the 100 acquisition is reported
— When set to 50 3 dB down from the 100 acquisition is reported
— When set to 90 05 dB down from the 100 acquisition is reported
Grid
Enables and disables the display of a 10 x 10 grid on the FieldFox screen
How to enable Grid display
—Press Mkr >Tools
—Then Grid
— OFF Grid OFF
— ON A grid of XY lines appears on the screen
9 Duty Cycle The ratio of the pulse width pulse period
10 Pulse Rep Freq The rate in pulses sec at which pulses
recurKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 369
Pulse Measurements Mode – Option 330
Pulse Measurement Settings
Trace Memory
A memory trace is a pulse measurement Tr 1 data trace (NOT the trace in the
Zoom window) that has been stored in the FieldFox volatile memory It then
becomes static meaning it is not updated with normal pulse measurements It
can be displayed on the screen by itself or with a pulse trace for comparison
purposes
The Tr 1 data trace is displayed in yellow
The memory trace is displayed in blue
How to display data and memory traces
—Press Trace 6
—Then Trace Memory
—Then Data>Mem to store the current live trace into memory A beep’
sounds to confirm the data trace has been saved to memory There is no
display annotation that indicates that the memory trace has been stored
—Press Data to view only the data trace
—Press Memory to view only the memory trace
—Press Data & Memory to view both the live trace and the stored
memory trace 370 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Pulse Measurements Mode – Option 330
Pulse Measurement Settings 371
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
20 VVM (Vector Voltmeter) Mode Option 308
VVM Mode (Option 308) measures the electrical length of cables and other
devices The 1Port Cable Trimming and 2Port Transmission measurement
displays the electrical length in both Magnitude and Phase
Figure 201 Display for the 1Port Cable Trimming measurement
In this Chapter
Overview on page 373
Measurement Selection on page 374
Frequency Selection on page 374
Display Resolution on page 374
IF Bandwidth on page 375
Output Power on page 375
Averaging on page 376
Single or Continuous Measure on page 377
VVM Calibration on page 377
Zeroing on page 377 372 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
VVM (Vector Voltmeter) Mode Option 308
Procedures
1Port Cable Trimming Measurements on page 379
2Port Transmission Measurements on page 381
AB and BA Measurements on page 383Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 373
VVM (Vector Voltmeter) Mode Option 308
Overview
Overview
In the FieldFox both 1port and 2port measurement types use a different
configuration setup from the HPKeysight 8508A Vector Voltmeter
Figure 202 Typical 8508A measurement configuration –as shown in the 8508A manual
The above block diagram requires an external source and directional coupler to
measure the electrical length of a DUT or cable to be trimmed Separate paths
are used to measure the Incident signal (A) and Reflected signal (B) To
measure the ratio of the ReflectedIncident signals you were required to select
BA for both the Magnitude and Phase display
In the FieldFox the source and directional coupler are inside the instrument
This allows you to connect the DUT to ONLY the FieldFox PORT 1 with NO
external instruments in order to make Cable Trimming measurements
See the FieldFox block diagram and Cable Trimming procedures beginning in
1Port Cable Trimming Measurements on page 379 374 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
VVM (Vector Voltmeter) Mode Option 308
VVM Mode Settings
VVM Mode Settings
Select VVM Mode before making any setting in this section
How to select VVM Mode
—Press Mode
—Then VVM
Measurement Selection
How to select a VVM Measurement
—Press Measure 1
— Then choose from the following
— 1Port Cable Trimming 1port reflection measurement Learn how to
make this measurement in 1Port Cable Trimming Measurements
on page 379
— 2Port Transmission 2port transmission measurement Learn how
to make this measurement in 2Port Transmission Measurements
on page 381
— BA and AB 2port ratioed receiver measurements using external
sources Learn more in AB and BA Measurements on page 383
Frequency Selection
How to set Frequency
—Press FreqDist
—Then Frequency
— Enter a value using the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary
knob
— After using the arrows or the rotary knob press Enter The increment
setting of the arrows is based on the current span and can NOT be changed
in VVM Mode
— After using the keypad select a multiplier key Learn about multiplier
abbreviations inMultiplier Abbreviations on page 43
Display Resolution
You can display either one digit or two digits after the decimal point for both
magnitude and phase readingsKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 375
VVM (Vector Voltmeter) Mode Option 308
VVM Mode Settings
This setting survives a Preset and Mode Preset
How to set Resolution
—Press ScaleAmptd
—Then Resolution
—Then choose
— 1 00 (default)
— 2 000
IF Bandwidth
Reducing the IF receiver bandwidth reduces the effect of random noise on a
measurement However narrower IF bandwidths cause longer measurement
times
For highest accuracy Zero AFTER changing the IF Bandwidth Learn about
Zeroing in Zeroing on page 377
How to set IF BW
—Press BW 2
—Then IF BW
— Then choose from the following
— 10 Hz | 100 Hz | 1 kHz | 10 kHz | 100 kHz
More 30 Hz | 300 Hz | 3 kHz | 30 kHz
Output Power
Set the power level out of the FieldFox to High Low or manually set power
level to a value between High and Low
Generally the high power setting is used when measuring passive highloss
devices to place the signal farther from the noise floor However for devices
that are sensitive to high power levels such as amplifiers use the Low power
setting
For best measurement accuracy use the Manual power setting at 15 dBm
After calibration the power level can be decreased for amplifiers or increased
for higher dynamic range
Power Level settings in this mode will NOT change Power Level settings in
other modes To help prevent damage to your DUT use caution when
changing modes with your DUT connected to the FieldFox test ports 376 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
VVM (Vector Voltmeter) Mode Option 308
VVM Mode Settings
How to set Output Power
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then More
—Then Output Power
— High (Default setting) Sets output power to the maximum achievable
power at all displayed frequency
— Low Sets output power to approximately –45 dBm
— Man Set output power to an arbitrary value
—Then press Power Level
— Then enter a value using the numeric keypad the arrows or the
rotary knob
—Press Enter
Averaging
Averaging helps to reduce the effects of random noise on a measurement The
FieldFox computes the displayed value over several consecutive readings
Average count determines the number of readings to average The higher the
average count the greater the amount of noise reduction
An average counter is shown in the left edge of the screen as Avg N This
shows the number of previous readings that have been averaged together
When the counter reaches the specified count then a running average’ of the
last N readings is displayed
Average count 1 means there is NO averaging
This setting can be changed at any time without affecting calibration accuracy
How to set Averaging
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then More
—Then Avg N where N is the current count setting
— Enter a value using the numeric keypad Enter 1 for NO averaging
—Press Enter
To restart the averaging process press Meas Setup 4 then More then Restart Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 377
VVM (Vector Voltmeter) Mode Option 308
VVM Mode Settings
Single or Continuous Measure
This setting determines whether the FieldFox measures continuously or only
once each time the Single button is pressed Use Single to conserve battery
power or to allow you to save or analyze a specific measurement
This setting can be changed at any time without affecting calibration accuracy
How to set Single or Continuous
—Press Meas Setup 4
— Then choose one of the following
— Single Automatically sets Continuous OFF and causes the FieldFox to
make ONE measurement then hold for the next Single key press The
Hold annotation changes to an arrow > while the measurement
occurs
— Continuous OFF and Hold both put the FieldFox in Hold mode
— Continuous ON Makes continuous measurements This is the typical
setting when battery power is not critical
— You can also use Run Hold + to toggle between Single and Continuous
VVM Calibration
CalReady is accurate for most zeroed VVM measurements at frequencies
below about 6 GHz For the very highest accuracy especially above 6 GHz
then perform a QuickCal or Mechanical Cal Learn more in How to Perform a
Calibration on page 123
Press Zero OFF before calibrating (sets Zero to OFF)
Zeroing
Zeroing also known as Normalization or DataMemory simply Zeroes the
Magnitude and Phase display when Zero ON is pressed All subsequent
measurements are relative to the measurement that was made when Zero was
pressed
When an instrument state is saved with Zero ON the zeroing data is saved with
the state file similar to how a calibration is saved with a state file
— When performing a 1Port Cable Trimming operation a reference cable is
connected and measured Then Zero is pressed and subsequent cables are
measured and trimmed to match electrical length of the reference cable
QuickCal is only available on N991xA2xA3xA models 378 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
VVM (Vector Voltmeter) Mode Option 308
VVM Mode Settings
— For 2port measurements Zero is typically pressed when a THRU
connection is made in place of a DUT Learn more in 2Port Transmission
Measurements on page 381
Press Zero OFF before performing a QuickCal or Mechanical Cal (sets Zero to
OFF)
How to select Zeroing
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Zero Ref
— Open – select to display Phase 00 Deg when zeroed
— Short select to display Phase 1800 Deg when zeroed
—Then Zero ON
— Select Zero OFF to turn zeroing off
QuickCal is only available on N991xA2xA3xA modelsKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 379
VVM (Vector Voltmeter) Mode Option 308
1Port Cable Trimming Measurements
1Port Cable Trimming Measurements
A 1Port Cable Trimming measurement is used in a cable fabrication procedure
to validate proper electrical length
How to make a 1Port Cable Trimming Measurement
1 Press Mode then VVM then 1Port Cable Trimming
2 Press FreqDist then enter the frequency for the measurement
3 To improve measurement stability change the IF Bandwidth Output
Power and Averaging settings as needed
4 4Press Meas Setup 4 then Zero OFF
5 Optionally calibrate the FieldFox Learn more about VVM calibration in
VVM Calibration on page 377
6 To ensure that the calibration is adequate perform the following optional
Measurement Verification procedure
a Connect a short standard to PORT 1 where cables to be trimmed
will be connected
b Press Meas Setup 4 and press Zero
c Remove the short standard and connect the open standard
d Confirm that magnitude measurement is less than –01 dB and that
the phase value reads 180° degrees
7 Attach the shortest cable to the FieldFox PORT 1 connector This cable is
the reference cable Leave the end of the reference cable open
(unterminated)
8 Press Meas Setup 4 then press Zero
— The R receiver measures incident
signal (green line) out of the source
— The A receiver measures reflected
signal (red line) from the end of the
DUT (black line)
— In VVM mode the display ALWAYS
shows ratioed (AR) measurements
which is the electrical length of the
DUT
This measurement verification procedure is suitable for low frequency
measurements However for high frequency measurements a more
sophisticated procedure is required 380 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
VVM (Vector Voltmeter) Mode Option 308
1Port Cable Trimming Measurements
9 Remove the reference cable from the FieldFox PORT 1 connector
10Connect an unterminated longer cable to the FieldFox PORT 1 connector
11Observe the displayed phase difference between the reference cable and
the untrimmed cable
12Carefully trim the cable until the phase shift reads zero The attached
cable’s electrical length is now matched to the reference cable
13Repeat steps 10 through 12 for the remaining cables to be trimmed
The VVM phase reading shows a maximum of ±180° Therefore the
electrical length of the untrimmed cable MUST be within 180° of the
reference cable Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 381
VVM (Vector Voltmeter) Mode Option 308
2Port Transmission Measurements
2Port Transmission Measurements
A 2Port Transmission measurement is used for measuring electrical length
insertion loss gain or isolation of a DUT at a single CW frequency The
FieldFox signal source is transmitted out the port 1 connector through the
DUT and into the port 2 connector In the following image the gain of an
amplifier is being measured
Figure 203 2Port Transmission measurement of an amplifier
How to make a 2Port Transmission Measurement
1 Press Mode then VVM then 2Port Transmission
2 Press FreqDist and enter the measurement frequency
3 Press Meas Setup 4 then More then Output Power Select High for passive
devices Select Low for amplifiers
4 Calibrate the FieldFox using one of the methods described in VVM
Calibration on page 377 Before performing a QuickCal or Mechanical
Cal press Meas Setup 4 then Zero OFF
5 5Connect the DUT
Notes
— The magnitude value is the gain (positive value) or the loss (negative value)
of the DUT
— The phase value is the difference in phase (in degrees) between the DUT
input and output
QuickCal is only available on N991xA2xA3xA models 382 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
VVM (Vector Voltmeter) Mode Option 308
2Port Transmission Measurements
— To measure isolation of the amplifier reverse the connection to the amplifier
(PORT 1 to the amplifier output)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 383
VVM (Vector Voltmeter) Mode Option 308
AB and BA Measurements
AB and BA Measurements
These measurements allow you to use the FieldFox A and B receivers along
with an external source to make ratioed measurements
The image below shows a typical configuration for a BA magnitude and phase
measurement of a 2port DUT This DUT can be an antenna probe setup
Using network analyzer terms the image shows the A receiver as the reference
receiver which measures the signal that is applied to the DUT The B receiver is
the test port receiver which measures the DUT response
Figure 204 BA Transmission measurement with external source
Procedure
1 Connect the external source’s frequency reference output to the FieldFox
Freq Ref IN on the top panel If you are unable to use a common frequency
reference then increase the IFBW to ensure you are measuring the peak of
the correct signal After locating and tuning to the signal you may be able
to lower the IFBW to reduce noise
2 On the FieldFox select System 7 then System Configuration then
Frequency Ref then Freq Ref Source then Ext
3 Press Mode then VVM then BA or AB
4 The FieldFox internal source is NOT used so the output power setting is
not relevant
5 To calibrate replace the DUT with a THRU connection preferably by
connecting together the two Power Splitters (shown in green) For low
frequency measurements TEEs can be used
6 Press Meas Setup 4 then Zero
7 Connect the DUT and measure
These measurements require the Full 2port Sparameters option 384 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
VVM (Vector Voltmeter) Mode Option 308
AB and BA Measurements 385
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
21 ERTA (Extended Range Transmission Analysis) Mode
Option 209
ERTA (also known as FoxTrot) uses two FieldFox units to make longdistance
scalar transmission measurements One unit is the source and the other unit is
the Receiver
In this Chapter
Overview on page 386
Requirements and Limitations on page 387
Start Connection Wizard on page 388
Configure Measurement Settings on page 392
Select Measurement on page 392
Normalize on page 393
Source Tracking Offset and Offset Reversal on page 393
Improve Dynamic Range on page 394
Source Enable and Source Mode on page 394 386 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
ERTA (Extended Range Transmission Analysis) Mode Option 209
Overview
Overview
ERTA uses two FieldFox units to make longdistance scalar tracking
transmission measurements One unit is the source and the other unit is the
Receiver
Communication takes place between the two units with a LAN connection and
hardwired trigger signals Once the two units are synchronized the Receiver
unit becomes the master and measures the output of a DUT while the Source
unit responds as follower supplying signal at the DUT input The two units
possibly separated by hundreds of meters step together through the selected
frequency range making measurements such as long cable characterization
With a power splitter at the Source unit the SA Receiver can be used to
measure the reference signal to make a true BR ratio measurement Because
the reference trace is updated on every sweep there is no need for static trace
normalization Accuracy is further enhanced with input and output cable
corrections Furthermore the alignment process keeps the SA receivers
calibrated For information on alignments refer to the SA mode chapter’s
section Alignments on page 180Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 387
ERTA (Extended Range Transmission Analysis) Mode Option 209
Requirements and Limitations
Requirements and Limitations
Requirements
— Two FieldFox units with option 209 installed SA Mode is required for option
209
— Ethernet LAN cable(s) Either TWO cables that are used to connect both
units to the internet or ONE cable that is long enough to connect the two
FieldFox units This may require a crossover cable
— Two trigger cables that are long enough to connect the two FieldFox units
each with SMB (m) to SMA (f) connectors
— RF cabling to and from DUT
— Power Splitter (Optional) for enhanced BR ratio measurements
Limitations
The following SA features are removed in ERTA mode (Option 209)
— Channel Measurements Tune and Listen Interference Analysis Radio
Standards and Sweep Triggering
The following SA features are disabled during partnership synchronization
— Video BW SwpAcquisition Frequency Count RecordPlayback and certain
Amplitude Units
— The only keystrokes allowed on the Source unit are Send Text Message and
Exit
When you change network connections it may take up to 2 minutes for
the old address to be replaced by the new address If the FieldFox was
initially assigned an IP address by a DHCP server and then the FieldFox
LAN connection with a DHCP server is removed and is the FieldFox is
reconnected to a LAN segment with no DHCP server (such as a direct
connect to another FieldFox) the FieldFox may take up to two minutes to
selfassign an automatic private IP address During this connection time
the last recognized DHCP address is displayed on the FieldFox but is
invalid 388 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
ERTA (Extended Range Transmission Analysis) Mode Option 209
Start Connection Wizard
Start Connection Wizard
Use the FieldFox Connection Wizard to guide you through the following
physical setup
On the Receiver unit
—Press Mode then ERTA
—Then Meas Setup 4 then Connection Wizard then Start
STEP 1 Select [Start] when ready
—Press Start
— At any step press Exit to end the wizard
STEP 2 Connect Trigger and LAN cables
— LAN Connect a LAN cable to each unit The units can either both be
connected to the internet on the same network through a switch or router
or they can be connected directly to each other (a crossover cable may be
necessary)
— Trigger signals On each unit connect the RefTrig Out SMB (m) connector
on the FieldFox side panel to the RefTrig In SMA (f) connector on the other
FieldFox top panel
— RF connections
Preferred method (pictured above) Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 389
ERTA (Extended Range Transmission Analysis) Mode Option 209
Start Connection Wizard
— On the Source unit connect the Port 1 RF Output connector to the
input of a power splitter
— Connect one power splitter output to the Source unit Port 2 RF Input
— Connect the other power splitter output to the DUT input
— Connect the DUT output to the Port 2 RF Input of the Receiver unit
Simplified method (not shown)
— Omit the power splitter Connect the Source unit Port 1 RF Output
connector to the DUT input The measurement is a raw B receiver
Specs do NOT apply
STEP 3 Select LAN address of ERTA Partner
The Receiver unit is the master partner annotated with RCVR Master
The Source unit is the follower partner annotated with SRC Follower
On the Receiver unit
—Press ERTA Partner (not specified) The IP addresses of potential FieldFox
units are displayed Select the IP address of the Source unit If 1010101
appears then NO FieldFox units were found The LAN setting Obtain IP
Address using MUST be set to DCHP Learn more in LAN Settings on
page 535 Also be sure that Opt 209 has been installed correctly on the
Source unit
—Press Continue
STEP 4 Test Partnership
—Press Test Partnership If the Source unit is NOT already in ERTA mode it
will be started which may take a several seconds When successful LAN
OK and Trigger OK will appear on the screen
— If either the LAN or Trigger test fails then press Clear Test then Test
Partnership to retry the test
—Optional Press Send Text Message then enter a message to send to the
Receiver unit A LAN connection is necessary For quick communication
custom Keywords can be setup using the FieldFox labeler Learn how in
Edit Keywords on page 555
Any of the following will end the partnership
—Press EXIT Partnership
— Select Global or Mode Preset
— Change Modes
— Recalling a nonERTA State file Recalling an ERTA State file can
reestablish a partnership if the Source unit is still on the network at the
same location 390 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
ERTA (Extended Range Transmission Analysis) Mode Option 209
Start Connection Wizard
—Press Continue
STEP 5 Measure Jumper Cables
These steps can be used to characterize an Input and Output jumper cable that
may be connect the DUT to the FieldFox The loss of the characterized jumper
cables can then be removed from the DUT measurements The measurements
are stored to the internal Cables folder using an autogenerated *csv filename
— The Input cable is attached between the Sourcesplitter output and the
DUT input
— The Output cable is attached between the DUT output and the Receiver
unit
Figure 211 Input and Output jumper cables are measured on the Receiver unit
If your DUT input AND output is connected directly to the FieldFox or you
choose to ignore the loss of BOTH jumper cables then press Skip this step
Otherwise press Measure Jumper Cables
Do the following for both the Input and Output jumper cables
—Press Skip this step to skip the cable measurement
— Otherwise connect the Input Output jumper cable as shown below then
press Measure Input (or Output) Cable
For optimum flexibility use the Scale then More then Corrections menu to
measure save and recall cable characterizations These softkeys are
duplicated from the SA Field Strength AntennaCable characterization
Learn more in Field Strength Measurements on page 156Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 391
ERTA (Extended Range Transmission Analysis) Mode Option 209
Start Connection Wizard
—Press Remeasure or Continue
—Press Apply Corrections ON to remove the jumper cables from subsequent
DUT measurements
—Press Done to exit the Connection Wizard
— On the Receiver unit press LEAD ERTA Partnership The Source unit enters
ERTA mode as the follower 392 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
ERTA (Extended Range Transmission Analysis) Mode Option 209
Configure Measurement Settings
Configure Measurement Settings
On the Receiver unit select measurement settings such as Frequency range
Res Be Points and so forth Zeros pan frequency is allowed even though the
frequency is fixed and no stepping is required
Learn about these settings in SA Mode Settings on page 148
Select Measurement
The following traces are provided for your convenience They are all configured
as ClearWrite
Press Meas 1 then choose one or more of the following
Figure 212 Input power Output power and gain measurement traces
To change the trace numbers of these three measurements or to select a trace
state other than ClearWrite press Trace 6
Softkey Shown on screen Description
Input Power
R
2
w
r
R receiver Reference power
measured by the Source unit
before entering the DUT
Output Power
B
3
w
B
B receiver Power out of the
DUT measured at the
Receiver unit
Gain or Loss
BR
1
w
G
Gain or Insertion Loss The B
receiver data divided by the
R receiver data (BR)
This measurement can be
displayed accurately with or
without displaying the R or
B measurementsKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 393
ERTA (Extended Range Transmission Analysis) Mode Option 209
Configure Measurement Settings
Learn more about Trace Display States in Trace Display States (SA Mode) on
page 178
Normalize
Normalize can be used to quickly provide zeroing’ for any of the ERTA (B R or
G) traces On the sweep AFTER selecting Normalize Trace 1 is copied to
Trace4 It is then put into View state and subtracted from that input on
subsequent sweeps Any trace (1 2 or 3) which is set to process that same
input (B R or G) will therefore be processing normalized measurement data
This continues as long as the frequency span number of points and the trace
input (B R or G) is NOT changed If any of these settings change Normalize is
deactivated
How to Normalize the B trace
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Remote Source
—Then Normalize ON
Source Tracking Offset and Offset Reversal
Source offset tracking is used to offset the Source frequency from the Receiver
frequency by a fixed offset at every tune frequency This feature is used when
the DUT contains a frequency converter
How to set Tracking Offset and Offset Reversal
— On the Receiver unit press Meas Setup 4
—Then Remote Source
—Then Advanced
— Then choose one or both of the following
— Tracking Offset Enter an offset value
— OfsTrkReversal Determines whether Receiver Freq is added to or
subtracted from the Offset Freq
——OFF SourceFreq Offset + RecFreq Use to measure
Upconverters
——ON SourceFreq Offset RecFreq Use to measure
Downconverters The source sweeps in Reverse direction
The Offset Freq MUST be larger than the Receiver Stop Freq 394 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
ERTA (Extended Range Transmission Analysis) Mode Option 209
Configure Measurement Settings
Improve Dynamic Range
The following settings can be made to reduce measurement noise which
improves Dynamic Range
Increase source power as much as possible while maintaining a leveled source
How to set Source Power
—Press Meas Setup 4
—Then Remote Source
—Then Source Power
— Then either Max Power or Leveled Increase source power until the
unleveled warning appears Then decrease power until power is again
leveled
To further reduce measurement noise on the Receiver unit
— Reduce Attenuation to 5 dB then turn the Preamp ON Learn how in
Preamplifier Control (Opt 235) on page 155
— Decrease the Res BW Learn how in Resolution Bandwidth (Res BW) on
page 165
— Set Frequency Reference to GPS on both units This requires Option 307
(Builtin GPS) and two GPS antennae The GPS reference can be enabled
for several sweeps Then if you move to a location without an adequate GPS
signal Holdover Mode will occur Learn more about GPS as a frequency
reference in Frequency Reference Source on page 530
Source Enable and Source Mode
When Source Enable [OFF] is selected or when Source Mode [CW or
CoupledCW] is selected then synchronization ends and the two partner units
revert to general SA (nontracking) sweeps However the units are still in
partnership and other settings continue to be synchronized such as
Frequencies ResBw and Points 395
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
22 AMFM Metrics (SA Only and Option 355)
In this Chapter
Using AMFM Metrics
Using FieldFox’s analog demodulation users maintaining AMFM radio
systems can demodulate and characterize AM and FM signals They can tune
to the signal and listen to the audio tones using FieldFox’s builtin speakers or
a headphone They can also display the RF spectrum the demodulated
waveform and AMFM metrics such as carrier power modulation rate and
SINAD
AMFM Metrics enables you to make the following measurements
And can be enableddisabled simultaneously with Tune and Listen
Overview of Measurement Types
If you are familiar with the AMFM measurements and terms skip to How to
Set Up AMFM Metrics on page 398
The FieldFox assumes you have manually set up the CF span and
amplitude settings Refer to Chapter 9 SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mode
Using AMFM Metrics on page 395
SINAD and THD Calculations on page 402
Interpreting AMFM Metrics Error Messages on page 405
AM Measurements — AM Measurements Carrier power AM rate AM modulation
index
FM Measurements — FM deviation (peak and RMS) Modulation Rate Carrier power
Demodulated voltage SINAD THD (total harmonic distortion) 396 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
AMFM Metrics (SA Only and Option 355)
Using AMFM Metrics
Table 221 Measurement Details
Measurement details
Modulation Rate The modulation rate quantifies how fast the modulation is and equates to the
frequency of the baseband signal that modulates the carrier
SINAD (Signal to Noise
and Distortion Ratio)
Another commonly used distortion measure is signal to noise and distortion
ratio (SINAD) SINAD in nature is the reciprocal of the modulation distortion
provided by the distortiontotal Vrms but the SINAD is usually expressed in
a logarithmic term as follows
Where
S Signal Power
D
N Noise
SINAD [(S + D + N) (D + N)] OR
Refer to SINAD and THD Calculations on page 402
THD (Total Harmonic
Distortion)
The total harmonic distortion (THD) measurement further isolates the total
harmonic distortion component from the noise component in the total
unwanted signal It helps the user to troubleshoot the root causes of
modulation distortion
S Signal Power
D
N Noise
THD [(D + N) (S + D + N)]
RF spectrum of the
modulated signal
This is the most traditional spectrum analyzer measurement viewing the
modulated carrier signal power in frequency domain Prior to being
modulated the signal power of a sinusoidal carrier concentrates at the carrier
frequency By contrast modulation causes sidebands indicating the power
redistribution over frequencies The pattern of the sidebands depends upon
the modulation format
Demod waveform This measurement retrieves the baseband signal from the modulated signal
via the demodulation process and displays the baseband signal in a pattern of
modulation depthdeviation versus time Since the modulation
depthdeviation is directly proportional to the instantaneous amplitude of the
baseband signal the measurement result helps to intuitively evaluate the
quality of the baseband signal
AM modulation depth AM modulation depth (PeaktoPeak 2)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 397
AMFM Metrics (SA Only and Option 355)
Using AMFM Metrics
Modulation Metrics
FM deviation The FM deviation reflects the amount of the frequency modulation to which
the baseband signal modulates the carrier signal The quantity being
measured is the peak frequency deviation that is the maximum frequency
excursion from the carrier frequency
Carrier power This measures the power of the carrier signal without the modulation Ideally
power for a sinusoidal carrier signal is concentrated around its carrier
frequency
Table 221 Measurement Details 398 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
AMFM Metrics (SA Only and Option 355)
Using AMFM Metrics
How to Set Up AMFM Metrics
— Connect a test tone to the FieldFox SA Port 2 (Port 2)
—Press Measure
—Then Analog Demod Tune & Listen
— Then choose one of the following
— AM Metrics or
— FM Metrics
Left display Frequency Spectrum (Power vs Frequency)
Right display Demodulated waveform vs time where Demod SwpT sets
the width of the demod window
—Then FreqDist > Center to set the carrier frequency
—Set Freq Span so that all sidebands above 60 dB are displayed in the left
window
— Optionally adjust the Res BW to better identify side bands
Metrics are displayed in the AMFM Modulation Metrics table on the
FieldFox For AM and FM Metrics examples refer to Figure 221 through
Figure 228 on page 407
Selecting FM Wide vs FM Narrow does not effect the displayed waveforms
or metrics But if you are using the Audio Demod feature and listening to the
demodulated waveform then select the appropriate FM type because the
tones do differ based on the FM type selected Refer to Table 221 on
page 396Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 399
AMFM Metrics (SA Only and Option 355)
Using AMFM Metrics
Figure 221 AM Metrics Example 1 400 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
AMFM Metrics (SA Only and Option 355)
Using AMFM Metrics
Figure 222 AM Metrics Example 2Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 401
AMFM Metrics (SA Only and Option 355)
Using AMFM Metrics
Figure 223 FM Metrics Wide band Example 402 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
AMFM Metrics (SA Only and Option 355)
SINAD and THD Calculations
SINAD and THD Calculations
— FieldFox converts the audio waveform to the audio frequency spectrum
using an FFT (ie The FFT result is not displayed) Refer to Figure 224 on
page 402
— The FFT waveform is used to calculate SINAD and THD distortion metrics
— The fundamental signal harmonics and noise from 0 Hz to 24 kHz are
applied to the formulas Refer to Figure 225 on page 403
— For more on calculations refer to Overview of Measurement Types on
page 395
— See also httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59914913ENpdf
Figure 224 Audio Waveform with FFT CalculationsKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 403
AMFM Metrics (SA Only and Option 355)
SINAD and THD Calculations
Figure 225 SINAD and THD Results Example 1 404 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
AMFM Metrics (SA Only and Option 355)
SINAD and THD Calculations
Figure 226 SINAD and THD Results Example 2Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 405
AMFM Metrics (SA Only and Option 355)
Interpreting AMFM Metrics Error Messages
Interpreting AMFM Metrics Error Messages
This section discusses possible AMFM Metrics error messages and how to
correct them
Test Tone Not Found
A Test Tone Not Found message is displayed under the following
circumstances
— FieldFox frequency span is too wide
— No side lobes are displayed in the results
Refer to the examples in Test Tone Not Found Example on page 406 and
Test Tone Not Found Corrected Example on page 407 406 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
AMFM Metrics (SA Only and Option 355)
Interpreting AMFM Metrics Error Messages
Test Tone Not Found Example
The following response had the following settings
— Source CF 140 MHz
— FM Deviation 18 kHz
— Modulation Rate 1 kHz
Reasons for error
— Frequency span of 10 MHz is too wide
— No side lobes displayed so test tone not found
Figure 227 Test Tone Not Found ExampleKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 407
AMFM Metrics (SA Only and Option 355)
Interpreting AMFM Metrics Error Messages
Test Tone Not Found Corrected Example
The following response was corrected with these setting changes
— Frequency set to narrower frequency span of 50 kHz
— Ideally the frequency span should show the modulation envelope down to –
60 dB below the RF power level
Response corrected because
— Narrowing the frequency span enables the modulation envelope’s side
lobes to be identified
— FM algorithm identifies the side lobes
— The algorithm matches the modulation envelope to the mathematically
calculated FM modulation or distortion patterns
Figure 228 Test Tone Not Found Corrected Example 408 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
AMFM Metrics (SA Only and Option 355)
Interpreting AMFM Metrics Error Messages 409
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
23 Channel Scanner (Option 312)
In this Chapter
Using Channel Scanners
Channel Scanner enables you to do the following
Using Channel Scanners on page 409
How to Set Up Channel Scanner on page 410
— Field Strength Measurements on page 424
— Using the AntennaCable Editor on page 430
Measure and display channel power vs frequency for up to 20 channels simultaneously
Six Display Types
— Bar graph vertical display orientation
— Bar graph horizontal display
orientation
— Channel Power
—Strip Chart
— Strip Chart and Overlay
—Scan & Listen
Color Coded Display Types
— Specify high and low power with
color bars
Flexible Data Sorting
— Sort results displayed by power or
frequency low to high or high to low
Data Logging Record GPS stamped data measurements
— Define measurement interval by time
or distance
— Show results in spectrogram
— Replay files on Google Maps or
Google Earth 410 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
Figure 231 Display Example Measure 5 Channels Spaced 2 MHz Apart
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
This section briefly reviews the steps in setting up a channel scan
measurement If you are not familiar with this process or would like more
information refer to How to Define a Channel and Use Channel Scanner
1 Define some channels (refer to How to Define a Channel and Use Channel
Scanner)
a Select a Scan Mode—choose
— Range Specify total channels channel spacing or
— Custom List Specify a list of channels from an editor
b Then modify channels based on the selected scan mode
2 Select Display Type—choose
— Bar ChartV or
— Bar ChartH or
— Channel Pow or
— Strip Chart or
— Chart Overlay or
— Scan&Listen
3 Modify scale and specify color bar coding—Modify the scale and assign
colors to low and high power channels (bars)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 411
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
Press ScaleAmptd
Then one of the following
— Red Limit to set the power level and color scale for high power
channels
— Blue Limit to set the power level and color scale for low power
channels
— Others Scale Ref Level RF Atten etcetera as desired
4 Enable Data Logging and set the Record Settings
— Record or
— Play or
— View
— To set the Record Settings—choose
— Meas Interval
— Interval Time
— Time Interval
— Distance Interval and or
— Auto Save (default is On)
5 Then select the User Folder and save to *KML or *CSV file SaveRecall
RecPlayback
— Then User Folder Def System
— Def – Sets the default User Folder path
——List files (*csv and *kml) are saverecalled to
CurrentDevice＼ChannelScanner＼ChannelS
canner＼RecordPlayback＼
——RecordPlay files are saverecalled to
CurrentDevice＼ChannelScanner＼ChannelS
canner＼RecordPlayback＼

Or
— System – Sets the User Folder to the user defined system
folder pathname
——List files are save tofrom
CurrentDevice＼＼
——RecordPlay files are saverecalled to
CurrentDevice＼＼
Refer to Chapter 28 File Management 412 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
— Then File Type
— KML (default) or
— CSV
— Then Save Log File
6 Export KML file into 3rd party mapping software (ie Google or Google
Earth)
How to Define a Channel and Use Channel Scanner
Channel definitions consist of the following
— Each channel is defined by CF and Integration BW
— Frequency span is set automatically to 15 x Integration BW
— Power is measured over the Integration BW
Using Channel Scanner refer to
— Step 1A Scan Mode Range Channel Defined on page 413 or
— Step 1B Scan Mode Custom List Channel Defined on page 414
Then
— Step 2 Select Display Type on page 415
— Step 3 Modify Scale and the Display Color Bar Settings on page 419
— Step 4 Enable Data Logging and Record Results on page 420
— Step 5 Save the Log Results on page 422
— Step 6 Import and Play back KML Files into 3rd Party Software (Example
Google Earth with Animation Tool) on page 422Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 413
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
Figure 232 Channel Definition
Step 1A Scan Mode Range Channel Defined
1 Define some channels Press Measure > Scan Mode > Range
2 Press Edit Range and modify table items
— Total Channels
— Search Count
— Start Channel CF
— CF Step Size 414 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
Figure 233 Range Table Settings
3 Press Done
Step 1B Scan Mode Custom List Channel Defined
1 Define some channels Press Measure > Scan Mode > Custom List
2 Press Edit Custom List and modify table items
— Add table rows
— Then for each row
— Edit Center Frequency (CF)
— Edit Integration BW (IBW)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 415
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
Figure 234 Custom List Table Settings
3 Press Done
4 Press Save Recall List > Save List to save a custom list See also How to
use the FieldFox labeler on page 546
Step 2 Select Display Type
Select one of the following display orientations
— Select Display Type—choose
— Bar ChartV or
— Bar ChartH or
— Channel Pow or
— Strip Chart or
— Chart Overlay or
— Scan&Listen
Press Recall List to bring back a previously stored custom list 416 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
Figure 235 Bar Chart Vertical Display Type
Figure 236 Bar Chart Horizontal Display TypeKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 417
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
Figure 237 Channel Power Display Type
Figure 238 Strip Chart Display Type 418 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
Figure 239 Strip Chart Overlay Display Type
Figure 2310 Scan & Listen Display TypeKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 419
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
Step 3 Modify Scale and the Display Color Bar Settings
To assign colors to low and high power values
1 Press ScaleAmptd > Red Limit to set high power values and to set the
color
2 Press Blue Limit to set low power values and to set the color
3 And then press System > Display > Display Colors to set Indoor Outdoor
or other display colors See also Chapter 23 Channel Scanner (Option
312) on page 409
Figure 2311 Outdoor Display Colors 420 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
Figure 2312 Indoor Display Colors
Step 4 Enable Data Logging and Record Results
Data logging records your data with a timestamp and GPS stamp (refer to
GNSS (GPS+) and GPS on page 526) GPS must be enabled for the log
results to include a GPS stamp
Features
— Log files contain measured channel results including timestamps andor
distance stamps
— Timestamps are included in log files with or without GPS
— GPS must be enabled for log results to include distance stamps
—Data results can be logged
— Data results can be saved to a *CSV or *KML file Refer to Step 5 Save
the Log Results on page 422
— User specifies how often results are stored
— Time Store results every n seconds
— Distance Store results every n meters GPS must be enabled to
store results by distance
Procedure
1 Press Measure > Data Logging > Record Settings > Meas Interval ON
(default)
2 Press Interval Type > Time or Distance thenKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 421
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
— Time Interval 1 sec to 3000 seconds or
— Distance Interval from 1m to 10 km
— When done press Back
3 Press Save Recall RecPlayback > File Type CSV or KLM
4 To begin recording Press Record
If Auto Save is On (default) Measurements are stored automatically
accorded to the specified time or distance interval values Refer to step 5
5 Optional Auto Save ON (default)—When Auto Save is on during
recording the FieldFox stores intermediate results in a temporary file If
the power fails during recording you can retrieve the results Select Recall
Log File Select the temporary file name
Press Record Settings > Auto Save On Off
6 When done press Stop or Esc The files save dialog is displayed Edit the
file name where the file results will be stored
7 Press Done
8 Press Back
Playing a Recorded Log and Viewing the Spectrogram
To play the log results
1 Press Data Logging > Play
2 Then choose
— Optional Use the RPG (fine adjust) or the arrow keys (coarse adjust)
to change the color bar
— Position to change the position along the time record’s
results Recording must be Paused to use Position
— Red Limit to change the color bar
— Blue Limit to change the color bar
3 Press Stop or Esc to exit the log recording
To pause the log play
1 Optional Press Pause Resume to pause or resume the log recording
2 Then choose
— Optional Use the RPG (fine adjust) or the arrow keys (coarse adjust)
to change the color bar
— Position to change the position along the time record’s
results
— Red Limit to change the color bar 422 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
— Blue Limit to change the color bar
3 Press Stop or Esc to stop the log recording
To View the spectrogram of recorded results
1 Press View
2 Then choose
— Zoom to zoom in on spectrogram time record results
— Red Limit to change the color bar
— Blue Limit to change the color bar
3 Press Exit or Esc to exit view
Step 5 Save the Log Results
Two file types are supported for save or recall log results
—KML file format
— Files include bar color
— Files stored in this format can be imported into 3rd party applications
like Google Earth or Google Maps
— CSV file format Files stored into this format can be imported into
spreadsheet applications
1 Press Save Recall RecPlayback > File Type CSV or KLM > Back
2 To begin recording Press Record
Measurements are stored automatically according to the specified time or
distance interval values
3 When done press Stop The files save dialog is displayed Edit the file
name where the file results will be stored
4 Press Done
5 Optional Auto Save ON (default)—When Auto Save is on during
recording the FieldFox stores intermediate results in a temporary file If
the power fails during recording you can retrieve the results Select Recall
Log File Select the temporary file name
Press Record Settings > Auto Save On Off
Step 6 Import and Play back KML Files into 3rd Party Software
(Example Google Earth with Animation Tool)
Features
Use the Playback Slider to replay measurement results See also Google Maps
and or Google Earth’s helpKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 423
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
— Open the FieldFox *KML file in Google Earth Time Slider appears in upper
left of the map
— Manual Mode – Move the time slider cursor to see colorcoded icons
popup according to the timestamp
— Loop mode has a FastSlow Replay Option
— Click on each color coded balloon to see the table of measurement results
for that location
Figure 2313 Importing a KML File Into Google Earth 424 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
Field Strength Measurements
To measure the strength of any signal transmitted through the air an antenna
must be connected to the FieldFox The Field Strength feature allows you to
enter the frequency response of the receiving antenna (the Antenna Factor)
and associated cabling and then have amplitude corrections automatically
compensate the displayed trace for that response
Figure 2314 Overview of Field Strength for Channel Scanner (See also Figure 2315 on
page 425)
FieldFox Field Strength Channel Scanner
Refer to Figure 2315 on page 425Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 425
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
Figure 2315 Editing Antenna Units (See also Figure 2314 on page 424)

426 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
Figure 2316 Yellow Trace with Cable and Antenna Corrections
Field Strength Measurements
Yellow Trace Corrected trace with antenna factor This correction includes
the sum of the antenna correction and the cable correction (These corrections
are linearly interpolated) (Antenna ON Apply Corr ON) Refer to Figure
2316 on page 426
For information refer to Trace Display States (SA Mode) on page 178
— Learn how to set YAxis Units on How to Set Yaxis Units on page 154
— Use a Band Power marker to measure total power over a range of
frequencies Learn how in BandInterval Power Marker on page 190
How to select and edit corrections for Field Strength measurements
The Antenna and Cable correction data survives a Mode Preset and Preset
All Correction ONOFF states survive a Mode Preset but NOT a Preset
—Press ScaleAmptd
—Then More
—Then Corrections
— Then choose from the following
—Apply Corrections ON OFF Turn ON and OFF correction for all settings
—RcvrSide Antenna Off On EditRecall an Antenna file to be used on
the receiver side
—RcvrSide Cable Off On EditRecall a Cable file to be used on the
Receiver side







Yellow trace
Cable correction
which is the sum
of the antenna
correction and
the cable
correction (These
corrections are
linearly
interpolated)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 427
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
— View Corrections > View Corrections ON OFF Turn ON and OFF
Yellow Trace AntennaCable corrections This is a composite of all
cableantenna corrections that are currently applied Available as a
useful visual aid the zero dB level (no net correction) is mapped to
appear at the 50 dBm onscreen level
The following menu appears when any of the above Antenna or Cable softkeys
are pressed
— AntennaCable ON OFF Turn correction ON or OFF for this AntennaCable
— Edit AntennaCable Edit an AntennaCable Correction table See Using the
AntennaCable Editor (below) for more information
— New Create a new AntennaCable See Using the AntennaCable Editor
(below) for more information
— Save AntennaCable Save the modified AntennaCable to a file on the
specified Storage Device
— Recall AntennaCable Read an existing AntennaCable file from the
specified Storage Device
— Storage Device Choose from Internal USB SD Learn more about these
selections in Set File Type and Select Device on page 549
When finished press Back to return to the previous menu
Field Strength Correction Examples
Refer to Figure 2317 on page 428 and Figure 2318 on page 429 428 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
Figure 2317 Apply Corrections ONKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 429
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
Figure 2318 Apply Corrections OFF 430 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
Using the AntennaCable Editor
The Antenna Editor and the Cable Editor menus are very similar Both tables
include header information and a FrequencyValue table
Figure 2319 FieldFox Antenna Editor
How to use the AntennaCable Editor
—Press New then Yes to clear all data from the existing Antenna or Cable
table and reset header information to default settings
—Then Edit Antenna or Edit Cable to open the Antenna Cable Editor
— Then use the arrows to select a field
— To edit header information press Edit then modify the selected field
using the FieldFox labeler
——Description Enter a description for the antenna or cable
correction table This is NOT the filename used to save the file
——Antenna Unit (Rcvrside Antennas only) Units in which the
measurement will be displayed Select NONE (default setting)
to select from standard Channel Scanner Units on the Scale
menu Learn how in Scale and Units on page 153
——Choose from dB μVm (dB micro Volts per meter) dB μAm
(dB micro Amps per meter) dBG (gauss) dBpT (tesla)
——Freq Interpolation Set to LINear and can NOT be edited
— To edit FrequencyValue pairs enter numbers using the numeric
keypad and a frequency suffix when necessaryKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 431
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
——For both Cable and Antenna correction Positive numbers
indicate loss (we need ADD something positive to compensate
for it) and Negative is indicative of some existing gain
——Antenna Factor describes the dB value needed to accurately
display a farfield signal in terms that are in the units listed
below When the antenna has low gain or low efficiency the
dB value to be added is larger
—When one FreqValue pair is entered that correction value is applied
to the entire displayed frequency span
—When two or more FreqValue pairs are entered the data points
between the lowest and highest frequencies are corrected Linear
interpolation is applied between frequencies when necessary
— Optionally choose from the following
—Previous Next Page Quickly scrolls through pages of FreqValue
data
— Add Row Add a blank FreqValue pair to the table
—DeleteClear then
——Delete Row Remove the selected FreqValue pair from the
table
——Clear All then Yes Remove all FreqValue pairs from the table
and resets header information to default settings
When the table edits are complete
—Press Done to close the AntennaCable Editor
—Press Save Antenna or Save Cable to save your changes to the specified
Storage Device Enter a filename using the FieldFox labeler (learn more in
How to use the FieldFox labeler on page 546) Learn more about
Antenna and Cable files below
—Press Recall Antenna or Recall Cable to load an Antenna or Cable file from
the specified Storage Device
— Storage Device Changes the device used to save or recall files Choose
from Internal (default setting) USB (must be connected) or SD card This is
a different setting from the SaveRecall Storage Device setting
About Antenna and Cable files
— Cable files are saved and recalled from the Cables folder
— Antenna files are saved and recalled from the Antenna folder
—To DELETE Cable or Antenna files use the Manage Files feature Learn more
in Manage Files on page 552
— If the folder does not already exist on a USB or SD card it is created
automatically before storing the file 432 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Channel Scanner (Option 312)
How to Set Up Channel Scanner
— All Channel Scanner mode Antenna and Cable files are saved and recalled
as *csv files which allows them to also be read by spreadsheet programs
— The FieldFox can also read *ANT (Antenna) files that were created from
older Keysight Spectrum Analyzers
— Channel Scanner Mode cable or antenna (*csv or *ANT) files can NOT be
edited in Data Link software
How to create a Cable file from an S21 (NA mode) or an Insertion Loss
(CAT mode) measurement
1 Measure the S21 or Insertion Loss of a cable In NA mode select either
LogMag Linear or VSWR formats
2 Use Manage Folders to change the active folder to CABLES Learn how in
Manage Folders on page 554
3 While in NA mode save the measurement as a *csv file Learn how in How
to Save a File on page 544
4 In Channel Scanner mode select Corrections then recall the *csv file for
correction 433
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
24 Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
IMPORTANT Noise Figure mode uses DC variable voltage source (VVS) –
(Option 309) during the measurements The voltage might be as high as
28V during the measurement During the noise figure measurement
always make sure there are no voltage sensitive devices connected to the
DC SMB output port When you exit the Noise Figure mode the VVS
voltage is reset to 1V to avoid potentially damaging your devices Refer to
Variable Voltage Source (Opt 309) on page 532
25When you initially change the FieldFox mode to Noise Figure the
FieldFox displays the following message for ten seconds
Ensure your Noise Source is connected to the VVS DC Output
It (VVS) will be driven up to +28V during the measurement
Noise figure requires these options
— Spectrum analyzer mode (Option 233—Combination Analyzers Only)
— Preamplifier (Option 235)
— DC variable voltage source (Option 309)
— Noise source (Refer to
httpsliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59909783ENpdf)
Not required but recommended for improved accuracy
— External preamplifier (U7227ACF and U7228ACF) Refer to
wwwkeysightcomfindusbpreamp
Noise figure mode sets the sweep to Continuous OFF to allow time for
connecting a noise source before beginning any measurements 434 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
Figure 251 Example of Jitter Uncertainty (21 points)—with Uncertainty Bars Learn more
in How to use AutoIntegration on page 474
Figure 252 Example of Jitter Uncertainty (21 points)—with Uncertainty Bars Disabled
Learn more in How to use AutoIntegration on page 474 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 435
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
In this Chapter
See Also
Using Noise Figure on page 436
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement on page 440
— Example Typical Noise Figure Measurement Procedure
on page 440
— Overview of Softkey Menus on page 441
— How to Use DUT Measurement Setups on page 448
— Single Continuous Restart on page 460
— Points on page 460
— Alignments on page 461
— Calculating Noise Figure Measurement Uncertainty on
page 462
— Using ENR Tables on page 467
— About ENR (*enr) Preamplifier (*amp) and DUT (*dut)
Files on page 468
— Using Markers (Noise Figure) on page 470
Calibration Wizard on page 471
How to use AutoIntegration on page 474
Other Features Available on page 480
Troubleshooting on page 481
All about Markers on page 484
All about Limit Lines on page 499
All about Trace Math on page 504
All about Scale Settings on page 506
Chapter 25 Data Analysis Features
Chapter 28 File Management 436 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
Using Noise Figure
Using Noise Figure
Noise Figure enables you to do the following
Select Noise Figure Mode before making any setting in this chapter
How to select Noise Figure Mode
—Press Mode_
—Then More
—Then Noise Figure
The FieldFox uses the YFactor technique to accurately verify and characterize the noise figure
of devices Option 356 has these features
Five Measurement Types
—Noise Figure
— Noise Factor
—Gain
— Noise Temperature
—YFactor
Four Measurement Setup Types
— Noise Source
—DUT
—Integration
—Uncertainty
Four Preconfigured DUT Measurement Types
—Amplifier
—Downconverter
— Upconverter
— MultiStage Converter
Uncertainty Contribution Values can be Customized for Your Device
— Jitter uncertainty
— ENR uncertainty
— Uncertainty bars
— Mismatch uncertainty
— User calibration uncertainty Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 437
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
Using Noise Figure
Figure 253 Display Annotation—Overview
1 Variable Voltage Source
(VVS) Status (appears when
VVS is on Refer to Variable
Voltage Source (Opt 309) on
page 532
2 Calibration Status
3 Excess Noise Ratio (ENR)
Status
4 Frequency Context
5 DUT Type
6 Excess Noise Ratio (ENR)
Mode
7 Sweep point caret (shows
last point measured)
1 Variable Voltage Source (VVS)
Status line (appears when the
VVS status line is turned on in the
system menu) Refer to Variable
Voltage Source (Opt 309) on
page 532

2 Uncertainty status annotation
(displayed when the uncertainty
bars are enabled)

3 Questionable Amplitude
annotation (displayed when the
Amplitude Alignment is stale)
4 External Reference annotation
(displayed when external
reference is selected)
5 Warning message annotation
Used to display the following
warnings
–Invalid frequency settings
–VVS trip
–ADC Over Range
–Ext Ref unlock 438 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
Using Noise Figure
Figure 254 Dual Window Display Annotation
Figure 255 Calibration Annotation
1 In the dualwindow
layout nontracespecific
annotations are moved from
the left of the traces to the
bottom of the traces
1 No Cal No calibration
applied
2 Rcvr Cal Only receiver
calibration applied
3 ~User Cal Receiver Cal +
User Cal applied but User
Cal is interpolated (the
calibration frequency points
do not match up with sweep
frequency points)
4 User Cal Receiver cal +
User Cal applied and User
Cal is not interpolated (the
calibration frequency points
match up with sweep
frequency points)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 439
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
Using Noise Figure
Figure 256 ENR Status and Mode Annotation
Figure 257 Uncertainty Annotation
ENR Status annotation
1 ~ENR Using ENR table
but it’s extrapolated (the
sweep frequency range goes
beyond the table frequency
range)
2 ENR Using ENR table
and it’s not extrapolated (the
sweep frequency range is
within the table frequency
range) or using spot ENR
ENR Mode annotation
3 Table (346C) ENR table
is selected (the mode
number is pulled from the
current ENR table)
4 Spot (15000 dB) Spot
ENR table is selected (the
value is the current spot
ENR)
Uncertainty Status annotation
(Only displayed when the
Uncertainty bars have been
enabled)
1 Uncertainty Bars are disabled

2 Unc Uncertainty bars are
enabled and uncertainty values
are questionable (not all
uncertainty contributions are
turned on or one or more of the
contributions was calculated to
be 000 based on the ENR DUT
and Preamp uncertainty values)
If you see that your uncertainty
values are questionable make
sure all contributions are turned
on (if you’re not using a
preamplifier and User
Calibration (User Cal) you do
not have to turn on the User Cal
contribution) and you have
entered uncertainty values for
your noise source DUT and
preamplifier if applicable

3 Unc Uncertainty bars are on
and uncertainty values are valid 440 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
The Option 356 Noise Figure mode uses the Yfactor method to calculate the
noise figure
This section contains the following
— Example Typical Noise Figure Measurement Procedure on page 440
— Overview of Softkey Menus on page 441
— How to Use DUT Measurement Setups on page 448
— Single Continuous Restart on page 460
— Points on page 460
— Resolution Bandwidth (Res BW) on page 461
— Alignments on page 461
— Calculating Noise Figure Measurement Uncertainty on page 462
— Using ENR Tables on page 467
— Using Markers (Noise Figure) on page 470
Example Typical Noise Figure Measurement Procedure
This section briefly reviews the steps in setting up a noise figure measurement
If you are not familiar with this process or would like more information refer to
Overview of Softkey Menus on page 441 and How to Use DUT
Measurement Setups on page 448
1 Set up a Noise Source ENR Table
(Meas Setup > Noise Source > ENR Table EditSaveRecall)
2 Set the resolution bandwidth BW > Res BW
3 Set the frequency range FreqDist >
— Start
— Stop
— Center and
— Span
4 Set the number of points Sweep > Points (minimum 3 points maximum
1001 points default 21)
5 Use Meas Setup > Integration Setup Integration (See also How to use
AutoIntegration on page 474)
— Max TimePt (Available when Mode Auto) or
— TimePt (available when Mode Fixed)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 441
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
6 Perform a Receiver Calibration (Cal > Run Receiver Cal and follow
prompts)
7 Enter DUT setup type Meas Setup > DUT > Type
— Amplifier (default)
— Downconverter
— Upconverter or
— MultiStage Converter
8 Run a User Calibration (ie If you are using an external preamp)
(Cal >Run User Cal and follow prompts)
9 Use Measure to select the type of noise figure measurement
— Noise Figure
— Noise Factor
— Gain
— Noise Temperature or
— YFactor
10Use Meas Setup > Uncertainty > Uncert Contributions to EnableDisable
Uncertainty Contributions
— Jitter Uncert OFF ON
— ENR Uncert OFF ON
— Mismatch Uncert OFF ON
— User Cal Uncert OFF ON (applies the current User Cal uncertainty to
the current measurement’s uncertainty calculations) and
— Then Back > Uncert Bars to ON
Overview of Softkey Menus
This sections describes the Noise Figure’s Measure Measure Setup softkeys
and related submenu softkeys
1 Define a measurement type
a Select a Measure—choose
— Noise Figure Specify Noise Figure (default) or
— Noise Factor Specify a Noise Factor or
Noise Figure has asymmetrical uncertainty (ie log measurement) Noise
Factor and Noise Temperature have symmetrical uncertainty (ie linear
measurement) Uncertainty is not displayed for Gain and YFactor 442 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
— Gain Specify Gain or
— Noise Temperature Specify Noise Temperature or
— YFactor Specify YFactor
26 Then modify the settings based on the selected noise figure type
2 Select Measure Setup—choose
— Noise Source or DUT or on page 444 Integration or on
page 445 or Uncertainty on page 445
Opens a menu of softkeys to define the Noise Figure’s ENR Mode
Spot or Table and uncertainty values
Then choose
— ENR Mode Spot Table You can enter ENR data for the
noise source you are using as a table of values or as a
single spot value The values held in the table can be used
for measurements at a range of frequencies as well as at a
fixed frequency
The single spot value is used either for measurements at a
single frequency or for measurements across a range of
frequencies that is narrow enough such that the ENR value
does not change significantly across that range (Default is
Table)
— ENR Spot Values Opens a menu to enter a spot value
either for measurements at a single frequency or for
measurements across a range of frequencies that is narrow
enough such that the ENR value does not change
significantly across that range (Inactive with ENR Mode set
to Table)
Then choose
——ENR sets the ENR spot value in dB (default is
15 dB)
——ENR Uncert sets the ENR spot uncertainty value
in dB (default is 0000 dB)
——On | Γ| sets the On value (hot) of the ENR spot
value’s 50Ω match Γ (0000 to 1000)
——Off | Γ| sets the Off value (cold) of the ENR spot
value’s 50Ω match Γ (0000 to 1000)
——ENR Uncert Cov [2σ] Opens a menu to set the
value of the ENR uncertainty coverage
Then choose 1σ 2σ (default) or 3σ Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 443
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
——More opens additional ENR Spot Value softkey
menu choices
——Γ Spec Style [95th ile] Opens a menu of
softkeys to set the Γ specification style
Then choose Maximum 95th ile (default) 80th
ile Median Mean or Fixed
——Γ Distribution [Rayleigh] Opens a menu of
softkeys to set the type of Γ distribution
Then select Rayleigh (default) Fixed or Uniform
in Circle
— ENR Table EditSaveRecall Opens the ENR table menu to
edit save or recall noise source values (Not active with
ENR Mode set to Spot)
Then choose
——Edit ENR Table Opens the currently selected
table of noise source values (generic default
noise source values are populated for quick
check) Enter your noise source’s values for more
accurate measurements
——New ENR Table opens a new ENR table for
entering and saving additional noise source
values
——Save ENR Table Opens a menu of softkeys to
enable you to enter a unique noise source
filename
——Recall ENR Table Opens a menu of file recall
softkeys and displays a list of stored noise source
files
——Storage Device [Internal] Opens a menu of
softkeys to set the storage location for your files
Then choose Internal (default) SD Card or USB
——Back to return to previous menu
IMPORTANT Save your noise source table with a unique filename to avoid
loss of table data All noise figure files are saved with *enr type suffixes
The FieldFox displays Replace existing file because the displayed default filename
is the one last saved Enter a unique filename to avoid loss of table data (ie all noise figure files
are saved with *enr type suffixes) 444 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
— T Cold Default When making measurements at different
ambient temperatures you can set the Tcold value in
Kelvin (K) manually (User) When set to Default the Tcold
value is set to the 2965 K (Default Default)
— Back to return to previous menu
— DUT or
Opens a menu of softkeys to define your DUT Type (Amplifier
Downconverter Upconverter or MultiStage Converter) frequency
context and loss compensation Refer to How to Use DUT
Measurement Setups on page 448Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 445
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
— Integration or
Opens a menu of softkeys to define the Integration’s Mode Auto or
Fixed and Jitter values
Then choose
— Mode Auto Fixed Select Auto (default) to let the FieldFox
select the optimum coupled instrument settings Changes
can be made to the Jitter Goal and Max TimePt values
When integration Mode is set to Fixed the TimePt
softkey is active and can be modified
— JItter Goal Sets the maximum peaktopeak jitter value
Values greater than this value triggers the Jitter Warning
(ie if Jitter Warning ON) (Only active when
Mode Auto) (Default is 05 dB)
— Max TimePt Sets the maximum amount of time the jitter
is measured at a given point to attempt to reach the Jitter
Goal value (ie the measurement time per point is
automatically adjusted to the minimum time required but
will never exceed the displayed Max TimePt) After this
time values in excess of the jitter Goal value trigger the
Jitter Warning
— Jitter Warning EnablesDisables the Jitter Warning The
Jitter Warning displays when the Jitter value exceeds the
Jitter Goal value (Default ON)
— TimePt Sets the TimePt when Mode is set to Fixed
(Only active when Mode Fixed)
— Back to return to previous menu
— Uncertainty
Opens a menu of uncertainty softkeys for setting the DUT Preamp
and Uncert Contributions
Then choose
— DUT Sets the DUT Mode to either Spot (default) or Table
Then choose
——DUT Mode Set to Spot (default) or to Table
For DUT MODE Spot choose
For optimum speed and performance measurement results it is
recommended that autointegration is used in all noise figure
measurements 446 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
——DUT Spot Values (Only active when DUT
Mode Spot)
Then choose
——Input |Γ| Sets the input Γvalue
——Output |Γ| Sets the output Γvalue
——Γ Spec Style [Fixed] Opens a menu of softkeys
to set the Γ specification style
Then choose Maximum 95th ile 80th ile
Median Mean or Fixed (default)
——Γ Distribution [Fixed] Opens a menu of softkeys
to set the type of Γ distribution
Then select Rayleigh Fixed (default) or Uniform
in Circle
——Back to return to previous menu
——DUT Table EditSaveRecall (Only active when
DUT Mode Table)
Then choose
——Import DUT Data Opens a menu of softkeys
where you can select a DUT *csv or *snp data
file to import into your table
Then choose Recall File Sort by File Name Sort
by Date Next Page Previous Page or Cancel
——Edit DUT Data Opens a menu of softkeys where
you can edit the current selected DUT table data
file (eg serial number model number Γ Spec
Style Γ Distribution Input |Γ| Output |Γ| and
frequencies)
Then choose Edit Next Page Previous Page
Add Row (only active for Frequency)
DeleteClear (only active for Frequency) or
Done
——New DUT Table Opens a menu of softkeys to
choose a new DUT table
IMPORTANT The FieldFox displays Replace existing file because
the displayed default filename is the one last saved Enter a unique
filename to avoid loss of table dataKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 447
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
——Save DUT Table Opens a Create a filename menu
of softkeys to enter a DUT table filename and
then to save the file
——Recall DUT Table Opens a Select a file menu of
softkeys to enter a DUT table filename to recall
——Storage Device [Internal] Opens a set of softkeys
to select where your DUT table is saved
Then choose Internal SD Card or USB
— Back to return to previous menu
— Preamp Sets the DUT Mode to either Spot (default) or
Table
Then choose
——Preamp Mode Set to Spot (default) or to Table
For Preamp MODE Spot choose
——Preamp Spot Values (Only active when DUT
Mode Spot)
Refer to similar DUT Spot Values (Only active
when DUT Mode Spot) on page 446
——Back to return to previous menu
——Preamp Table EditSaveRecall (Only active
when Preamp Mode Table)
Refer to similar DUT Table EditSaveRecall
(Only active when DUT Mode Table) on
page 446
——Back to return to previous menu
— Uncert Contributions Opens a menu of uncertainty
contribution softkeys
Then choose
——Jitter Uncert Enabledisable the Jitter
Uncertainty
——ENR Uncert Enabledisable the ENR
Uncertainty
——Mismatch Uncert Enabledisable the Mismatch
Uncertainty 448 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
——User Cal Uncert Enabledisable the User Cal
Uncertainty
——Back to return to previous menu
— Uncert Cover Sets the uncertainty coverage value for the
current settings
Then choose 1σ 2σ (default) or 3σ
— Uncert Bars Enablesdisables the uncertainty calculator
uncertainty bars values for the current settings
— Back to return to previous menu
How to Use DUT Measurement Setups
Noise figure Option 356 has four predefined measurement setups
—Amplifier
—Downconverter
—Upconverter
— MultiStage Converter
Refer to Using Measure Setup to Choose DUT Type on page 448
Each of the four measurements has frequency context and loss compensation
softkeys that can used to optimize the DUT’s noise figure measurement Refer
to DUT Type and Frequency Context on page 453 and to DUT Type Loss
Compensation on page 458
Using Measure Setup to Choose DUT Type
This section contains the following
—Setting DUT > Type [Amplifier] see Figure 261 on page 449
—Setting DUT > Type [Downconverter] see Figure 262 on page 450
—Setting DUT > Type [Upconverter] see Figure 263 on page 451
—Setting DUT > Type [MultiStage Converter] see Figure 264 on page 452Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 449
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
Figure 261 DUT – Measurement Setup – Type [Amplifier] Screen
Used for setting up DUT
parameters without an
external preamplifier
(LNA)
– Type [Amplifier]
––DUT displays does not
display LO if not frequency
converting
––Displays preamp (LNA) if
User Cal is available See
next image this figure
Used for setting up DUT
parameters with an
external preamplifier
(LNA)
DUT – Measurement Setup – Type [Amplifier]
DUT – Measurement Setup – Type [Amplifier] with External Amplifier (LNA) and User
Calibration 450 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
Figure 262 DUT Measurement Setup – Type [Downconverter] Screen
Used for setting up DUT
parameters without an
external preamp
– Type [Downconverter]
––Performs internal
frequency downconversion
(converts RF down to IF)
–Sideband
––LSB Lower Sideband
(available for downconverter
and upconverter)
––USB Upper Sideband
(available for downconverter
and upconverter)
––DSB Double Sideband
(available for
downconverter averages
LSB and USB ENR values)
DUT – Measurement Setup – Type [Downconverter]
Used for setting up DUT
parameters with an
external preamp
DUT – Measurement Setup – Type [Downconverter] with External Amplifier (LNA) and User
CalibrationKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 451
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
Figure 263 DUT Measurement Setup – Type [Upconverter] Screen
Used for setting up DUT
parameters without an
external preamp
–Type [Upconverter]
––Performs internal
frequency upconversion
(technically converts IF up
to RF but for this case RF
always DUT In and IF
always DUT Out and so
converts RF up to IF)
–Sideband
––LSB Lower Sideband
(available for downconverter
and upconverter)
––USB Upper Sideband
(available for downconverter
and upconverter)
Used for setting up DUT
parameters with an
external preamp
DUT – Measurement Setup – Type [Upconverter]
DUT – Measurement Setup – Type [Upconverter] with External Amplifier (LNA) and User
Calibration
Preamp 452 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
Figure 264 DUT Measurement Setup – Type [MultiStage Converter] Screen
Used for setting up DUT
parameters
– Type [MultiStage
Converter]
––MultiStage Converter
Performs multistage
frequency conversion
(converts RF downup to IF)
DUT – Measurement Setup – Type [MultiStage Converter]
Used for setting up DUT
parameters with preamp
and User Cal
DUT – Measurement Setup – Type [MultiStage Converter] with External Preamp (LNA) and User
CalibrationKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 453
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
DUT Type and Frequency Context
Noise figure enables you to define the frequency context for your noise figure
measurements
— RF (DUT In)
—Start
—Stop
—Center
—Span
— Freq Context—(Inactive for Amplifier)
—RF
—IF
— LO—(Inactive for Amplifier)
— IF (DUT Out)—(Inactive for Amplifier)
—Start
—Stop
—Center
—Span
This section contains the following
—Setting Meas Setup > DUT > Next > RF (OUT in) see Figure 265 on
page 454
—Setting Meas Setup > DUT > Next > IF (DUT Out) see Figure 266 on
page 455
—Setting Meas Setup > DUT > Freq Context [IF] see Figure 267 on
page 456 454 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
Frequency Context – RF (DUT In)
The RF (DUT In) softkey can be used to define the DUT Type’s RF Start Stop
Center and Span frequencies Refer to Frequency Range and Frequency
Context on page 457
Figure 265 DUT >Type [Amplifier] and [MultiStage Converter] > RF (DUT In)—Frequency
Context
Used for setting up Start
Stop Center and Span
frequency context for a
DUT
– Type [Amplifier] and
[MultiStage Converter]












Set the frequency context
based on the DUT Type


––Enter the RF (DUT In)
values for Start Stop
Center and Span
frequencies
DUT – Measurement Setup – Type [Amplifier] and [MultiStage Converter] Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 455
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
Frequency Context – IF (DUT Out) – Inactive for Type [Amplifier]
The IF (DUT Out) softkey can be used to define the DUT Type’s IF Start Stop
Center and Span frequencies Refer to Frequency Range and Frequency
Context on page 457
Figure 266 DUT >Type [Downconverter] [Upconverter] and [MultiStage Converter] > IF
(DUT Out)—Frequency Context (Inactive for Type [Amplifier]
Used for setting up Start
Stop Center and Span
frequency context for a
DUT
– Type [Downconverter]
[Upconverter] and
[MultiStage Converter]










Set the frequency context
based on the DUT Type


––Enter the RF (DUT In)
values for Start Stop
Center and Span
frequencies
DUT – Measurement Setup – Type [Downconverter] [Upconverter] and [MultiStage Converter] 456 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
DUT Type—Freq Context (IF or RF)—(Inactive for DUT Type [Amplifier])
Frequency context can be used to define the DUT Type’s RF Context IF
(default) and RF values Refer to Frequency Range and Frequency Context
on page 457
Figure 267 DUT >Type [Downconverter] [Upconverter] and [MultiStage Converter] >
Freq Context [IF] or [RF]—(Inactive for Type [Amplifier])
Used for setting up
frequency context for a
DUT
– Type [Downconverter]
[Upconverter] and
[MultiStage Converter]












Set the frequency context
based on the DUT Type


––Enter the frequency
context IF (default) or RF
DUT – Measurement Setup – Type [Downconverter] [Upconverter] and [MultiStage Converter] Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 457
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
Frequency Range and Frequency Context
Set the range of frequencies over which you would like to make DUT type
measurements and frequency context for noise measurements
When the frequency range is changed after a calibration is performed the cal
becomes interpolated Learn more in Interpolation * on page 140
How to set Frequency Range and Frequency Context
—Press FreqDist (Measurement) or
for Frequency Context
—Press Meas Setup > DUT) > RF (DUT In) and IF (DUT Out)
— Then choose from the following
— Start and Stop frequencies beginning and end of the sweep
— Center and Span frequencies – the center frequency and span of
frequencies (half on either side of center)
— Freq Annotation and one of the following
— Follow each setting by entering a value using the numeric keypad
arrows or the rotary knob
— After using the keypad select a multiplier key Learn about multiplier
abbreviations in Chapter 1 Overview
— After use the arrows or the rotary knob press Enter
AutoSelect (Default) – The FieldFox selects a frequency annotation
setting (CenterSpan or StartStop)
CenterSpan The center frequency and span are displayed
StartStop The start and stop frequencies of the frequency span are
displayed 458 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
Figure 268
DUT Type Loss Compensation
For all of the DUT Types (Amplifier Downconverter Upconverter and
MultiStage Converter) the loss compensation before the DUT (BeforeDUT)
and after the DUT (AfterDUT) can be enabled or disabled for loss and for
temperature
Loss compensation can be used to compensate for double sidebands (DSB)
Loss compensation can be used in the case of DSB measurements to
compensate for the doubling of the measured noise level (ie 301 dB
increase) For all sideband cases you can enable or disable Loss (device loss)
and Temperature (device temperature) Refer to Figure 269 on page 459
This section contains the following
—Setting Meas Setup > DUT > Loss Compensation > Before DUT and After
DUT see Figure 269 on page 459Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 459
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
Setting DUT Loss Compensation
Figure 269 DUT Loss Compensation
Used for setting up loss
compensation for a DUT
– Type [Amplifier]
[Downconverter]
[Upconverter] and
[MultiStage Converter]












––Loss compensation can be
set before and after the DUT




––Enable or disable the Loss
(device loss) and the
temperature (device
temperature)
DUT – Measurement Setup – Type [Amplifier] [Downconverter] [Upconverter] and [MultiStage
Converter] 460 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
Single Continuous Restart
This setting determines whether the FieldFox measures continuously or only
once each time the Single or Run Hold + button is pressed Use Hold
Single or to conserve battery power or to allow you to save or analyze a
specific trace
How to set Single or Continuous
—Press Sweep 3
— Then choose one of the following
—Continuous
——ON Causes noise figure (NF) to make continuous sweeps This
is the typical setting for making measurements Each Run
Hold + press causes NF to toggle between continuous sweep
and Hold
——OFF Causes NF to Hold Each Run Hold + or Single press
causes NF to make ONE sweep then Hold The Hold
annotation changes to an arrow > while the sweep occurs
—Single Automatically sets Continuous OFF and causes NF to make
ONE sweep then Hold
—Restart Resets the sweep to the current defined start frequency point
Points
Points is the number of measurements that are measured and displayed along
the Xaxis The higher number of data points the better the ability to resolve
closely spaced signals and the slower the sweep speed
How to set number of points
—Press Sweep 3
—Then Points [current setting]
— Then choose from 03 | 05 | 11 | 21 | 51 | 101 | 201 | 401 | 601 | 801 | 1001Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 461
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
Resolution Bandwidth (Res BW)
In NF Mode the Res BW settings increase the measurement speed and quality
of a measured noise figure The wider (higher) the Res BW the faster and
better the noise figure measurement However as the Res BW is narrowed the
sweep speed becomes slower and the measurement quality is degraded
So Wider Res BW better noise measurement and faster measurement time
How to set Res BW
—Press BW 2
—Then Res BW
— Then choose from the following
— 300 KHz | 1 MHz | 3 MHz | 5 MHz Press the desired resolution
bandwidth
The current Res BW setting is shown at the bottom of the screen
This setting could impact the accuracy of the measurement See Specifications
in httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59909783ENpdf
Alignments
The Noise Figure mode requires alignment types amplitude Refer to the SA
chapter’s Alignments on page 180 for information on all alignments
Avoid setting the resolution bandwidth (Res BW) greater than the
bandwidth of the measured DUT 462 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
Calculating Noise Figure Measurement Uncertainty
The Noise Figure mode can calculate and display the uncertainty of the noise
measurement whether it is a Noise Figure Noise Factor or Noise Temperature
measurement
The uncertainty calculation accounts for the following sources of uncertainty
both in the measurement and in the user calibration (Run User Cal)
— Noise power uncertainty caused by finite sample size (Jitter)
— Noise power uncertainty caused by mismatch
— ENR uncertainty of the noise standard
The following are not included because they have been determined to be
insignificant
— Linearity (ie due to the linear wide dynamic range receiver the automatic
gain adjustment and the small power excursions of the hotcold
measurement)
— Residual temperature drift of the FieldFox (ie due to the internal reference
switch)
Other possible causes of uncertainty that are not included in the uncertainty
analysis are temperature drift of the following
—DUT
— Noise source or
— Preamplifier
Refer to ENR Using ENR Tables on page 467
Reverse noise wave generation by the DUT or preamplifier
All amplifiers including the DUT and preamplifiers used in the noise figure
measurement are active devices which may generate noise power from both
their input and output ports The Noise Figure mode uncertainty calculation
does not account for uncertainties caused when the input generated noise
reflects back into the amplifier and adds to the total measured noise power
These types of uncertainties are minimized by using well matched noise
Generally the drift immunity of the Yfactor noise figure measurement is
quite good Nevertheless caution is advised when temperature changes
are significant between the user calibration and measurement
When any one of the four uncertainty values reads all 000 across the
band a yellow UNC annotation is displayed on the left side of the FieldFox
display Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 463
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
sources in the measurement and in the user calibration And in the case of
very low power output DUTs (<15 dB gain + noise figure) by using an isolator
on the input of the preamplifier
Electromagnetic interference
DUTs preamplifiers noise sources and connectors may all potentially be
affected by radiated signals present in the test environment Care should be
taken to establish an appropriate test environment for the noise figure
measurement
DUT oscillations microphonic behavior etcetera
Any instability in the DUT will cause unaccounted noise measurement
uncertainties
Entering Uncertainty Information
In addition to information gathered during the measurement the following
information must be provided by the user in order to determine the noise
measurement uncertainty
— DUT Reflection Coefficient
For this section see also Overview of Softkey Menus on page 441
(Uncertainty > DUT on page 445)
DUT Reflection Coefficients values may be imported to a DUT table from
*snp or *csv Files entered by editing a DUT table recalled as a previously
saved DUT table (in a *dut file) or set as a spot value to be applied across
all frequencies
DUT and preamplifier *snp files may be generated in the FieldFox VNA
mode and then imported into the Noise Figure mode 464 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
Specified Style (Spec Style) Following the GUM method for Type B
evaluation of standard uncertainty described in Reference[1]1 the
uncertainty calculation takes into account not only the entered value of the
reflection coefficient but also the nature of this value This can either be a
measured value for the DUT or some form of specified value This is
indicated by the Spec Style setting Specified Styles may be either a
percentile value maximum fixed median or mean This value indicates the
nature of the entered value relative to the population of values it represents
Refer to Table 261 on page 464
Distribution Distribution settings refer to the population distribution of the
| Γ| values for the device Refer to Table 262 on page 464
1 Reference [1] GUM 1995 with minor corrections Evaluation of measurement data
Guide to the expression of uncertainty in measurement JCGM 1002008 First Edition
September 2008
Table 261 Specify Style — of the entered value relative to the represented population
Style Description
Maximum Use this if this value represents the largest possible reflection coefficient for the population of
devices to which the DUT belongs This is true for does not exceed specifications
Fixed Use this if the value is a measured value for the DUT
Median Mean Use this if this value represents the median mean reflection coefficient for the population of
devices to which the DUT belongs
95th ile Use this if 95 of the population has a lower reflection coefficient than the value entered This is
the case for 2 standard deviation (2σ) type specifications
80th ile Use this if 80 of the population has a lower reflection coefficient than the value entered
Table 262 Distribution — of the population of the reflection coefficients
Distribution Description
Fixed The reflection coefficient magnitude is always at the given level This is often the case when
measured values are used
Rayleigh The probability density function (pdf) of the magnitude of the reflection coefficient is a Rayleigh
distribution This is normally the case for specified values when the overall mismatch is due to
several interacting impedance transitions within the device
Uniform (within a
Circle)
A distribution that was historically used in the industry before the Rayleigh research as
documented in Keysight Application Note 14493 but is rarely accurate Refer to
httpsliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59889215ENpdfKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 465
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
— Noise Source Reflection Coefficient ENR Uncertainties and ENR values
For this section see also Overview of Softkey Menus on page 441 (Noise
Source on page 442) and Using ENR Tables on page 467
Noise source reflection coefficients ENR Uncertainties and ENR values
may be entered by Recalling a previously generated *enr file editing an
ENR table or set as a spot value to be applied across all frequencies Note
that any *enr file which uses the standard *enr file format may be recalled
by the Noise Figure mode
As in the case of the DUT in addition to entering the magnitude reflection
coefficient values the uncertainty calculation takes into account the
distribution and specified style for the noise source reflection coefficient
value Additionally the ENR table requires a value for the ENR uncertainty
coverage (Uncert Coverage) which states how the entered ENR uncertainty
(ENR Uncert) value is related to the population of possible ENR
uncertainties This is typically set to 2σ which means that 95 of the time
the actual ENR is within the range of ENR + ENR Uncertainty
— Preamplifier Reflection Coefficients (User Calibration Only)
For this section see also Overview of Softkey Menus on page 441
(Uncertainty > Preamp on page 447)
When a user calibration is performed the Preamplifier Reflection
Coefficient values may be imported to a Preamp table from *snp or *csv
files entered by editing a preamplifier table (Preamp Table) recalled as a
previously saved preamp table (in a *amp file) or set as a spot value to be
applied across all frequencies
Template *enr files for several common models of noise sources may be
found in the default ENR table directory of the FieldFox In these files the
reflection coefficients have been set to the values specified for the
respective model numbers but the values for the ENR or ENR uncertainty
will need to be entered at each frequency Refer to ENR (*enr) Files on
page 468
Template preamplifier (*amp) files for several common models of
preamplifiers may be found in the default Preamp table directory of the
FieldFox In these files the reflection coefficients have been set to the
values specified for the respective model numbers
DUT and preamplifier *snp files may be generated in the FieldFox VNA
mode and then imported into the Noise Figure mode 466 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
As in the case of the DUT In addition to entering the magnitude reflection
coefficient values the uncertainty calculation takes into account the
distribution (Γ Distribution) and specified style (Spec Style) for the
preamplifier reflection coefficient value
— User Calibration Noise Source Reflection Coefficient ENR Uncertainties
and ENR values (User Calibration Only)
These are identical to the noise source values entered for the measurement
but are entered prior to performing the user calibration (Run User Cal)
— Controlling the Uncertainty Calculation and Display
For this section see also Overview of Softkey Menus on page 441
(Uncertainty > Uncert Contributions on page 447)
When enabled uncertainty bars are displayed on the data trace indicating
the uncertainty range for the current Noise Figure Noise Factor or Noise
Temperature measurement By default the displayed uncertainty range is
the measured data + the default coverage factor of two times the
calculated standard deviation (2σ) which is based on all included
uncertainties Optionally the coverage factor may be changed to 1σ 2σ or
3σ Also as an aid in determining the cause of measurement uncertainty
any of the individual contributors (user calibration (User Cal Uncert)
mismatch uncertainty (Mismatch Uncert) ENR uncertainty (ENR Uncert) or
jitter uncertainty (Jitter Uncert) may be excluded from the uncertainty
analysisKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 467
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
Using ENR Tables
ENR tables are used to define the noise source(s) used in DUT measurements
receiver and user calibration(s) Additionally ENR tables are used along with
DUT tables preamplifier tables and information collected during the
measurement to compute the measurement uncertainty Refer to Figure 2610
on page 468
— Both gain and noise figure measurement accuracy will be enhanced by
using a noise source with as low a reflection coefficient as possible for both
the noise figure measurement and the user calibration
— It is not necessary to use the same noise source in the user calibration as
will be used in the measurement In some cases it might be better to use a
different noise source in the user calibration than will be used in the
measurement If this is done it is important to select the ENR table for the
calibration noise source prior to the calibration And then to select the ENR
table for the measurement noise source prior to measuring the DUT
See also Calibration Wizard on page 471
How to Create an ENR Table
To create an ENR table
This procedure assumes you have previously set your frequency resolution
bandwidth and number of points Refer to Example Typical Noise Figure
Measurement Procedure on page 440
For this procedure refer to Figure 2610 on page 468
1 Press Measure > Noise Source > ENR Mode Table (default)
2 Then ENR Table EditSaveRecall
3 Then choose
Edit ENR Table (to modify the currently loaded ENR table)
New ENR Table (to create a new table)
Save ENR Table (to save any changes to the currently loaded ENR table)
Recall ENR Table (to recall a previously saved table)
Back (to return to previous softkey menu)
4 Then edit the table as necessary for your devices and measurements by
entering in Header Autopopulate ENR ENR uncertainty On |Γ| and Off
|Γ| Refer to Figure 2610 on page 468 468 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
Figure 2610 Editing ENR Tables
About ENR (*enr) Preamplifier (*amp) and DUT (*dut) Files
This section contains the following
— ENR (*enr) Files on page 468
— Preamplifier (*amp) Files on page 469
— DUT (*dut) Files on page 469
ENR (*enr) Files
— ENR files are saved to and recalled from the NoiseFigure＼ENR folder If the
folder does not already exist on a USB or SD card it is created
automatically before storing the file
— ENR files are stored as *enr files Existing ENR files that are loaded into the
FieldFox can be overwritten Your edited file will NOT be overwritten when
firmware is updated
—To DELETE a *enr file use the Manage Files feature Learn more in
Manage Files on page 552
Uses existing ENR file format Refer
to
httpsliteraturecdnkeysightcom
litwebpdf0034690148pdf
1 Three additional header fields
(used for uncertainty calculations)
—ENR Uncert Cov
–Γ Spec Style
–Γ Distribution
2 Auto Populate fields are not part
of the file These fields are only
used to assist in filling the table
values
(when a given autopopulate value
is turned on its value fills in the
associated values in the table)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 469
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
Preamplifier (*amp) Files
— Preamplifier (*amp) files are saved to and recalled from the
NoiseFigure＼Preamp folder If the folder does not already exist on a USB or
SD card it is created automatically before storing the file
— Preamplifier files are stored as *amp files Existing *amp files that are
loaded into the FieldFox can be overwritten Your edited file will NOT be
overwritten when firmware is updated
—To DELETE a *amp file use the Manage Files feature Learn more in
Manage Files on page 552
DUT (*dut) Files
— DUT (*dut) files are saved to and recalled from the NoiseFigure＼DUT
folder If the folder does not already exist on a USB or SD card it is created
automatically before storing the file
— DUT files are stored as *dut files Existing *dut files that are loaded into the
FieldFox can be overwritten Your edited file will NOT be overwritten when
firmware is updated
—To DELETE a *dut file use the Manage Files feature Learn more in
Manage Files on page 552 470 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to Define a Noise Figure Measurement
Using Markers (Noise Figure)
In addition to the features shown here noise figure has many of the same
marker features as other FieldFox modes See also All about Markers on
page 484
Figure 2611 Marker Annotation
Figure 2612 Marker Table Annotation
Marker annotation
– Marker readout in top right
corner of graticule
– Displays uncertainty values
for select measurements

IMPORTANT Noise Figure
has asymmetric uncertainty
(see red box in figure) Noise
Factor and
Noise Temperature have
symmetric uncertainty
Marker table annotation
under the graticule
– Marker table data under
the graticule
– Displays uncertainty values
for select measurements

IMPORTANT Noise Figure
has asymmetric uncertainty
(see red box in figure) Noise
Factor and
Noise Temperature have
symmetric uncertaintyKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 471
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
Calibration Wizard
Calibration Wizard
The Noise Figure mode has two types of calibration wizard softkeys Receiver
Cal and User Cal
To access the calibration wizards
—Press Cal then
— Run Receiver Cal or
— Run User Cal and then
— follow the prompts
When to Calibrate
Noise Figure has two different calibrations that are important to run
depending on the type of measurement you are using
— Receiver calibrations (required for all measurements)
— User calibrations (required if the setup uses an external preamplifier)
Understanding Receiver and User Calibrations
This section contains the following
— Receiver Calibration (Receiver Cal)
— User Calibration (User Cal)
— User Calibration (User Cal)
— Optimizing Measurement Accuracy

Receiver Calibration (Receiver Cal)
The receiver calibration＇s purpose is to establish the true measurement
bandwidth of the receiver when making noise measurements This bandwidth
information is used to calculate the gain of the DUT when there is no user
calibration But if there is a user calibration the gain calculation is
independent of the receiver bandwidth from the receiver calibration The
A receiver calibration is required for a user calibration On the Fieldfox
after you have completed a user calibration the User Cal (User Cal)
annotation overwrites the displayed Receiver Cal (Rcvr Cal) annotation
When there is no preamplifier in the measurement only a receiver
calibration is required 472 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
Calibration Wizard
receiver calibration has virtually no influence on the noise figure measurement
either with or without a user calibration The receiver calibration only effects
the gain measurement and only when there is no user calibration
As already stated the receiver calibration measures the measurement
bandwidth of the receiver In most cases this is set primarily by the digital
processing of the receiver The receiver calibration is needed because it is
influenced by the IF analog circuitry of the FieldFox Additionally the
bandwidth is extremely stable and does not vary significantly with time or
temperature So once the receiver calibration has been successfully performed
there is no need to repeat the receiver calibration
Exceptions Redo the receiver calibration when the FieldFox receiver
hardware is changed (factory repair) or in the rare case where a filter is added
to the measurement system which has a narrower bandwidth than the receiver
(ie the external bandwidth is less than the lowest resolution bandwidth (Res
BW) setting of 300 kHz)
User Calibration (User Cal)
In general a user calibration should be performed whenever a preamplifier is
used in the noise figure measurement If there is no preamplifier the user
calibration is not necessary
Although it will be interpolated if other frequencies are used when a user
calibration is performed it should be made at the same frequencies as the
measurement The user calibration also needs to be performed with the same
resolution bandwidth as is used in the measurement The user calibration
determines the noise contribution of the preamplifier so that it can be removed
from the measurement when computing the noise figure of the DUT Also the
user calibration establishes the power gain of the receiver—preamplifier system
so that the reported gain of the DUT will be the gain between input of the DUT
(where the noise source is connected during the measurement) and the
calibration plane (which is the point where the noise source is connected
during the user calibration) Therefore for the best gain accuracy the noise
source used in the calibration should be connected at the same point as the
DUT will be during the measurement
Optimizing Measurement Accuracy
— Both gain and noise figure measurement accuracy will be enhanced by
using a noise source with as low a reflection coefficient as possible for the
user calibration
Performing a user calibration is recommended only when the
measurement setup includes a preamplifier The user calibration is
unnecessary for accurate measurements when no preamplifier is usedKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 473
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
Calibration Wizard
— When the DUT output noise power is relatively low (ie the gain plus noise
figure of the DUT is less than 15 dB) measurement accuracy may also be
improved by using a low loss isolator on the preamplifier input Due to the
output reflection coefficient of the DUT reverse noise waves from the
preamplifier when present will contribute a different amount of noise
power during the measurement of the DUT than during the user calibration
And this change in receiver noise power can impact the measurement
accuracy
— It is not necessary to use the same noise source in the user calibration as
will be used in the measurement In some cases it might be better to use a
different noise source in the user calibration than will be used in the
measurement If this is done it is important to set the ENR table for the
calibration noise source prior to the calibration and to set the measurement
noise source prior to measuring the DUT
— Prior to starting a user calibration it is a good practice to connect the
preamplifier and noise source that will be used during the user calibration
and perform a noise figure measurement of the preamplifier itself (without a
user calibration) Use the same bandwidth and frequency settings that will
be used in the user calibration A successful noise figure measurement
ensures that all of the connections (bias control and RF) have been made
properly The user calibration can be started immediately following the
successful noise figure measurement of the preamplifier with no change to
the setup 474 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to use AutoIntegration
How to use AutoIntegration
This section provides an example procedure for measuring a device using noise
figures’ auto integration feature This example does not use an external preamp
and was performed over a long time duration Autointegration is
recommended to achieve greater accuracy and speed for all of your device
measurements Refer to Figure 2614 on page 478 and Figure 2614 on
page 478
For the following example these settings were used on the FieldFox with a
Keysight 346C K01 noise source that had the following characteristics
About AutoIntegration
With auto integration the FieldFox Noise Figure application chooses the
optimum integration time for each of the noise power measurements needed
(ie noise source on noise source off and receiver reference) to compute the
device＇s noise figure with the selected amount of measurement jitter in the
shortest possible time The auto integration feature calculates the time
required to satisfy the jitter goal from the relative power levels as they are
measured One significant advantage of auto integration is that it ensures that
the best possible instrument speed is used in achieving the necessary jitter
requirement
If on the other hand it is determined that the time required to meet the jitter
goal exceeds the maximum allowed time set by the user auto integration will
divide the maximum allowed time between the power measurements in order
to produce the smallest possible jitter in the noise figure measurement In
For optimum speed and performance measurement results it is
recommended that autointegration is used in all noise figure
measurements
Keysight 346C K01 characteristics at 50 GHz
ENR of 11 8 dB
Noise figure 87 dB
Gain 95 dB
Total Noise 182 dB above kTB
FieldFox N9952A noise figure (as tested) 393 dB
For this example the cold noise generation of the 346C
K01 is 211 dB below the FieldFox’s noise power (ie
393 dB – 182 dB 211 dB)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 475
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to use AutoIntegration
these cases since the jitter goal has not been reached a jitter warning marker
will appear on the data trace (unless disabled by the user) indicating that the
jitter goal could not be achieved within the selected time constraint
Due to the stability of the FieldFox receiver with its internal reference switch
and the design of the auto integration feature it is possible to achieve a stable
accurate low jitter measurement results even under challenging measurement
conditions such as when measuring low noise power output devices at high
frequencies with no preamplifier by setting very long maximum integration
times For example stable measurements with 01 dB jitter and no discernible
drift have been demonstrated measuring a low gain low noise amplifier at
50 GHz using maximum integration times of 5000 seconds per point in spite of
ambient temperature drift of several degrees Centigrade over the course of the
measurement
While auto integration can achieve very low jitter measurements it is a good
practice to consider the contribution of the jitter uncertainty to the total
measurement uncertainty when selecting a jitter goal If the measurement
uncertainty from other contributors is known to be 05 dB for example it
would make little sense to set a jitter goal of 01 dB Setting a jitter goal of
03 dB in this case would only increase the RSS uncertainty to 058 dB and
would potentially speed up the measurement by a factor of 9 relative to a jitter
goal of 01 dB Auto integration makes it possible to select the jitter level with
confidence and is therefore a valuable tool in obtaining the required level of
accuracy with the fastest possible measurement time
AutoIntegration Procedure
No user cal was performed for this measurement because no external preamp
was used
Set the equipment up in an area where it will remain undisturbed for the
determined amount of measurement time Refer to Figure 2613 on page 477
and Figure 2614 on page 478 See also Figure 251 on page 434 and Figure
251 on page 434
1 Enter the Measurement type
Select Measure > Noise Figure (default)
2 Enter the Noise Source ENR information into a table
Select Measure Setup
Then choose
— Noise Source then
— ENR Mode Table (default)
If you have previously saved your noise source’s ENR information into a
table skip this step and proceed to step 4 476 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to use AutoIntegration
— ENR Table EditSaveRecall
— Edit ENR Table
— Enter the serial number and model number of your noise source If
desired enter other information (eg Options Cal Date etcetera)
Enter a value using the numeric keypad the arrows or the
rotary knob
— Done to finish table and return to previous menu
3 Save the ENR table
If you are not familiar with saving and recalling files refer to Chapter 28
File Management and then to Saving and Recalling Files on page 544
Choose
— Save ENR Table
Enter the filename of your noise source
Enter a value using the numeric keypad the arrows or the
rotary knob
— Done to finish table and return to previous menu
4 Enter the noise figure measurement’s frequency number of points and
span settings
— FreqDist > Center > 50 GHz
— Sweep 3 > More > 401 points
— BW 2 > Span > 0 Hz
5 Define the noise figure’s integration settings
Meas Setup 4 > Integration
Then choose
— Mode Auto (default)
— Jitter Goal > 010 dB
— Max TimePt > 300s
— Jitter Warning ON (default)
— Back to return to previous menu
Press Uncertainty then
— Uncert Bars ON
6 Leave the setup to run for desired timeKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 477
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to use AutoIntegration
Figure 2613 Example of Jitter Uncertainty (401 points)—with Uncertainty Bars 478 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to use AutoIntegration
Figure 2614 Example of Jitter Uncertainty (401 points)—without the Uncertainty BarsKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 479
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
How to use AutoIntegration
Figure 2615 shows an example of a noise figure visual Jitter Warning
elements that can be enableddisabled (ie blue circles around points where
the jitter goal was exceeded)
—Press to toggle Jitter Warning OFF ON (default ON)
Figure 2615 Example of Jitter Uncertainty—with Jitter Uncertainty Trace 480 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
Other Features Available
Other Features Available
— Limit Lines For information on using Limit Lines refer to All about Limit
Lines on page 499
— Display Lines For information on using Limit Lines refer to the SA
chapter’s section Display Line on page 189
— Scale Settings – For information on using Autoscale Autoscale All and
Scale settings All about Scale Settings on page 506Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 481
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Some measurements can result in invalid results (NaNs) In these cases the
FieldFox’s Noise Figure Option 356 displays the following
— Red X on the NaN point
— Marker readout displays –––
— SCPI will return its NaN representation (ie 991E+37)
Figure 2616 Example of an invalid measurement 482 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Noise Figure Mode (Option 356 – CPU2 Only)
Troubleshooting 483
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
25 Data Analysis Features
The following features can be used after a measurement to analyze the results
In this Chapter
How to create Markers on page 484
How to move a Marker after it is created on page 484
About Delta Markers on page 485
Marker Table on page 486
Coupled Markers (NA Mode) on page 487
Marker Trace (CAT NA NF Modes) on page 488
Marker Trace (IQA and SA Mode) on page 488
Marker Format on page 489
Searching with Markers on page 490
What Is a Peak’ on page 495
Marker Functions on page 497
SA Marker Functions on page 498
How to Create Fixed Limit Lines on page 499
Relative Limit Lines on page 500
Build From Trace on page 500
Limit Options on page 501
How to Save and Recall Limits on page 502
How to display data and memory traces on page 504
How to perform Trace Math on page 504
About Math Operations on page 505
How to Use Scale Settings on page 506Data Analysis Features
All about Markers
484 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
All about Markers
Markers move along the Xaxis range of the measurement trace to provide a numerical readout of
each measured data point Markers also allow you to search for specific Yaxis values
A trace can contain up to six markers
The marker readout on the FieldFox screen displays X and Yaxis information for the current active
marker ONLY
A Marker Table can be displayed that allows you to simultaneously view X and Yaxis information
for all markers
Markers can be used in CAT IQ Analyzer NA NF RTSA SA and Pulse Measurements Modes
How to create Markers
—Press Marker
— Then Markers 16 to select a marker to activate
— Then Normal to activate that marker A marker is created on the trace in the middle of the
Xaxis That marker is now active
— Then move the marker using the rotary knob the arrows or by entering an Xaxis position
with the number keys
— Then press Enter
How to move a Marker after it is created
—Press Marker
— Then Markers 16 repeatedly until the marker of interest is selected The OFF Normal Peak or
Delta softkey is black to indicate the current setting of each marker
— Then move the marker as when it was first created
— Markers can also be moved using one of the marker search functions Refer to Searching with
Markers on page 490Data Analysis Features
All about Markers
Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 485
Figure 251 Marker 2 is Active marker 1 is NOT active
About Delta Markers
A Delta marker provides Xand Yaxis readout information that is relative to a reference’ marker
A Delta marker is created with a Δ (delta symbol) to distinguish it from the reference marker
All six markers can be a Delta marker pair
Peak search functions can be performed using delta markers
Figure 252 A Delta marker and its associated reference marker
In the graphic above the marker readout shows the difference between the two markers in
frequency and amplitude
Data Analysis Features
All about Markers
486 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
How to Create a Delta Marker
— Create a Normal marker and move it to the reference position
—Press Delta The marker becomes the reference marker and fixed in its XAxis position
— Move the Delta marker using the numeric keypad the arrows or the rotary knob
—Press Enter when finished
How to move the Reference marker
—Press Normal to turn the Delta marker OFF
— Move the marker to the new position
— Then press Delta again to turn the Delta marker back ON
Fix the position of the Reference marker (IQ Analyzer RTSA and SA Modes ONLY)
In SA mode the reference marker can be fixed at the Yaxis position of the data trace when the
marker was created or it can float’ with each sweep at the Yaxis position of the data trace In CAT
and NA mode the reference marker always floats with the data trace
— Create a Delta marker
—From the Mkr >Tools menu press More (SA mode only) then Marker Properties then Delta
Ref Fixed
— OFF – The reference marker floats at the data trace Yaxis position
— ON – The reference marker is fixed at the Yaxis position of the data trace when the
marker was created (default IQA and SA modes)
Signal Track Marker (NF and SA Mode ONLY)
In NF and SA mode the marker can be peaked at the Yaxis position of the data trace and the
marker is centered on the screen This setting applies to all NF and SA markers
— Create a Signal Track marker (peak)
—From the Mkr >Tools menu press More then Marker Search
— OFF – The reference marker floats at the data trace Yaxis position
— ON – The reference marker is peaked at the Yaxis position of the data trace and the
marker is centered on the screen
Marker Table
The Marker Table can be displayed at the bottom of the FieldFox screen It can display information
for up to 6 markers in a fullwidth window and up to 3 markers for a halfwidth window (NA mode)
The marker table squeezes the graticule area when activatedData Analysis Features
All about Markers
Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 487
How to display the Marker table
—Press Marker
— Then More
— Then Marker Table On Off
Coupled Markers (NA Mode)
Coupled Markers available in NA mode only1 and allows you to simultaneously create and move
markers that have the same number for all traces For example when marker 2 is created on a
trace a marker 2 is created for ALL traces When any marker 2 is moved they all move together to
the same Xaxis position
— Coupled markers are allowed only in NA mode and are relevant only in multitrace
configurations
— You can have markers that are coupled and others that are uncoupled
— Peak functions move the marker to the peak on the active trace while all other markers move to
the same Xaxis position
Figure 253 Coupled Markers move on ALL traces at the same time (NA shown)
IQ Analyzer (IQA) mode has coupled markers but the behavior is different
than the NA mode Coupled Markers behavior Refer to Coupled Markers
(Waveform Only) on page 258
1 IQA mode has coupled markers but the behavior is different than NA mode’s coupled markers Refer to
Coupled Markers (Waveform Only) on page 258Data Analysis Features
All about Markers
488 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
How to create Uncoupled Markers
To create markers that are NOT coupled (move independently on each trace)
—Press Marker
— Then More
— Then Coupled Markers OFF
Marker Colors
As shown in the above image in NA and CAT Modes markers are the same color as the trace to
which they are assigned In SA Mode the marker color is NOT the same as the trace
Marker colors can NOT be changed
Marker Trace (CAT NA NF Modes)
The Marker Trace setting is used to move markers between the data trace and memory trace
When Coupled Markers is ON this setting applies to the active marker for ALL traces that are
coupled Otherwise this setting applies to the active marker on only the active trace
How to move a marker between traces
— With at least one marker present press Marker then More
— Then select the marker to move using Marker 123456
— Then toggle Marker Trace Auto Data Mem
— Auto Marker resides on data trace when it is visible Marker resides on memory trace
when only IT is visible (Default setting)
— Data Marker resides on data trace even when not visible
— Mem Marker resides on memory trace even when not visible
Marker Trace (IQA and SA Mode)
Marker Trace determines the trace number on which a marker resides A marker is created on or
can later be changed to the trace number specified by the Marker Trace selection When changed
a marker moves to the same Xaxis location on the specified trace
Learn more about IQA Traces in Trace Display States (IQA Mode) on page 261
Learn more about SA Traces in Trace Display States (SA Mode) on page 178
Markers are coupled by defaultData Analysis Features
All about Markers
Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 489
How to move a marker between traces
— With two or more traces present press Marker and Enter to create a marker The marker is
created on the current Marker Trace selection (default setting is 1)
— Then More
— Then select the marker to move using Marker 123456
— Then toggle Marker Trace 1234
— The selected marker is moved to the specified trace
— When a marker is moved to a blank’ trace (not visible) the marker moves to the same
Xaxis position at either the Yaxis position of the last data or to the ZERO position
Marker Format
The Marker Format setting allows you to choose the format of the marker readout that appears in
the upperright corner of the screen and in the marker table The marker format can be
independent of the trace format and can be set independently for each trace All markers on a
trace have the same marker format
How to choose marker format
—Press Marker
— Then More
— Then Marker Format
—For NA Mode measurements choose from the following
Selection Example Yaxis value
Default Same as displayed format
R + jX Complex impedance format
(3rd number is distance for Time Domain)
228Ω j614Ω
2879fF
Z Magnitude Impedance Mag 6608Ω
Phase 738°
Real 02003
More
Imaginary 06727
Mag & Phase 0705 737°
dB Angle 21 dB 1382°Data Analysis Features
All about Markers
490 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
There are more trace formats available than marker formats To display marker readouts in more
formats than are shown here change the trace format then select Default Learn how to change
format in Format on page 94
—For TDR (CAT) Mode choose from Default and Z Mag
Searching with Markers
Marker Searches are used to move markers to locations on the trace which exhibits the
characteristics of the search criteria Learn What is a Peak in What Is a Peak’ on page 495
How to Search with Markers
The following menu structure applies to NA Mode Keystrokes will be slightly different for CAT Pulse
Measurements and SA Modes
— Activate the marker to be used for the search (NOT necessary with Bandwidth search)
— Then press Mkr >Tools
— Then choose one of the following
— Tracking ON OFF (NA Mode ONLY)
——ON causes the active marker to search for the specified criteria with each new
sweep Search criteria can include Target Bandwidth Peak Min The searches
begin with the first sweep after Tracking is turned ON based on the current search
type Trk appears next to the marker number
——OFF causes a new marker search only when the search feature is reexecuted
— Peak Moves the active marker to the HIGHEST amplitude data point of the trace Peak
Excursion and Peak Threshold value is ignored In SA Mode the LO feedthrough signal (0
Hz) is also ignored
— Next Peak Moves the active marker to the next highest amplitude data point of the trace
Peak Excursion value is ignored
— Mkr > Center Moves the current active selected marker to the center frequency for the
current frequency range displayed
— Mkr > RefLev Moves the current active marker to the acquisition
— Minimum (Not available in DTF RTSA SA or IQ Analyzer) Moves the active marker to
the LOWEST amplitude data point of the trace
— Min Search (IQ Analyzer RTSA and SA modes Only) Moves the active marker to the
LOWEST amplitude data point of the trace If a marker is turned off it is turned on before
the minimum search is performed
— Target (NA Mode and Pulse Measurements ONLY) Enter the Target value The marker
moves to the first occurrence of the Target value to the right of its current position The
FieldFox interpolates between measured data points to find the exact Target value to two
decimal points The interpolated Xaxis value is displayed in the marker readout or marker
table Subsequent presses of the Target softkey cause the marker to move to the right to Data Analysis Features
All about Markers
Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 491
find the next occurrence of the Target value When the marker reaches the end of the
stimulus range it wraps around and continues the search from the beginning of the
stimulus range
— Bandwidth ON OFF (NA Mode ONLY) Use to quickly toggle BW Markers ON and OFF
When OFF the marker table appears showing the X and Yaxis positions of all enabled
markers
— Bandwidth (NA Mode ONLY) Specify the level in dB from the peak or valley where
bandwidth is measured
——Negative numbers search for a Peak bandpass such as a filter S21 response
——Either of the following TWO methods can be used to search for a Valley or Notch
filter such as the S11 response of a bandpass filter
——Negative values search down from the TOP (MAX) of the response
——Positive values search up from the BOTTOM (MIN) of the notch
——If you first enter Negative then Positive values it may be necessary to press
Marker then More then Markers All Off
Figure 254 S21 of a filter with BW Markers and associated readout values The search
criteria is 3 dBData Analysis Features
All about Markers
492 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Figure 255 S11 of the same filter with same search criteria 3 dB
The same values would result from a search criteria of approximately +304
dB
After pressing Bandwidth four markers are automatically created to find the first negative or
positive bandpass over the displayed frequency range
Bandwidth Search can be used ONLY with Log Mag display format
— The following six values are displayed for Bandwidth Search
— BW Width of the filter (marker 2 freq) minus (marker 3 freq)
— Center Marker 4 frequency Mathematical midpoint between marker 2 and marker 3
— Q Center Frequency Bandwidth
— Loss Marker 1 amplitude
— Left Frequency of marker 2 or 3 (to left of marker 1)
— Right Frequency of marker 2 or 3 (to right of marker 1)
—Press Back to return to the previous menu
Press Peak Search then choose from the following
— Peak Moves the active marker to the HIGHEST amplitude data point of the trace Peak Excursion
value is ignored In SA Mode the LO feedthrough signal (0 Hz) is also ignored
— Next Peak Moves the active marker to the next highest amplitude peak from where it currently
resides
— Peak Left (Not IQA) Moves the active marker to the next data point to the left that meets the
Peak’ criteria When no data points to the left meet the Peak’ criteria the marker does not
move Data Analysis Features
All about Markers
Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 493
— Peak Right (Not IQA) Moves the active marker to the next data point to the right that meets the
Peak’ criteria When no data points to the right meet the Peak’ criteria the marker does not
move
The following applies to DTF Measurements ONLY
— More then
— Track Peaks ON OFF When Track Peaks is ON markers will find the new peak with every
sweep While in this Mode the markers can NOT be turned OFF or moved
— Find 3 Peaks Three markers are created and find the highest peaks (faults) on the trace
The following applies to IQA Measurements ONLY
— More then
— Min Search Moves the active marker to the minimum frequency (IQA displays time) currently
displayed on the screen
— Mkr Properties then
— Peak Criteria then refer to How to set Peak Criteria on page 495
— Delta Ref Fixed Enables or disables the delta reference fixed marker
— Peak Left (IQA Spectrum Only) Moves the active marker to the next data point to the left that
meets the Peak’ criteria When no data points to the left meet the Peak’ criteria the marker
does not move
— Peak Right (IQA Spectrum Only) Moves the active marker to the next data point to the right that
meets the Peak’ criteria When no data points to the right meet the Peak’ criteria the marker
does not move
Using Mkr5Mkr6 to find minsmaxs between Mkr1 and Mkr2 Mkr3 and Mkr4 (CAT and NA
Mode)
Use this feature to search minimum and maximum values within subspans defined by Mkr1 and
Mkr2 and Mkr3 and Mkr4 This facilitates measuring minimum and maximum values on your uplink
and downlink channels or only in the passband of a DUT Use in conjunction with marker table and
limit lines to verify your DUT’s signals and to adjust or tune as needed See also All about Limit
Lines on page 499Data Analysis Features
All about Markers
494 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
When markers are set to Normal Mkr5 and Mkr6 can be used to find the minimum and or
maximum values between Mkr1 and Mkr2 (using Mkr5) and Mkr3 and Mkr4 (using Mkr6) Refer to
Figure 256 on page 495
How to use the Mkr5 and Mkr6 markers to find maximums and minimums between your Normal
markers (CAT and NA Mode)
This section assumes you understand the previous marker features And that you have previously
positioned your markers (Mkr1 and Mkr2 or and Mkr3 and Mk4) and set the markers up as Normal
markers using How to create Markers on page 484 and other previous marker sections For
example if your markers are set to Delta change to Normal and verify the marker positions are
correct Refer to Figure 256 on page 495
— Then press Mkr >Tools
— Then More (For DTF TDR measurements and NA Mode skip this step and proceed to the next
step)
— Then Mkr5 & Mkr6 Search
— For Mkr1 & Mkr2 maximum or minimum value search
— Then Mkr5 Peak or
— Mkr5 Min
Or for Mkr3 & Mkr4 maximum or minimum value search
— Then Mkr6 Peak or
— Mkr6 Min
If your Markers are positioned and in Normal marker mode no changes are
made to the Mkr1 through Mkr4 settings

If your Markers are not previously positioned and in Normal marker mode
when you select the Mkr5 and Mkr6 maximum and minimum setting your
markers are set as follows
— Markers are all set to Normal
— Mkr1 and Mkr3 are set to 14 full span
— Mkr2 and Mkr4 are set to 34 full spanData Analysis Features
All about Markers
Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 495
Figure 256 CAT Mode Mkr5 and Mkr6 Search Example
What Is a Peak’
You define what the FieldFox considers a peak by setting the Peak Threshold and Peak Excursion
and for IQ Analyzer Only Cont Peak Search
These two peak criteria settings are set individually for each trace and for each mode (CAT SA or
NA)
These settings do NOT survive a FieldFox or Mode Preset
How to set Peak Criteria
—Press Mkr >Tools
—In CAT and NA modes
— Then Peak Search
— Then Peak Criteria
The Peak Threshold and Excursion settings are NOT available in DTF
measurements To make these settings create a nonDTF CAT mode
measurement then change the measurement back to DTFData Analysis Features
All about Markers
496 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
—In IQA (Spectrum) and SA mode
— Then More
——Then Mkr Properties
——Then Peak Criteria
—In IQA (Waveform) mode
— Then Mkr Properties
——Then Peak Criteria
After selecting Peak Criteria for CAT IQA NA or SA mode
——Then select the following
——Peak Threshold Minimum amplitude (dB) To be considered valid the peak
must be above the threshold level The valley on either side can be below the
threshold level
Default –190 for CAT and NA Modes –90 for SA Mode
——Peak Excursion The vertical distance (dB) between the peak and the valleys
on both sides To be considered a peak data values must fall off from the
peak on both sides by the excursion value Default 05 dB for CAT and NA
Modes 6 dB for SA Mode
——Cont Peak Search (IQ Analyzer Only) Enables or disables the Continuous
Peak Search marker When Continuous Peak Search is on a peak search is
automatically performed for the selected marker after each sweep The rules
for finding the peak are exactly the same as for Peak Search including the
use of peak criteria rules See also Using Markers (IQA) on page 256
——Delta Ref Fixed Enables or disables the delta reference fixed marker
CAT mode Loss measurements are displayed in positive values In these
cases the Peak Threshold setting is inverted For example Peak Threshold
20 will consider any peak that has less Loss than 20 dB to be validData Analysis Features
All about Markers
Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 497
Peak Excursion and Peak Threshold example—the settings for the trace in the following
image are
——Threshold –10 dB
——Excursion 1 dB
——Scale 1 dB Division
Peak A Valid Peak (Above Threshold and Excursion Settings)
Peak B Invalid Peak (Below 1 dB Excursion Setting)
Peak C Invalid Peak (Below –10 dB Threshold Setting)
Marker Functions
Marker functions are used to change FieldFox frequency or distance settings to those of the active
marker
How to use Marker Functions
— Activate the marker to move
— Then press Mkr >Tools
— Then Mkr > (this step not required for IQ Analyzer mode)
Then choose one of the following
— Mkr > Center (Not available in DTF IQ Analyzer (waveform) or SA mode with zero span) The
center frequency of the measurement becomes the value of the active marker The frequency
span is adjusted accordingly
— Mkr > Delay (NA mode ONLY) The group delay value of the active marker becomes the
electrical delay setting of the trace Learn how to set group delay format in Calibration
Settings on page 93e Learn more about electrical delay in Electrical Delay on page 97
— Mkr> RefLev (IQ Analyzer (NOT waveform) and SA mode ONLY) The acquisition becomes the
magnitude of the active marker
— Mkr>TuneFreq (SA mode with Tune & Listen ONLY) The Tune & Listen Frequency becomes the
frequency of the active marker
The following applies to DTF Measurements ONLYData Analysis Features
All about Markers
498 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
— More then
— Mkr>Start Distance The Start Distance of the measurement becomes the value of the active
marker Markers that would no longer appear on the screen are moved to the new Start
Distance
— Mkr>Stop Distance The Stop Distance of the measurement becomes the value of the active
marker Markers that would no longer appear on the screen are moved to the new Stop
Distance
IQ Analyzer (IQA) Marker Functions
The following Marker Functions are available in IQ Analyzer Mode ONLY (exceptions are noted)
— Noise Marker (Available in SA mode)
— BandInterval Power Marker (Available in SA mode)
— Coupled Markers
— Band Span
— Interval Band Span
—Continuous Peak Search
Learn more about Noise and BandInterval Power marker functions starting in the IQA chapter here
Noise Marker on page 256
SA Marker Functions
The following Marker Functions are available in SA Mode ONLY (exceptions are noted)
— Noise Marker (Available in IQ Analyzer mode)
— BandInterval Power Marker (Available in IQ Analyzer mode)
— Frequency Counter at Marker
— Audio Beep with Marker
— Time Zero Fixed Marker
Learn more about these marker functions starting in the SA chapter here Noise Marker on
page 190Data Analysis Features
All about Limit Lines
Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 499
All about Limit Lines
Limit lines are visual representations drawn on the FieldFox screen of the specified limits for a
measurement With this capability you can easily compare measured data versus specifications
Optionally you can enable an audible beep and display Pass or Fail information for each
measurement
— You can have up to as many limit line segments as there are data points for each measurement
trace allowing you to test all aspects of your measurements
— Limit lines are available in CAT Mode NA Mode NF Mode and SA Mode Power Meter Mode
uses different limit settings Learn more in Limits on page 344
— Limit lines and limit testing are NOT allowed in NA Mode with Smith Chart or Polar display
formats
— A simple Display Line is also available in IQ Analyzer NF and SA Modes ONLY Learn more in
Display Line (IQ NF and SA Modes Only) on page 503
— Limit lines can be saved and recalled with an *sta file Learn more inHow to Save and Recall
Limits on page 502 They can also be saved and recalled independently from the Limit softkeys
Learn more inHow to Save and Recall Limits on page 502
How to Create Fixed Limit Lines
There are two ways to build a Fixed limit line
1 1 Build (limits) From a Trace Learn how in Build From Trace on page 500
2 Enter XY data points into the onscreen editor The limit line is formed as the FieldFox
connects the dots’ on the screen To create frequency gaps that are NOT tested use separate
limit lines The Xaxis values for two lines can overlap
—Press Limit 8
— Then Edit Limits A limit line table appears
— Use the Up Down arrows and rotary knob to navigate the cursor to the following editable cells
— Description Press Edit then enter a description for the limit line using the FieldFox
labeler Learn how in How to use the FieldFox labeler on page 546
— FixedRelative – Press Edit to toggle between the following
——Fixed the limit line does not move The XY coordinates are absolute locations on
the screen
——Relative the limit line moves relative to the center frequency and acquisition
Note It is easiest to first create Fixed Limits then change this setting to Relative
Learn more Relative Limit Lines on page 500
— UpperLower – Press Edit to toggle between the following
IMPORTANT For CAT and NA modes limit lines do not apply
where F1 F2Data Analysis Features
All about Limit Lines
500 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
——Upper FAILS any measured data point ABOVE the line
——Lower FAILS any measured data point BELOW the line
— OffOn – Press Edit to toggle between the following
——On Limit line is drawn on the screen and PASSFAIL testing occurs
——Off Limit line is NOT drawn on the screen and testing does NOT occur
— Frequency – Enter a numeric Xaxis value of the data point
— Amplitude – Enter a numeric Yaxis value of the data point
—Press Add then choose from the following
— Add Point Adds a blank XY data point below the cursor
— Add Limit Adds a default limit line below the current limit
—Press Clear then choose from the following
— Clear Point Removes the XY data point on which the cursor resides
— Clear Limit Removes the limit Line on which the cursor resides
— Clear All Removes ALL limit lines
—Press Relative Limit Lines
Relative limit lines are XY coordinates that are referenced to the center frequency (Xaxis) and
acquisition (Yaxis)
Use relative limits to test devices or signals that are identical except for the center frequency or
amplitude With relative limit lines in place you change the center frequency of the measurement
and the limits look as though they are in the same location
The same is true for acquisition When you expect to measure a different power level instead of
changing the Yaxis value of all of the fixed limits simply change to relative limits The limits will
then remain a constant Yaxis distance from the acquisition
Each limit line can be changed at any time from Fixed to Relative and Relative to Fixed
How to Create a Relative Limit Line
The easiest way to create a Relative limit line is to create a Fixed Limit at a specific center frequency
and acquisition Learn how Relative Limit Lines on page 500 Then change the limit line to
Relative The XY data points will be recalculated relative to the center frequency and acquisition
Build From Trace
A limit line can be built from an existing trace One XY point is made from each measured data
point Then using an offset value you can shift the limit line UP for upper limits or DOWN for lower
limitsData Analysis Features
All about Limit Lines
Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 501
Once limit lines have been built from the trace changes that you make to the trace such as
frequency range do NOT change the limits However the limit line properties can be edited just like
standard limit lines
Figure 257 A lower limit line (red) built from the trace (yellow) shifted down 5 dB
How to Build Limit Lines from a Trace
— Select the trace from which limits will be built
—Press Limit 8
— Then Edit
— Then Build From Trace A limit line table appears
— Use the arrows to select ON
—Use Offset to shift the limit line UP or DOWN Learn how below
Limit Options
How to set Limit Options
—Press Exit if the limit table is visible
— Then Options
— Then choose from the following
— Beep
Build from Trace is NOT allowed for traces with more than 1001 data
pointsData Analysis Features
All about Limit Lines
502 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
——On Pass Audible beep sounds when a sweep passes
——On Fail Audible beep sounds when a sweep fails
——Off No audible beep sounds
— Warning On Off Shows Pass or Fail indication on the display with each sweep Data
points that fail are highlighted
— Limit Type Then Fixed or Relative
— Offset Shifts the limit line up or down Enter an offset value using the rotary knob the
arrows or by entering a value with the number keys
——Enter a positive offset to shift the limit line UP usually used with UPPER limits
——Enter a negative offset to shift the limit line DOWN usually used with LOWER
limits
— Margin Shifts the limit line up or down like an offset but only virtually The limit line does
NOT appear to move Enter a Margin value using the rotary knob the arrows or by
entering a value with the number keys
Enter a positive margin to virtually shift the limit line UP
Enter a negative margin to virtually shift the limit line DOWN
How to Save and Recall Limits
—Press SaveRecall then Device to set the Device (Internal SD card or USB flash drive) to be
used for the Save or Recall Learn more in Set File Type and Select Device on page 549
— Then press Limit
— Then choose from the following
— Save Limits After limit lines have been defined this saves the line definition to a file on the
specified device
— Recall Limits Recalls a limit Line definition from the specified deviceData Analysis Features
All about Limit Lines
Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 503
Display Line (IQ NF and SA Modes Only)
A display line is a simple horizontal line that can be placed at any amplitude level on the SA screen
or set to any level in IQA Use a display line as mental guide for visual feedback A display line is
similar to a Limit Line except that no PASSFAIL testing occurs A display line is easier to create
than a Limit Line Learn more in All about Limit Lines on page 499
Figure 258 Display Line with Annotations (SA mode shown but others are similar)
How to create and move a Display Line
—Press Limit __8
— Then Display Line OFF ON
— Then enter a Yaxis value using the arrows or the rotary knob then press Enter Or enter a
value using the numeric keypad and press a suffix key or press EnterData Analysis Features
All about Trace Math
504 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
All about Trace Math
Trace Math is available in CAT (excluding DTF measurements) NA Mode and FOPS (under USB
Power Meter mode)
A trace is a series of measurement data points that are connected to form a line This live’ data
trace is updated as data points are measured
A memory trace is a live trace that has been stored in the FieldFox volatile memory It then becomes
static meaning it is not updated with measurements It can be displayed on the screen by itself or
with a data trace for comparison purposes
— In NA mode memory traces are the same color as data)
— In CAT mode and FOPS the data trace is displayed in yellow and the memory trace is displayed
in blue
How to display data and memory traces
—Press Trace 6
—Press Math and Memory then Data>Mem to store the current live trace into memory A beep’
sounds to confirm the data trace has been saved to memory There is no display annotation that
indicates that the memory trace has been stored
—Press Data to view only the data trace
—Press Memory to view only the memory trace
—Press Data & Memory to view both the live trace and the stored memory trace
How to perform Trace Math
Trace math is performed between a live trace and a memory trace When one of the following math
operations are selected the yellow data trace displays the current measurement with the selected
trace math applied The math operation symbol indicated below in [brackets] is displayed on the
lower left corner of the screen
—Press Trace 6
— If not already stored press Data>Mem to store the current live trace into memory
— Then Data Math
— Then choose one of the following
— Data + Mem [D+M] Current measurement data is added to the data in memory
— Data – Mem DM] Current measurement data is subtracted from the data in memory
Noise Figure (NF—Opt 356) does not have trace math but does have the
ability to display data and memory traces Refer to How to display data
and memory tracesData Analysis Features
All about Trace Math
Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 505
— Data Mem [DM] Current measurement data is divided by the data in memory
— Math Off [Data] Displays trace data with NO math applied
About Math Operations
Data Memory and Data Memory math operations are performed on complex linear data before it
is formatted Because data is often viewed in log format it is not always clear which of the two
math operations should be used Remember dividing linear data is the same as subtracting
logarithmic data The following illustrates in general when to use each operation
Use Data Memory for normalization purposes such as when comparing traces before and
after a change is made or when measuring trace noise In the following table the DataMem
values intuitively show the differences between traces It is not obvious what DataMem is
displaying
Use Data Memory to show the relative differences between two signals Use for comparison of
very small signals such as the S11 match of two connectors
In the following table DataMem shows both pairs of connectors to have the same 2 dB difference
However the second pair of connectors have much better S11 performance (–50 and –52) The
relative significance is shown in DataMem
Values to compare DataMem DataMem
05 dB and 06 dB 01 dB –39 dB
05 dB and 07 dB 02 dB –33 dB
Values to compare DataMem DataMem
–10 dB and –12 dB 2 dB –24 dB
–50 dB and –52 dB 2 dB –64 dBData Analysis Features
All about Scale Settings
506 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
All about Scale Settings
How to Use Scale Settings
Adjust the Yaxis scale to see the relevant portions of the data trace The Yaxis is divided into 10
graticules
This setting can be changed at any time without affecting calibration accuracy
How to set Scale
—Press Scale Amptd
— Then choose from the following three methods
1 Autoscale Automatically adjusts the Yaxis to comfortably fit the Minimum and Maximum
amplitude of the trace on the screen
2 Set Scale acquisition and Reference Position
— Scale Manually enter a scale per division to view specific areas of the trace
— Ref Level Manually set the value of the reference line Enter a negative value
by pressing RunHold (+) either before or after typing a value
— Ref Pos Manually set the position of the reference line Values must be
between 0 (TOP line) and 10 (BOTTOM line)
— Range Manually set the absolute power (dBm)
3 Set Top and Bottom graticule values The scale per division is calculated
— Top to set the value of the Top graticule
— Bottom to set the value of the Bottom graticule
— Enter a negative value by pressing RunHold (+) either before or after typing
a value
IMPORTANT Some of the scale settings do not apply to all of the modes
Scale annotation on the FieldFox screen
Reference Line red arrow
Ref Level 40 dB
Ref Position 1
Scale 2 dB per divisionData Analysis Features
All about Scale Settings
Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 507
Averaging (CAT NA Power Meter Channel Scanner and Pulse
Measurement Modes Only)
Trace Averaging helps to smooth a trace to reduce the effects of random noise on a measurement
The FieldFox computes each data point based on the average of the same data point over several
consecutive sweeps
Average Count determines the number of sweeps to average the higher the average count the
greater the amount of noise reduction
An average counter is shown in the left edge of the screen as Avg N This shows the number of
previous sweeps that have been averaged together to form the current trace When the counter
reaches the specified count then a running average’ of the last N sweeps is displayed Average
Count 1 means there is NO averaging
This setting can be changed at any time without affecting calibration accuracy
How to set Trace Averaging
—Press BW 2
— Then Average N where N is the current count setting
— Enter a value using the numeric keypad Enter 1 for NO averaging
—Press Enter
— While Trace Averaging is in process press Sweep 3 then Restart to restart the averaging at 1
Averaging is often used to increase the dynamic range of a measurement
To achieve the highest dynamic range select NA mode and reduce the IF
Bandwidth setting Learn more about dynamic range in Increase Dynamic
Range on page 107Data Analysis Features
All about Scale Settings
508 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 509
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
26 System Settings
In this Chapter
RunHold on page 510
Preset on page 511
User Preset on page 511
Audio (Volume) Control on page 512
Display (Settings) on page 513
Display Brightness on page 513
Display Colors on page 513
Trace Width on page 514
Title on page 514
Edit Keywords on page 515
Full Screen Mode on page 515
Preferences on page 515
Quick Settings Table on page 515
Save and Reset Preferences on page 516
Global Settings (Overview) on page 517
——Language on page 517
——Battery Saver on page 518
——Startup Mode on page 519
File folders on page 522
Alpha Numeric Editing on page 523
File Saving Naming Options on page 523
System Configuration on page 525
Options (Licensing) on page 525
GNSS (GPS+) and GPS on page 526
Frequency Reference Source on page 530 510 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
System Settings
RunHold
Variable Voltage Source (Opt 309) on page 532
Security Level on page 533
Date and Time Format and Time Zone Settings on page 533
LAN Settings on page 535
Power ON on page 536
FieldFox Package Installer (N995xA N996xA and applies to
N991xA2xA3xA units with serial number prefixes ≥5607) on
page 537
Date and Time Format and Time Zone Settings on page 533
Service Diagnostics on page 539
See Also
Install the LithiumIon Battery on page 28
FieldFox High Temperature Protection on page 30
RunHold
The RunHold key determines whether the FieldFox sweeps continuously or
does NOT sweep but holds the display results of the last sweep that was
performed
Use Hold to conserve battery power or to allow you to save or analyze the
results of a specific measurement sweep
The current sweep mode is shown on the screen as
— Continuous
—Hold
— is displayed while a single sweep occurs
How to perform a single sweep while in Hold
—Press Sweep 3
— Then choose one of the following
— Single Automatically sets Continuous OFF (Hold) and causes
FieldFox to make ONE measurement sweep then hold for the next
Single key press
— SA Mode ONLY – With Continuous OFF each successive RunHold
press also causes a single sweepKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 511
System Settings
Preset
— Continuous ON OFF Makes continuous sweeps This is the typical
setting when battery power is not critical
Preset
The Preset key restores the FieldFox measurement settings to a known
condition You can preset the entire instrument or just the current Mode (CAT
SA and so forth)
When Preset the FieldFox CalReady calibration is recalled for use in CAT and
NA Modes Learn more in CalReady on page 123
In addition to all Preference settings the following settings always survive
Preset and Mode Preset
— External Reference state (see Frequency Reference Source on page 530)
— SA Scale and Units (see Scale and Units on page 153)
— SA Correction states (see Field Strength Measurements on page 156)
— VVM Display Resolution (see Display Resolution on page 374)
— Marker Peak Excursion and Threshold (see What Is a Peak’ on page 495)
How to Preset the FieldFox
—Press Preset
— Then choose one of the following
— Preset Returns ALL Modes to the factory default settings
— Mode Preset Returns only the current Mode to the factory default
settings The current settings for all other Modes remain
User Preset
User Preset allows you to store custom settings for each mode then recall the
settings when the Preset key is pressed Your custom settings are saved to a
standard State file (UserPresetsta) However unlike State files calibration
data is NOT saved Learn more ab0out State files in Set File Type and Select
Device on page 549
How to set User Preset
— Make your custom settings for all modes
— When finished press Preset
—Then Save User Preset then select Yes to confirm 512 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
System Settings
Audio (Volume) Control
—Then User Preset ON
How to recall User Preset
—Press Preset
— Then choose from the following
— Preset (User) The entire UserPresetsta file is recalled ALL modes
assume the settings that were in place when the User Preset was
saved The active mode is the mode that was visible when the file was
saved
— Mode Preset (User) The settings for only the current mode are
recalled from UserPresetsta
Audio (Volume) Control
System volume control is a FieldFox global setting which sets speaker volume
for ALL success beeps key press clicks and individual features that use the
FieldFox speaker such as SA Mode Tune and Listen
The volume control setting remains through a FieldFox Preset To cause your
volume control setting to remain through a FieldFox shut down save the
setting as a Preference Learn how in Save and Reset Preferences on
page 516
How to set the FieldFox Volume Control
—Press System 7
—Then Volume
— Then use the arrows the rotary knob or numeric keypad to enter a
value between 0 (lowest volume) and 100 (highest volume)
— Only the instrument settings are saved to UserPresetsta No trace data
or calibration data is saved
— User Preset ON OFF is saved as a Preference setting Like all
preferences this setting survives a FieldFox shut down and power ON
Therefore when User Preset is ON during shut down the FieldFox will
load UserPresetsta when it is powered ON
— To return to Factory Preset select User Preset OFF The contents of
UserPresetsta remain stored on the FieldFox When User Preset is OFF
you can also set the Startup Mode preference that determines which
mode will be visible after powering ON Learn more in Startup Mode
on page 519
Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 513
System Settings
Display (Settings)
—Press Volume again and select Mute to quickly turn OFF the speaker
volume
—Press Volume again to set volume ON to the previous volume control
Display (Settings)
You can adjust the FieldFox for optimum viewing in a wide range of lighting
conditions
Display settings are persistent after a FieldFox shut down Save the display
settings as Preferences Learn how in Save and Reset Preferences on
page 516
Display Brightness
Change the brightness of the background
How to set Display Brightness
—Press System 7
—Then Display
—Then Brightness
— Use the arrows the rotary knob or numeric keypad to enter a
value between 0 and 100
Display Colors
Change Display Colors to alter the viewing scheme
How to set Display Colors
—Press System 7
—Then Display
—Then Display Colors
— Then choose one of the following
Clean the transflective screen with gentle and minimal wiping using
Isopropyl alcohol applied to a lintfree cloth
Indoor 514 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
System Settings
Display (Settings)
Trace Width
You can set width of all displayed traces on the FieldFox This may allow better
viewing or enhance the look of screen images This setting can be saved with
Preferences
How to set Trace Width
—Press System 7
—Then Display
—Then Display Colors
—Then More
—Then Trace Width
— Then choose one of the following
— Normal Standard widthWide
— Wide Enhanced width
Title
A custom title can be made to appear in the upperleft corner of the FieldFox
screen The title can contain up to approximately 65 alphanumeric characters
To view the Title area see the Screen Tour in Screen Tour on page 41
How to add or edit a Title
—Press System 7
—Then Display
—Then Title
Outdoor Dusk
Outdoor Clouds
Outdoor Sun
Night VisionKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 515
System Settings
Preferences
— Then enter or edit a title using the FieldFox labeler This is the same labeler
function that is used to name files Learn how to use the labeler in How to
use the FieldFox labeler on page 546
—Then Title ON OFF to make the title appear and disappear from the screen
Edit Keywords
During a file save operation keywords can be quickly appended to other text to
create unique filenames The Edit Keywords feature allows you to create
custom keywords Learn all about Edit Keywords in Edit Keywords on
page 555
Full Screen Mode
Full Screen Mode maximizes the display of trace The screen annotations and
the soft keys are removed
—Press System 7
—Then Full Screen
To Exit full screen Mode press any key
Preferences
FieldFox preferences are settings that survive a shut down When your FieldFox
is turned OFF then back ON these settings remain All preference settings can
be restored to their factory defaults Learn how in Save and Reset
Preferences on page 516
There are two ways to make FieldFox preference settings
— From softkey selections throughout the FieldFox menu structure Do this to
temporarily try a setting then press Save Current Preferences Learn how
in the next section
— From the Quick Settings table
—Also refer to Audio (Volume) Control on page 512 and Display
(Settings) on page 513
Quick Settings Table
All preferences can be set from the Quick Settings table They are immediately
saved as Preferences when Done is pressed
How to view and change Preference Quick Settings
—Press System 7
—Then Preferences 516 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
System Settings
Preferences
—Then Preferences
—Press Next Page and Previous Page to view all settings
— To change a setting
— Use the arrows to highlight a setting
—Then press Edit The current setting changes to yellow
— Some settings require you to press a softkey to change the value
Otherwise use the numeric keypad arrows or rotary knob
to change the value
— When finished changing a value press Done Edit
— When finished changing ALL preferences press Done All changes are
immediately saved as Preferences
— To exit the editing session without saving changes press Esc at any time
Learn more about these preference settings
Save and Reset Preferences
All preference settings can be made at one time from the Quick Settings table
Settings
Global Settings (Overview) on page 517
— Language on page 517
— Battery Saver on page 518
— Startup Mode on page 519
Display (Settings) on page 513
Audio (Volume) Control on page 512 and Audio on page 520
Date and Time on page 521
GNSS (GPS+) and GPS on page 526
File folders on page 522
Alpha Numeric Editing on page 523 (ie ABCQwerty keyboard styles)
File Saving Naming Options on page 523
CAT (Distance Units) on page 523
CATNA on page 524
SA on page 525Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 517
System Settings
Preferences
All settings that can be saved as preferences (except Battery Saver and Startup
Mode) can also be made from individual softkey selections throughout the
FieldFox menu structure However they remain through a FieldFox shut down
ONLY when the current settings are saved as preferences
The table above shows a list of all of these settings and where they are
discussed in this User’s Guide
How to save current settings as Preferences
— Using softkeys configure the settings as you would like them to remain
—Press System 7
—Then Preferences
—Then Save Current Settings There is a beep when your settings have been
saved
—Press Reset Preferences to restore the factory default settings
Global Settings (Overview)
Choose the Global Settings values (Language Batter Saver and Startup
Mode) See also Quick Settings Table on page 515
How to select Global Settings
—Press System 7
—Then Preferences
—Then Preferences
— Then use arrow softkeys or the knob to select Global Settings
—Then Edit for each of the following
— Language (see)
— Batter Save Mode (see)
——On
——Off (default)
— Startup Mode (see)
—Then Done Edit (for each change in setting)
Language
Choose the language in which to display FieldFox softkeys and other
messages Select Save Current Settings to set this language as a preference 518 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
System Settings
Preferences
How to select a Language
—Press System 7
—Then Preferences
—Then Language
— Then choose from the following
— English
— Espanol – Spanish
— Deutsch – German
— Italiano – Italian
— Francais – French
— Russian
— Japanese
— Chinese
— Turkish
Battery Saver
When the battery saver is OFF the RF source power is left ON at the end of the
sweep which consumes more battery power This feature is used in CAT NA
VVM modes and SA mode when the internal source is turned ON
Battery Saver is the ONLY FieldFox setting that must be made as a Preference
from the Quick Settings table This setting remains until you change it again
How to set Battery Saver
—Press System 7
—Then Preferences
—Then Preferences
— Then scroll to Global Settings > Battery Saver
— ON – To conserve battery power the RF source power is turned OFF
at the end of each CAT NA and VVM mode sweep This behavior
does not impact FieldFox measurements
— OFF – Source power is kept ON at all times including during trigger
Hold mode and between single sweep acquisitions The RF source
stays at the stop frequency until another sweep begins This provides
The FieldFox internal temps will run 2°C – 5°C cooler with the Battery
Saver on (the temperature range is dependent on the ambient temp)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 519
System Settings
Display
a constant uninterrupted RF output from the RF OUT port This
behavior also provides the highest trace stability sweeptosweep
which may only be evident while using either single sweep or
RunHold With Battery Saver OFF the use of a full battery charge is
reduced by approximately 45 minutes
Startup Mode
The Startup Mode setting determines the mode that becomes active (visible)
when User Preset is set to OFF (Factory Preset) and the FieldFox is powered
ON See User Preset on page 511
How to setup Startup Mode
—Press System 7
—Then Preferences
—Then Preferences
— Then scroll to Global Settings > Startup Mode and press Edit
— Then repeatedly press the Startup Mode to scroll through the available
choices
— is the factory default mode for your FieldFox model
— Builtin Power Meter Mode is NOT allowed as a Startup Mode
Display
Choose the Display values (Display Colors Trace Width Brightness Title
Enabled Title) See Display (Settings) on page 513
How to select Display values
—Press System 7
—Then Preferences
—Then Preferences
— Then use arrow softkeys or the knob to select Display
—Then Edit for each of the following
—Display Colors
—Indoor (default)
—Night Vision
—Outdoor Sun
—Outdoor Dusk 520 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
System Settings
Audio
—Outdoor Clouds
—Trace Width
— Normal (default)
—Wide
—Brightness
— 0 to 100 (80 default)
— Title Enabled
—On
— Off (default)
—Title
User Title (default)
—Then Done Edit (for each change in setting)
Audio
Choose the Audio values (Mute Volume) See also Audio (Volume) Control
on page 512
How to select Audio values
—Press System 7
—Then Preferences
—Then Preferences
— Then use arrow softkeys or the knob to select Audio
—Then Edit for each of the following
—Mute
——On
——Off (default)
—Volume
— 0 to 100 (default is 50)
—Then Done Edit (for each change in setting)
Setting trace width to Wide will result in slower trace refresh ratesKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 521
System Settings
Date and Time
Date and Time
Choose the Date and Time values (Date and Time Time Format Date Format
and Time Zone) See also Date and Time Format and Time Zone Settings on
page 533
How to select CAT distance units
—Press System 7
—Then Preferences
—Then Preferences
— Then use arrow softkeys or the knob to select Date and Time
—Then Edit for each of the following
—Date and Time
——Edit as needed (Refer to Date and Time Format and Time
Zone Settings on page 533)
——Time Format
——Date Format
——Time Zone
—Then Done Edit (for each change in setting)
GPS – Distance Settings
Choose the GPS values (GPS State Elevation Unit GPS Sync Clock Display LatLon
Format) See also GNSS (GPS+) and GPS on page 526
How to select CAT distance units
— Press System 7
— Then Preferences
— Then Preferences
— Then use arrow softkeys or the knob to select GPS
— Then Edit for each of the following
—GPS State
——Off (default)
——Internal
——External 522 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
System Settings
File folders
—Elevation Unit
——Meters (default)
——Feet
——Inches
—GPS Sync Lock
——Off (default)
——Internal
——External
—Display
——On
——Off
— LatLon Format
——dddº mm’ sssss
——ddddddddddº
——dddº mmmmmmm’
— Then Done Edit (for each change in setting)
File folders
When enabled FieldFox uses the last selected Device and Folder location as the
default device location after instrument power cycle
How to set File Folders
—Press System 7
—Then Preferences
—Then Preferences
— Then scroll to User Folder Persist
— User Folder Persist (OnOff) – Defaults to the current Device and
folder location at power up Toggle User Folder Persist OnOff when a
new Device location is selected location
— User Folder – displays the default folder location
Before setting the preferences for the File Folders you must select the
Device and Folder locations Refer to Chapter 28 File ManagementKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 523
System Settings
Alpha Numeric Editing
— User Device – displays the default device location
See also Alpha Numeric Editing and File Saving Naming Options
Alpha Numeric Editing
— Keyboard Style – Toggles through QwertyABC style keyboards that the
Labeler displays Refer to How to use the FieldFox labeler on page 546
File Saving Naming Options
— Prefix – Displays the current choice for Prefix Choices are User Last File
(default) or Off Refer to Prefixes and Suffixes for Filenames in Prefixes and
Suffixes for Filenames on page 555
— Auto Append – Displays the current choice for Auto Append to a filename
(Suffix) Choices are Off (default) Number Date Refer to Prefixes and
Suffixes for Filenames on page 555
CAT (Distance Units)
Choose the CAT distance units (ie Meters (default) Feet Inches) See DTF
Units on page 69
How to select CAT distance units
—Press System 7
—Then Preferences
—Then Preferences
—Then Edit for each of the following
— Distance Units
——Meters (default)
——Feet
——Inches
— TDR Sweep
——Cable (default and the most accurate)
——Auto
—Then Done Edit (after each change in setting) 524 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
System Settings
CATNA
CATNA
Choose the CATNA settings for SnP file save default factory error corrections
extended cal default See also > What Data Processing functions are
included in saved SNP Data on page 551
How to select CATNA defaults
—Press System 7
—Then Preferences
—Then Preferences
— Then use arrow softkeys or the knob to select CATNA
—Then Edit for each of the following
—SnP File Save
——Default
——Advanced
— Default Factory Error Corr (N995xA6xA Only)
——Enhanced Response
——Full 2 Port
— Extended Cal Default (N995xA6xA Only)
——On
——Off (default on models >6 GHz)
—Then Done Edit (after each change in setting)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 525
System Settings
SA
SA
Choose the SA setting for Individual ment Control default See also
Alignments on page 180
How to select SA defaults
—Press System 7
—Then Preferences
—Then Preferences
— Then use arrow softkeys or the knob to select SA
—Then Edit for each of the following
— Individual ment Control
——On (Default recommended)
——Off
—Then Done Edit (after changing setting)
System Configuration
Options (Licensing)
You can view and install options on your FieldFox To see a comprehensive list
of the options that are available view the FieldFox Configuration Guide at
httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59909836ENpdf
How to view the Installed Options
—Press System 7
—Then System Configuration
—Then Options (Licensing)
—Then Show Options
The currently installed options are listed
How to Install Options
Alic file must already be on a USB Flash Drive To learn how to obtain alic file
visit httpwwwkeysightcomfindsoftwarelicense
Insert the USB Flash Drive in the FieldFox
—Press System 7
—Then System Configuration 526 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
System Settings
System Configuration
—Then Options (Licensing)
—Then Install Options The FieldFox reads validates then installs the options
— Press and hold the power button to shut down then restart the FieldFox
How to Delete ALL Options
Deleting individual options is NOT supported
—Press System 7
—Then System Configuration
—Then Options (Licensing)
—Then Advanced
—Then Delete All Options
After a warning message all options on the FieldFox are deleted
For more information about Licensing see the FieldFox Service Manual at
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfox
GNSS (GPS+) and GPS
GPS (Global Positioning System) allows you to stamp’ each data trace with
your physical position in latitudelongitudeelevation format This can be
useful when making measurements on cell towers or other antennas at remote
locations
— With Option 307 GPS is available with the builtin receiver accessed
through the toppanel SMA (f) connector This connector has a 33 VDC
bias voltage which is switched ON when GPS is set to Internal This system
is designed for use with an active antenna such as the Keysight
N9910X825
— Without Option 307 GPS is usable ONLY with an external GPS receiver that
is shipped with Microsoft Streets and Trips and AutoRoute The GPS
receiver is NOT available from Keysight Only the GPS USB receiver is used
with the FieldFox Therefore it is NOT necessary to purchase the very latest
version of the map software
Delete All CFG Options is to be used by Service Personnel ONLY
IMPORTANT The FieldFox may display Ant OPEN even when a GPS
antenna is connected to the FieldFox If the GPS antenna is powered by
another power supply and has a DC blocking capacitor where the feed is
connected to FieldFox then minimal amounts of current will be drawn
from the FieldFox so the instrument will display Ant OPEN The
threshold to detect the presence of an antenna is approximately 16 mAKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 527
System Settings
System Configuration
How to make GPS settings
GPS settings are the same with or without Option 307
— Your GPS settings can be saved with Preferences Learn more in Quick
Settings Table on page 515
—Press System 7
—Then System Configuration
—Then GPS
— Then choose from the following
— Display ON OFF Enable and disable the GPS display on the FieldFox main
window
— GPS
— OFF Disable GPS (default setting)
— External Enable GPS using an external customersupplied USB
dongle device A check is made to detect a USB GPS device at the
USB connectors
— Internal Enable GPS using Option 307 – Builtin GPS Connect a
GPS antenna to the toppanel GPS connector Learn more about
additional GPS antenna accessories at
httpwwwkeysightcomfindfieldfox Internal is set automatically
when Frequency Reference Source is set to GPS Learn more in
Frequency Reference Source on page 530
When Internal or External is selected a search is made for satellites overhead
GPS works best when outdoors and in full view of the open sky When several
satellites are found the following screen appears (when Display is set to ON)
and is updated frequently
As the bar graph count exceeds 9 bars the dB text is dropped from the
number displayed on the bar Units for CNo are dBHz 528 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
System Settings
System Configuration
Figure 261 GPS Display
— The left portion of the screen displays satellites and the corresponding
number on the adjacent Satellite Power chart
— The right portion of the screen displays Satellite Power Carrier to Noise
(CNo) dBHz values on the tops of the satellite power chart
GPS Status
With GPS enabled the following is displayed at the top of the FieldFox screen
The following icons (located in RED circle above) indicate the GPS lock status
GPS ON and locked on satellites
GPS ON but NOT locked on satellites
GPS ON but no GPS receiver is present or detected
The following annotation (BLUE circle in above image) indicates the INTERNAL
toppanel antenna status
—Ant INIT – antenna status initializing
The CNo values returned are not calibrated at the factory or warranted for
accuracy The numbers retrieved are passed unprocessed directly from the
GPS receiver in useKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 529
System Settings
System Configuration
—Ant OK – antenna present and working
—Ant OPEN – antenna is not drawing DC bias current This could occur when
an active antenna is not connected properly or the antenna does not require
DC bias current Antennas that do not require bias current can still provide
an accurate GPS reading
—Ant SHORT – antenna center pin has been shorted to ground The internal
bias circuitry is disabled for about one minute then reenabled You can
also press GPS OFF then GPS Internal to quickly reenable the antenna
bias
More GNSS and GPS settings
—Press System 7
—Then System Configuration
—Then GNSS (GPS+) or GPS (depending on options) > GNSS Settings
— Then choose from the following
— Enable and disable the synchronization of the FieldFox internal clock to the
GPS UTC time standard
— ON The FieldFox clock is synchronized and updated approximately
once every hour to the time of the GPS clock
— OFF The FieldFox clock is NOT synchronized with GPS When set to
OFF after Sync was ON the date and time does NOT revert back to
the settings before the clock was synchronized
— LatLon Format Change the format of the GPS display on the FieldFox
screen Choose from
— ddd°mm’ sssss degrees minutes seconds (default setting)
— ddd°mmmmmmm’ degrees minutes fractional minutes
— dddddddddd° decimal degrees
— None LatLon is not displayed
— Elevation Unit Choose from
— m (Meters)
— Feet
— Inches
The GPS Sync setting has the same restrictions as the Date and Time
setting Learn more in Date and Time on page 521 530 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
System Settings
System Configuration
Saving Data with GPS Enabled
GPS position and clock data are included when data is saved with the following
files types *csv *SnP State State+Trace data save
A warning is shown if the GPS is ON but unlocked at time of save or if the GPS
feature is ON but no GPS is physically present at time of save
The following is a sample S1P file with GPS information
GPS Latitude 38 2887717 N
GPS Longitude 122 4266625 W
GPS TimeStamp 06252010 162448
GPS Seconds Since Last Read 2s
Saving GPS Display Data
To save the current GPS data displayed
—Press SaveRecall 9
—Then Save File Picture (PNG)
— A menu opens to enable naming the file you are saving (*png)
Frequency Reference Source
The FieldFox internal frequency reference source is used to make accurate and
stable measurements To improve measurement accuracy and stability you
can use a highlystable external 10 MHz reference source or a precision timing
signal provided with Builtin GPS (Opt 307)
The Frequency Reference setting will survive a Factory Preset or Mode Preset
and is saved as part of the Instrument State When resuming after Standby the
FieldFox will display an Unlock message while it acquires a lock to an external
or GPS source
How to select Frequency Reference Source
—Press System 7
—Then System Configuration
—Then Frequency Ref
—Then Freq Ref Source
— Then choose from the following
— Int Internal frequency referenceKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 531
System Settings
System Configuration
— Ext External frequency reference Connect the 10 MHz External
Reference to the Ref InTrig In SMA (f) connector on the FieldFox top
panel The FieldFox may take up to 10 seconds to lock to a valid
External Reference source
— GPS Available ONLY with Builtin GPS (Opt 307) When selected the
internal GPS is immediately enabled and a search for satellites
begins When satellites are found the precision timing signal is NOT
used directly but is used to correct the absolute frequency of the
internal reference many times per second
Holdover mode
When the GPS signal is lost the last GPS reading is used as a holdover
correction value for the internal reference The holdover correction value is no
longer used but instead the factoryset correction value is used when any of
the following occur
— when GPS is disabled
— when Reference Source is set to Internal
— when the FieldFox resumes from Standby mode or shut down
Frequency Reference Status
When switched to Ext or GPS one of the following annotations appears in the
lowerleft corner of the screen
— EXT R – External reference is selected
— GPS R – GPS reference is selected
— GPS H – Internal Reference is used with last holdover’ correction reading
If the FieldFox does NOT find an appropriate Ext or GPS reference signal then
Ext Ref UNLOCKED is displayed in the lowerleft corner of the graticule area
This can occur when any of the following conditions exist
— NO reference signal is present
— A low or very highlevel external reference signal is present For best
results the signal should be between –5 dBm and +5 dBm
— The external reference is offfrequency
To learn the expected measurement accuracy when connected to a frequency
reference source see the FieldFox specifications in SpecificationsData
Sheet on page 589
Reference OUT
The internal 10 MHz frequency reference is available from the RefTrig output
connector on the rightside panel Use this signal as a common frequency
reference when making measurements using external equipment See this
connector in Top Panel on page 38 532 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
System Settings
System Configuration
Variable Voltage Source (Opt 309)
An internal DC source available with Opt 309 may be used to provide power
for external devices The maximum power available is 8 watts
The voltage is output through an SMB (m) output connector located on the
leftside panel See the connector in Left Side Panel on page 40
An optional SMB (f) to BNC (m) biastee power cable is available with Keysight
part number N9910X713
The following status line is provided near the top of the FieldFox screen
Figure 262
How to make Voltage Source settings
—Press System 7
—Then System Configuration
—Then Voltage Source
—Then Source ON OFF to enable and disable the voltage source output
— Then Voltage xxx V Using arrows the rotary knob or numeric
keypad enter a value between 0001 and 32 volts
IMPORTANT Noise Figure mode uses DC variable voltage source (VVS) –
(Option 309) during the measurements The voltage might be as high as
28V during the measurement During the noise figure measurement
always make sure there are no voltage sensitive devices connected to the
DC SMB output port Refer to Chapter 24 Noise Figure Mode (Option 356
– CPU2 Only) on page 433
When you initially change the FieldFox mode to Noise Figure the FieldFox
displays the following message for ten seconds
Ensure your Noise Source is connected to the VVS DC Output
It (VVS) will be driven up to +28V during the measurement
Voltage Source Status Line
1 Voltage source state ON OFF TRIPPED
2 Voltage setting from 100 V to 3200 V with01 V resolution
3 Current The amount of current (in Amperes) being drawn from the source
4 Max Current A conservative estimate of maximum current possible given
the present voltage setting The actual trip’ level may be slightly different Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 533
System Settings
System Configuration
— Clear Overload If the voltage source becomes TRIPPED’ press to reenable
the voltage source output Then set Source ON
— Status Line ON OFF Turn ON and OFF the voltage source status line that
appears near the top of the screen The status line is always ON while
making Voltage Source settings
Security Level
For security reasons you can prevent frequency information from appearing on
the FieldFox while in SA NA or CAT modes
How to set Security Level
—Press System 7
—Then System Configuration
—Then Security Level
— Then choose from the following
— None All frequency settings are visible
— High Frequency information is blanked from the following
——Display annotation
——Softkeys
——Marker display and marker table
——Calibration properties
——All settings tables
——Limit line tables
——All savedpng files
— Any of the following will redisplay frequency information
——Set to None Preset Mode Preset or FieldFox restart
Date and Time Format and Time Zone Settings
Set the local date and time Date and Time format and Time Zone that is
shown on the FieldFox screen The Date and Time is also used to identify files
that are saved
The Date and Time can also be set by synchronizing with GPS satellites Learn
more in GPS – Distance Settings on page 521
How to Update Date and Time using Internet
This method of setting the Date and Time does NOT have the security
restrictions of the other methods (listed below) 534 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
System Settings
System Configuration
This method will NOT set the correct Time Zone You must do that using the
manual method See below
—PressSystem 7
—Then System Configuration
—Then More
—Then Update Time using Internet
— Connect a LAN cable that is also connected to the Internet
—Then press Update Time using Internet When successful a message is
displayed indicating the amount of time correction that occurred
— Optional Set the following when a Proxy server is used to connect to the
internet
— Proxy Host – Enter the name of the proxy host
— Proxy Port – Enter the port number of the proxy host
How to MANUALLY set Date and Time Format and Time Zone
—Press System 7
—Then System Configuration
—Then More
—Then Date and Time
— Press the arrows to highlight the row to be edited
—Then press Edit
— Use the arrows or rotary knob to select the field to be edited
Because of licensing security the manual and GPS Sync methods to set
Date and Time are restricted as follows
Can be set backward no more than 5 hours at a time
Can be set forward any amount of time
Can be set backward or forward no more than once in a day A new day
begins at midnight
There is no restriction for setting the Time Zone
To change the Date and Time backward a significant amount send an email to
ctdsoco_support@keysightcom
BEFORE manually setting the Date and Time be absolutely certain that the
Time Zone setting is correctKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 535
System Settings
System Configuration
— Use the arrows or numeric keypad to edit that field
—Press Cancel or Done when the edits are complete
—Press Done to exit the Date and Time settings The readout in the
upperright corner of the FieldFox screen will update accordingly
LAN Settings
Configure the LAN settings to be used to communicate with the Data Link
Software and connect to the FieldFox for remote SCPI operation Learn more
about Data Link at wwwkeysightcomfindfieldfoxsupport
How to configure LAN settings
The first three Current’ settings can NOT be edited
— Press System 7
— Then System Configuration
—Then More
Table 261 LAN LEDs (N995xA N996xA and applies to N991xA2xA3xA units with serial
number prefixes ≥5607)
LAN LEDs (N995xA N996xA and applies to N991xA2xA3xA units with serial number
prefixes ≥5607) )
When FieldFox is connected to the LAN the flashing LAN LEDs have the following
definitions
Green Flashing indicates packets are being transferred
Yellow
— Flash pause 10 Mbit link speed
— Flash flash pause 100 Mbit link speed
— Flash flash flash pause 1 GBit link speed 536 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
System Settings
System Configuration
— Then LAN
— Use the arrows to select one of the following then press Edit
— Hostname Change the name that can be used to address the FieldFox if
your server supports this feature The default hostname is generated
automatically
— Obtain IP Choose from
— DHCP IP Address is assigned dynamically If your server supports
this feature the IP Address for the FieldFox is assigned each time it is
started
— Static Set the IP Address manually The Address remains until you
change it
— Static IP Address Enter the IP Address – including periods in the
format nnnnnnnnnnnn
— Static Subnet Mask Enter the Subnet Mask – including periods in the
format nnnnnnnnnnnn
— Static Gateway Enter the Static Gateway – including periods in the
format nnnnnnnnnnnn
— Static DNS Enter the Static DNS – including periods in the format
nnnnnnnnnnnn
— Apply Settings Choose from
— Power Up The above settings take effect when the FieldFox is
started
— Now The above settings take effect immediately
—Press Done Edit when finished
Power ON
When the FieldFox is without a power source this setting allows the FieldFox
to power ON as soon as a charged battery or the DC Adapter is inserted
without pressing the power button
For all FieldFoxes with firmware ≤A0818 and ≤A0950 FW when using
Static IP addresses
— Either a valid Static Gateway is required or 0000
— Either a valid Static DNS is required or 0000 (If entry is available)
To make the LAN settings persist after power up toggle Apply Settings to
Now then back to Power Up You should see a message indicating that the
LAN config file was savedKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 537
System Settings
System Configuration
How to set Power ON
—Press System 7
—Then System Configuration
—Then More
—Then Power ON
— Then choose from the following
— Auto The FieldFox will power ON when a charged battery or the DC
Adapter is inserted
— Manual The FieldFox will power ON only when the power button is
pressed
FieldFox Package Installer (N995xA N996xA and applies to
N991xA2xA3xA units with serial number prefixes ≥5607)
The FieldFox Package Installer enables you to download new versions of
firmware from either a USB memory or SD Card Additionally the Utility softkey
enables you to backup user files or restore user files
How to run the Installer
—Press System 7
—Then System Configuration
—Then More
—Then Firmware Update
—Then Start Installer
— The Installer software opens after a couple of seconds
— Then the arrows or the knob to scroll to the firmware you want to
install
—Press Start Install
—Current Step Progress bar and a Total Progress bar are
displayed along with this message Copying package Do not
remove install media
Before running the Installer to update your firmware you might want to
back up your user data Refer to How to restore files on page 538
If no files are displayed verify that a USB memory or SD Card is installed
and press Refresh List 538 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
System Settings
System Configuration
— When the installation is completed the FieldFox reboots
How to backup files
This procedure backs up your user data to a USB or SD card See also How to
restore files on page 538
From the initial Installer menu
—Press Utility
—Then Backup Data
— A message is displayed Choose backup file location
— Then choose either SD Card or USB
— A progress bar and a message is displayed Saving user data…
—Press Cancel to exit without backing up your files and returning to the initial
Installer menu
How to restore files
This procedure restores user files from a USB or SD card See also How to backup
files on page 538
If your stored any user files to a USB or SD card this procedure restores those
files
From the initial Installer menu
—Press Utility
—Then Cancel to exit without restoring your files and returning to the initial
Installer menu
Or
Press Restore Data
If you backup multiple versions of the user files the FieldFox appends a
_# to each subsequently stored file During restore the file with the
highest appended number is loaded into the FieldFox
Restoring files overwrites the existing user data on the FieldFox
If you backup multiple versions of the user files the FieldFox appends a
_# to each subsequently stored file During restore the file with the
highest appended number is loaded into the FieldFoxKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 539
System Settings
Service Diagnostics
— A message is displayed This option will COMPLETELY ERASE
existing user data ARE YOU SURE
—Then No to return to the previous menu without restoring files
Or
Press Yes
— Then choose either SD Card or USB
A progress bar and a message is displayed Restoring user data…
Service Diagnostics
— The Service diagnostics menu is generally used to display servicerelated
information To access these menu items press System 7 then Service
Diagnostics
System Information
The System information table shows important information about your
FieldFox The following is the most useful information
— Model Number – FieldFox model
— Serial Number – Identification number of your FieldFox
— Firmware Release – The currently installed version of software Check to
see if you have the latest firmware at
wwwkeysightcomfindfieldfoxsupport
— Network Identity – The network name and current IP address of your
FieldFox
— Reflectometer Factory Cal The Factory (CalReady) Calibration shows the
date and time that the factory cal was performed for each test port and the
Thru connection The format is P1 P2 P1P2
The factory calibration is updated when you send your
FieldFox to Keysight for Instrument Calibration Learn more in Instrument
Calibration on page 591
Event Log
The Event Log shows the information that has appeared on the FieldFox
screen The most recent information is at the top of the table
Press Clear Events to erase this information
Battery
Learn more in Chapter 29 Working with the LithiumIon Battery on page
559 540 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
System Settings
Service Diagnostics
Internal Temperatures
Learn about the importance of the internal FieldFox temperatures in FieldFox High
Temperature Protection on page 30
Erase User Data
All data that you have written to the FieldFox can be erased with the press of a
button You would do this if your FieldFox is located in a secure environment
and must be routinely erased of sensitive data
All data is removed from the FieldFox internal UserData partition This
includes all State files and Trace + State files (*sta) all Data files (*csv *snp)
all Picture files (*png) all Cal Kit files and all Cable files
External media that is inserted (miniSD card or USB flash drive) is NOT
erased
The Lost Clusters folder and files are NOT erased because they are part of
the file system housekeeping
How to Erase User Data
—Press System 7
—Then Service Diagnostics
—Then Advanced
—Then Erase User Data
—Then Confirm Erase
— Then the following occurs
— All data files and folders are deleted from the UserData partition
— The FieldFox is rebooted which manages the newlyfreed data and
rewrites the factory cal kits and cable files
Rebooting is not required on the N995xA N996xA and applies to
N991xA2xA3xA units with serial number prefixes ≥5607 541
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
27 Using the MiniUSB Port to send SCPI Commands and
Queries (N995xA6xA and applies to N991xA2xA3xA
units with serial number prefixes ≥5607)
In this Chapter
MiniUSB Connection to PC with IO Libraries
The FieldFox comes with a miniUSB port that can be used to connect to your
PC’s standard USB 20 port Using Keysight IO Libraries Connection Expert
and connecting via a VISA connection you can send SCPI commands via the
Keysight Interactive IO window to the FieldFox Refer to your IO Libraries
online help for the details on connecting to your instrument Refer to
keysightcom to download the IO Libraries
Overview of miniUSB to PC setup for sending SCPI commands and queries
— Connect a miniUSB (FieldFox deviceside) to standard USB (hostPC)
— On the FieldFox Power on the instrument
—Click System 7 > System Diagnostics > System Information and find the
FieldFox serial number
— On your PC Open the Keysight IO Libraries software Connection Expert
and connect to the FieldFox using the VISA connection Refer to the
Keysight Connection Expert Help
IMPORTANT It is recommended that only USB certified cables are used
with the FieldFox
MiniUSB Connection to PC with IO Libraries on page 541
The FieldFox may be communicated with via the VISA libraries This
makes it available to VEE LabView and other software tools that can
communicate with VISA instruments
You can connect to USB ports that are not type 20 USB But the
miniUSB port is optimized for a type 20 USB ports 542 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Using the MiniUSB Port to send SCPI Commands and Queries (N995xA6xA and
applies to N991xA2xA3xA units with serial number prefixes ≥5607)
MiniUSB Connection to PC with IO Libraries
—In the Keysight Interactive IO window Type in your SCPIs on the Command
line and click Send Command Read Response or Send & Read Refer to
the Keysight Connection Expert Help and Figure 271 on page 542
Figure 271 Keysight Interactive IO Window 543
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
28 File Management
The FieldFox can save any of the following types of files
— Current settings and calibration
— Trace data (*csv *S1P *S2P)
— Picture of the FieldFox screen
In addition files can be saved to the internal memory a USB Flash drive or a
standard SD cardD
In this Chapter
Save Files on page 544
Recall Files on page 548
Move (Copy) Files on page 548
Set File Type and Select Device on page 549
Manage Files on page 552
Manage Folders on page 554
Edit Keywords on page 555
Prefixes and Suffixes for Filenames on page 555
See Also
Erase User Data on page 540 544 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
File Management
Saving and Recalling Files
Saving and Recalling Files
The FieldFox model families are
— N991x (VNASA) model family
— N992x (VNA) model family
— N993x (SA) model family
— N995x (VNASA) model family
— N996x (SA) model family
Save Files
How to Save a File
—Press SaveRecall 9
—Then Save
— At the top of the current labeler’ screen (see following image) check the
File Type to save and Device (Internal USB Storage Card) to which the file
is saved Learn how to change these settings in Set File Type and Select
Device on page 549
— Then use the labeler to specify a filename
FieldFox State files are intended to be recalled on the same instrument
model on which they were saved Sometimes you may able to recall them
within model families An error will result when trying to recall a state file
that was saved on a different model family
If you are having difficulty saving to a USB flash drive it may be a timing
issue The turnaround time for file open write data file close to a USB
drive is much longer than to FieldFox’s internal memory Alternative
methods are
1 Save your content to the FieldFox’s internal memory and then move your files
off to a USB flash drive using FTP SCPI programming Refer to Using FTP with
FieldFox and to the FieldFox Programming Guide
2 Save your data to the FieldFox’s internal memory then move the data to a PC
using a binary block transfer and delete the data from the FieldFox’s internal
memory An example for transferring an image
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpProgrammingwebhelp
ExamplesTransfer_Image_to_PChtm Please note that the receiving
computer program needs to be able to handle the binary block transfer See
also FieldFox Programming Guide Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 545
File Management
Saving and Recalling Files
Saving MATLAB files
Figure 281 IQ Analyzer Mode (IQA) MATLAB File Save
Insert only ONE USB flash drive in the FieldFox when saving or copying
files
If you have Option 351 IQ Analyzer option you can directly save your data
as MATLAB files (*mat) Refer to Chapter 11 IQ Analyzer (IQA) – Option
351 (CPU2 Only) on page 237 and to Chapter 28 File Management on
page 543
If you have the FieldFox’s Remote Server mode (89600 VSA software
connectivity) you can use the VSA software to capture and record your
data as MATLAB files (*mat) Learn more about FieldFox and 89600 VSA
software refer to Chapter 13 Remote Server Mode (Requires CPU2 and
SA HardwareSA Option 233) and to
httprfmwemkeysightcomwirelesshelpfiles89600BWebHelp89600
htm 546 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
File Management
Saving and Recalling Files
Figure 282 VSA Software MATLAB File Save
How to use the FieldFox labeler
The FieldFox labeler is used to edit or change the current filename It is also
used for many other labeling functions such as creating a title prefix and
keyword to display on the FieldFox screen Learn about Titles in How to
Manage files on page 552
— Move the cursor (see section below How to move the cursor) then press
Select to add the cursor character to the end of the existing filename
— Back Space to erase the last character(s) from the end of a filename
—Press Shift to toggle keyboard between lower case and upper case
characters
—Press Alt Keyboards to display the different keyword choices
You can select either an ABC or Qwerty style keyboard Refer to Alpha
Numeric Editing on page 523 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 547
File Management
Saving and Recalling Files
The preselected keywords (File Site and so forth) can be selected just like a
single character These keywords can also be edited Learn more in Edit
Keywords on page 555
Figure 283 The FieldFox labeler
In the graphic above the current filename is File_0 The cursor is on the
custom DTF_VSWR keyword The file will be saved to USB (flash drive) File
Type is Trace + State (Instrument State)
How to move the cursor
— Use the rotary knob to move cursor on the same row The cursor will change
rows when it comes to a row end
— Use the arrows to move the cursor up and down the rows
When the current filename is complete
—Press Done to save the file to the specified filename
—Press Cancel to close the labeler without saving a file 548 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
File Management
Saving and Recalling Files
— If the filename already exists you are prompted to choose from the
following
—Press Yes to overwrite the existing file
—Press Cancel to return to edit the filename
Recall Files
The FieldFox can recall State files Trace + State files and image files
State Files
ALL FieldFox instrument settings for ALL Modes are saved and recalled in a
*sta file If error correction is ON in CAT or NA Mode then calibration data is
also saved and recalled
If error correction is OFF (CalRdy is active) calibration data is NOT saved in the
*sta file When a Trace + State file is recalled on a FieldFox other than the one
it was saved on differences in the CalRdy calibration data may result in
differences between the displayed traces
Image Files
The FieldFox can open and display *png *jpg and *jpeg images
How to Recall a File
—Press SaveRecall 9
—Then Recall File or Enter
— Navigate to the file to be recalled using the UpDown arrow keys
—Optional Sort by Name to list the current files by name
—Optional Sort by Date to list the current files by date
—Optional Next Page if available to go to the next page of filenames
—Optional Previous Page if available to go to the previous page of
filenames
—Then Recall File or Enter
— Cancel to cancel recall file and return to the previous menu
Move (Copy) Files
The FieldFox can Move files (ie including Trace + State files and image files)
Before recalling a file first Select the Device and Location from which the
file will be recalled See the following section for more informationKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 549
File Management
Saving and Recalling Files
How to move a file
—Press SaveRecall 9
—Then Device to be copied from (ie Internal SD or USB) Refer to Set
File Type and Select Device on page 549
—Then More
—Then Manage Files
—Then Select Files
— Navigate to the file(s) to be copied using the UpDown arrow keys or the
knob
—Then Copy
— Select the destination device using the softkeys
—— Copy to Internal Copies to FieldFox’s internal memory
—— Copy to USB Copies to a USB memory device
—— Copy to SD Card Copies to a SDSDHC memory card
——Cancel to cancel copy file and return to the previous menu
— Use the close folder icon or the open folder icon to locate the target folder
for your files
—Then Do Copy copies files to selected location and FieldFox displays a
confirmation message of a successful file copy
— Cancel to cancel copy file and return to the previous menu
Set File Type and Select Device
The following File TYPE and DEVICE settings are used to determine the type of
file to save and the location to be used for all file operations
These two settings remain through an instrument preset but are reset to the
default values when the FieldFox power is shutdown
Select Device (location of File SaveRecall)
—Press SaveRecall 9
—Then Device to set the LOCATION where the file is to be saved recalled or
moved Choose from the following
— Internal SavesRecallsMoves (Copies) files tofrom the FieldFox
internal memory To specify a folder first select Manage Folders
(learn how in Manage Folders on page 554) The Data Link software
will read data ONLY from the ＼UserData folder 550 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
File Management
Saving and Recalling Files
— SD Card SavesRecallsMoves (Copies) files tofrom the SD card (not
included) inserted in the card slot See Take the FieldFox Tour on
page 35 Only the root folder is available
— USB SavesRecallsMoves (Copies) files to or from a USB Flash drive
(not included) that is inserted in one of the USB connectors Only the
root folder is available
How to set File Type
—Press SaveRecall 9
—Then File Type Choose one of the following
— State Saves ALL FieldFox instrument settings for ALL Modes to a
*sta file If a calibration is ON in CAT or NA Mode calibration data is
also saved This file can be opened ONLY by a FieldFox State files
can be saved between compatible FieldFox models See note
inSaving and Recalling Files on page 544
— Trace+State Saves the current trace and instrument settings to a
*sta file In SA Mode all traces are saved This file can be opened
ONLY by a FieldFox When recalled the FieldFox sweep is set to Hold
— Picture (PNG) Saves a 640 x 453 pixel image of the FieldFox screen to
a *png file The picture does NOT include the softkeys
— Data (csv) Saves trace data from the current Mode to a *csv file This
format can be imported into spreadsheet software such as Microsoft
Excel Column A is always the frequency at which the data is
measured
——In SA Mode all visible data traces are saved Each trace is
saved to a separate column that is labeled with the Trace
State
——In CAT and NA Modes only the data trace is saved – not the
memory trace
——In Power Meter (with Option 208 Frequency Offset Power
Sensor (FOPS)) all visible traces are saved Each trace is saved
to a separate column labeled Output Power or Memory
——In VVM Mode NO data is saved
Insert only ONE USB Flash Drive in the FieldFox when saving or copying
files
When using RTSA the Density Spectrum information is not saved using
Trace+State Only the last displayed trace settings is savedKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 551
File Management
Saving and Recalling Files
— Data (S1P) (S2P) Saves CAT and NA Mode trace data to an *S1P or
*S2P file depending on the active measurement This file format is
used by CAE programs such as Keysight＇s Microwave Design System
(MDS) and Advanced Design System (ADS) It can also be imported
into spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel
About SNP Files
The SNP file includes header information and the following data
— S1P saves 1port (receiver) data for the active data trace *s1p Files
contain 1 stimulus value and 1 Sparameter (total of 3 scalar values) Stim
Real(Sxx) Imag(Sxx)
— S2P (NA Mode ONLY) saves 2port data for the active trace *s2p Files
contain 1 stimulus value and 4 Sparameters (total of 9 scalar values) Stim
Real(S11) Imag(S11) Real(S21) Imag(S21) Real(S12) Imag(S12)
Real(S22) Imag(S22)
— Only data traces are saved – not memory traces
Corrections
— When parameters are corrected data is returned even when not displayed
Data is returned with the correction type that is applied for each
Sparameter The correction type for each Sparameter is annotated in the
header
— When parameters are NOT corrected or displayed
— With Smith chart and Polar formats RealImag zerofilled data
appears as (10 00)
— With all other formats LogMagPhase zerofilled data appears as
(00 00)
> Display formats
In CAT Mode S1P files are always Magnitude (dB) Phase (angle) format
In NA Mode
— Smith chart and Polar display formats are ALWAYS saved in RealImag data
pairs
— All other display formats are saved in LogMagPhase (dbAngle)
> What Data Processing functions are included in saved SNP Data
In NA Mode the data processing functions (such as trace math) that are
included in the SNP data depends on a Preference setting Click System then
Preferences then Preferences then scroll to NA SNP File Save then select
from the following 552 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
File Management
Saving and Recalling Files
— Default – SNP data does NOT include smoothing SNP data saves are taken
AFTER data processing (location 2) on the processing chain
— Advanced – SNP data includes the following
— With Smith or Polar display format SNP data saves are taken
BEFORE most processing (location 1 on the data processing chain)
— With any other display format SNP data saves are taken just AFTER
Formatting and Smoothing is applied (location 3 on the data
processing chain) For each nonactive trace SNP trace data is
reprocessed using the data processing chain of the active trace
See the FieldFox data processing chain at the Supplemental Online Help
httpnasupportkeysightcomfieldfoxhelpSupHelpFieldFoxhtm Learn
more about System Preferences in Preferences on page 515
Manage Files
Files that are stored in the FieldFox internal memory standard SD card and
USB Flash drive can be copied to another device or deleted
How to Manage files
—Press SaveRecall 9
—Then Device to select the location (Internal USB or standard SD Card) of
the file to copy or delete
—Then More
—Then Manage Files
— Then choose from the following
— Select Files Selects a file or files to sort copy or delete
— Sort
— Sort by Name Sorts the displayed list of files by name
— Sort by Date Sorts the displayed list of files by date
— Copy Select a file or files to copy
— Then select a device to copy the file to Choose from Copy to Internal Copy
to USB (must be inserted) or Copy to SD Card (must be inserted)
When selecting Internal it may also be necessary to first select Manage
Folders to specify an active folder which contains the files to copy or
delete Refer to Manage Folders on page 554Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 553
File Management
Saving and Recalling Files
— Do Copy to complete the file copy to the mediafolder selected
— Delete
— Yes The selected file is deleted
— Cancel To cancel Delete and return to previous menu
— More
— Select Files Selects a file or files to sort copy or delete
— Select All selects all of the displayed files All files that are displayed
are to be copied Then select a device and a folder to copy the file to
Choose from Internal USB (must be inserted) or SD Card (must be
inserted)
— Clear All Deselects all of the displayed files
— Rename Files
— Enter the string in the filename or filenames that are to be replaced
— Replace With Enter the string that is to be replaced by the
characters entered with the String to Replace softkey
— Prefix Enter a prefix (one time) that the current filename or filenames
are to be renamed To add a prefix to subsequent filenames
(persistent) refer to How to edit the Prefix and Suffix (Auto Append)
in How to edit the Prefix and Suffix (Auto Append) on page 556
— Suffix Enter a suffix that the current filename or filenames are to be
renamed
— Do Rename Enable renaming of the current file or files
Copy can be done to any FieldFox internal folder standard SD folder or
USB storage device
For more on renaming foldersfiles refer to How to use the FieldFox
labeler on page 546 and Prefixes and Suffixes for Filenames on
page 555
String to Replace is case sensitive
Insert only ONE USB Flash Drive in the FieldFox when saving or copying
files 554 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
File Management
Saving and Recalling Files
Manage Folders
You can create new folders delete old folders and select the active folder to
which files can be saved The Parent folder [] is listed when not in the root
directory
Press SaveRecall 9
—Press SaveRecall 9
—Then More
—Then Manage Folders
— Then choose from the following
— Change Folder Changes the active folder to which files can be saved
The active device and current folder is displayed at the top of the
screen and below a list of files in that folder Use the arrows to
highlight a folder within the current folder Each time the Change
Folder softkey is pressed the highlighted folder becomes the active
folder
— Create Folder A new folder is created in the current folder Select a
name for the new folder from one of the displayed keywords You can
change these keywords using the following Edit Keywords function
Refer to Edit Keywords in Edit Keywords on page 555
— Delete Folder The selected folder and its contents are deleted after a
warning prompt is displayed A Parent folder or system folder can
NOT be deleted
— Copy Folder The selected folder and its contents are copied and a
message is displayed telling you that the copy was successful
——Then select a device to copy the folder to Choose from Copy
to Internal Copy to USB (must be inserted) or Copy to SD
Card (must be inserted)
——Do Copy to complete the file copy to the mediafolder
selected
— Rename The rename folder menu opens and the selected folder’s title
is displayed and available for editing
—Press Exit when finished
For more on renaming foldersfiles refer to How to use the FieldFox
labeler on page 546 and Prefixes and Suffixes for Filenames on
page 555Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 555
File Management
Saving and Recalling Files
Edit Keywords
The preselected keywords (FILE SITE and so forth) can be edited to meet your
specific needs Your keywords will remain in the FieldFox until you change
them Keywords are limited to 30 characters
How to edit keywords
—Press SaveRecall 9
—Then More
—Then Edit Keywords
—Then Next Page and Previous Page to view all keywords
— Use the arrows to select a keyword to edit
— When a keyword is selected then press Edit
— Then choose from the following
—Press Select to add the cursor character to the end of the selected
keyword
—Press Backspace to erase the last character from the end of the
selected keyword
—Press Shift to change from uppercase to lowercase and vice versa
—Press Alt Keywords to toggle through different keyword choices
How to move the cursor
— Use the rotary knob to move the cursor along the same row The cursor will
change rows when it comes to a row end
— Use the arrows to move the cursor up and down between rows
When the selected keyword is complete
—Press Done to save all keywords and close the Edit Keywords labeler These
keywords will exist on the FieldFox until changed
—Press Cancel to close the labeler without saving changes
Prefixes and Suffixes for Filenames
The prefix and suffix (Auto Append) can be used together to organize files
Once set and enabled they are automatically entered as the beginning (Prefix)
and end (Suffix using Auto Append) of a filename when performing a Save 556 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
File Management
Saving and Recalling Files
operation These settings are persistent until disabled Refer to How to edit
the Prefix and Suffix (Auto Append) on page 556 and How to enabledisable
Auto Append (Suffix) on page 557
This section contains the following sections
— How to edit the Prefix and Suffix (Auto Append) on page 556
— How to move the cursor on page 547
— When the Prefix is complete on page 557
— How to enabledisable Auto Append (Suffix) on page 557
How to edit the Prefix and Suffix (Auto Append)
If you want to edit a prefix on a finite set of files one time refer to Manage
Files on page 552
—Press SaveRecall 9
—Then More
—Then Prefix Suffix
— Then choose from the following
— Edit Prefix to edit the prefix using the labeler For more refer to How
to edit the Prefix and Suffix (Auto Append) on page 556
——Select to add the cursor character to the end of the Prefix
—— Back Space to delete the last character(s) from the end of the
prefix
——Shift to toggle between capital letters and lower case letters
——Alt Keywords to display the different preselected keywords
(File Site and so forth) can be selected just like a single
character These keywords can also be edited See Edit
Keywords
——Cancel to cancel edits and return to the previous menu
— Auto Append (Suffix)
— OFF to turn off Auto Append
— Number to autoappend a number using format _nnn sequentially
to all saved files
— Date to autoappend a date and time using format
_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS sequentially to all saved files
If you are only interested in adding a prefix or a suffix to a new file or files
one time refer to Manage Files on page 552Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 557
File Management
Saving and Recalling Files
— Number Suffix Reset to reset Auto Append number to _001
— Prefix
— OFF to disable the prefix The Prefix softkeys are grayed out
(inactive) Refer to How to enabledisable the Prefix (persistent) in
How to enabledisable the Prefix (persistent) on page 557
— Last File to use the last filename saved as your filename for
subsequent saved filenames
— User to use the userselected prefix
— Back to return to the previous menu
How to move the cursor
— Use the rotary knob to move cursor on the same row
— Use the arrows to move the cursor up and down the rows
When the Prefix is complete
—Press Done to save the Prefix and close the labeler This Prefix will exist on
the FieldFox until it is changed
—Press Cancel to close the labeler without saving changes
How to enabledisable the Prefix (persistent)
—Press SaveRecall 9
—Then More
—Then Prefix Suffix
—Then Prefix
— OFF to disable the prefix on subsequently saved files Edit Prefix Auto
Append and Number Suffix Reset softkeys are grayed out (inactive)
How to enabledisable Auto Append (Suffix)
—Press SaveRecall 9
—Then More
—Then Prefix Suffix
—Then Auto Append
— OFF to disable the Auto Append (Suffix) on subsequently saved files Auto
and Number Suffix Reset softkeys are grayed out (inactive)
When Last File is selected the Edit Prefix and Auto Append softkeys are
unavailable (grayed out) Refer to Prefixes and Suffixes for Filenames on
page 555 558 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
File Management
Press Printing
Press Printing
The current screen or selected files can be printed using a PCLcompatible
printer (like older HP Deskjet printer) connected to one of the FieldFox USB
ports Newer PCL3GUI photo and allinone printers are NOT supported
Measurements can also be printed using the FieldFox Data Link software
How to print the current screen or a saved file
To save ink first select an outdoor (white background) display color Learn how
in Display Colors on page 513
— Connect the printer to a FieldFox USB port The print softkey will appear
ONLY when a compatible printer is connected
—Then press SaveRecall 9
—Then Print and choose from the following
— Printer & Page＼nSetup Confirm that the printer is connected and
configured properly The Status line should read Ready’
— Make other print settings as desired
— Select Files＼nfor Printing Print up to 16 *PNG images on one page
that are stored on the Internal drive Images can NOT be printed from
the USB and SD card
— Edit the Quick Settings table to select up to FOUR Rows and FOUR
Columns for up to 16 total images to be printed on a single page
— If necessary edit the filenames to be printed
— Select Done Then Print Selected＼nFiles to begin printing
——Print Current Screen – Immediately prints the FieldFox screen
using the selected Printer and Page Setup settings 559
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
29 Working with the LithiumIon Battery
In this Chapter
See Also
Viewing the Battery Charge Status
You can view the battery charge status in the following ways
— Icons in the upper right of the front panel screen
— Battery screen select System then Service Diagnostics then Battery
— Builtin battery gauge Learn more in the following section
Viewing the Battery Charge Status on page 559
Charging the Battery on page 561
Reconditioning Battery on page 564
Battery Care on page 564
Maximizing Battery Life on page 564
LithiumIon Battery Disposal on page 565
Install the LithiumIon Battery on page 28
To conserve battery power on page 29
For the Battery on page 571
Table 291 Front Panel Icons
Icon Status
Connected to external power through the
ACDC adapter Battery installed and charging
The amount of charge is indicated by the
number of bars shown 560 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Working with the LithiumIon Battery
Viewing the Battery Charge Status
Service Diagnostics—Battery Screen
The Battery screen displays the following information To access the screen
select System then Service Diagnostics then Battery
Additional battery information is available using SCPI commands
1 Status – Fully charged No battery Charging Empty or Discharging
2 External DC Supply – ON or OFF indicates if an external DC supply is
connected
3 Battery Present – ON or OFF indicates if a battery is installed
1 Voltage – measured by the battery’s sensor
2 Current – amount of current being consumed when operating from
internal battery If battery is charging indicates amount of charging
current
3 Battery Temperature – internal temperature of the battery as measured by
a sensor embedded in the battery
4 Present Run Time to Empty – minutes of power remaining based on
amount of current being used now
5 Charge Cycles – number of charge cycles the battery has experienced
Charge cycle defined as ≥80 change in relative state of charge
BuiltIn Battery Gauge
Each lithium ion battery has an LED gauge that displays its charge status The
gauge is active unless the battery is in shut down mode
To view the LED gauge open the FieldFox battery compartment door remove
the battery then press the button on the battery
Battery not charging with 84 battery life
remaining
Battery fully charged A fully charged battery
MAY NOT read 100
Table 291 Front Panel Icons
Icon Status
Items 4 through 8 are read directly from the battery The information is
based on the battery’s internal sensors and memoryKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 561
Working with the LithiumIon Battery
Charging the Battery
The battery in your FieldFox will have either 4 or 5 LED segments
Charging the Battery
When you receive your FieldFox the lithiumion battery is partially charged to
approximately 30 to 40 to preserve battery life Allow four hours to fully
charge the battery internally or three and a half hours () by using the external
battery charger (N9910X–872) A fully charged battery will power your
FieldFox for about four hours Upon receiving your FieldFox it is NOT
necessary to charge your FieldFox＇s battery before using your instrument
The FieldFox circuitry ALWAYS prevents the battery from discharging to a level
that is damaging However if the battery is completely discharged the
FieldFox may not turn ON If this occurs the battery can still be charged either
internally or externally
Because a lithiumion battery has no memory effect you can charge a battery
at any time regardless of the current charge status
Internal Charging with the ACDC Adapter
Internal charging time for a fully depleted battery is approximately 4 hours with
the FieldFox either ON or OFF
5segment
Gauge
Charge
Remaining
4segment Gauge Charge Remaining
5 segments ≥80 4 segments ≥75
4 segments 60 to 79 3 segments 50to 74
3 segments 40 to 59 2 segments 25 to 49
2 segments 20 to 39 1 segment < 25
1 segment < 20
Read the safety information in For the ACDC Adapter on page 570 562 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Working with the LithiumIon Battery
Charging the Battery
Figure 291 ACDC Adapter
To charge a battery inside the FieldFox insert the ACDC adapter plug into the
Power connector on the FieldFox side panel then plug the adapter into an AC
outlet
— FieldFox ON Charging is indicated by a battery icon in the upper right of
the front panel screen
— FieldFox OFF Charging is indicated by the FieldFox power LED glowing
amber with its intensity increasing from dim to bright every few seconds
This pattern repeats until the LED turns off when charging is done Learn
more on Front Panel on page 35Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 563
Working with the LithiumIon Battery
Charging the Battery
Using the External Battery Charger (N9910X–872)
Figure 292 External Battery Charger (N9910X872)
The external battery charger (N9910X–872) lets you charge a fully depleted
battery in approximately three hours It is a two bay level–3 standalone
battery charger that is compliant with the standard Smart Battery System The
two bays are charged sequentially on a firstcome firstserved basis though a
discharge can be performed in the left bay while the right bay is charging
For more information refer to the Instruction Manual included with the
external battery charger
Read the safety information in For the External Battery Charger
(N9910X872) on page 571
External Battery Charger LED Charging Status
Green Fully charged
Green flashing Fast charging
Yellow flashing Reconditioning – the accuracy of the
battery’s internal LED charge gauge
is being renewed See
Reconditioning Battery on
page 564
Yellowgreen Battery is reconditioned
Red flashing Error
Yellow Standby 564 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Working with the LithiumIon Battery
Reconditioning Battery
Reconditioning Battery
Reconditioning a battery can be performed ONLY with the External Battery
Charger (N9910X–872)
1 Insert a battery into the left bay of the external charger
2 Press the button labeled Push to Recalibrate Left Battery Bay
3 The charger will charge the battery fully discharge it completely then
recharge it fully again The entire process can take up to 12 hours
4 Install the battery into the FieldFox
5 On the System Battery screen verify that the battery is fully charged
Battery Care
Visually inspect the battery periodically for signs of degradation such as
swelling cracking of the battery shell or leakage of fluid If degradation
occurs replace the battery and dispose of it properly Refer to LithiumIon
Battery Disposal on page 565 Operation with a degraded battery could result
in damage to the FieldFox
Maximizing Battery Life
— If AC power is not continuously available (Ex in a field environment) use the
battery and recharge it when it holds a 20 to 50 charge as shown on
the screen’s battery charge icon At this charge level 2 or 3 segments show
on the battery gauge
— If the FieldFox is not going to be used for more than a week remove the
battery Best practice is to store the battery with a charge of about 50 At
this charge level 3 segments show on the battery gauge
— Allow a battery to warm to room temperature before charging it
Temperature shock can damage the battery chemistry and in some cases
cause a short circuit
— Store batteries in a cool dry location away from metal objects and
corrosive gases
Storage temperature limits (20 to 50 relative charge is recommended)
Transportation –20°C to 50°C
Within 1 month –20°C to 45°C
Within 6 months –20°C to 40°C
Within 1 year –20°C to 35°CKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 565
Working with the LithiumIon Battery
LithiumIon Battery Disposal
— Battery charging limits
Charge temperature 0°C to 45°C (<10°C slows charge on some batteries)
Discharge temperature –10°C to 60°C
— Operate the FieldFox on battery power between the ambient temperatures
of –10 and +50°C (–14 to +122°F) Using the battery at lower or higher
temperatures can damage it and reduce operating life Cold temperatures
affect battery chemistry reducing charge capacity especially below 0°C
(32°F)
LithiumIon Battery Disposal
When you notice a large decrease in charge capacity after proper recharging
it’s probably time to replace the battery
LithiumIon batteries need to be disposed of properly Contact your local
waste management facility for information regarding environmentally sound
collection recycling and disposal of the batteries Regulations vary for
different countries Dispose of the battery in accordance with local regulations
Keysight Technologies through Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation
(RBRC) offers free and convenient battery recycling options in the US and
Canada Contact RBRC at 8772RECYCLE (8772732925) or online at
httpwwwcall2recycleorg for the nearest recycling location 566 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Working with the LithiumIon Battery
LithiumIon Battery Disposal 567
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
30 Safety Considerations
Keysight has designed and tested the FieldFox in accordance with IEC
Publication 610101Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Measurement Control and Laboratory Use and the FieldFox is supplied in a
safe condition The FieldFox is also designed for use in Installation Category II
and pollution Degree 2 per IEC 610101 Read the following safety notices
carefully before you start to use this FieldFox to ensure safe operation and to
maintain the product in a safe condition 568 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Safety Considerations
For the FieldFox
For the FieldFox
No operator serviceable parts inside except for the lithiumion
battery Refer servicing to qualified personnel To prevent electrical
shock do not remove covers
If this product is not used as specified the protection provided by
the equipment could be impaired This product must be used in a
normal condition (in which all means for protection are intact) when
attached to the AC–DC adapter
The unit may be used only in the operating conditions and positions
specified by the manufacturer
Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized
modification to the product Return the product to Keysight
Technologies or a designated repair center for service to ensure that
safety features are maintained
Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the
prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed
Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment
comply with IEC950 I EN60950
Observe all ratings and markings of the instrument before
connecting the instrument
Maximum Input Voltages and Power
RF Output Connector 50V DC +23 dBm RF
Ext TrigRef Connector 55 V DC
RF Input ±50 VDC +27 dBm RF
DC Input 19VDC 4ADC
When performing a measurement ensure that the right safety and
performance ratings of the instrument and accessories are used
Do not expose the circuit or operate the instrument without its cover
or while power is being supplied
Do not operate the instrument in any environment at risk of
explosion
The power cord and connectors shall be compatible with the connector
used in the premise electrical system Failure to ensure adequate earth
grounding by not using the correct components may cause product
damage and serious injuryKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 569
Safety Considerations
For the FieldFox
The measuring terminals on this instrument are designed to be used with
external signals described in Measurement Category I but NOT with
external signals described in Categories 570 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Safety Considerations
For the ACDC Adapter
For the ACDC Adapter
Use only the designated ACDC adapter supplied with the
instrument
Use only the designated power cord supplied with the ACDC
adapter
Operated at an ambient temperature 0 to 40°C full power rating derate
linearly at a rate of 3 watts per degree C from 90W at 40°C to 45W at
55°C 30W at –20°C
Maximum output rating +15V60 A
Input rating AC 100–240 V 5060Hz
To prevent electrical shock disconnect the AC to DC adapter from
the mains before cleaning Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened
with water to clean the external case parts Do not attempt to clean
internally
When the FieldFox is connected to the ACDC adapter position the
adapter so the power cord is readily accessible The power cord is
the disconnecting device It removes main power to the ACDC
adapter The FieldFox front panel switch is only for the DC power
within the instrument and not for the ACDC adapter Alternately
an AC switch or circuit breaker (which is readily identifiable and is
easily reached by the operator) may be installed and used as a
disconnecting device to remove mains power from the ACDC
adapter
To avoid overheating always disconnect the FieldFox from the
ACDC adapter before storing the FieldFox in the backpack
If you prefer to leave the FieldFox connected to the ACDC adapter
while inside the backpack you can disconnect the ACDC adapter
from its AC power source to prevent overheating
The ACDC adapter has an auto–ranging line voltage input – be sure the
supply voltage is within the specified range
The ACDC adapter is for indoor use only
Never use a modified or damaged charger Use the original AC–DC
adapter ONLY
The ACDC adapter is designed for use in Installation Category II and
Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 610101Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 571
Safety Considerations
For the External Battery Charger (N9910X872)
For the External Battery Charger (N9910X872)
For the Battery
Lithium battery packs may get hot explode or ignite and cause serious injury if
exposed to abuse conditions
This section contains the following
— High Capacity Lithium Battery (N9910X876)
— Standard Capacity Battery (N9910X870)
High Capacity Lithium Battery (N9910X876)
Lithium battery (High Capacity) N9910X876 (battery Keysight part number
14200937) is used to provide power to a family of portable microwave test
instruments produced by Keysight Technologies Be sure to follow these safety
warnings
If charging batteries externally use the optional external charger available
from Keysight or another SMBus charger of level II or higher
Never use a non–SMBus charger because the battery issues commands
over the SMBus to the charger to control the charge rate and voltage
Never use a modified or damaged charger
External ACDC power
supply US FCC
compliance
Meets the required verification equipment authorization rules
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two
conditions (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) this device must accept
any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation
External battery US
FCC compliance
Battery storage
The only instructions related to storage have to do with temperature and are listed below
— Temperature (1 month) 20°C to +45°C
— Temperature (6 month) 20°C to +40°C
— Temperature (12 month) 20°C to +35°C
Rating 108V 6400mAh 70Wh 572 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Safety Considerations
For the Battery
Lithium–ion batteries
— Must not be exposed to high temperatures (>70°C) or fire
— Must be kept away from children
— Must not be short circuited
— Must be replaced only with Keysight qualified Li–ion batteries
— If replaced or charged improperly there is a danger of explosion
Do not connect the positive terminal and negative terminal of the
battery to each other with any metal object (such as wire)
Do not carry or store the battery with necklaces hairpins or other
metal objects
Do not pierce the battery with nails strike the battery with a
hammer step on the battery or otherwise subject it to strong
impacts or shocks
Do not solder directly onto the battery
Do not expose the battery to water or salt water or allow the
battery to get wet
Do not disassemble or modify the battery The battery contains
safety and protection devices which if damaged may cause the
battery to generate heat explode or ignite
Do not place the battery in direct sunlight or use or store the
battery inside cars in hot weather Doing so may cause the battery
to generate heat explode or ignite Using the battery in this
manner may also result in a loss of performance and a shortened
life expectancy
There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced
Replace only with the same or equivalent type of battery
recommended Discard used batteries according to manufacturer’s
instructions
If you are charging the batteries internally even while the FieldFox
is powered off the FieldFox may become warm Allow for proper
ventilation
Do NOT run the FieldFox with the vents blocked or in the carrying
caseKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 573
Safety Considerations
For the Battery
Standard Capacity Battery (N9910X870)
Do not discharge the battery using any device except the FieldFox
or the external battery charger (N9910X–872) When the battery is
used in a device other than those specified it may damage the
battery or reduce its life expectancy If the device causes an
abnormal current to flow it may cause the battery to become hot
explode or ignite and cause serious injury
The external battery charger discharges during recalibration
For a Korean battery safety consideration translation refer to
Appendix D Korean Battery Safety Translation
For a Russian battery safety consideration translation refer to
Appendix E Russian Battery Safety Translation
The external battery is not rated for use in a wet location Do not use
the external battery in a wet location
Lithium–ion batteries
— Must not be exposed to high temperatures (>70°C) or fire
— Must be kept away from children
— Must not be short circuited
— Must be replaced only with Keysight qualified Li–ion batteries
— If replaced or charged improperly there is a danger of explosion
Do not connect the positive terminal and negative terminal of the
battery to each other with any metal object (such as wire)
Do not carry or store the battery with necklaces hairpins or other
metal objects
Do not pierce the battery with nails strike the battery with a
hammer step on the battery or otherwise subject it to strong
impacts or shocks
Do not solder directly onto the battery
Do not expose the battery to water or salt water or allow the
battery to get wet 574 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Safety Considerations
For the Battery
Do not disassemble or modify the battery The battery contains
safety and protection devices which if damaged may cause the
battery to generate heat explode or ignite
Do not place the battery in direct sunlight or use or store the
battery inside cars in hot weather Doing so may cause the battery
to generate heat explode or ignite Using the battery in this
manner may also result in a loss of performance and a shortened
life expectancy
There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced
Replace only with the same or equivalent type of battery
recommended Discard used batteries according to manufacturer’s
instructions
If you are charging the batteries internally even while the FieldFox
is powered off the FieldFox may become warm Allow for proper
ventilation
Do not discharge the battery using any device except the FieldFox
or the external battery charger (N9910X–872) When the battery is
used in a device other than those specified it may damage the
battery or reduce its life expectancy If the device causes an
abnormal current to flow it may cause the battery to become hot
explode or ignite and cause serious injury
For a Korean battery safety consideration translation refer to
Appendix D Korean Battery Safety Translation
For a Russian battery safety consideration translation refer to
Appendix E Russian Battery Safety TranslationKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 575
Safety Considerations
Battery Protective Functions
Battery Protective Functions
This section contains the following
— Battery Protective Functions (N9910X876)
— Battery Protective Functions (N9910X870) on page 577
Battery Protective Functions (N9910X876)
The following protective functions are designed into the lithiumion
rechargeable battery system used in FieldFox
The protective functions can be divided between two categories active and
passive Active protection refers to the type of protection that depends on at
least two or more protection devices working together to enable the protection
Passive protection refers to the type of protection that is always enabled
independent of any other protection device
Active Protection
Primary Overcharge Voltage This prevents the battery from being charged if
the voltage across any cell exceeds approximately 425 V per cell Once the
overcharge protection is tripped the voltage across each cell must drop below
approximately 410 V to reset the protection and permit charging
Secondary Overcharge Voltage This is a onetime permanent protection that
is triggered when the voltage across any cell exceeds approximately 430 V
Once this protection is tripped the battery can no longer be used and must be
replaced
Overdischarge Voltage This prevents the battery from discharging if the
voltage across any cell drops below approximately 25 V Once the
overdischarge voltage protection is tripped the voltage across each cell must
be charged to approximately 3 V to reset the protection and permit
discharging
Primary Overcharge Current This prevents the battery from being charged if
the average charging current reaches or exceeds 33A for a time period of 5
seconds or more
Secondary Overcharge Current This prevents the battery from being charged
if the charging current reaches or exceeds 4A+–20 for a time period of 20
milliseconds or more
Primary Overdischarge Current This prevents the battery from being
discharged if the average current out of the battery reaches or exceeds 7A for a
time period of 5 seconds or more This protection can be reset by removing the
load 576 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Safety Considerations
Battery Protective Functions
Secondary Overdischarge Current This prevents the battery from being
discharged if the current out of the battery reaches or exceeds 6A for a time
period of 20 milliseconds or more This protection can be reset by removing the
load
Short Circuit Protection This prevents the battery from being charged or
discharged and protects against damage or lost data if the current ins or out of
the battery reaches or exceeds 333A for a time period of 2745 microseconds
or more This protection can be reset by removing the load
Overtemperature Charging The system microcontroller prevents the battery
from being charged if the cell temperature exceeds 48C Once the
overtemperature charging protection is tripped the cell temperature has to
drop to or below 43C to reset the protection and permit charging
Overtemperature Discharging The system microcontroller prevents the
battery from being discharged if the cell temperature exceeds 67C Once the
overtemperature discharging protection is tripped the battery is automatically
shut off which results in turning off the instrument as well
Passive Protection
Reverse Charging A reverse protection diode prevents against damage or lost
data due to a reverse charge polarity applied to the battery terminals
Primary Overtemperature The maximum operating temperature of this fuse is
85C An overtemperature cutout permanently opens at 85C with no recovery
Secondary Overtemperature A second PTC polyfuse built into each Liion cell
will open up and limit current flow as a function of very high temperatures
Tertiary Overtemperature A current interrupt device (CID) within each Liion
cell will permanently open up when the temperature reaches 95C As each cell
fuse is permanently interrupted overall battery performance will become
severely degraded up to and including disabling the batteryKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 577
Safety Considerations
Battery Protective Functions
Battery Protective Functions (N9910X870)
The following protective functions are designed into the lithiumion
rechargeable battery system used in FieldFox
The protective functions can be divided between two categories active and
passive Active protection refers to the type of protection that depends on at
least two or more protection devices working together to enable the protection
Passive protection refers to the type of protection that is always enabled
independent of any other protection device
Active Protection
Primary Overcharge Voltage This prevents the battery from being charged if
the voltage across any cell exceeds approximately 435 V per cell Once the
overcharge protection is tripped the voltage across each cell must drop below
approximately 415 V to reset the protection and permit charging
Secondary Overcharge Voltage This is a onetime permanent protection that
is triggered when the voltage across any cell exceeds approximately 445 V
Once this protection is tripped the battery can no longer be used and must be
replaced
Overdischarge Voltage This prevents the battery from discharging if the
voltage across any cell drops below approximately 26 V Once the
overdischarge voltage protection is tripped the voltage across each cell must
be charged to approximately 3 V to reset the protection and permit
discharging
Primary Overcharge Current This prevents the battery from being charged if
the average charging current reaches or exceeds 35A for a time period of 120
seconds or more
Secondary Overcharge Current This prevents the battery from being charged
if the charging current reaches or exceeds 4A+–20 for a time period of 20
milliseconds or more
Primary Overdischarge Current This prevents the battery from being
discharged if the average current out of the battery reaches or exceeds 5A for a
time period of 120 seconds or more This protection can be reset by removing
the load
Secondary Overdischarge Current This prevents the battery from being
discharged if the current out of the battery reaches or exceeds 6A for a time
period of 20 milliseconds or more This protection can be reset by removing the
load
Short Circuit Protection This prevents the battery from being charged or
discharged and protects against damage or lost data if the current in or out of
the battery reaches or exceeds 125A for a time period of 183 microseconds or
more This protection can be reset by removing the load 578 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Safety Considerations
Batteries Safe Handling and Disposal
Overtemperature Charging The system microcontroller prevents the battery
from being charged if the cell temperature exceeds 46C Once the
overtemperature charging protection is tripped the cell temperature has to
drop to or below 45C to reset the protection and permit charging
Overtemperature Discharging The system microcontroller prevents the
battery from being discharged if the cell temperature exceeds 65C Once the
overtemperature discharging protection is tripped the battery is automatically
shut off which results in turning off the instrument as well
Passive Protection
Reverse Charging A reverse protection diode prevents against damage or lost
data due to a reverse charge polarity applied to the battery terminals
Primary Overtemperature A PTC (positive temperature coefficient) polyfuse in
series between the Liion cells and the charging and discharging transistors
will open up and limit current flow to the battery terminals as a function of very
high temperatures This protection is resettable once the overstress condition
is removed
The maximum operating temperature of this fuse is 85C
Secondary Overtemperature A second PTC polyfuse built into each Liion cell
will open up and limit current flow as a function of very high temperatures
Tertiary Overtemperature A current interrupt device (CID) within each Liion
cell will permanently open up when the temperature reaches 95C As each cell
fuse is permanently interrupted overall battery performance will become
severely degraded up to and including disabling the battery
Overcurrent Fuse This is a onetime blow fuse with a rated current of 12A
Batteries Safe Handling and Disposal
Refer to battery manufacture Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for safe handling and
disposal information Battery SDS＇s are located at
httpsregulationsaboutkeysightcommsdsdefaulthtm
Battery Transportation
Batteries are generally subject to transportation regulations refer to the
battery Safety Data Sheet (SDS) and contact your shipping department for
transportation requirementsKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 579
Safety Considerations
Environmental Requirements
Environmental Requirements
Refer to the FieldFox Specifications in SpecificationsData Sheet on
page 589
Electrical Requirements
The FieldFox allows you to use either the lithiumion battery or the ACDC
adapter both are included
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions
The FieldFox was constructed in an ESD protected environment This is
because most of the semiconductor devices used in this instrument are
susceptible to damage by static discharge
Static charges are generated in numerous ways such as simple contact
separation of materials and normal motions of persons working with the
FieldFox To prevent instrument damage practice industry accepted
techniques for handling static sensitive devices when using the FieldFox
Very often coaxial cables and antennas also build up a static charge which if
allowed to discharge by connecting to the FieldFox may damage the
instrument input circuitry To avoid such damage it is recommended to
dissipate any static charges by temporarily attaching a short to the cable or
antenna prior to attaching to the instrument 580 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Safety Considerations
FieldFox Markings
FieldFox Markings
The CSA mark is a registered trademark of CSA International
The CTick Mark is a registered trademark of the Australian Spectrum
Management Agency
The RCM Mark is a registered trademark of the Australian Communications and
Media Authority
This symbol combines the following three markings
CE indicates product compliance with all relevant European legal Directives (if
accompanied by a year it signifies when the design was proven)
ICES indicates product compliance with the Canadian InterferenceCausing
Equipment Standard (ICES–001)
ISM indicates this is an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class B product
(CISPR 11 Clause 4)
The Standby symbol is used to mark a position of the instrument power line
switch
This symbol indicates separate collection for electrical and electronic equipment
mandated under EU law as of August 13 2005 All electric and electronic
equipment are required to be separated from normal waste for disposal
(Reference WEEE Directive 200296EC)
Indicates the time period which no hazardous or toxic substance elements are
expected to leak or deteriorate during normal use Forty years is the expected
useful life of the product
This symbol indicates the Environmental Protection Use Period (EPUP) for the
product’s toxic substances and for the China RoHS requirements
CAUTION risk of danger refer to safety information in manual
Dispose of properlyKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 581
Safety Considerations
Battery Markings
Battery Markings
Hot surface connectors get hot during extended operation so care must be
taken when making connections and disconnections
The CE mark shows that the product complies with all relevant European legal
Directives (if accompanied by a year it signifies when the design was proven)
The battery parts can be recycled Consult local or country regulations
Dispose of properly Do not throw batteries away—collect as small chemical waste
Recycle the old battery properly Consult local or country regulations related to
disposal
Keep battery away from excessive heat Do not dispose of by burning
UL recognized in Canada and the United States
The CTick Mark is a registered trademark of the Australian Spectrum
Management Agency
The RCM Mark is a registered trademark of the Australian Communications and
Media Authority
Korean Certification (KC) mark includes the marking’s identifier code which
follows the format KCCREMYYYZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ or
MSIPREMYYYZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 582 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Safety Considerations
Battery Markings
BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards) standard mark for registration
Indicates the time period which no hazardous or toxic substance elements are
expected to leak or deteriorate during normal use Ten years is the expected
useful life of the product
This symbol indicates the Environmental Protection Use Period (EPUP) for the
product’s toxic substances and for the China RoHS requirementsKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 583
Safety Considerations
Packaging Markings
Packaging Markings
ACDC Adapter Markings
This symbol on all primary and secondary packaging indicates compliance to
China standard GB 18455–2001
The UL Marks are registered certification marks of Underwriters Laboratories Inc
(UL) It means that UL has tested and evaluated representative samples of that
product and determined that it meets UL＇s safety requirements When
accompanied by a ＇C＇ and ＇US＇ it indicates compliance to both Canadian and US
requirements
NOM Mark (Normality of Mexico) indicates that the product was tested by an
accredited laboratory in Mexico and meets Mexico’s safety requirements
Japan’s safety and EMC compliance mark
China’s safety and EMC compliance mark
Taiwan’s safety and EMC compliance mark
Singapore’s safety mark
Korean Certification (KC) mark includes the marking’s identifier code which
follows the format KCCREMYYYZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ or
MSIPREMYYYZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
GOST Russia’s safety and EMC mark 584 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Safety Considerations
Certification and Compliance Statements
Certification and Compliance Statements
Certification
Keysight Technologies Inc certifies that this product met its published
specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Keysight Technologies
Inc further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the
United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent
allowed by the Institute＇s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of
other International Standards Organization members
Manufacturer’s Declaration
This product has been designed and tested in accordance with accepted
industry standards and has been supplied in a safe condition The
documentation contains information and warnings that must be followed by
the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the product in a safe
condition
Declaration of Conformity
Should the Declaration of Conformity be required visit
httpwwwkeysightcomgoconformity
For more information see Where to Find the Latest Information on page 3
AC (Alternating Current)
Direct current (DC) equipment
CAUTION risk of danger refer to safety information in manual
DC connector polarity
Dispose of properlyKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 585
Safety Considerations
Certification and Compliance Statements
EMC
Complies with the essential requirements of the European EMC Directive as
well as current editions of the following standards (dates and editions are cited
in the Declaration of Conformity)
— IECEN 613261
— CISPR Pub 11 Group 1 class B
— ASNZS CISPR 11
— ICESNMB001
This ISM device complies with the Canadian ICES001
Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB001 du Canada
Safety
Complies with the European Low Voltage Directive
— IECEN 610101
— Canada CSA C222 No 610101
— USA UL std no 610101
South Korean Class B EMC Declaration
This equipment is Class B suitable for home electromagnetic environment and
is suitable for use in all areas
Acoustic Statement (European Machinery Directive)
Acoustic Noise Emission
LpA <70 dB
Operator position
Normal operation position per ISO 7779 586 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Safety Considerations
Certification and Compliance Statements 587
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA
User’s Guide
A Connector Care Review
Proper connector care and connection techniques are critical for accurate and
repeatable measurements The following table contains for tips on connector
care
Prior to making connections to your analyzer carefully review the information
about inspecting cleaning and gauging connectors For course numbers
about additional connector care instruction contact Keysight Technologies 588 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Connector Care Review
Handling and Storage
Do Do Not
— Keep connections clean
— Extend sleeve or connector nut
— Use plastic endcaps during storage
— Touch matingplane surfaces
— Set connectors contactend down
— Store connectors or adapters loose
Visual Inspection
Do Do Not
— Inspect all connectors carefully
— Look for metal particles scratches and dents
— Use a damaged connector—ever
Connector Cleaning
Do Do Not
— Try compressed air first
— use isopropyl alcohola
— Clean connector threads
a Cleaning connectors with alcohol shall only be done with the DC power cord removed in a wellventi
lated area and with the power to the FieldFox turned OFF Allow all residual alcohol moisture to evapo
rate and the fumes to dissipate prior to energizing the instrument
— Use any abrasives
— Get liquid into plastic support beads
Gaging Connectors
Do Do Not
— Clean and zero the gage before use
— Use the correct gage type
— Use correct end of calibration block
— Gage all connectors before first use
— Use an outofspecification connector
Gaging Connectors
Do Do Not
— connectors carefully
— Make preliminary connection contact lightly
— Turn only the connector nut
— Use a torque wrench for final connection
— Apply bending force to connection
— Over Tighten preliminary connection
— Twist or screw any connection
— tighten past torque wrench break point 589
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
B SpecificationsData Sheet
To ensure the highest accuracy and consistency the FieldFox Specifications
are now stored ONLY at
httpliteraturecdnkeysightcomlitwebpdf59909783ENpdf 590 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
SpecificationsData Sheet 591
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
C Instrument Calibration
Over time the active components in the FieldFox age and the performance
may degrade or drift To ensure that the FieldFox is performing to the
published specifications you should have an instrument calibration performed
periodically
How Often Should Calibrate My Instrument
You determine the calibration period which best meets your requirements
However a 12 month calibration cycle is appropriate for most users
There are two things to consider performance drift and connector wear
The instrument specifications are set to consider the performance drift that
may occur over a 12 month period Therefore getting the instrument
calibrated at 12 month intervals ensures that the analyzer maintains
performance within the operating specifications If you need the analyzer to
maintain more consistent operation you may want to have the instrument
calibrated more often
Connector wear is a bigger factor and depends on the number of connections
that are made The test ports become noticeably worn after 500 to 700
connections This could represent about 12 months with average use With
more frequent connections the calibration cycle should be sooner You can
extend the time between calibrations and thereby save money by using
connector savers and by performing proper Connector Care Learn more in
Connector Care Review on page 587
How do I Get an Instrument Calibration
To get your Keysight instrument calibrated send it to one of the Keysight
Technologies service centers Please visit this website to learn how
wwwkeysightcomfindcalibration 592 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Instrument Calibration
What Are My Choices of Instrument Calibration
What Are My Choices of Instrument Calibration
The following types of instrument calibration are available from Keysight
Technologies service center
Keysight Calibration Includes the test data from the calibration and the
certificate of calibration stating the instrument has been
calibrated and is operating within the published
specifications
ANSI Z540
Calibration
Includes the test data from the calibration and the
certificate of calibration stating the instrument has been
calibrated using a process in compliance with ANSI
Z5401 and is operating within the published
specifications
ISO 17025
Calibration
Includes the test data from the calibration and the certificate of
calibration stating the instrument has been calibrated using a process in
compliance with ISO 17025 and is operating within the published
specificationsChapter 3 CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mode 593
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
D Korean Battery Safety Translation 594 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Korean Battery Safety TranslationKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 595
Korean Battery Safety Translation 596 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Korean Battery Safety TranslationKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 597
Korean Battery Safety Translation 598 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Korean Battery Safety TranslationKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 599
Korean Battery Safety Translation 600 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Korean Battery Safety TranslationKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 601
Korean Battery Safety Translation 602 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Korean Battery Safety Translation 603
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
E Russian Battery Safety Translation 604 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Russian Battery Safety TranslationKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide 605
Russian Battery Safety Translation
N992790001 606 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Russian Battery Safety Translation
N992790001Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 607
Russian Battery Safety Translation
N992790001 608 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Russian Battery Safety Translation
N992790001Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 609
Russian Battery Safety Translation
N992790001 610 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Russian Battery Safety Translation
N992790001Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 611
Russian Battery Safety Translation
N992790001 612 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Russian Battery Safety Translation
N992790001Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 613
Russian Battery Safety Translation
N992790001 614 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Russian Battery Safety Translation 615
Keysight Handheld Analyzers
N99xxA User’s Guide
F Keysight Software EndUser Licensing Agreement
(EULA) 616 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Keysight Software EndUser Licensing Agreement (EULA)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide 617
Keysight Software EndUser Licensing Agreement (EULA) 618 Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Keysight Software EndUser Licensing Agreement (EULA)Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Index
Symbols
583
Numerics
1port cable loss
measurements
CAT mode 55
1port cable loss CAT
mode 56
1Port Cable Trimming VVM
Measurements 379
1Port Cable Trimming VVM
measurements 371
2port insertion loss
measurements 379
CAT mode 57
2port insertion loss
measurements CAT
mode 57
2port transmission
measurements
VVM mode 381
2port transmission
measurements VVM
mode 381
89600 VSA software 301
A
ABC keyboard 523
ACDC adapter 567
583
power requirements 27
using 561
accessories 24
Adjacent Channel Power
(ACPR) 199
Alias Faults 69 82
align all nowalignments 182
alignmentsalign all now 182
alignmentsindividual 180
alignmentsoverview 180
all about markers 484
AM FM Tune & Listen 161
AMFM Metrics error
messages 405
AMFM Metrics Option
355 395
AMFM Metricserror
messages 405
Amplitude Alignment 185
InstAlign 223
IQA 261 461
RF Burst 185
Antenna Corrections 156 158
424 430
appendix B 587 589
attenuation 154 155 209 210
254
Audio Beep 192
Average Type 179 222
Averaging
VVM 376
averaging 50 98 507
VVM 376
avoid overpowering 34
B
Band Power Marker IQA 257
Band Power Marker SA
mode 190 257 258 260 498
Band Span Marker IQA 258
bandpass mode 63 64
battery
care 564
charge status viewing 559
charge statusviewing 510
559
charging 29
external 563
internal 561
disposal 565
gauge 560
icons 559
installing 28
LED 563
markings 581
maximizing life 564
protective functions 575 577
safe handling 578
saver 518
service diagnostics 560
viewing charge status 28
Big Marker IStates 105
big marker states 105
bridge cancellation
measurements VVM
mode 381
brightness
display 513
Builtin Power Meter 331
C
Cable (Correction)
Specifications
DTF 65 77
cable and antenna test See
CAT
cable loss measurements 55
56
cable specifications DTF 66
Cal On 140
Calculated DTF values 69 81
calibration
Cal On 140
CAT and NA modes 121
noise figure 471
type 134
verifying integrity 142
Calibration Type 134
Calibration Wizard
Wizardcalibration 471
CalReady 123
properties 141
CalReady Properties 141
Capture Data IQA 242
care of the battery 564
CAT mode
1port cable loss
measurements 55
2port insertion loss
measurements 57
calibration 121Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Index
DTF settings 62 74 87 111 241
273
return loss measurements 55
settings 47 327 328
CAT mode measurements 325
certification statements 584
Channel Power (CHP) 195
channel scanner option
312 409
Channel Selection 151
charge status viewing 510 559
charging the battery
externally 563
internally 561
cleaning the screen 37
colors display 513
compliance statements 584
compressed measurement 155
156 211
Compressed SA
Measurements 155 211
connector care review 587
considerations safety 567
Contacting Keysight 5
Continuous Peak Search
Marker IQA 260
control temperature 31
Couple Markers IQA 258
Coupled Frequency 54 64
Coupled Markers 487
cursor moving 555
cursor moving 547 555 557
D
data analysis features 483 543
data indicator (*) old 193
data indicator old (*) 193
Date and Time Setting 533
Date and Time setting 521
datetime setting 521 532
declaration of conformity 584
delta marker 485 486
delta markers 485
Detection Method 187 221
detection method 187 221
display
brightness 513
colors 513
front panel 41
preferences 517
settings 513
display live and memory
traces 369
Display Resolution
VVM 374
disposal of battery 565
dissipate static charge 34
DTF
measurements 59 60
settings 62 74 87 111 241 273
start and stop distance 60
DTF Measurement 62 74
DTF settings 62
DTF Start and Stop
Distance 63 75
Dynamic Range 107
dynamic range 107
E
ECal 130
Edit a Cable File 66
DTF 66 78
edit keywords 555
edit enable and disable the
current prefix 555 557
edit enable and disable the
current suffix 555 556
Electrical Delay 97
Enhanced Response
Optimization 139
Erase User Data 540
error
meas UNCAL 166 193
red flashing LED external
battery charger 563
red red flashing LED external
battery
charger 563
systematic 122
error messages AMFM
Metrics 405
ERTA 385
ESD 579
Event Log 539
external frequency
reference 530
External Gain 154 209
External triggering 101 172 215
external triggering 172 215
external zeroing 339
F
features overview 23
FFT Gating 175
Field Strength
Measurements 156 424
File Management 543
file management 543
files
managing 552
prefixes 555 557
suffixes 555
FM Tune & Listen 161
FM tune and listen 40
folders 554
Format
NA Mode 94
format NA mode 94
FoxTrot 385
FreqMaskTrigger 319
frequency
context setting 457
external reference 530
mode DTF 63
range NA mode 95
range setting 49 457
range step size 149
step size 149
Frequency Counter at SA
Marker 191 498
Frequency Offset Using Power
Sensor 345
Frequency Range
NA Mode 95
front panel 35
Full Screen Mode 515
G
Gating 118
gating 118
Gating FFT 175
gauge battery 560
getting started information 27
GPS 521 526
group delay 94 95
H
hightemperature
protection 30
hold 510Index
Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
how to
change
frequency step size 148
149 207
units to feet 69 81
check for a compressed
measurement 156 211
control the preamp 155 210
255
create
delta marker 486
markers 484
edit keywords 555
edit enable and disable the
current prefix 557
enter
numeric values 43
make
1port cable loss
measurement 5
5 56
2port insertion loss
measurement 5
7
DTF measurements 60
72
manage files 552
measure return loss 55
monitor the internal FieldFox
temperature 30
move
cursor 547 557
reference marker 486
name files 546
perform
O S L cal 127
OS L cal 127
single sweep while in
Hold 510
preset 511
recall an *sta file 548
save
display settings as
preferences 517
file 544
select
CAT mode 47 328
CAT mode
measurements
47 328
NA formats 94
RTSA mode 207
SA mode 148 207
set
attenuation 154 155
209 210 254
bandpass mode ON 64
date and time 532
frequency context 457
frequency range 49 148
207 457
output power 53 102
376
power meter display
units 342
res BW 165 214 461
resolution 52 100
scale 49 506
sweep time 52
sweep type 51 100
trace averaging 50 507
video BW 166
use
external reference 530
view and change Quick
Settings 93
view and change quick
settings 92
http
literaturecdnkeysightcom
litwebpdf59914913EN
pdf 402
I
icons battery 559
IF Bandwidth
NA Mode 99
VVM 375
IF bandwidth
NA Mode 99
IF Output 167
IF output 167
indicator (*) old data 193
individualalignments 180
initial use preparing for 27
input voltages and power
maximum 34
insertion loss
measurements 57
InstAlign 185 223 261 461
installing battery 28
Interference Analyzer 307
interference rejection 53 54
Interpolation 140
Interval Power Marker 190 257
258 260
Interval Power Marker IQA 257
Interval Span Marker IQA 258
IQ Analyzer 237
IQA
markersusing 256
measurementparameters 24
5
measurementsabout 240
measurementshow to
make 241
trace display states 261
IQA mode
settings 241
IQA Captrure Data 242
Isolation 137
K
KeyboardABC 523
KeyboardQwerty 523
keywords 555
L
LAN Settings 535
language settings 518
latest information where to
find 25
LED
battery 563
onoff settings 30
Licensing 525
Limit Lines 499
Limit lines 499
saving and recalling 502
lithiumion battery
installing 28
M
Magnitude Offset 96
magnitude offset 96
Manage Files 552
Manage Folders 554
managingKeysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Index
files 552
folders 554
manuals 25
marker
table 486
markers 484
Coupled (NA Mode) 487
creating 484
delta 485
moving 484
search function 488 490
table 486
trace 488
trace (CAT & NA Mode) 488
trace (SA Mode) 488
markersusing
IQA 256
markings
battery 581
FieldFox 580
packaging 583
math
operations 505
maximizing battery life 564
maximum input voltage and
power 34
maximum input voltages and
power 34
Meas UNCAL error 193
meas UNCAL error 166
measurement selection IQA
Mode 237
measurement selection NA
Mode 85
measurement selection OTA
Mode 265
measurementparameters
IQA 245
Measurements
IQA 240 268
measurements
1port cable loss
measurements CAT
mode 55
1port cable loss CAT
mode 55
2port insertion loss CAT
mode 57
bridge cancellation VVM
mode 381
compressed 155 156 211
return loss 55
selection 47 328
selection reflection 328
measurementsabout
IQA 240
OTA 268
meausrementshow to make
IQA 241
OTA 273
miniUSB port sending SCPI
commands 541
MixedMode SParameters 88
mixedmode Sparameters 88
mode 301
IQA 237
NA 85
OTA 265
power meter 331
RTSA 207
SA 145 148 205 307 325 335
345
temperature control 31
VVM 371
move
cursor 547 555 557
reference marker 486
moving the cursor 547 555 557
multiplier abbreviations 43
multipliers 43
MultiTrace Configurations 91
multitrace configurations 91
N
NA Factory Cal 539
NA mode
calibration 121
settings 87 90 92
name files 546
network analyzer 85
noise figure calibration 471
noise figure option 356 433
Noise Marker IQA 256
normalization 133
normalize 133
numeric values 43
numeric values entering 43
O
O S L cal 127
O S L calibration 127
Occupied Bandwidth 197
old data indicator (*) 193
Opt 010 109
option
010 109
215 71
option 312 channel
scanner 409
Option 355 AMFM Metrics 395
option 356 noise figure 433
options
installing 525
OTA
measurementsabout 268
measurementshow to
make 273
OTA mode
settings 273
Output Power
NA Mode 102 375
output power 53 102 376
overpowering avoid 34
OverTheAir 265
overview 23
overviewalignments 180
P
packaging markings 583
panel front 35
panel left side 40
panel right side 38
panel top 38
Parameter Conversion 89
peak
criteria 495
excursion 495 496
threshold 495
perform
single sweep while in
Hold 510
Phase Offset 97
Playback Configuration 231
234 296 317 321
Points SA mode 177 219 460
points RTSA mode 219
points SA mode 177 460
Port Extensions 103
power meter mode 331
power requirements 27
power requirements for the
ACDC adapter 27
power sensor input 34 39Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Index
Power Spectral Density 196
power maximum 34
Preferences 515
preferences 515
prefixes for file names 555 557
preparing for initial use 27
preset 511
preset settings 511
Printing 558
printing 558
protection high
temperature 30
protective functions of the
battery 560
Pulse Measurements 355
Q
Quick Settings 93
quick settings 48
QuickCal 125
Qwerty keyboard 523
R
Radio Standard 150
realtime spectrum analyzer
mode 205
recall an *sta file 548
recalling files 548
Receiver Measurements 90
Record Source 233 320
RecordPlayback 227 313
RecordPlaybackRTSA 227 294
RecordPlaybackSA 313
Recording Configuration 232
295 317
reference marker 486 497
reference external
frequency 530
Reflection Mode 325
remote server 301
resolution 41 52
NA Mode 100
Resolution Bandwidth SA
mode 165 214 461
resolution bandwidth NF
mode 461
resolution bandwidth RTSA
mode 214
resolution bandwidth SA
mode 165
Resolution NA mode 100
Response Cals 132
response cals 132
Restart 177 218 460
restart 177 218 460
return loss measurements CAT
mode 55
review connector care 44
reviewconnector care 587
RRC Weighting 203
RTSA 205
RTSA mode
settings 207
units 208
RTSA Spectrogram
Display 225
RTSARecordPlayback 227
294
RTSASpecrtrogram
Display 225
RTSAspectrogram display 225
S
S11 measurements NA
mode 87 90
SA mode
settings 148 207 225 308
units 153
SA Mode Units 153 208
SARecordPlayback 313
SAspectrogram display 308
Safety Considerations 567
save
display setting as
preferences 516
file 544
save and recalling files 544
Save Preferences 516 517
Scale Settings
NA Mode 95
scale settings NA mode 95
scale setting 49 506
screen cleaning 37
screen front panel 41
Security Level 533
select
language 518
sending SCPI commands
miniUSB port 541
service diagnostics 539
Sessions 227 313
set
date and time 521
display colors 513
display units 342
output power 375
settings
CAT mode 47 327 328
DTF 62 74 87 111 241 273
DTF mode 62
language 517 518
preset 511
RTSA mode 207
SA mode 148 207 225 308
VVM mode 374
smoothing 51
Source Control with USB
Power Meter 340
Sparameters 87
Spectrogram Display 225 308
Spectrogram Display
RTSA 225
Spectrogram DisplayRTSA 225
spectrogram displayRTSA 225
spectrogram displaySA 308
spectrum analyzer mode 145
205 307 325 335 345
standby mode 29
Startup Mode 519
static charge dissipate 34
Step Detection Mode 344
suffixes for file names 555
sweep
acquisition parameter 166
169
time 52
time NA mode 101
type 51 100
type SA mode 166
Sweep Acquisition 169
sweep acquisition 169Keysight N992790001 User’s Guide
Index
Sweep Time
NA Mode 101
Sweep Type
SA Mode 166
system configuration
settings 525
System Impedance (Z0) 103
System Settings 509
systematic 122
T
TDR 71
temperature control mode 31
Time Domain 109
time domain 71
Time Zone 521 533
time zone 521
timedate setting 521 532
title editing 514 546
top panel 38
trace averaging setting 50 507
Trace Display States 178 220
261
trace display states
IQA 261
Trace Math 353 504
Trace Width 514 516
Tracking Generator 163
Transform 109
transform 112
Transform Window 114
transform window 114
triggering RTSA mode 215
Triggering SA Mode 172 215
triggering SA mode 101 172
TRL 136
Tune & Listen (AMFM) 161
U
units changing 69 81
units DTF changing 69
USB keyboard 24
use
external reference 530
User Preset 511
User Tags 229 315
V
values
multipliers 43
numeric 43
values multipliers 43
VBW 166
vector voltmeter 371
vector voltmeterSeeVVM 371
Velocity Factor 65 104
verifying integrity of
calibration 142
jumper cables 142
verifying integrity of calibration
& jumper cables 142
video bandwidth 166
Video Bandwidth SA mode 166
Video triggering 101 172 215
video triggering 172 176 215
viewing
charge status battery 510
559
installed options 517 525
Volume Control 512
volume control 512
VSA 301
vsa 301
VVM Calibration 377
VVM mode 371
bridge cancellation
measurements 381
settings 374
VVM mode settings 374
W
Waterfall Display 308 311
Waveguide Calibrations 137
where to find the latest
information 25
Window Settings
DTF 68 80
window settings DTF 68
Z
zero span 170 171
Zeroing VVM mode 377
zeroing external 339
zeroing VVM mode 377This information is subject to change
without notice
© Keysight Technologies 20142019
Edition 4 September 2019
wwwkeysightcom

《香当网》用户分享的内容，不代表《香当网》观点或立场，请自行判断内容的真实性和可靠性！
该内容是文档的文本内容，更好的格式请下载文档